A very close wrong answer
This test has the first 120 of the 258 questions that match.
Question 1 of 120
2026 Practice Test A English, question 10Passage The Best Laid Plans of Ravens
The Best Laid Plans of Ravens
In Edgar Allan Poe’s poem “The Raven,” a raven visits a lonely man’s home and responds to the man’s pleading questions with only the word “nevermore.” The poem’s narrator interprets the word as a prediction of doom for his future. A talking, prophetic raven may seem to be the wild imaginings of the poet, but a new study published in the journal Science hints that one particular idea behind the poem might not be as far-fetched as it seems. For most of human history, people assumed that animals do not understand the passage of time in the same way people do. Some people believed that animals might remember events from the past and that instinct might drive them to make preparations in order to guarantee survival, but most people did not think that animals had the ability to plan. At Lund University in Sweden, researchers argue that ravens may be able to think ahead and even plan for the future.
It can be difficult to test an animal’s ability to plan because human observers must be certain they are not mistaking instinctual behavior for intentional planning. For example, many animals hoard food so that they will not run out later, but scientists who study animals would not call hoarding a decision to plan for the future. This action is merely instinctual. Cognitive scientists argue that in order for an animal’s behavior to qualify as preparing for the future, the animal must use specific decision-making skills to solve a problem.
To avoid mistaking instinctual behavior for evidence of decision-making, the Lund University researchers designed two experiments to test ravens’ ability to plan. Ravens belong to the corvid family, a group of birds known for their intelligence. A study in 2007 showed that corvids have the tendency to save only certain types of food, which suggests that they are planning for the future rather than acting on instinct. In order to investigate that theory, the researchers had to design experiments that would achieve results that could not be explained by an instinctual behavior of food hoarding. Therefore, the ravens were taught two behaviors that they do not normally perform in the wild.
For the first experiment, the researchers showed the birds how to use a small stone to open a box and get treats. Once the ravens learned the behavior, the researchers presented the birds with four stones. Only one stone was the right size to open the box. The birds learned to select that stone and set it aside until the researchers presented the box. The second experiment involved bartering. A researcher would trade the ravens a large treat for a bottle cap. Later, the researchers presented the ravens with a group of items, including small treats and the bottle cap. The ravens chose the bottle cap over the treats and waited for the original researcher to trade with them again so that they could get more treats. In both experiments, the ravens waited patiently for up to seventeen hours for the researcher to return.
The results of these experiments are exciting, but more evidence needs to be gathered before scientists can fully conclude that ravens can plan for the future. Some scientists argue that the ravens might be choosing the stone and bottle cap because the ravens have been trained to do so, not necessarily because the ravens are thinking ahead. Regardless, like other recent advances in animal science, these experiments show that ravens could be much smarter than first believed, and scientists now believe that ravens do actually think about their own future.
Question
In the first experiment described in paragraph 4, which of the ravens’ behaviors provides the strongest evidence for the claim that the birds are capable of planning?
- AThey accepted treats from the box.
- BThey set aside the stone that would open the box.
- CThey learned which stone could open the box.
- DThey waited for researchers to bring the box.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks which of the ravens’ behaviors in the first experiment described in paragraph 4 most strongly supports the claim that the birds are capable of planning.
A. Incorrect. While “the researchers showed the birds how to use a small stone to open a box and get treats” (paragraph 4), the acceptance of the treats does not demonstrate planning.
B. CORRECT. Once the ravens learned which stone would open the box, they consistently selected only that stone.
C. Incorrect. Although the birds learned which stone opened the box, this behavior demonstrates not their ability to plan but rather their intelligence.
D. Incorrect. The birds’ patience shows their anticipation for and understanding of the future gain of a treat but does not provide the strongest evidence of their ability to plan.
Question analysis
This evidence question on “The Best Laid Plans of Ravens” asks which of the ravens’ behaviors in the first experiment, the one with a stone and a box of treats, gives the strongest evidence that the birds can plan. Several behaviors seem to fit, so students must weigh them against the passage’s own idea of what planning is.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 evidence questions usually ask which detail supports a claim. This one asks which of the ravens’ behaviors gives the strongest support, and several seem to fit, so students must apply paragraph 2’s test for planning to paragraph 4.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer major
- Reading between the lines moderate
- Evidence in several places minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 599 words; question and choices: about grade 5, 58 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Every choice describes something the ravens really did, so the work is ranking, not finding. The passage’s dramatic detail, birds waiting up to seventeen hours, draws attention away from the quieter act of keeping the right stone ready, which is the behavior that most clearly prepares for the future. Students who weigh each behavior against paragraph 2’s idea of decision-making, rather than against how impressive it sounds, separate the two.
A very close wrong answer major Choosing the answer
Setting the stone aside and waiting for the box both come from one sentence, “set it aside until the researchers presented the box”; only the first is an action taken now for a later need. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
The passage never says which behavior counts as planning, so students must apply paragraph 2’s test, that the animal “must use specific decision-making skills to solve a problem,” to each one. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Evidence in several places minor Working it out
The waiting that tempts students is stressed at the end of paragraph 4, “up to seventeen hours,” well after the stone sentence, and paragraph 2 holds the standard for judging both. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: Use paragraph 2’s description of what counts as planning as a yardstick, then rank the four behaviors by how well each meets it instead of taking the first that seems clever.
Traps
- Supports only part of the claim: In a question about evidence: a line that backs one half of the claim but not the other, or a related point rather than the claim itself.
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
The wrong answers, classified
A True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Picks the payoff of the experiment, taking treats from the box, which any trained animal does and which shows nothing about thinking ahead.
C Supports only part of the claim (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Sees intelligence in learning which of the four stones fits, but knowing the right tool is not the same as keeping it ready for a box that comes later.
D Supports only part of the claim (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Is drawn by the stress on waiting “up to seventeen hours,” which shows the birds expect the box, but waiting is passive; holding the right stone ready is the planning act.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks which thing the ravens did in the first experiment, the one with the stone and the box, is the strongest evidence that they can plan. More than one choice really happened. You must rank them and pick the best one.
Decide what counts as planning
Paragraph 2 gives a test. To count as preparing for the future, “the animal must use specific decision-making skills to solve a problem.” In plain words, planning means doing something now to get ready for something later. Use that as your measuring stick.
Find the key sentence
Paragraph 4 says “The birds learned to select that stone and set it aside until the researchers presented the box.” To set something aside is to put it away to use later. When the birds did this, the box was not there yet.
Explain why this is planning
The ravens had nothing to open at that moment. Still, they picked the one stone that would work and saved it. They did this because they expected to need it later. It is like packing an umbrella in the morning because rain is coming in the afternoon. That is a choice made now to solve a future problem.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. Taking treats is the reward. Any trained animal does that.
- B fits. Saving the right stone gets the bird ready for a box that comes later.
- C does not fit. Learning which stone works shows the birds can be taught. Knowing the right tool is not the same as keeping it ready.
- D does not fit as well. Waiting shows the birds expected the box. But waiting is doing nothing, so it is weaker proof.
Watch out: D is tempting because the passage stresses waiting “up to seventeen hours.” Long waiting is impressive, but it is not an action.
Choose the answer
Setting the stone aside is the clearest act of getting ready for the future. So the answer is B.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D is the closest wrong choice. Waiting and setting the stone aside come from the same sentence. But while a bird waits, it does nothing. Setting the stone aside is a choice. The bird keeps the right tool ready for a box that is not there yet. That act of getting ready makes B stronger evidence.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “The Best Laid Plans of Ravens” as printed (page 12)

Question 2 of 120
2026 Practice Test A English, question 11Uses the passage above: “The Best Laid Plans of Ravens”.
Question
How does paragraph 5 fit into the overall structure of the passage and contribute to the development of ideas?
- AIt introduces a problem with the results of the study at Lund University, suggesting that some scientists believe that further research will not lead to a clear answer.
- BIt summarizes the final steps of the study at Lund University, emphasizing the difficulties researchers had in differentiating between true planning and practiced actions.
- CIt provides a conclusion to the information about the Lund University study, indicating that some scientists think further research is needed in order to prove the idea.
- DIt lists the effects of the study at Lund University, implying that researchers should have designed experiments that better differentiated between planning and instinct.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks how paragraph 5 fits into the overall structure of the passage and contributes to the development of ideas.
A. Incorrect. While paragraph 5 states that “more evidence needs to be gathered before scientists can fully conclude that ravens can plan for the future,” this statement suggests that more research is needed, not that the results of the Lund University study are problematic.
B. Incorrect. Paragraph 5 does not discuss steps of the study or emphasize difficulties in determining whether the behaviors shown in the study were planned or practiced; instead it simply suggests that more study is required to make such a determination.
C. CORRECT. Paragraph 5 notes that some doubt remains (“Some scientists argue that the ravens might be choosing the stone and bottle cap because the ravens have been trained to do so, not necessarily because the ravens are thinking ahead”) and that more experimentation is needed; the author concludes that there is reason to believe the originally stated theory that ravens are quite smart and can give thought to how future events may affect them.
D. Incorrect. Paragraph 5 does not list the effects of the study or criticize the experiment for not differentiating between planning and instinct. The paragraph explains why the results of the experiments are not conclusive and emphasizes that more research is needed.
Question analysis
This text-structure question asks how the last paragraph of the article “The Best Laid Plans of Ravens” fits into the passage and develops its ideas. Students must see what that paragraph does once the experiments have been described. Each long choice names a role and then adds a claim, so a choice can begin well and end wrong.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Explaining the role of a final paragraph is regular grade 7 structure work. The choices are long, though, and each pairs a role with a claim about scientists’ views, so both halves must be checked against a paragraph that mixes doubt with enthusiasm.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- How, not what moderate
- A lot to read minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 599 words; question and choices: about grade 15, 121 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Paragraph 5 makes three moves, excitement, doubt and a hopeful conclusion, and each wrong choice builds on one of them and then goes too far. Students who notice the doubt but read past “before scientists can fully conclude” pick the claim that research will never settle the question. Summing up the paragraph before reading the choices, and then checking the second half of each, is what earns the point.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about a problem with the results matches the right one in its first half, a doubt raised in paragraph 5, and differs only in claiming that more research will not give a clear answer. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
How, not what moderate Working it out
The question asks what paragraph 5 does in the article, closing the account of the Lund study, so students must name its role rather than repeat its caution about training. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
A lot to read minor Understanding the question
The choices run 24 to 28 words, and each pairs a role with a second claim about what scientists or researchers think or did, so both halves of every choice have to be checked. (Kintsch, 1998; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Strategy: Sum up paragraph 5 in one sentence of your own, then check both parts of each choice, the job it names and the idea it attributes to scientists, against that summary.
Traps
- Half right: One half of a two-part choice is right and the other is not.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
The wrong answers, classified
A Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Rightly sees that paragraph 5 raises a doubt about the results, but adds that more research will not settle it, when the paragraph says more evidence is needed to reach a conclusion.
B Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Turns the objection some scientists raise, that the birds may simply be trained, into the Lund researchers’ own struggle, though the paragraph describes no steps of the study.
D Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Reads the call for more evidence as a verdict that the experiments were badly designed, though the author calls the results “exciting” and faults no one.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks about structure: what job paragraph 5 does in the article. Each choice has two parts, a job and an idea about scientists. Both parts must be right.
See where paragraph 5 sits
Paragraphs 3 and 4 describe the Lund University experiments. Paragraph 5 is the last paragraph. It comes after the whole study has been described. So it is the place where the author sums up what the study means.
Read what paragraph 5 says
It opens: “The results of these experiments are exciting, but more evidence needs to be gathered before scientists can fully conclude that ravens can plan for the future.” Next, it says some scientists think the ravens may just be trained. Then it says “Regardless,” the experiments show ravens “could be much smarter than first believed.” Regardless means “even so.”
Put the paragraph in your words
Paragraph 5 wraps up the study. The results are exciting but not proven yet. More research is needed to be sure. A conclusion is the ending part that sums things up. So paragraph 5 is the conclusion to the study, and it says more evidence is needed.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. Paragraph 5 does raise a doubt. But it never says more research will fail to give a clear answer.
- B does not fit. Paragraph 5 describes no steps of the study.
- C fits. It wraps up the study and says more research is needed.
- D does not fit. It lists no effects and blames no one. The author calls the results “exciting.”
Choose the answer
Paragraph 5 ends the story of the study and calls for more evidence. So the answer is C.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong choice, because its first half is right: paragraph 5 raises a doubt. But A says more research will not lead to a clear answer. The paragraph says more evidence is needed “before scientists can fully conclude,” so research is the way to an answer. C says this.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 3 of 120
2026 Practice Test A English, question 13Uses the passage above: “The Best Laid Plans of Ravens”.
Question
With which statement would the author of the passage most likely agree?
- AScientists are unlikely to be able to conduct an experiment that can genuinely distinguish between instinctual and learned behaviors in animals.
- BScientists should continue researching to determine whether or not animals can demonstrate advanced intelligence.
- CScientists should be careful about making conclusions about animal intelligence based on experiments that rely on training animals.
- DScientists can confirm data on whether animals have the ability to plan by performing experiments on additional species known for their intelligence.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks the reader to choose the statement with which the author of the passage would most likely agree.
A. Incorrect. It is very likely that additional experiments or changes to the experiments presented can help scientists tell the difference between the types of behavior that the animals are showing. The current research supports “other recent advances in animal science” and also shows that ravens are “much smarter” (paragraph 5) than previously believed, making them excellent candidates for further research.
B. CORRECT. As paragraph 5 notes, “more evidence needs to be gathered before scientists can fully conclude that ravens can plan for the future.” The evidence is not yet considered definitive because “some scientists argue that the ravens might be choosing the stone and bottle cap because the ravens have been trained to do so, not necessarily because the ravens are thinking ahead” (paragraph 5). Therefore, more research is needed in order to draw a complete conclusion as to whether or not the animals are demonstrating advanced intelligence or simply the results of training.
C. Incorrect. The passage shows that the scientists did not draw conclusions based on one experiment alone. The passage also states in paragraph 5 that additional research and experiments are necessary in order to obtain conclusive evidence of ravens’ abilities to think and plan ahead.
D. Incorrect. The passage claims that more evidence must be gathered in order to make a claim that animals can definitely plan for the future. The evidence presented helps scientists “believe that ravens do actually think about their own future” (paragraph 5), but more confirmation is needed. The passage does not discuss performing experiments on additional species.
Question analysis
This inference question asks which statement the author of “The Best Laid Plans of Ravens” would most likely agree with. Students must work out the author’s own view of the raven experiments and of research into animal thinking. The article reports more than one viewpoint, so students have to keep track of which ideas belong to the author.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Inferring which statement an author would accept is common grade 7 work. The author’s view is stated fairly plainly in the last paragraph, but that paragraph also reports what other scientists argue, so students must separate the author’s position from theirs.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Reading between the lines moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Much to keep track of minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 599 words; question and choices: about grade 15, 87 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The passage reports several opinions, and the hard part is telling which one is the author’s. Students who notice the training objection in paragraph 5 often adopt it as the author’s warning, but “Regardless” shows the author weighing it and moving on to a hopeful view that still calls for more evidence. The other wrong choices either turn “difficult” into “unlikely” or bring in research the article never mentions.
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
The author’s view is never stated as advice; it has to be read from paragraph 5, where “more evidence needs to be gathered” is followed by “Regardless” and a hopeful conclusion. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about caution with experiments that train animals shares the right one’s careful stance and differs in one detail, training, the objection the author raises only to set aside. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Much to keep track of minor Working it out
The article mixes four voices, what people long assumed, the Lund researchers, “some scientists” who doubt them and the author, and each statement must be traced to the right one. (Sweller, 1988; Carpenter, Just & Shell, 1990)
Strategy: Find the sentences where the author speaks in their own voice, especially in paragraph 5, and pick the statement that follows from them without adding claims the article never makes.
Traps
- Wrong tone or attitude: Misjudges the tone, attitude or point of view, such as reading admiration as criticism, or taking a character's or subject's feelings for the author's.
- Too broad or too strong: A choice overstates, generalizes, or uses absolute words the text does not support.
- Outside knowledge: A choice is plausible in the real world but not supported by this text.
The wrong answers, classified
A Too broad or too strong (King et al., 2004)
Builds on paragraph 2’s point that planning is “difficult” to test and hardens it into “unlikely,” a pessimism the author, who finds the results “exciting,” never expresses.
C Wrong tone or attitude (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Takes the objection that the ravens may only have been trained, which “some scientists” raise, as the author’s own view, though the author answers it with “Regardless.”
D Outside knowledge (King et al., 2004; Recht & Leslie, 1988)
Offers a sensible research idea, testing other clever species, that the article never suggests; the author’s call for more evidence concerns ravens alone.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks which statement the author would most likely agree with. You must find the author’s own view. The article also reports what other people think, so keep those ideas apart.
Sort out the voices in paragraph 5
Paragraph 5 says “Some scientists argue that the ravens might be choosing the stone and bottle cap because the ravens have been trained to do so.” That is what other scientists think. The author’s own words are “The results of these experiments are exciting, but more evidence needs to be gathered.”
Put the author’s view in plain words
The author thinks the research is promising but not finished. After the doubt, the author says “Regardless,” which means “even so,” and stays hopeful. So the author wants scientists to keep studying until they can be sure.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. The author never says a good test is unlikely. The author finds the results exciting.
- B fits. The author says more evidence must be gathered.
- C does not fit. The worry about training belongs to “some scientists.” The author sets it aside with “Regardless.”
- D does not fit. The article never mentions testing other kinds of animals.
Watch out: C sounds careful, like a scientist. But it repeats the other scientists’ view, not the author’s.
Choose the answer
The author wants scientists to keep gathering evidence before anyone decides. So the answer is B.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong choice. It sounds careful, and the author is careful too. But the warning about training comes from “some scientists.” The author answers it with “Regardless” and stays hopeful. The author’s own point is that “more evidence needs to be gathered.” That matches B.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 4 of 120
2026 Practice Test A English, question 19Passage Excerpt from A Voice in the Wilderness
Excerpt from A Voice in the Wilderness
by Grace Livingston Hill
With a lurch the train came to a dead stop and Margaret Earle, hastily gathering up her belongings, hurried down the aisle and got out into the night.
It occurred to her, as she swung her heavy suit-case down the rather long step to the ground, and then carefully swung herself after it, that it was strange that neither conductor, brakeman, nor porter had come to help her off the train, when all three had taken the trouble to tell her that hers was the next station; but she could hear voices up ahead. Perhaps something was the matter with the engine that detained them and they had forgotten her for the moment.
The ground was rough where she stood, and there seemed no sign of a platform. Did they not have platforms in this wild Western land, or was the train so long that her car had stopped before reaching it?
She strained her eyes into the darkness, and tried to make out things from the two or three specks of light that danced about like fireflies in the distance. She could dimly see moving figures away up near the engine, and each one evidently carried a lantern. The train was tremendously long. A sudden feeling of isolation took possession of her. Perhaps she ought not to have got out until some one came to help her. Perhaps the train had not pulled into the station yet and she ought to get back on it and wait. Yet if the train started before she found the conductor she might be carried on somewhere and he justly blame her for a fool.
There did not seem to be any building on that side of the track. It was probably on the other, but she was standing too near the cars to see over. She tried to move back to look, but the ground sloped and she slipped and fell in the cinders, bruising her knee and cutting her wrist.
In sudden panic she arose. She would get back into the train, no matter what the consequences. They had no right to put her out here, away off from the station, at night, in a strange country. If the train started before she could find the conductor she would tell him that he must back it up again and let her off. He certainly could not expect her to get out like this.
She lifted the heavy suit-case up the high step that was even farther from the ground than it had been when she came down, because her fall had loosened some of the earth and caused it to slide away from the track. Then, reaching to the rail of the step, she tried to pull herself up, but as she did so the engine gave a long snort and the whole train, as if it were in league against her, lurched forward crazily, shaking off her hold. She slipped to her knees again, the suit-case, toppled from the lower step, descending upon her, and together they slid and rolled down the short bank, while the train . . . ran giddily off into the night.
The horror of being deserted helped the girl to rise in spite of bruises and shock. She lifted imploring hands to the unresponsive cars as they hurried by her—one, two, three, with bright windows, each showing a passenger, comfortable and safe inside, unconscious of her need.
A moment of useless screaming, running, trying to attract some one’s attention, a sickening sense of terror and failure, and the last car slatted itself past with a mocking clatter, as if it enjoyed her discomfort.
Margaret stood dazed, reaching out helpless hands, then dropped them at her sides and gazed after the fast-retreating train, the light on its last car swinging tauntingly, blinking now and then with a leer in its eye, rapidly vanishing from her sight into the depth of the night.
She gasped and looked about her for the station that but a short moment before had been so real to her mind; and, lo! on this side and on that there was none!
The night was wide like a great floor shut in by a low, vast dome of curving blue set with the largest, most wonderful stars she had ever seen. Heavy shadows of purple-green, smoke-like, hovered over earth darker and more intense than the unfathomable blue of the night sky. It seemed like the secret nesting-place of mysteries wherein no human foot might dare intrude. It was incredible that such could be but common sage-brush, sand, and greasewood wrapped about with the beauty of the lonely night.
No building broke the inky outlines of the plain, nor friendly light streamed out to cheer her heart. Not even a tree was in sight, except on the far horizon, where a heavy line of deeper darkness might mean a forest. Nothing, absolutely nothing, in the blue, deep, starry dome above and the bluer darkness of the earth below save one sharp shaft ahead like a black mast throwing out a dark arm across the track.
As soon as she sighted it she picked up her baggage and made her painful way toward it, for her knees and wrist were bruised and her baggage was heavy.
A soft drip, drip greeted her as she drew nearer; something plashing down among the cinders by the track. Then she saw the tall column with its arm outstretched, and looming darker among the sage-brush the outlines of a water-tank. It was so she recognized the engine’s drinking-tank, and knew that she had mistaken a pause to water the engine for a regular stop at a station.
cinders: track bed made from the residue of burnt coal
From A VOICE IN THE WILDERNESS by Grace Livingston Hill—Public Domain
Question
How does paragraph 11 contribute to the plot of the excerpt?
- AIt reveals that the reality of the situation is different from Margaret’s assumptions.
- BIt illustrates that Margaret’s main problem is her own imagination.
- CIt shows that Margaret is surprised by the unexpected adventure she is about to undertake.
- DIt provides insight into how Margaret reacts to stressful situations.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks how paragraph 11 contributes to the plot of the excerpt.
A. CORRECT. In paragraph 5, Margaret assumes there is a station (“It was probably on the other [side], but she was standing too near the cars to see”), but in paragraph 11, the station that had been “so real” in Margaret’s mind actually does not exist.
B. Incorrect. Margaret’s main problem is not that her imagination has led her astray but rather that her inexperience with this train route has caused her to misinterpret the events that have occurred. Paragraph 11 reveals that she has been acting on faulty assumptions; however, her assumptions are somewhat justified by the events that have occurred.
C. Incorrect. While Margaret seems somewhat in awe of her surroundings in paragraph 12 and she “gasped” in paragraph 11, her exclamation is one of shock at the discovery, not surprise over an unexpected adventure.
D. Incorrect. While paragraph 11 describes how Margaret responds to the distressing situation that her actions and decisions have created, the paragraph does not offer insight into how Margaret generally responds to problems or conflicts.
Question analysis
This plot-structure question asks how paragraph 11 of A Voice in the Wilderness, a single exclaiming sentence that begins “She gasped,” contributes to the plot once Margaret is alone beside the track. Students relate the paragraph to what comes before and after it. Its archaic phrasing, with “lo!” and an inverted clause, makes the plain meaning harder to see.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Explaining what a single paragraph adds to a plot is standard grade 7 structure work. Paragraph 11 is one short sentence, but its old-fashioned exclamation has to be linked to the paragraphs around it, which adds a step.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Evidence in several places moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Hard words minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 8, 981 words; question and choices: about grade 10, 58 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Paragraph 11 is a single exclaiming sentence whose job is to overturn what Margaret, and the reader, have believed since she stepped down. Students who link it to her earlier guesses about a platform and a building see the reversal at once. Those who read it alone fasten on her gasp or on the words “so real to her mind,” and choose a reading about her character or her imagination rather than the plot.
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
The assumption the paragraph overturns was built earlier: in paragraph 3 she wonders about a platform, and in paragraph 5 she decides the station is “probably on the other” side. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about her imagination and the right one both describe a gap between what Margaret pictured and what is there; they differ on whether the fault lies in her mind or in the missing station. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Hard words minor Understanding the question
The paragraph announces its reversal in old-fashioned words, “lo! on this side and on that there was none,” which students unused to such phrasing may read past. (Perfetti, 2007; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Strategy: Translate paragraph 11 into plain modern English, reread the paragraphs just before and after it, and judge each choice by what this paragraph itself shows.
Traps
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Too broad or too strong: A choice overstates, generalizes, or uses absolute words the text does not support.
The wrong answers, classified
B Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Seizes on “so real to her mind” and blames her imagination, though the station she expected is truly missing and the danger she faces is real.
C Wrong tone or attitude (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Hears surprise in “gasped” and “lo!” but takes it for eagerness about an adventure, when it is shock at finding no station on either side.
D Too broad or too strong (King et al., 2004)
Makes a general claim about how Margaret handles stress, which could fit almost any paragraph, while this one reports a single discovery that turns the plot.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks how paragraph 11 moves the plot, the chain of events, forward. What changes for Margaret in this paragraph?
Read paragraph 11
Paragraph 11 is one sentence: “She gasped and looked about her for the station that but a short moment before had been so real to her mind; and, lo! on this side and on that there was none!”
Put it in plain words
“Lo!” is an old word that means “Look!” The words “on this side and on that there was none” mean there was no station on either side of the track. Earlier, in paragraph 5, she guessed the building “was probably on the other” side. An assumption is something you believe without checking. Now she sees that her assumption was wrong. There is no station at all.
Check each choice
- A fits. What she assumed, a station, is different from what is real, no station.
- B does not fit. Her imagination is not the problem. The missing station is a real problem.
- C does not fit. Her gasp is shock, not excitement about an adventure.
- D does not fit. She gasps, but the paragraph’s job is the discovery. It does not show how she usually handles stress.
Choose the answer
Paragraph 11 shows that the station Margaret counted on is not there. So the answer is A.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong choice. Both A and B notice a gap between what Margaret pictured and what is there. But B blames her imagination. Her trouble is real: there is no station, and the train is gone. A says what the paragraph does. It shows the truth is different from what she assumed.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Excerpt from A Voice in the Wilderness” as printed (pages 128–129)


Question 5 of 120
2026 Practice Test A English, question 31Passage Excerpt from “The Spirit of the Herd”
Excerpt from “The Spirit of the Herd”
by Dallas Lore Sharp
In this excerpt, published in 1914, author and professor Dallas Lore Sharp describes a summer cattle roundup in Oregon. The heat and dust had been relentless for three days. The cowboys were exhausted, and the cattle were restless. The ranch boss, Wade, had led the drive to a watering place, only to find it empty.
Along with the wagon had come the fresh horses—one of them being Peroxide Jim, a supple, powerful, clean-limbed buckskin, a horse, I think, that had as fine and intelligent an animal-face as any creature I ever saw. Wade had been saving this horse for emergency work. And why should he not have been saved fresh for just such a need as this? Are there not superior horses as well as superior men—a Peroxide Jim to complement a Wade?
The horse knew the cattle business and knew his rider perfectly; and though there was nothing like sentiment about the boss of the P Ranch riders, his faith in Peroxide Jim was complete. . . .
The desert, where the herd was camped, was one of the highest of a series of tablelands, or benches; it lay as level as a floor, rimmed by sheer rock, from which there was a drop to the bench of sage below. The herd when overtaken by the dusk had been headed for a pass descending to the next lower bench, but was now halted within a mile of the rim rock on the east, where there was a perpendicular fall of about three hundred feet. . . .
In the taut silence of the stirless desert night, with the tension of the herd at the snapping-point, any quick, unwonted sight or sound would stampede them. The sneezing of a horse, the flare of a match, would be enough to send the whole four thousand headlong—blind, frenzied, trampling—till spent and scattered over the plain.
And so, as he rode, Wade began to sing. The rider ahead of him took up the air and passed it on until, above the stepping stir of the hoofs rose the faint voices of the men, and all the herd was bound about by the slow plaintive measures of some old song. It was not to soothe their savage breasts that the riders sang to the cattle, but rather to preempt the dreaded silence, to relieve the tension, and so to prevent the shock of any sudden startling noise.
So they sang and rode and the night wore on to one o’clock, when Wade, coming up on the rim-rock side, felt a cool breeze fan his face, and caught a breath of fresh, moist wind with the taste of water in it.
He checked his horse instantly, listening as the wind swept past him over the cattle. But they must already have smelled it, for they had ceased their milling, the whole herd standing motionless, the indistinct forms close to him in the dark showing their bald faces lifted to drink the sweet wet breath that came over the rim. Then they started on again, but faster, and with a rumbling now from their hoarse throats that tightened Wade’s grip on the reins.
The sound seemed to come out of the earth, a low, rumbling mumble, as dark as the night and as wide as the plain, a thick, inarticulate bellow that stood every rider stiff in his stirrups. . . .
Then the breeze caught the dust and carried it back from the gray-coated, ghostly shapes, and Wade saw that the animals were still moving in a circle. He must keep them going. He touched his horse to ride on with them, when across the black sky flashed a vivid streak of lightning.
There was a snort from the steers, a quick clap of horns and hoofs from far within the herd, a tremor of the plain, a roar, a surging mass—and Wade was riding the flank of a wild stampede. Before him, behind him, beside him, pressing hard upon his horse, galloped the frenzied steers, and beyond them a multitude borne on, and bearing him on, by the heave of the galloping herd.
Wade was riding for his life. He knew it. His horse knew it. He was riding to turn the herd, too, back from the rim, as the horse also knew. The cattle were after water—water-mad—ready to go over the precipice to get it, carrying horse and rider with them. Wade was the only rider between the herd and the rim. It was black as death. He could see nothing in the sage, could scarcely discern the pounding, panting shadows at his side. He knew that he was being borne toward the rim, how fast he could not tell, but he knew by the swish of the brush against his tapaderos and the plunging of the horse that the ground was growing stonier, that they were nearing the rocks.
To outrun the herd was his only chance for life. If he could come up with the leaders he might not only escape, but even stand a chance of heading them off upon the plain and saving the herd. There were cattle still ahead of him; how many, what part of them all, he could not make out in the dark. But the horse knew. The reins hung on his straight neck, where his rider had dropped them, as, yelling and firing over the wild herd, he had given this horse the race to win, to lose.
They were riding the rim. Close on their left bore down the flank of the herd, and on their right, under their very feet, was a precipice, so close that they felt its blackness—its three hundred feet of fall! . . .
. . . Then Wade found himself racing neck and neck with a big white steer, which the horse, with marvelous instinct, seemed to pick out from a bunch, and to cling to, forcing him gradually ahead, till, cutting him free from the bunch entirely, he bore him off into the swishing sage.
The steers coming on close behind followed their leader, and in, after them, swung others. The tide was turning from the rim. More and more were veering, and within a short time the whole herd, bearing off from the cliffs, was pounding over the open plains.
Whose race was it? It was Peroxide Jim’s, according to Wade, for not by word or by touch of hand or knee had the horse been directed in the run. From the flash of the lightning the horse had taken the bit, had covered an indescribably perilous path at top speed, had outrun the herd and turned it from the edge of the rim rock, without a false step or a tremor of fear.
From “The Spirit of the Herd” by Dallas Lore Sharp—Public Domain
tablelands: plateaus, flat areas of land sharply elevated from the surrounding area
tapaderos: leather covers for stirrups
Question
How does paragraph 3 convey the effect of the setting on the cattle drive?
- AIt shows how the growing darkness created challenges for the riders in getting the herd to move.
- BIt describes how the changing elevation contributed to the dangerousness of the environment.
- CIt describes how the desert created an uncomfortable feeling of isolation for the riders and the cattle.
- DIt shows how the steep terrain made it difficult for the cattle to keep moving forward.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks how paragraph 3 conveys the effect of the setting on the cattle drive.
A. Incorrect. The riders were not trying to move the herd through the darkness. Instead, the reference to the growing darkness (“overtaken by the dusk”) indicates that the riders had halted the animals for the night because moving the herd across the desert in the darkness would have been much too dangerous because of the sheer drop-off at the edge of the tableland. The riders needed the daylight to navigate the herd safely through the “pass descending to the next lower bench.”
B. CORRECT. Paragraph 3 describes the land where the herd was as being “as level as a floor” but “rimmed by sheer rock, from which there was a drop to the bench of sage below.” The drop was “a perpendicular fall of about three hundred feet”—any animal or person could fall over that edge. It was the change in height, from flat tableland to sheer drop-off, that made the terrain so dangerous.
C. Incorrect. The use of the word “desert” in the first sentence of the paragraph does not highlight the isolation of the setting or indicate that the riders and the herd were uncomfortable being alone. Instead, the word merely establishes the setting where the action occurred: “it lay as level as a floor, rimmed by sheer rock, from which there was a drop to the bench of sage below.”
D. Incorrect. The excerpt does not indicate that the steep terrain made it difficult for the herd to move forward. The herd was not expected to navigate the steep terrain. Instead, the steep terrain presented a danger to the herd that must be avoided. The riders intended to move the herd safely through passes that descended gradually to lower elevations.
Question analysis
This setting question on “The Spirit of the Herd” asks how paragraph 3, which describes the high desert where the herd has stopped for the night, conveys the setting’s effect on the cattle drive. Students must understand unusual landform words, one explained in a footnote, and work out what the land means for the herd. Several choices name a real feature of the scene.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students analyze how setting affects a story, usually from plainly worded description. This paragraph relies on terms such as tablelands, benches and rim rock, and never names the effect, so students must work it out from the description.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Hard words moderate
- Reading between the lines minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 8, 1160 words; question and choices: about grade 9, 76 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Paragraph 3 reads like a surveyor’s report, flat land ending in a sheer drop, with no word of fear. Students must turn its landforms into a picture and see that a herd camped a mile from a three-hundred-foot fall is in danger. The strongest wrong answer gets the cliff right but makes it a barrier to the drive, and others seize on the dusk or on the loneliness a desert suggests.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about steep terrain blocking the herd and the right one both rest on the drop at the rim; they differ only in its effect, a hazard to avoid or an obstacle to movement. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Hard words moderate Understanding the question
The paragraph’s landforms, “tablelands, or benches,” “rim rock,” a “pass descending to the next lower bench” and a “perpendicular fall,” must be pictured before the danger is clear. (Perfetti, 2007; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Reading between the lines minor Working it out
The paragraph never calls the drop dangerous; students must infer it from “sheer rock” and “about three hundred feet,” a danger that becomes real only when the herd stampedes toward the rim. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Strategy: Make a quick sketch of the land paragraph 3 describes and mark where the herd is halted, then ask what that setting means for the drive and test each choice against it.
Traps
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Outside knowledge: A choice is plausible in the real world but not supported by this text.
The wrong answers, classified
A Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Turns “overtaken by the dusk” into a struggle to get the herd moving, though the herd was halted for the night and the paragraph stresses the drop, not darkness.
C Outside knowledge (King et al., 2004; Recht & Leslie, 1988)
Assumes a desert must feel lonely, a common association, though the paragraph uses “desert” only to place the herd on a level plain and says nothing of isolation.
D Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Rightly notices the sheer drop but makes it an obstacle to forward movement, when the herd was headed for a pass and the cliff was a hazard to avoid.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks about setting, the place and time of a story. How does the land in paragraph 3 affect the cattle drive? A cattle drive is a trip where riders move a large herd of cattle across the land.
Read paragraph 3
The herd is camped on high, flat land “rimmed by sheer rock, from which there was a drop to the bench of sage below.” The herd “was now halted within a mile of the rim rock on the east, where there was a perpendicular fall of about three hundred feet.”
Picture the land
The note says tablelands are “flat areas of land sharply elevated from the surrounding area.” A bench is another name for one. Picture giant steps. The herd is on a high step. Its edge is sheer rock, a straight drop. Perpendicular means straight up and down. So the herd has stopped within a mile of a cliff about 300 feet high.
Work out the effect
Elevation is how high the land is. Here the elevation changes suddenly, from flat ground to a steep cliff. A scared herd could run right over the edge. That makes the place dangerous. Later, this danger comes true when the stampede races toward the rim.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. The herd was halted for the night. The riders were not trying to move it.
- B fits. The sudden drop makes the place dangerous.
- C does not fit. The paragraph says nothing about feeling lonely.
- D does not fit. The herd was headed for a pass, an easier way down. The cliff was a danger to avoid.
Choose the answer
The change in height, from flat land to a sheer drop, makes the setting dangerous. So the answer is B.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D is the closest wrong choice, because it also points to the steep drop. But the herd was not trying to climb down the cliff. It was headed for a pass and had stopped for the night. The drop matters because the herd could fall over it. That danger is what B describes.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Excerpt from “The Spirit of the Herd”” as printed (page 41)

Question 6 of 120
2026 Practice Test A English, question 36Passage Massachusetts: Lowell National Historical Park
Massachusetts: Lowell National Historical Park
During the first half of the 19th century, Lowell, Massachusetts, quickly transformed itself from a farm town to a bustling industrial city. In time, Lowell became a model of industry, gaining global recognition for its state-of-the-art technology, innovative canal and dam system, mill architecture, boardinghouses, churches, and ethnic neighborhoods. Young Yankee women, immigrant families, and European tourists all flocked to Lowell to find work at one of the many textile mills, or visit the industrious city that was becoming a popular tourist destination. As one Scottish traveler observed during his visit to America, “Niagara and Lowell are the two objects I will longest remember in my American journey, the one the glory of American scenery, the other of American industry.” Today, Lowell National Historical Park welcomes visitors to enjoy the sights of Lowell and learn about the history of one of America’s most significant industrial cities.
The Boston merchants who founded Lowell in 1821 and named it after Francis Cabot Lowell chose to locate the town along Massachusetts’s Merrimack River to take advantage of the kinetic energy offered by the Pawtucket waterfalls. Over six miles of canals powered the waterwheels of Lowell’s mills, whose massive five- and six-story brick buildings dominated the city’s landscape. . . . The most recognized of these buildings are the Lowell Manufacturing Company chartered in 1821, the Suffolk or Wannalancit Mill completed around the 1880s, the Boott Mill Company established in 1835, and the Boott Mill Boardinghouse that opened in 1838. By the 1850s, 40 textile mills employing over 10,000 workers stretched for about a mile along the river. . . .
The city’s female workforce was significant in the history of Lowell. From the early to mid-1800s, women left the constricted lifestyle of small rural towns and rural areas for independent industrial city life. Most were young single Yankee girls, who were tired of the limited opportunities offered by their domestic work. Women found that Lowell’s mills offered monthly wages for their services and provided them room and board. Although these women gained economic independence in Lowell, the mill boardinghouse keepers constantly supervised their social activities, for which they hardly had any time, considering their daily 12- to 14-hour work schedules. At the end of the day, the factory bell signaled the “mill girls” to return to their boardinghouses. They were expected to adhere to the strict code of conduct respecting curfew and attending church.
Yankee “mill girls” continued to dominate the Lowell workforce until the 1840s, when the city began to find it difficult to compete with the growing industrial development in other New England communities. As profits fell, the mill industry cut wages. These wage cuts, deteriorating working conditions, and long workdays led the “mill girls” to protest and organize strikes. When their demands went unheard, the women left Lowell, and immigrant groups replaced them in the workforce. Despite the low wages and unhealthy work conditions, immigrants were eager to find work.
The immigrants replacing the Yankee “mill girls” during the 1840s were predominantly Irish Catholics, who traveled to America during the Great Potato Famine. Although Lowell received an influx of Irish families during this time, the Irish were a part of the city’s history from its birth, and before the “mill girls” arrived, they built Lowell’s historic canals, mills, and boardinghouses. Initially, Lowell’s Protestant community was slow to welcome Irish immigrants, but the hostility between Yankee Protestants and Irish Catholics eventually disappeared. Irish immigrants dominated the industrial scene until the Civil War, when other immigrant groups began to work in the city mills.
Like the Irish, the French-Canadians, Greeks, Poles, Portuguese, Russian Jews, and Armenians who came to work in Lowell’s mills faced long work hours, low wages, and poor living conditions in the city’s crowded tenements. By the time Lowell’s industry declined, the city had become an ethnic melting pot, where each group claimed its own distinct neighborhood, like the Irish immigrants’ “New Dublin” or “Acre,” and the French-Canadians’ “Little Canada.” The city officially began to close down its mills in the 1920s and ’30s after Lowell’s outdated mills could no longer compete against the state-of-the-art cotton mills in other communities and working conditions continued to decline as Lowell’s companies stopped reinvesting in their mills. . . . Despite a brief resurgence during World War II, the city shut down its last surviving mill by the mid-1950s.
From “Massachusetts: Lowell National Historical Park”—Public Domain/National Park Service
Yankee: native to New England
Niagara: a town in northwestern New York State well known as the location of Niagara Falls, a series of waterfalls on the Canadian border
domestic work: household duties like cooking and cleaning
Question
Read this sentence from paragraph 1.
As one Scottish traveler observed during his visit to America, “Niagara and Lowell are the two objects I will longest remember in my American journey, the one the glory of American scenery, the other of American industry.”
The author most likely includes the quotation from the Scottish traveler in order to
- Asuggest that people around the world saw the direct contribution of nature and industry to the United States.
- Bcompare the natural and industrial attractions in the United States at that time.
- Cconvey the idea that the United States offered both natural and industrial attractions.
- Dimply that the natural resources in the United States contributed to the development of industry.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks why the author most likely includes the quotation from the Scottish traveler in paragraph 1 of the passage.
A. Incorrect. While it is likely that people outside the United States recognized that both the natural landscape and the bustling industry were significant, the quotation from the Scottish traveler is meant to convey the variety of the types of attractions in the U.S., not to make a general statement about their contribution.
B. Incorrect. The Scottish traveler mentions both “American scenery” and “American industry” in the quotation, but the intent is to highlight that they are each points of interest. The quotation does not provide a comparison of the two attractions.
C. CORRECT. The quotation emphasizes the idea that the United States offers different attractions. The Scottish traveler highlights the two places in the United States that he will most remember: first, the beautiful natural formation of Niagara Falls (“ ‘the glory of American scenery’ ”) and second, the industrial city of Lowell (“ ‘the glory . . . of American industry’ ”).
D. Incorrect. The Scottish traveler mentions both “American scenery” and “American industry” in the quotation but does not imply that the natural resources contributed to the development of industry.
Question analysis
This reading question asks why the author of a National Park Service article about Lowell, Massachusetts, quotes a Scottish traveler who named Niagara and Lowell as the sights he would remember longest from his American journey. Students must work out the job a quotation does in an opening paragraph, and the traveler's compressed, old-fashioned wording has to be untangled first.
- NYS standards
- 7R5 structure and genre features
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Grade 7 readers regularly explain why an author includes a quotation. This one adds a sentence in older English built on a compressed “the one…, the other…” pattern, but it is a single sentence in a plainly organized opening paragraph, so the demand stays typical.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- How, not what moderate
- Complex sentences minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one sentence or line
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 15, 764 words; question and choices: about grade 11, 115 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Most of the work is translating the traveler's compressed remark into plain words: Niagara stands for American scenery, Lowell for American industry, and both are high points of his trip. Students who see the two placed side by side often take the pairing for a comparison, while others read more into it, a worldwide verdict or a link between waterfalls and mills. The question rewards stating only what the remark does in the paragraph, which is to set Lowell beside Niagara as a sight worth the journey.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The comparison choice names the same pair as the key, Niagara's scenery and Lowell's industry; it differs only in the verb, “compare” instead of conveying that the country offered both kinds of attraction. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
How, not what moderate Working it out
The stem asks why the author placed the traveler's remark in paragraph 1, so its job, backing the sentence before it about tourists visiting the industrious city, matters more than its content. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Complex sentences minor Understanding the question
The 37-word sentence ends in the compressed, old-fashioned “the one the glory of American scenery, the other of American industry,” where the verb and the second “glory” are left out. (Abedi & Lord, 2001; Freedle & Kostin, 1993; Messick, 1989)
Strategy: Put the traveler's remark into plain modern words, reread the sentence before it about who came to Lowell, and pick the purpose that fits both without reading more into the remark than it says.
Traps
- Wrong purpose or structure: Names a purpose, structure or effect that the part does not serve, or describes what a part says when the question asks what it does.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Too broad or too strong: A choice overstates, generalizes, or uses absolute words the text does not support.
The wrong answers, classified
A Too broad or too strong (King et al., 2004)
Stretches one Scottish visitor's memory into what “people around the world” saw, perhaps from the paragraph's “global recognition,” and adds a “direct contribution” that the remark never claims.
B Wrong purpose or structure (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Takes the remark's side-by-side pattern, “the one … the other,” for a comparison, though the traveler weighs neither against the other and simply names each as a highlight.
D Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Connects Niagara's waterfalls to the Pawtucket falls that powered Lowell's mills in paragraph 2, a link between nature and industry that the traveler's remark never draws.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This question asks about the author’s purpose. You need to say why the author put the Scottish traveler’s words into paragraph 1. Don’t just restate what he says. Ask what job his words do in the paragraph.
Find the quotation and its neighbor
The traveler’s words are in paragraph 1: “Niagara and Lowell are the two objects I will longest remember in my American journey.” He ends with “the one the glory of American scenery, the other of American industry.” Now look at the sentence just before it. It says European tourists came to “visit the industrious city that was becoming a popular tourist destination.”
Put his words in plain English
The old-fashioned ending leaves words out. “The one” means the first place he named, Niagara. “The other” means the second place, Lowell. Glory means the finest thing, the pride. Industry means factories and the work done in them. So he is saying: Niagara Falls is the best of America’s natural beauty, and Lowell is the best of its industry. Both are the sights he will remember longest.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. One visitor is not “people around the world.” He also never says nature or industry made a “direct contribution” to the country.
- B is wrong. He names the two places side by side, but he never weighs one against the other.
- C is right. He names a natural wonder and an industrial wonder as the two highlights of his trip. So America offered both kinds of attraction.
- D is wrong. He never says nature helped industry grow. The waterfalls that powered the mills come up in paragraph 2, not in his words.
Watch out: “The one” and “the other” set the two places side by side. That can feel like a comparison, which leads to B. But he praises both. He does not compare them.
Choose the answer
The author uses the quotation to show that America had two kinds of sights worth the trip: natural ones like Niagara and industrial ones like Lowell. So the answer is C.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong answer. It names the same pair, nature and industry. But to compare is to show how two things are alike or different. The traveler doesn’t do that. He simply names Niagara and Lowell as two highlights. C says just that: the country offered both kinds of attraction.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Massachusetts: Lowell National Historical Park” as printed (page 50)

Question 7 of 120
2026 Practice Test A English, question 37Uses the passage above: “Massachusetts: Lowell National Historical Park”.
Question
A central idea that Lowell was “one of America’s most significant industrial cities” (paragraph 1) is conveyed in the passage primarily through a description of the
- Acanals, mills, and boardinghouses that were built by immigrants.
- Bmill girls and immigrants who comprised Lowell’s workforce.
- Cdevelopment of the mills and the workforce established to support them.
- Dcultural diversity of the people who lived in the area.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks which description conveys the central idea that Lowell was “one of America’s most significant industrial cities” (paragraph 1).
A. Incorrect. While the passage does state that the city’s canals, mills, and boardinghouses were built by early immigrants from Ireland, these details do not contribute to the development of the overall idea that Lowell was a significant industrial city.
B. Incorrect. The details about the women and immigrants who worked in the mills are important to the passage, but these details alone do not show that Lowell was a significant industrial city.
C. CORRECT. The details throughout the passage about the development of the mills and the people who worked in them convey the significance of Lowell in early American industry. Paragraph 2 shares details about the businesses that started in the 1800s and contributed to the development of industry in the region (“The most recognized of these buildings are the Lowell Manufacturing Company chartered in 1821, the Suffolk or Wannalancit Mill completed around the 1880s, the Boott Mill Company established in 1835, and the Boott Mill Boardinghouse that opened in 1838”). Then paragraphs 3–6 provide specific details about the people who worked in the mills at different points in time.
D. Incorrect. Although the passage references Lowell’s culturally diverse community (“Young Yankee women, immigrant families, and European tourists all flocked to Lowell to find work at one of the many textile mills” [paragraph 1]), these groups alone are not what marked Lowell as a significant industrial city.
Question analysis
This central idea question asks which kind of description in an article about the Massachusetts mill city of Lowell does most to show that it was one of America's most significant industrial cities. Students need a map of all six paragraphs, because every choice names something the passage really describes, and the question turns on which description does the main work.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students trace how a central idea is developed, usually through a few supporting details. Here the strands to weigh run through six dense paragraphs of dates, mills and worker groups, and the stem is long and passive, so it asks more than typical.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer major
- Evidence in several places moderate
- A lot to read minor
- Complex sentences minor
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 15, 764 words; question and choices: about grade 10, 63 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A grammatical error in the explanation was corrected.
- An inaccurate detail in the explanation was corrected.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Every choice names something the passage really describes, so truth rules nothing out; the question turns on which description carries the claim that Lowell mattered as an industrial city. Because four of the six paragraphs follow the workers, the workforce alone looks like the passage's main thread, and students who forget paragraph 2's mills take the half for the whole. Diversity and the immigrant builders are real themes too, but neither says anything about Lowell's industrial standing.
A very close wrong answer major Choosing the answer
The workforce choice is the key with one half removed: both describe the people who worked the mills, but only the key also names the development of the mills, which paragraph 2 builds with dates and numbers. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
The industrial picture is built in two stages, the canals and mills of paragraph 2 and the successive workforces of paragraphs 3 to 6, so each choice must be measured against the whole passage. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
A lot to read minor Understanding the question
Six paragraphs pack in mill names, dates from 1821 to the 1950s and a string of worker groups, from Yankee mill girls to Irish, French-Canadian and Greek immigrants. (Kintsch, 1998; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Complex sentences minor Understanding the question
The stem is a long passive sentence that quotes paragraph 1 inside it and holds the real question, “primarily through a description of the,” until its last words. (Abedi & Lord, 2001; Freedle & Kostin, 1993; Messick, 1989)
Strategy: Note in a phrase what each of the six paragraphs is about, then test each choice against the stem's claim: would that description make a reader see Lowell as a major industrial city?
Traps
- Too narrow: A single detail offered as the central idea or a summary, or a summary that keeps minor details and leaves out an essential part.
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
The wrong answers, classified
A Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Seizes on paragraph 5's clause that Irish workers built the canals, mills and boardinghouses, one fact about construction rather than the account of mills and workers that shows Lowell's importance.
B Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Sees that paragraphs 3 to 6 follow the mill girls and the immigrants who replaced them, but leaves out the mills themselves, the heart of paragraph 2's industrial picture.
D True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Recalls paragraph 6's “ethnic melting pot” and paragraph 1's “ethnic neighborhoods,” which are real, but the city's diversity says nothing about its standing as an industrial city.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: The handbook’s explanation of Option B says “The details about the women and immigrants who worked in the mills is important to the passage.” The subject is “details,” so the site now says “are important.”
- Explanation: The handbook’s explanation of Option C says paragraph 2 describes “the businesses that started in the early 1800s,” but the sentence it then quotes includes “the Suffolk or Wannalancit Mill completed around the 1880s,” late in the century. The site now says “the businesses that started in the 1800s.”
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This is a central idea question. A central idea is a main point that the whole passage builds. The point here is that Lowell was “one of America’s most significant industrial cities.” Significant means important. You need the description that does the most to show this.
Map the six paragraphs
- Paragraph 1: Lowell grows from a farm town into a famous industrial city.
- Paragraph 2: The mills: canals, huge brick buildings, mills started across the 1800s, and by the 1850s, “40 textile mills employing over 10,000 workers.”
- Paragraphs 3 and 4: The Yankee “mill girls” who worked in the mills.
- Paragraphs 5 and 6: The Irish and other immigrants who took their place.
See how the picture is built
The passage shows Lowell’s importance in two parts. First it describes the mills: how they were built and how big they grew. Then it follows the workers who ran them, group after group. Together, the mills and the workforce show a major industrial city. Workforce means all the people who do the work. Either part alone tells only half the story.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. Paragraph 5 does say the Irish built the canals, mills and boardinghouses. But that is one fact in one sentence, not the main description.
- B is wrong. The mill girls and immigrants fill paragraphs 3 to 6. But this choice leaves out the mills themselves, the heart of paragraph 2.
- C is right. It covers both parts: how the mills grew and the workers who kept them running.
- D is wrong. Lowell did become an “ethnic melting pot.” But a mix of cultures doesn’t show that a city was an industrial leader.
Watch out: Four of the six paragraphs are about workers, so B looks like the main thread. It is only half of it.
Choose the answer
The central idea is carried by the growth of the mills plus the workforce gathered to run them. So the answer is C.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong answer. It matches the second half of C, the people who worked in the mills. But it drops the mills, with their six miles of canals and, by the 1850s, 40 mills. Workers alone don’t make a city an industrial giant. C keeps both halves, so it fits the whole passage.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 8 of 120
2026 Practice Test A English, question 41Uses the passage above: “Massachusetts: Lowell National Historical Park”.
Question
Which sentence best summarizes the mill girls’ experience as the dominant workforce in Lowell?
- AThe mill girls were eager to leave their domestic duties and small towns behind, so they went to work in the mills of Lowell.
- BOriginally, the mill girls were satisfied to work in Lowell, but as they left their jobs at the Lowell mills, immigrants arrived to fill the empty positions.
- CYoung women left home to work in the Lowell mills, but the mill girls soon became dissatisfied with the working conditions and rigid boardinghouse rules.
- DThe mill girls embraced city life when they came to work in Lowell’s mills, but when their protests about unfavorable working conditions went unanswered, they left.
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The question asks for the sentence that best summarizes the mill girls’ time as the dominant workforce in Lowell.
A. Incorrect. While the passage explains that mill girls were initially eager to leave the domestic duties of life in rural areas, the summary sentence does not address the details about the mill girls’ time working in the mills or the changes that led the mill girls to leave the industry.
B. Incorrect. Mill girls initially found satisfaction in the mill work and lifestyle, and when they did leave, immigrants filled the empty jobs. This summary sentence, however, does not address the details about the mill girls’ time as the primary workforce in Lowell or the circumstances that led them to leave their jobs in the mid-1800s.
C. Incorrect. Mill girls did leave home to work in the Lowell mills, and they did grow dissatisfied over time, but this summary sentence does not include details about the mill girls’ actions to improve the working conditions.
D. CORRECT. This sentence summary best captures the mill girls’ experience as outlined in paragraphs 3 and 4. The sentence concisely summarizes both the women’s initial excitement about the opportunity to live independently (“Women found that Lowell’s mills offered monthly wages for their services and provided them room and board” [paragraph 3]) and their eventual inability to secure better working conditions (“When their demands went unheard, the women left Lowell, and immigrant groups replaced them in the workforce” [paragraph 4]).
Question analysis
This summary question asks which sentence best sums up the experience of the Yankee mill girls during the years they were Lowell's main workforce. Students must pull together the account spread over paragraphs 3 and 4, and every choice is a two-part sentence that sounds accurate, so each must be checked for what it includes, what it leaves out and what it gets slightly wrong.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Summarizing part of a text is a grade 7 standard, usually tested with one clearly complete choice. Here all four summaries are long, two-part and largely accurate, so ranking them by completeness and precision asks more than typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly understand
- What makes it hard
- Every choice must be checked moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence in several places minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 15, 764 words; question and choices: about grade 11, 116 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
This is a completeness question: every summary is built from true pieces of paragraphs 3 and 4, and the right one is the only one that runs from arrival to departure with the cause in between. Students who stop at dissatisfaction feel they have the whole arc, because the turn against working conditions is the story's middle. Writing a one-line summary first, with a beginning, a turning point and an end, makes the gaps in the others easy to see.
Every choice must be checked moderate Choosing the answer
All four summaries are two-part sentences of 24 to 27 words that sound accurate, so each has to be checked for what it leaves out: the arrival, the wage cuts and protests, or the departure. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The dissatisfaction summary shares the key's shape, women coming to the mills and then turning against their working conditions; it differs only in the ending, where the key has unanswered protests and the women leaving. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places minor Working it out
The mill girls' story runs from paragraph 3, on why they came and how they lived, to paragraph 4, on wage cuts, strikes and their departure in the 1840s. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: Write your own one-sentence summary of paragraphs 3 and 4 before reading the choices, then compare each choice with it claim by claim, including its words about timing and cause.
Traps
- Too narrow: A single detail offered as the central idea or a summary, or a summary that keeps minor details and leaves out an essential part.
The wrong answers, classified
A Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Covers only why the women came, leaving domestic work and small towns behind, and stops before their years as the workforce, the wage cuts and their leaving.
B Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Gets the start and the replacement by immigrants right but drops the wage cuts, protests and strikes that paragraph 4 gives as the reason the women left.
C Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Keeps the arrival and the growing discontent, adding the minor boardinghouse rules, but leaves out the protests and the women leaving, and “soon” skips the years before the 1840s wage cuts.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This question asks for the best summary. A summary retells the main events in a few words. It covers the beginning, the middle and the end. Here you sum up the mill girls’ time as Lowell’s main workforce. Their story is in paragraphs 3 and 4.
Find the beginning of their story
Paragraph 3 says the women came for “independent industrial city life.” They found that the mills “offered monthly wages for their services and provided them room and board.” Room and board means a place to live and meals. So at first, they were glad to come. Their days were long, though, and the rules were strict.
Find the middle and the end
Paragraph 4 gives the turning point. In the 1840s, profits fell and the mills cut wages. “These wage cuts, deteriorating working conditions, and long workdays” led the women to protest and strike. Deteriorating means getting worse. Then comes the end: “When their demands went unheard, the women left Lowell.”
Check each choice
- A is wrong. It tells only why they came. It stops before their years at work and their leaving.
- B is wrong. It has the start and the end. But it skips the middle: the wage cuts and protests that made them leave.
- C is wrong. It has the start and the unhappy middle, but no protests and no leaving. Also, “soon” is off, since the trouble came years later, in the 1840s.
- D is right. It covers all three parts: they embraced city life, protested bad conditions, and left when no one listened. Embraced means happily welcomed.
Watch out: C feels complete because it ends with the women unhappy. But their story doesn’t end there. They protested, and then they left.
Choose the answer
Only one summary runs from the mill girls’ arrival to their leaving, with the cause in between. So the answer is D.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong answer. Like D, it starts with the women coming to the mills and then growing unhappy. But it stops there. It leaves out the protests and the women leaving Lowell, which is how their time as the main workforce ended. D tells the whole story.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 9 of 120
2026 Practice Test A English, question 43Passage The Benefits of Indoor Plants
The Benefits of Indoor Plants
(1) In an age of endless media content, it is easy to see why people might prefer to stay inside. (2) According to a study sponsored by the Environmental Protection Agency, Americans spend an average of 87 percent of their time indoors. (3) Scientists say that this separation between people and nature puts people at risk for physical and psychological issues.
(4) During the process of photosynthesis, plants convert carbon dioxide into oxygen and remove many harmful toxins from the air. (5) Spending prolonged periods of time indoors, away from plants, deprives people of these benefits. (6) Air that is not regularly detoxified can lead to a condition known as sick building syndrome. (7) This disorder first came to light in the 1970s when many office workers in the United States began to complain of unexplained flu-like symptoms. (8) Researchers determined the cause to be volatile organic compounds, or VOCs. (9) VOCs are harmful chemicals that are emitted by everyday objects such as carpet, furniture, cleaning products, and computers. (10) The NASA Clean Air Study found a simple way to remove a significant number of VOCs within a 24-hour period: add plants to indoor spaces.
(11) Adding plants to indoor spaces has psychological benefits too. (12) Research has long linked time spent in natural environments with increased energy and feelings of contentment. (13) While being outdoors is an excellent option for improving a person’s mental health, recent research has indicated that encountering natural elements while indoors can also help. (14) To experience the maximum benefit of natural elements, experts suggest placing at least one live plant per 100 square feet of home or office space.
(15) Connecting with nature, even just by being near an indoor plant, is a significant factor in a person’s well-being. (16) Sitting in front of an electronic screen all day isn’t natural, and today’s workers need to get up and get outdoors. (17) Richard Ryan, a psychology professor at the University of Rochester, puts it this way: “Nature is something within which we flourish, so having it be more a part of our lives is critical, especially when we live and work in built environments.”
Question
Which sentence should follow sentence 3 to best introduce the topic of the passage?
- APlacing plants in homes and offices can provide a healthy bridge between nature and the indoors.
- BIt is important for people to realize that they need to spend more time near plants, whether indoors or out in nature.
- CFor their personal health and well-being, people need to spend more time outdoors or bring the outdoors in.
- DIndividuals with little connection to nature can experience illness, depression, and higher levels of stress.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks which sentence should follow sentence 3 to best introduce the topic of the passage.
A. CORRECT. The sentence introduces the overall topic by previewing the main ideas in the passage. It introduces the connection between natural elements and well-being (“a healthy bridge”) and sets up the main argument of the passage (“Placing plants in homes and offices” can increase people’s well-being).
B. Incorrect. Although sentence 3 mentions the connection between “people and nature,” this sentence references the importance of spending time near plants while both indoors and outdoors. However, the passage focuses specifically on the benefits of having indoor plants.
C. Incorrect: Though the sentence describes a reason why indoor plants are important (“For [people’s] personal health and well-being”), the topic of the passage is related to the need for indoor plants, not the need for people to spend more time outdoors.
D. Incorrect. While the sentence refers to how time away from nature can affect health and well-being, the vague wording (“little connection to nature”) makes this sentence too broad to introduce the topic of the passage, and thus, it should not follow sentence 3.
Question analysis
This revising question works with the four-paragraph passage “The Benefits of Indoor Plants” and asks which sentence should follow sentence 3 to introduce the passage's topic. The opening paragraph ends on the health risks of time spent away from nature, and every choice continues that thought in some way, so students must judge which one prepares a reader for what the passage goes on to cover.
- NYS standards
- 7W2a introducing and organizing a topic
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Introducing a topic so that it previews what follows is a grade 7 writing standard, practised often in class. The passage is short and plainly worded, and the choices differ in focus rather than in grammar, typical grade 7 revision.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence in several places moderate
- How sentences fit together minor
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 12, 346 words; question and choices: about grade 9, 84 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The first paragraph ends on a problem, and all four choices continue it plausibly, so the decision is about scope. The passage is about plants indoors, and the near miss offers outdoor time as an equal remedy, while another widens the subject to plants anywhere and a third simply restates the danger. Students who skim the topic sentences of the later paragraphs before choosing see that only an indoor solution introduces what follows.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice ending “or bring the outdoors in” sounds like the key's “bridge between nature and the indoors,” but it adds spending more time outdoors, a remedy the passage does not develop. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
The topic only emerges from the later paragraphs: plants cleaning indoor air in sentences 4–10, their psychological benefits in 11–14, and nature brought indoors in 15–17. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
How sentences fit together minor Working it out
The new sentence must follow sentence 3's warning about “separation between people and nature” and lead into sentence 4's photosynthesis, so it has to name plants as the remedy. (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Strategy: Skim the first sentence of each later paragraph to see what the passage actually covers, then test each choice: would it set up those paragraphs without promising something they never discuss?
Traps
- Half right: One half of a two-part choice is right and the other is not.
- Too broad or too strong: A choice overstates, generalizes, or uses absolute words the text does not support.
- Says it twice: Repeats an idea that the sentence or passage already states.
The wrong answers, classified
B Too broad or too strong (King et al., 2004)
Accepts a sentence about needing plants, but “whether indoors or out in nature” widens the subject to plants anywhere, while the passage discusses only plants inside.
C Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Is drawn by “bring the outdoors in” and “health and well-being,” but the other half, spending more time outdoors, is a remedy the passage never goes on to develop.
D Says it twice (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Follows sentence 3 smoothly by naming illness, depression and stress, but that only restates its “physical and psychological issues” and never introduces plants, the passage's subject.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This revising question asks you to add a sentence that introduces the topic. Such a sentence tells the reader what the passage will be about. For example, an essay about why dogs make good pets might start: Dogs make loyal, loving pets. The new sentence goes after sentence 3, so it must also follow from it.
Find the passage’s topic
Skim the rest of the passage. Sentences 4–10 tell how plants clean indoor air. Sentences 11–14 say plants indoors help the mind. Sentences 15–17 say even an indoor plant connects you with nature. So the topic is plants inside homes and offices. The title says it too: “The Benefits of Indoor Plants.”
Connect it to sentence 3
Sentence 3 names a problem: “this separation between people and nature puts people at risk for physical and psychological issues.” Psychological means having to do with the mind and feelings. The best next sentence should name the fix the passage talks about: bringing plants indoors.
Check each choice
- A is right. It names plants “in homes and offices” as “a healthy bridge between nature and the indoors.” A bridge connects two things, so plants bring nature inside. That sets up every later paragraph.
- B is wrong. “Whether indoors or out in nature” widens the topic to plants anywhere. The passage only discusses plants inside.
- C is wrong. It offers two fixes: more time outdoors, or bringing the outdoors in. The passage develops only the second. C never even mentions plants.
- D is wrong. It just repeats sentence 3’s problem in new words. It never brings up plants, the subject of the passage.
Look closely at choice C
Watch out: C sounds close because of “bring the outdoors in.” But the passage gives no tips for spending more time outside. Sentence 13 mentions being outdoors only on its way to the indoor point. So half of C promises something the passage never delivers.
Choose the answer
Only one choice moves from sentence 3’s problem to the passage’s answer, plants inside. So the answer is A.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong answer, because “bring the outdoors in” sounds like A. But C gives equal weight to spending more time outdoors, and the passage never develops that idea. A points only to plants indoors, which is exactly what the rest of the passage is about.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “The Benefits of Indoor Plants” as printed (page 60)

Question 10 of 120
2026 Practice Test A English, question 45Uses the passage above: “The Benefits of Indoor Plants”.
Question
Which sentence could best follow sentence 13 to support the ideas in the third paragraph (sentences 11–14)?
- AA global study of 7,600 workers from sixteen countries revealed that employees who worked in spaces with natural elements, such as indoor plants, were more creative and productive than employees who worked in spaces without natural elements.
- BSpecifically, a study suggests that one well-known hotel is popular among guests because its owners have made a significant investment in landscaping and indoor plants known to have a relaxing effect.
- CIn fact, one recent study suggested that people who are routinely exposed to natural elements seem to increase their compassion for others, perhaps because that exposure generates compassion for the environment in which they live.
- DAccording to a study that was conducted in 2003, plants can reduce the amount of noise that people perceive in indoor spaces with hard surfaces, just as adding carpet can make a room seem quieter.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks for the sentence that could best follow sentence 13 to support the ideas in the third paragraph (sentences 11–14).
A. CORRECT. The sentence could best follow sentence 13 because it directly supports the main idea of the third paragraph that indoor plants provide “psychological benefits” (sentence 11) by presenting the findings of a relevant research study. The details about the study provide a concrete example of the mental benefits of indoor plants: the employees in the study who worked near plants “were more creative” and accomplished more than those who worked in spaces without plants.
B. Incorrect. Although the sentence describes a study in which indoor plants were found to have a positive effect, it does not clearly support the ideas in sentences 11–14, because the sentence focuses on the popularity of the hotel rather than psychological benefits. Therefore, this sentence does not best follow sentence 13 to support the ideas in the third paragraph.
C. Incorrect. Although the sentence suggests that being “routinely exposed to natural elements” can increase the positive emotion of compassion, it could not best follow sentence 13, because the reference to “natural elements” is too vague to sufficiently support the ideas in the third paragraph. The sentence does not logically follow the idea from sentence 13, which refers specifically to “encountering natural elements while indoors.”
D. Incorrect. The sentence develops the idea that indoor plants are helpful by comparing them to carpeting and stating that they can reduce the amount of noise that people perceive. Noise cancellation, though convenient, is irrelevant to the topic of the third paragraph, which is specific to the psychological benefits of indoor plants. Therefore, this sentence does not best follow sentence 13 to support the ideas in the third paragraph.
Question analysis
This supporting-details question asks which sentence could best follow sentence 13 to back up the third paragraph (sentences 11–14) of the indoor-plants passage. All four options report a study or finding about plants or nature, so students must check each against what the paragraph is about and where sentence 13 leaves off.
- NYS standards
- 7W2b developing a topic
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 writers choose relevant evidence for a point. Here each option is a long sentence describing a plausible study, and the best fit depends on matching the paragraph's exact point, a finer judgment than typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- How sentences fit together moderate
- A lot to read minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 12, 346 words; question and choices: about grade 15, 151 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Every option cites a study about plants or nature, and two name feelings, a relaxing effect and compassion, which sound more psychological than the key's creativity and productivity. The decision rests on two conditions from the paragraph: the benefit must be psychological, and the nature must be indoors. Students who test only one condition end up with the compassion study, which is not about indoor spaces, or the hotel, whose finding is about popularity.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The compassion choice and the key both report a study tying natural elements to a mental effect; the compassion study drops the indoor setting that sentence 13 specifies and turns to caring for others. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
How sentences fit together moderate Working it out
The added sentence sits between sentence 13's research on “encountering natural elements while indoors” and sentence 14's one plant per 100 square feet, so it must give evidence about nature indoors. (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
A lot to read minor Understanding the question
The options run 31 to 37 words, each describing a different study, so four separate findings must be read and held against the paragraph's point. (Kintsch, 1998; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Strategy: Restate sentences 11 and 13 in your own words, then ask of each option whether it gives evidence for that exact point or for a related benefit the paragraph does not discuss.
Traps
- Off the point: Adds or keeps something that does not support the paragraph's or the passage's focus, or an introduction or conclusion that misses the main point.
- Too broad or too strong: A choice overstates, generalizes, or uses absolute words the text does not support.
The wrong answers, classified
B Off the point (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Spots indoor plants and a “relaxing effect,” but the finding is that a hotel is popular with guests, a business result rather than evidence about people's well-being.
C Too broad or too strong (King et al., 2004)
Sees compassion as a psychological benefit, but the study covers exposure to “natural elements” in general, not the indoor encounters of sentence 13, and its benefit is caring for others.
D Off the point (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Accepts any benefit of indoor plants, but rooms that seem quieter are an acoustic advantage, not the psychological effects that sentence 11 names as the paragraph's subject.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This revising question asks for a supporting detail. A supporting detail is a fact or example that backs up a paragraph’s point. The new sentence goes after sentence 13, in the third paragraph. So first pin down that paragraph’s exact point.
Find the paragraph’s point
Sentence 11 states it: “Adding plants to indoor spaces has psychological benefits too.” Psychological benefits are good effects on the mind and feelings. Sentence 13 adds that “encountering natural elements while indoors can also help.” Natural elements are bits of nature, like plants.
Set two tests
So the new sentence must pass two tests. First, it must show a benefit for the mind. Second, it must be about nature indoors. Think of a paragraph about how bedtime reading helps kids sleep. A study about bedtime reading would fit. A study about reading on the bus would not.
Check each choice
- A is right. Workers near “natural elements, such as indoor plants,” were “more creative and productive.” Creative means good at new ideas. Productive means getting more done. Both are benefits for the mind, and the plants are indoors.
- B is wrong. The finding is that a hotel is popular with guests. That is about business, not people’s minds.
- C is wrong. It is about being “routinely exposed to natural elements” anywhere, not indoors. Its benefit is caring for others.
- D is wrong. Making a room seem quieter is about sound, not the mind.
Watch out: C names a feeling, compassion, so it sounds like a benefit for the mind. But it drops the indoor setting that sentence 13 is about.
Choose the answer
Only one choice shows a benefit for the mind from nature indoors. So the answer is A.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong answer, because compassion is a feeling. But its study is about natural elements in general, not inside a building. Sentence 13 is about nature indoors, and sentence 14 tells how many plants to put in a room. A fits right between them.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 11 of 120
2026 Practice Test A Math, question 10Question
Three expressions are given:
Which of these are equivalent to the sum of these three expressions?
Select the two correct answers.
Choose every answer that is correct, then check. The DOE has not published how answers with several parts are scored; this site counts one right only when every part is right.
- A
- B
- C
- D
- E18
- F34
Show the answer
Correct answer: A and E
Add the three expressions: .
Distribute 3 and −2: .
Combine the variable terms and combine the constants: .
Question analysis
This algebra question gives three expressions, one with a decimal coefficient and a negative factor, and asks which two of six choices are equivalent to their sum. It tests distributing, combining like terms and recognizing equivalent expressions. Signs from the negative factor are easy to lose, and several choices are built from exactly those slips.
- NYS standards
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Expanding and combining linear expressions with a negative factor and a decimal coefficient is standard grade 7 work. Choosing the two equivalent ones out of six, where each common slip appears as a choice, takes more care than one simplification.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Error-prone arithmetic moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Many steps minor
- An answer in an unexpected form minor
- Solution
- 4 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 8, 28 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The six choices form three consistent pairs, each an expansion with its simplified total: the right pair, a pair built on a sign slip with −2 × 4 that totals 34, and a pair built on 3 × 2n read as 5n that totals 18 − n. A student who makes either slip finds two choices that agree with each other and seem to confirm the work. The question rewards one careful simplification and the confidence to accept a sum with no n left.
Error-prone arithmetic moderate Working it out
The first expression puts a negative factor in front of a decimal term: −2 times 2.5n is −5n, and the −2 must reach the 4 as well, giving −8, not +8. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The first two expansions are identical except for their last sign, − 8 against + 8, and the third differs from the first only in 5n for 6n, so only a term-by-term check separates them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Many steps minor Working it out
Two distributions come first, then the n terms and the constants are collected separately, and six choices are compared with the result; both right ones must be picked to score. (Daniel & Embretson, 2010; Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
An answer in an unexpected form minor Choosing the answer
One right answer is the expansion before any terms are combined and the other is the plain number 18, which has to be accepted as equal to a sum in which every expression held n. (Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
Strategy: Distribute each factor across its parentheses, keeping the sign with every product, then combine the n terms and the constants separately and test each of the six choices against the result.
Traps
- Order of operations: Working left to right, or distributing a minus sign wrongly, gives a choice.
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
- Answer in another form: The right answer is written differently from the way you worked it out.
The wrong answers, classified
B Order of operations (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Gives the minus of −2 to 2.5n but not to 4, expanding −2(2.5n + 4) as −5n + 8 instead of −5n − 8, so this expansion totals 34.
C Wrong operation (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; King et al., 2004)
Expands 3(2n + 7) as 5n + 21, adding 3 and 2 instead of multiplying them, so the n terms no longer cancel and leave −n.
D Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Expects a sum of expressions in n to keep an n term, so it doubts the plain 18 and takes 18 − n, which the 5n expansion also simplifies to.
F Order of operations (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Takes −2 × 4 as +8, so the constants add to 5 + 21 + 8 = 34 while −n + 6n − 5n still cancels, leaving no n term.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- The distributive property
- a is the number in front of the parentheses, and b and c are the terms inside. You multiply a by every term inside, not only the first one. If a is negative, its minus sign goes into every product. It works because a groups of b + c is a groups of b plus a groups of c.
- Multiplying signed numbers
- a and b are positive numbers, so −a is negative. A negative number times a positive number is negative. Use it whenever a minus sign sits in front of the parentheses: −2 times 4 is −8, not 8.
- Combining like terms
- Like terms have the same letter part, such as 6n and −5n. a and b are their coefficients, the numbers in front of n. Add the coefficients and keep the n. Constants, the plain numbers, combine only with other constants.
Sort out the question
An expression is a math phrase made of numbers, letters and signs, with no equal sign. The sum of the three expressions means you add all of them:
You need the two choices that are equivalent to this sum. Equivalent means equal for every value of n. Some choices show the sum before it is simplified. Others show the result.
Distribute the 3
To distribute means to multiply the number outside the parentheses by each term inside.
Watch out: 3 times 2n is 6n. Adding 3 and 2 instead gives 5n. That slip leads to choice C, and then to 18 − n, choice D.
Distribute the −2
Now multiply −2 by both terms. A negative times a positive is negative, so both products are negative.
Watch out: the −2 multiplies the 4 too. Writing +8 instead of −8 leads to choice B. That sum works out to 34, choice F.
Write the whole sum
Put the three pieces together, starting with 5 − n:
This matches choice A exactly, term by term. So A is one of the answers.
Combine like terms
Gather the n terms first. Remember that −n means −1 times n.
Then gather the constants:
The n terms cancel out, so the whole sum is just 18.
Watch out: a sum with no n left is fine. Keeping an extra −n leads to choice D.
Pick the two answers
Choice A is the sum before you combine like terms. Choice E, 18, is the sum after you combine them. Both equal the sum for every value of n. So the answers are A and E.
Check your answer
Try a value, such as n = 2, in each expression. . . . The sum is , which matches E. Choice D would give 18 − 2 = 16 instead.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 12 of 120
2026 Practice Test A Math, question 27Question
Complete the steps to show one way to solve the equation for x.
Move the correct answer to each box. Each answer may be used more than once. Not all answers will be used.
On the test you drag tiles into the boxes; here, choose each box’s tile from its menu. A tile can be used more than once. The DOE has not published how answers with several parts are scored; this site counts one right only when every part is right.
Show the answer
Correct answer: blank 1: −4; blank 2: 28; blank 3: −56
Solution:
Answer for second equation: −4
Answer for third equation: 28
Answer for fourth equation: −56
Distribute the −0.5 on the right side of the equation: .
Add 4 to both sides of the equation to eliminate the −4 on the right side: .
Divide both sides by −0.5: .
Question analysis
Students complete a step-by-step solution of the equation 24 = −0.5(x + 8) by dragging number tiles into three boxes: one after distributing, one after collecting the constants, and one for x. It tests solving a two-step linear equation with a negative decimal. Tiles may be reused, and many come in positive and negative pairs, so every sign counts.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Solving equations of the form p(x + q) = r with rational numbers is named in the grade 7 standards. Here the steps are laid out, but the negative decimal factor forces a sign decision at every one of the three boxes.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Error-prone arithmetic moderate
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Many steps minor
- An answer in an unexpected form minor
- Solution
- 3 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 3, 39 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The layout settles the method, so the question comes down to one sign at each box. The printed plus before the first box nudges students toward the positive 4, and the pool then supplies every number that follows from it, down to −40. Students who distribute correctly can still lose the item at the last box by dividing 28 by 0.5. Substituting −56 back, −0.5 × (−48) = 24, confirms the final box.
Error-prone arithmetic moderate Working it out
Two of the three boxes turn on a negative decimal: −0.5 times 8 must give −4, and dividing 28 by −0.5 means multiplying by −2, which doubles the size and makes it negative. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The pool pairs −4 with 4, −40 with 40 and −56 with 56, so a box filled with the right size and the wrong sign looks just as finished; estimating cannot separate −56 from 56. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Many steps minor Working it out
The three boxes form a chain and all three must be right, so a slip in the first carries through; the pool even holds the whole wrong chain 4, 20 and −40. (Daniel & Embretson, 2010; Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
An answer in an unexpected form minor Choosing the answer
The second line prints a plus sign before its box, so the distributed −0.5x − 4 must be written as −0.5x + (−4), with the negative tile in the box. (Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
Strategy: Multiply −0.5 by both x and 8, undo the constant term by doing the opposite operation to both sides, then divide by −0.5, which is the same as multiplying by −2.
Traps
- Order of operations: Working left to right, or distributing a minus sign wrongly, gives a choice.
- Negatives and direction: Arithmetic with negative numbers, the order of a subtraction, or direction on a number line. (Moving a term across the equals sign without changing its sign is a faulty procedure.)
- A faulty procedure: A systematic but wrong procedure: adding fractions straight across, applying an exponent to each term of a sum, dropping a sign when moving a term.
The wrong answers, classified
DEB Order of operations (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Gives the minus of −0.5 to x but not to 8, writing −0.5x + 4, then correctly reaches 20 = −0.5x and x = −40 from that wrong start.
CFH Negatives and direction (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Distributes and adds 4 correctly to reach 28 = −0.5x, then divides 28 by 0.5 instead of −0.5, dropping the negative and entering 56.
CEB A faulty procedure (Brown & Burton, 1978; Tatsuoka, 1983)
Distributes correctly to −4 but moves it to the left side without changing its sign, so 24 − 4 = 20, and 20 ÷ (−0.5) = −40.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- The distributive property
- a is the number in front of the parentheses, and b and c are the terms inside. Multiply a by each term inside. If a is negative, the minus sign goes into every product. It works because a groups of b + c is the same as a groups of b plus a groups of c.
- Signs when you multiply or divide
- A negative number times a positive number gives a negative result. A negative times a negative gives a positive result. The same rules hold when you divide. Use them at every step where a negative number appears.
- Doing the same to both sides
- a and b are the two sides of an equation, and c is any number (not zero when you divide). An equation is like a balanced scale. Doing the same thing to both sides keeps it level. That is how you get x by itself.
Sort out the question
You solve by filling three boxes:
- Box 1 comes after , once the parentheses are gone.
- Box 2 is the number equal to .
- Box 3 is the value of x.
A tile can be used more than once, and some tiles are not used.
Distribute the −0.5
Multiply −0.5 by each term inside the parentheses. A negative times a positive is negative:
So . The line already shows a plus sign, so box 1 gets −4.
Watch out: the −0.5 multiplies the 8 too. Writing 4 instead starts a wrong chain: 4, then 20, then −40. Every number in that chain is a tile.
Add 4 to both sides
You want −0.5x alone on one side, and the −4 is in the way. Adding 4 undoes subtracting 4, so add 4 to both sides:
Box 2 gets 28.
Watch out: taking 4 away from 24 instead gives 20, another tile.
Divide both sides by −0.5
Now x is multiplied by −0.5. Dividing undoes multiplying, so divide both sides by −0.5:
Dividing by 0.5 is the same as multiplying by 2, since every whole holds two halves. A positive divided by a negative is negative. So .
Watch out: dropping the minus sign gives 56, which is also a tile.
Name the three tiles
From top to bottom, the finished steps read:
So the boxes get −4, 28 and −56, in that order. On the test, you drag each tile into its box. On this site, you choose it from the box’s menu.
Check your answer
Put back into the first equation. . Then , since a negative times a negative is positive. That gives 24, the left side, so −56 is right.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 13 of 120
2026 Practice Test A Math, question 37Question
When a student buys 4 notebooks, the total cost is $12. Each notebook costs the same amount. Select each point on the graph that best represents y, the total cost of x notebooks.
Select all the correct answers.

On the test you click the points in the figure; here, choose them below. The DOE has not published how answers with several parts are scored; this site counts one right only when every part is right.
- A(1, 1)
- B(1, 3)
- C(2, 5)
- D(3, 7)
- E(3, 9)
- F(4, 12)
- G(5, 14)
Show the answer
Correct answer: B, E, and F
Solution:
There are three correct points: (1, 3), (3, 9), and (4, 12).
Find the cost per notebook: .
The equation of the line is , where y is the total cost of x notebooks.
Check each point by plugging the x-value into the equation . If the y-value from the equation matches the y-value of the point, then the point is on the line .
Check all seven points:
(1, 1) y-values do not match; incorrect point
(1, 3) y-values match; CORRECT point
(2, 5) y-values do not match; incorrect point
(3, 7) y-values do not match; incorrect point
(3, 9) y-values match; CORRECT point
(4, 12) y-values match; CORRECT point
(5, 14) y-values do not match; incorrect point
Question analysis
A graph titled Buying Notebooks shows seven points, and students select every point that fits the total cost of buying notebooks, given the cost of a few notebooks and that each costs the same. It tests finding a unit rate and recognizing points of a proportional relationship. Some points line up in tempting patterns, and the item does not say how many to select.
- NYS standards
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Finding a unit rate and deciding which points fit a proportional relationship are grade 7 skills, and the arithmetic here is easy. What adds demand is testing all seven points with no count given, since one miss or extra pick loses the item.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 5, 36 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Finding the price is one division, 12 ÷ 4 = 3, so the question is really about checking: each chosen dot must fit y = 3x exactly, and the item does not say how many do. The graph punishes judging by eye, since a straight row of dots climbs from (1, 3) at $2 a notebook and two dots sit a single gridline off the true line. Multiplying each x by 3 and reading each y from the axis, not from the pattern, settles all seven.
Every choice must be checked moderate Choosing the answer
Seven dots must each be tested against $3 a notebook, and the item never says how many fit; one missed point or one extra loses the whole item, so no dot can be skipped. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Reading a figure, table or graph minor Understanding the question
The graph stacks two dots above 1 notebook and two above 3, and each total cost has to be read off a grid ruled at every dollar up to 15. (Lesh, Post & Behr, 1987; Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
(5, 14) sits one gridline below (5, 15), where 5 notebooks at $3 would be, and (2, 5) sits one below (2, 6), so judging by the line's direction cannot rule either out. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Work out the cost of one notebook from the total given in the question, then multiply each point's x-coordinate by that price and keep only the points whose y-coordinate matches exactly.
Traps
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
- Misreads the figure: Reads a value, label or tick spacing in a figure, table or graph wrongly.
The wrong answers, classified
A Little reason to choose it (Haladyna & Downing, 1993; Rodriguez, 2005)
No working from 4 notebooks for $12 makes one notebook cost $1, so this lowest dot mostly catches guesses, such as taking the dot nearest the origin as a start.
C Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Takes the straight row (1, 3), (2, 5), (3, 7) as the graph because its dots line up, though it climbs $2 a notebook and would meet the y-axis at $1, not the origin.
D Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Prefers the lower of the two dots above 3 notebooks because it continues the evenly spaced row from (1, 3) and (2, 5), instead of checking that 3 notebooks cost $9.
G Misreads the figure (Lesh, Post & Behr, 1987; Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Finds that 5 notebooks cost 5 × $3 = $15, then reads the dot above 5 as sitting on the top gridline, 15, when it is one line lower, at 14.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Unit price
- The unit price is what one item costs. Divide the total cost by the number of items bought. This works because every notebook costs the same, so the total splits into equal parts.
- A proportional relationship
- y is the total cost in dollars, and x is the number of notebooks. k is the price of one notebook, the number you always multiply by. A point fits only if its y is exactly k times its x. The graph is a straight line through (0, 0).
Sort out the question
Four notebooks cost $12, and each one costs the same. On the graph, x is the number of notebooks, and y is the total cost in dollars. The graph shows seven points. You must select every point that fits. The question does not say how many fit, so test all seven.
Find the price of one notebook
Split the $12 equally among the 4 notebooks:
Each notebook costs $3. So the total cost is 3 times the number of notebooks:
Test each point
For each point, multiply its x by 3. Keep the point only if the result equals its y.
Choice Point 3 × x Fits? A (1, 1) 3 No B (1, 3) 3 Yes C (2, 5) 6 No D (3, 7) 9 No E (3, 9) 9 Yes F (4, 12) 12 Yes G (5, 14) 15 No Watch for look-alike points
Watch out: the dots (1, 3), (2, 5) and (3, 7) sit in a neat straight row. But that row climbs $2 per notebook, not $3. Lining up is not enough: (2, 5) and (3, 7), choices C and D, do not fit.
Watch out: 5 notebooks cost dollars. The dot above 5 sits one gridline lower, at 14. Read the y-axis carefully, and you will skip choice G.
Name the points
Three points fit: (1, 3), (3, 9) and (4, 12). On the test, you click each of these dots on the graph. On this site, you check their boxes. So the answers are B, E and F.
Check your answer
All three points fit : , and . They also line up with (0, 0), since 0 notebooks cost $0. And (4, 12) is the fact the question gave you.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 14 of 120
2026 Practice Test B English, question 8Passage A Miracle Mile
A Miracle Mile
In the 1950s people compared running one mile in four minutes to scaling Mount Everest and nicknamed the feat a “dream mile.” Although such an accomplishment was considered humanly impossible, several elite runners aimed to break that supposedly impenetrable barrier. One of them was a twenty-five-year-old medical student named Roger Bannister.
Roger Bannister had tasted failure during the 1952 Olympics. There, he was favored to win the 1,500-meter competition, a distance slightly shorter than a mile, but he finished in a dismal fourth place instead. Bannister’s performance was a disappointment for him and his country, Great Britain. Determined to redeem himself, Bannister postponed his plans to retire from racing and focused on the ultimate prize—breaking the four-minute-mile barrier.
Bannister attacked the elusive milestone with a positive attitude and logical planning. The amateur athlete decided to use intensive interval training to develop endurance and speed. For these workouts, Bannister ran an interval of ten consecutive laps on a quarter-mile track, aiming for sixty seconds each lap. In between intervals, he let his body recover for two minutes.
By early 1954, Bannister had succeeded in lowering his quarter-mile pace to sixty-one seconds, but he had to shave off at least one more second in order to reach his target. Frustrated by the plateau he had reached, Bannister took a break from training and went mountain climbing for three days. The rest from running permitted his muscles to recuperate and left him feeling refreshed. When Bannister returned to the track, he completed ten quarter-mile-long intervals at fifty-nine seconds each. He finally felt prepared to attempt to break the world record.
As a member of the Amateur Athletic Association (AAA), Bannister joined the AAA team for a track meet against Oxford University. The event took place on a cinder track in Oxford on May 6, 1954. Bannister and his two AAA teammates, Chris Chataway and Chris Brasher, were close friends and frequent running partners. Chataway and Brasher agreed to help Bannister accomplish his goal by being his “rabbits.”
In track and field, rabbits are runners who enter the race solely to pace a teammate for a segment of the course. Typically, a runner settles in behind the rabbit and allows the rabbit to set an appropriate tempo. Additionally, by running behind the rabbit, the runner conserves about 15 percent of his or her effort. When the starting pistol fired, Brasher pounced into the lead, and Bannister followed behind his first rabbit.
Propelled by the excitement, Bannister lost his instinctive feel for his pace and shouted “Faster!” at Brasher. Brasher, however, remained composed and maintained his current steady but grueling pace, completing the first two laps in a desirable one minute and fifty-eight seconds. Then Chataway surged forward, leading Bannister at this same punishing rate for another lap and a half. At the beginning of the back straightaway of the track, Bannister bolted past Chataway. Bannister said, “I felt that the moment of a lifetime had come. There was no pain, only a great unity of movement and aim.” Bannister crossed the finish line in 3 minutes 59.4 seconds. The ecstatic crowd erupted the moment the timekeeper announced the word “three.”
Soon after Bannister’s achievement, four other athletes matched his performance. A new mindset had taken root among runners. Over the years, the record continued to fall. However, the current record, 3 minutes 43.13 seconds, has stood unbroken since 1999. Some question whether this record represents the limits of human ability. But perhaps there is another Bannister, an athlete who, with willpower and dedication, will accomplish the miraculous.
Question
The words “feat,” “humanly impossible,” and “impenetrable barrier” in paragraph 1 affect the tone of the paragraph because they
- Ahighlight the idea that only the most skilled runners would be able to run a four-minute mile.
- Bemphasize the idea that running a mile in less than four minutes was a seemingly unattainable goal.
- Cconvey the competitiveness among elite runners to consistently set and break speed records.
- Dshow the intensity of the training programs athletes endure in order to achieve their goals.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks how the words “feat,” “humanly impossible,” and “impenetrable barrier” in paragraph 1 affect the tone of the paragraph.
A. Incorrect. Although paragraph 1 states that “several elite runners aimed to break that supposedly impenetrable barrier,” the words “feat,” “humanly impossible,” and “impenetrable barrier” suggest that the goal was unattainable even for the most skilled runners.
B. CORRECT. No one had ever been able to run a mile in less than four minutes, and the words “feat,” “humanly impossible,” and “impenetrable barrier” imply that the goal seemed unattainable. These words also reinforce the comparison of running a four-minute mile to “scaling Mount Everest” (paragraph 1).
C. Incorrect. The words “feat,” “humanly impossible,” and “impenetrable barrier” describe how challenging and almost impossible running a four-minute mile seemed, and while other elite runners “aimed to break that supposedly impenetrable barrier” (paragraph 1), the paragraph focuses on Roger Bannister, not the competition among elite runners seeking to break the record.
D. Incorrect. Bannister’s training program is described in paragraphs 3 and 4, and the words “feat,” “humanly impossible,” and “impenetrable barrier” are used in paragraph 1 to describe the magnitude of Bannister’s goal to run a four-minute mile. Though his training program was intense, these words relate to the intensity of the goal itself, not to the intensity of his training.
Question analysis
This tone question on “A Miracle Mile,” an article about Roger Bannister and the four-minute mile, asks how three word choices in the opening paragraph, “feat,” “humanly impossible” and “impenetrable barrier,” affect its tone. Students must read the connotations of strong words in context and decide what they stress, while choices that echo other parts of the passage compete for attention.
- Grade level
- Grade 6 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Grade 7 tone questions often ask students to find the telling words themselves. Here the three words are quoted and sit in one short opening paragraph, and their shared meaning is strong and plain, so one careful reading is enough.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Hard words minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 10, 587 words; question and choices: about grade 11, 80 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The three quoted words all make the same point, and the opening comparison with “scaling Mount Everest” makes it again, so the effect is easy to sense. Points are lost on degree: the sentence holding two of the three words also names “several elite runners,” which makes a choice about only the best runners look supported. Students who hold on to “humanly impossible” rule it out, and the choices about rivalry and training fall away once they check that the words describe the goal, not the runners or their preparation.
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The choice about only the most skilled runners and the right one both stress how hard the four-minute mile was; they differ on degree, possible for the best runners or thought impossible for anyone. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Hard words minor Understanding the question
“Impenetrable” and “feat” carry the tone, and a student who does not know that impenetrable means impossible to break through may miss how absolute the barrier sounded. (Perfetti, 2007; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Strategy: Decide what feeling the three quoted words share, then reread paragraph 1 to see what they describe, and keep only a choice that fits both the feeling and the thing described.
Traps
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Word match: Repeats striking words or phrases from the text, so it looks supported, but its meaning does not fit the question.
- Wrong part of the text: A choice is true of another paragraph, stanza or speaker than the one asked about.
The wrong answers, classified
A Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Sees that the words stress difficulty but scales it down to a feat for the best runners only, though “humanly impossible” says no runner at all was thought able to do it.
C Word match (Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Picks up “elite runners aimed to break” from the same sentence and turns it into a rivalry over records, though the three words describe the barrier, not the runners.
D Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Carries the intensive interval training of paragraphs 3 and 4 back to paragraph 1, where the words measure the size of the goal, not the effort of preparing for it.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This is a tone question. Tone is the feeling or attitude that a writer’s words give a passage. The question names three word choices from paragraph 1. You need to decide what feeling they share and what they describe.
Find the words in paragraph 1
Paragraph 1 says people “compared running one mile in four minutes to scaling Mount Everest.” Scaling means climbing. Mount Everest is the tallest mountain on Earth. The paragraph calls running that fast a “feat.” The next sentence says “Although such an accomplishment was considered humanly impossible, several elite runners aimed to break that supposedly impenetrable barrier.”
Work out what the words mean
A feat is an amazing deed that is very hard to do. Humanly impossible means no person could ever do it. Impenetrable means impossible to break through, and a barrier is a wall. All three say the same thing. A mile under four minutes seemed like a goal no one could reach. A word for that is unattainable.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. It says the best runners could do it. But “humanly impossible” means no one could.
- B fits. The words make the four-minute mile sound out of reach.
- C does not fit. The words describe the barrier, not a contest between runners.
- D does not fit. Training comes later, in paragraphs 3 and 4. These words describe the goal itself.
Watch out: A is tempting because the same sentence mentions “several elite runners.” Elite means the very best. But even they were not expected to succeed.
Choose the answer
The three words make the goal sound almost impossible for anyone. So the answer is B, “emphasize the idea that running a mile in less than four minutes was a seemingly unattainable goal.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong choice. It also says the four-minute mile was hard. But A says that only the most skilled runners could do it. The passage says it was “considered humanly impossible.” People thought no runner at all could do it. That is why B fits better.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “A Miracle Mile” as printed (page 13)

Question 15 of 120
2026 Practice Test B English, question 13Uses the passage above: “A Miracle Mile”.
Question
How did interval training affect Bannister’s performance?
- AIt helped him learn how to moderate his pace while running.
- BIt helped him conserve effort when running with teammates.
- CIt helped him improve his pace and stamina while running.
- DIt helped him decrease his recovery time after an intense run.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks how interval training affected Bannister’s performance.
A. Incorrect. The moderation of his pace was achieved through the use of “rabbits,” described in paragraph 6, more than through his method of interval training.
B. Incorrect. Bannister worked individually during the interval training period and then paced himself with a two-person team of “rabbits,” which were introduced in paragraph 5 and explained in paragraph 6. It was the use of “rabbits” during the race that helped him conserve some of his effort, not the interval training.
C. CORRECT. As paragraph 3 states, the goal of Bannister’s training program was to “develop endurance and speed,” which are synonyms of the words “stamina” and “pace.”
D. Incorrect. Although Bannister “let his body recover for two minutes” (paragraph 3) during interval training, this was not the primary effect of the training on Bannister’s performance. Instead, interval training allowed him to develop greater endurance and speed.
Question analysis
This question asks how interval training affected Roger Bannister’s performance as he prepared to run a mile in under four minutes, according to “A Miracle Mile.” It tests finding a detail the passage states and recognizing it in a choice that may use different words. The passage describes several parts of his preparation and race, so students must keep track of which one the question is about.
- Grade level
- Grade 6 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Below typical grade 7 demand: the passage states the purpose of the training in a single sentence. A grade 7 student only needs to locate it and compare the choices with it, without inferring anything.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly understand
- What makes it hard
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 10, 587 words; question and choices: about grade 7, 48 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- The DOE’s 2026 explanations appendix skips this question; the explanation and answer key here are the DOE’s own, from its 2021–2022 guide (question 40), relettered.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Paragraph 3 states what the training was for, so the task is to match that sentence and ignore details from elsewhere. The rabbits of paragraph 6, who set Bannister’s tempo and save his effort, supply two tempting effects that belong to the race, not the workouts. The two-minute rests sit in the training paragraph itself, so a student skimming for “recover” can mistake part of the method for its result.
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The choice about moderating his pace and the right one both concern pace; only the right one matches the training’s stated aim, to “develop endurance and speed.” (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
The right answer is reworded minor Choosing the answer
The right choice turns “endurance and speed” into stamina and pace, while two wrong ones reuse the passage’s own words, “conserves” effort from paragraph 6 and “recover” from paragraph 3. (Freedle & Kostin, 1993; Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Strategy: Find the paragraph that introduces interval training, note what the training was meant to develop, and pick the choice that means the same thing.
Traps
- Wrong part of the text: A choice is true of another paragraph, stanza or speaker than the one asked about.
- Word match: Repeats striking words or phrases from the text, so it looks supported, but its meaning does not fit the question.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
The wrong answers, classified
A Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Sees the sixty-second laps as practice in holding a pace, but the training aimed to build speed and endurance, and in the race his rabbits had to hold his tempo for him.
B Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Matches the saving of “about 15 percent of his or her effort,” which paragraph 6 credits to running behind a rabbit in the race, not to interval training.
D Word match (Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Spots “recover” in paragraph 3 and picks the choice about recovery time, though the two-minute rest is part of the workout, and nothing says it grew shorter.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation and answer key: The 2026 printable test includes this question (Passage Set 2, Item 6), but the explanations appendix skips it: it explains only five of the six questions on “A Miracle Mile.” The question is question 40 of the DOE’s NYC Guide to the SHSAT for 2022 Admissions (the 2021–2022 guide, page 165), with the same stem and options lettered E–H. The explanation is the guide’s (page 218) and its key is G; both are relettered E–H to A–D here, so the key is C.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks what interval training did for Bannister’s running. So find the paragraph that first describes interval training. Look for what it was meant to build.
Find interval training in paragraph 3
Paragraph 3 says “The amateur athlete decided to use intensive interval training to develop endurance and speed.” In each workout he ran ten laps, aiming for sixty seconds a lap. Then he rested for two minutes and ran again. That is what an interval is here: a hard stretch of running between rests.
See what the training did
Endurance means being able to keep going for a long time. Another word for it is stamina. Speed is how fast you run, which is your pace. Paragraph 4 shows the result. By early 1954, he had lowered “his quarter-mile pace to sixty-one seconds.” He was getting faster.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. To moderate your pace means to keep it steady and not too fast. In the race, his rabbits did that for him. He even lost his feel for his pace.
- B does not fit. Saving effort came from running behind rabbits in the race (paragraph 6).
- C fits. Stamina and pace are other words for endurance and speed.
- D does not fit. He rested two minutes between runs. Nothing says that rest got shorter.
Watch out: D is tempting because paragraph 3 mentions rest: “he let his body recover for two minutes.” But the rest is part of the workout, not a result of it.
Choose the answer
Interval training built Bannister’s speed and endurance. So the answer is C, “It helped him improve his pace and stamina while running.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong choice, because it is also about pace. But the training aimed “to develop endurance and speed,” not to keep his pace in check. In the race, Bannister “lost his instinctive feel for his pace,” and Brasher had to keep it steady. C matches what the training was for.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 16 of 120
2026 Practice Test B English, question 15Passage Excerpt from In Search of the Unknown
Excerpt from In Search of the Unknown
by Robert W. Chambers
It was at that time the policy of the trustees and officers of the Zoological Gardens neither to employ collectors nor to send out expeditions in search of specimens. The society decided to depend upon voluntary contributions, and I was always busy, part of the day, in dictating answers to correspondents who wrote offering their services as hunters of big game, collectors of all sorts of fauna, trappers, snarers, and also to those who offered specimens for sale, usually at exorbitant rates.
To the proprietors of . . . mangy lynxes, moth-eaten coyotes, and dancing bears I returned courteous but uncompromising refusals—of course, first submitting all such letters, together with my replies, to Professor Farrago.
One day towards the end of May, however, just as I was leaving Bronx Park to return to town, Professor Lesard, of the reptilian department, called out to me that Professor Farrago wanted to see me a moment; so I . . . retraced my steps to the temporary, wooden building occupied by Professor Farrago, general superintendent of the Zoological Gardens. The professor, who was sitting at his desk before a pile of letters and replies submitted for approval by me, pushed his glasses down and looked over them at me with a whimsical smile that suggested amusement, impatience, annoyance, and perhaps a faint trace of apology.
“Now, here’s a letter,” he said, with a deliberate gesture towards a sheet of paper impaled on a file—“a letter that I suppose you remember.” He disengaged the sheet of paper and handed it to me.
“Oh yes,” I replied, with a shrug; “of course the man is mistaken—or—”
“Or what?” demanded Professor Farrago, tranquilly, wiping his glasses.
“—Or a liar,” I replied.
After a silence he leaned back in his chair and bade me read the letter to him again, and I did so with a contemptuous tolerance for the writer, who must have been either a very innocent victim or a very stupid swindler. I said as much to Professor Farrago, but, to my surprise, he appeared to waver.
“I suppose,” he said, with his near-sighted, embarrassed smile, “that nine hundred and ninety-nine men in a thousand would throw that letter aside and condemn the writer as a liar or a fool?”
“In my opinion,” said I, “he’s one or the other.”
“He isn’t—in mine,” said the professor, placidly.
“What!” I exclaimed. “Here is a man living all alone on a strip of rock and sand between the wilderness and the sea, who wants you to send somebody to take charge of a bird that doesn’t exist!”
“How do you know,” asked Professor Farrago, “that the bird in question does not exist?”
“It is generally accepted,” I replied, sarcastically, “that the great auk has been extinct for years. Therefore I may be pardoned for doubting that our correspondent possesses a pair of them alive.”
“Oh, you young fellows,” said the professor, smiling wearily, “you embark on a theory for destinations that don’t exist.”
He leaned back in his chair, his amused eyes searching space for the imagery that made him smile.
“Like swimming squirrels, you navigate with the help of Heaven and a stiff breeze, but you never land where you hope to—do you?”
Rather red in the face, I said: “Don’t you believe the great auk to be extinct?”
“Audubon saw the great auk.”
“Who has seen a single specimen since?”
“Nobody—except our correspondent here,” he replied, laughing.
I laughed, too, considering the interview at an end, but the professor went on, coolly:
“Whatever it is that our correspondent has—and I am daring to believe that it is the great auk itself—I want you to secure it for the society.”
When my astonishment subsided my first conscious sentiment was one of pity. Clearly, Professor Farrago was on the verge of dotage—ah, what a loss to the world!
I believe now that Professor Farrago perfectly interpreted my thoughts, but he betrayed neither resentment nor impatience. I drew a chair up beside his desk—there was nothing to do but to obey, and this fool’s errand was none of my conceiving.
Together we made out a list of articles necessary for me and itemized the expenses I might incur, and I set a date for my return, allowing no margin for a successful termination to the expedition.
“Never mind that,” said the professor. “What I want you to do is to get those birds here safely. Now, how many men will you take?”
“None,” I replied, bluntly; “it’s a useless expense, unless there is something to bring back. If there is I’ll wire you, you may be sure.”
“Very well,” said Professor Farrago, good-humoredly, “you shall have all the assistance you may require. Can you leave to-night?”
The old gentleman was certainly prompt. I nodded, half-sulkily, aware of his amusement.
“So,” I said, picking up my hat, “I am to start north to find a place called Black Harbor, where there is a man named Halyard who possesses, among other household utensils, two extinct great auks—”
We were both laughing by this time. I asked him why on earth he credited the assertion of a man he had never before heard of.
“I suppose,” he replied, with the same half-apologetic, half-humorous smile, “it is instinct. I feel, somehow, that this man Halyard has got an auk—perhaps two. I can’t get away from the idea that we are on the eve of acquiring the rarest of living creatures. It’s odd for a scientist to talk as I do; doubtless you’re shocked—admit it, now!”
But I was not shocked; on the contrary, I was conscious that the same strange hope that Professor Farrago cherished was beginning, in spite of me, to stir my pulses, too.
“If he has—” I began, then stopped.
The professor and I looked hard at each other in silence.
“Go on,” he said, encouragingly.
But I had nothing more to say, for the prospect of beholding with my own eyes a living specimen of the great auk produced a series of conflicting emotions within me which rendered speech profanely superfluous.
From IN SEARCH OF THE UNKNOWN by Robert W. Chambers—Public Domain
Audubon: John James Audubon, an ornithologist and artist who created scientific illustrations of birds
dotage: a loss of reasoning brought about by old age
Question
Read this sentence from paragraph 3.
The professor, who was sitting at his desk before a pile of letters and replies submitted for approval by me, pushed his glasses down and looked over them at me with a whimsical smile that suggested amusement, impatience, annoyance, and perhaps a faint trace of apology.
What does the phrase “a faint trace of apology” convey about the professor?
- AIt indicates that the professor feels bad that he has to call the narrator to his office after work.
- BIt shows that the professor is hesitant to share his opinions with the narrator.
- CIt implies that the professor is uncomfortable criticizing the narrator’s work.
- DIt suggests that the professor knows that the conversation will be frustrating for the narrator.
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The question asks what the phrase “a faint trace of apology” in paragraph 3 conveys about the professor.
A. Incorrect. The fact that the narrator had intended to leave the office for the day is not the source of the professor’s faintly apologetic manner, which is instead caused by the professor’s understanding that their conversation about the letter and the expedition is likely to cause an argument (“with a whimsical smile that suggested amusement, impatience, annoyance” [paragraph 3]). In paragraph 29, the professor asks the narrator if he can leave on an expedition that same evening, which indicates that the professor does not feel bad about taking up the narrator’s time after work.
B. Incorrect. The paragraphs that follow the sentence from paragraph 3 show the professor sharing his opinions without pause, even when his opinion of the narrator is unflattering (“ ‘Like swimming squirrels, you navigate with the help of Heaven and a stiff breeze, but you never land where you hope to—do you?’ ” [paragraph 17]).
C. Incorrect. The professor knows that the narrator will push back regarding the letter, but the professor is not uncomfortable challenging the narrator. Professor Farrago seems perfectly at ease and comfortable as he begins the discussion with the narrator.
D. CORRECT. The professor is both amused and annoyed by the narrator’s dismissal of the possibility that great auks still exist, and the professor knows that the narrator is likely to react negatively to being sent on what the narrator considers a “fool’s errand” (paragraph 25).
Question analysis
This question focuses on a single phrase in the excerpt from Robert W. Chambers’s In Search of the Unknown: as the professor looks up from a pile of letters, his whimsical smile shows “a faint trace of apology.” Students must work out what that hint of apology says about him. The phrase is brief and old-fashioned, and several explanations for it seem natural.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students often infer a character’s feelings from a description. Here the phrase ends a 46-word sentence of early-1900s prose, follows three other moods, and has to be interpreted from the scene as a whole, beyond typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Among the hardest on the SHSAT: a non-obvious approach, heavy reading, or a well-hidden trap.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Reading between the lines major
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence in several places moderate
- Complex sentences minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 9, 1066 words; question and choices: about grade 10, 123 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The phrase comes before a word of the conversation is spoken, so the reason for the apology lies ahead in the text. Two natural guesses compete with it: the professor has called the narrator back just as he was leaving, and he is about to question one of the narrator’s replies. Only a reader who follows the scene to the narrator’s scorn for the letter and the errand sees that the professor, at ease throughout, is sorry for what he is about to put the narrator through.
Reading between the lines major Working it out
Nothing explains the apology; students must reason from the talk that follows, in which the professor sends the narrator after birds the narrator believes extinct, that the professor expects resistance. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about criticizing the narrator’s work and the right one both tie the apology to the coming talk about a letter; one places discomfort in the professor, the other frustration in the narrator. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
What the professor anticipates appears only later: the narrator’s scorn for the letter in paragraphs 5–14 and his view of the trip as a “fool’s errand” in paragraph 25. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Complex sentences minor Understanding the question
The phrase closes a 46-word sentence, after a clause about the pile of letters and a run of three other moods, “amusement, impatience, annoyance.” (Abedi & Lord, 2001; Freedle & Kostin, 1993; Messick, 1989)
Strategy: Read the full sentence and then the conversation it opens, and test each choice against how the professor actually speaks and acts in that conversation.
Traps
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Half right: One half of a two-part choice is right and the other is not.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
The wrong answers, classified
A Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Ties the apology to the timing, since Professor Lesard stopped the narrator as he was leaving Bronx Park, but the professor later asks him to leave on the trip that same night.
B Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Reads the apology, and the “embarrassed smile” of paragraph 9, as reluctance to speak, though the professor states his belief in the letter plainly and even teases the narrator.
C Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Rightly senses that the professor is about to challenge the narrator’s reply to a letter, but he does it “placidly” and “coolly,” with no sign of discomfort.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks what one phrase shows about the professor: “a faint trace of apology.” Faint means slight, and a trace is a small sign. So his smile looks a little bit sorry. Why would he feel sorry? You find out from the talk that follows.
Read the whole sentence
Paragraph 3 says the professor looked at the narrator “with a whimsical smile that suggested amusement, impatience, annoyance, and perhaps a faint trace of apology.” Whimsical means playful. He is amused by the narrator and a bit annoyed with him. Then he picks up a letter the narrator has already turned down.
See what the professor is about to do
The professor is about to defend that letter. Then he sends the narrator after the birds in it. The narrator thinks the birds are extinct, or all dead. In paragraph 25 he calls the trip “this fool’s errand,” a pointless job. The professor seems to know the narrator will hate this. That is why his smile looks a little sorry.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. He later asks, “Can you leave to-night?” (paragraph 29). He is not sorry about taking the narrator’s time.
- B does not fit. He shares his opinion plainly: “He isn’t—in mine” (paragraph 11).
- C does not fit. He does challenge the narrator, but calmly. He speaks “placidly” and “coolly,” with no sign of being uneasy.
- D fits. He knows the talk will annoy the narrator.
Watch out: C is tempting because the professor is about to disagree with the narrator. But nothing shows that he is uncomfortable about it.
Choose the answer
The slight apology shows that the professor expects the narrator to be frustrated. So the answer is D, “It suggests that the professor knows that the conversation will be frustrating for the narrator.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong choice. Both C and D link the apology to the talk about the letter. But C puts the bad feeling in the professor, as if he were nervous. He is not. He speaks “placidly,” which means calmly. D puts the bad feeling in the narrator, and the narrator does get upset.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Excerpt from In Search of the Unknown” as printed (page 21)

Question 17 of 120
2026 Practice Test B English, question 16Uses the passage above: “Excerpt from In Search of the Unknown”.
Question
How does the exchange between the professor and the narrator in paragraphs 8–11 contribute to the development of the characters?
- AIt establishes the conflict between the professor and the narrator concerning the validity of the letter.
- BIt suggests a theme of collaboration because the narrator and the professor regularly work together.
- CIt reveals the characters’ traits by contrasting the narrator’s distrust with how easily the professor is deceived by what he reads.
- DIt hints that the resolution will involve the narrator accepting the professor’s opinion about the content of the letter.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks how the exchange between the professor and the narrator in paragraphs 8–11 contributes to the development of the characters.
A. CORRECT. Paragraphs 8–11 help develop the characters by revealing the difference between the opinions of the narrator and the professor. The narrator believes without any doubts that Halyard, the man who wrote the letter about the auks, is either “ ‘a liar or a fool’ ” (paragraph 9), while the professor believes in the possibility that the writer of the letter could actually be telling the truth (“I said as much to Professor Farrago, but, to my surprise, he appeared to waver” [paragraph 8]).
B. Incorrect. In paragraph 8, the narrator reacts to the letter writer with “a contemptuous tolerance,” and he is shocked to learn that the professor actually agrees with the man (paragraph 11) whom the narrator has bluntly condemned as a liar or a fool (“ ‘In my opinion,’ said I, ‘he’s one or the other.’ ” [paragraph 10]). The exchange presents an emphatic disagreement between the narrator and the professor, and it does not show them working together in a collaborative manner.
C. Incorrect. Although the narrator initially distrusts the contents of the letter and shows “contemptuous tolerance for the writer” (paragraph 8), the excerpt portrays the professor as experienced and intelligent, not as one who is easily deceived.
D. Incorrect. While the narrator does begin to consider the professor’s perspective at the end of the excerpt, paragraphs 8–11 primarily serve to establish the difference of opinion between the narrator and the professor about the writer of the letter.
Question analysis
This question on the excerpt from In Search of the Unknown asks how a short exchange in paragraphs 8–11, in which the narrator and Professor Farrago discuss a letter about a bird, contributes to the development of the two characters. Students must read what each man says and decide what the exchange adds. Some choices describe the pair accurately in part only.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 The task matches the grade 8 standard on how lines of dialogue reveal character, but the four paragraphs are short and the two speakers’ positions are stated outright, so the demand stays at a typical grade 7 level.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- How, not what minor
- Reading between the lines minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 9, 1066 words; question and choices: about grade 13, 90 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The four paragraphs are short and the disagreement is plain, so most students see that the men differ about the letter. The difficulty lies in the wording of the choices. One describes the contrast in terms of character, which suits the stem, but calls the professor easily deceived, a judgment only the narrator holds. The right choice speaks of a conflict, which sounds like plot rather than character, so students must trust that the conflict is what reveals the two men.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice that contrasts the narrator’s distrust with an easily deceived professor and the right one both set the men’s views of the letter against each other; they part on whether the professor is fooled. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
How, not what minor Working it out
The stem asks about the characters, while the right choice names a conflict over the letter, so students must see that the disagreement itself is what reveals each man. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Reading between the lines minor Working it out
The professor’s side is four words, “He isn’t—in mine,” and students must read them as openness to the letter’s truth, set against the narrator’s flat “one or the other.” (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Strategy: Sum up in a phrase what each man says and does in paragraphs 8–11, then check every part of each choice against those four paragraphs, since a choice can describe one character correctly and the other not.
Traps
- Half right: One half of a two-part choice is right and the other is not.
- Wrong part of the text: A choice is true of another paragraph, stanza or speaker than the one asked about.
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
The wrong answers, classified
B True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Rests on a true fact, that the narrator submits his work to the professor, but in paragraphs 8–11 the two disagree sharply and nothing shows them cooperating.
C Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Gets the narrator’s distrust right but adopts his view that the professor is gullible, though the professor only declines to call the writer a liar or a fool and stays calm.
D Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Knows that the narrator later comes to share the professor’s hope, in paragraph 34, but in paragraphs 8–11 he still insists the writer is “one or the other.”
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks what paragraphs 8–11 show about the two characters. Look at what each man says about the letter. Then compare their views.
Find the narrator’s view
In paragraph 8, the narrator reads the letter with “a contemptuous tolerance for the writer.” Contemptuous means full of scorn. He thinks the writer is “either a very innocent victim or a very stupid swindler.” A swindler is a cheat. In paragraph 10, he says the writer is a liar or a fool: “he’s one or the other.”
Find the professor’s view
The professor does not agree. In paragraph 8, the narrator notices that “to my surprise, he appeared to waver.” To waver means to be unsure. In paragraph 11, the professor answers, “He isn’t—in mine.” He means that in his opinion the writer is not a liar or a fool. So the two men clash over whether the letter is true. A clash like this is a conflict.
Check each choice
- A fits. The two men disagree about whether the letter can be trusted. Validity means whether something is true.
- B does not fit. They do work together, but here they disagree.
- C does not fit. The narrator’s distrust is right, but the professor is not fooled. He calmly refuses to call the writer a liar.
- D does not fit. The narrator starts to hope later, in paragraph 34. In paragraphs 8–11 he does not budge.
Watch out: C is tempting because half of it is true. The narrator does distrust the letter. But the idea that the professor has been fooled is only the narrator’s view.
Choose the answer
Paragraphs 8–11 set the narrator’s scorn against the professor’s open mind. So the answer is A, “It establishes the conflict between the professor and the narrator concerning the validity of the letter.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong choice. It is right about the narrator’s distrust. But it speaks of “how easily the professor is deceived.” Deceived means tricked. The story never shows that. He stays calm and thinks for himself. A describes both men correctly: they disagree about the letter.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 18 of 120
2026 Practice Test B English, question 17Uses the passage above: “Excerpt from In Search of the Unknown”.
Question
The professor’s observations in paragraphs 15–17 create tension in the excerpt by causing the narrator to feel
- Aflustered by the professor’s criticism of his logic.
- Bannoyed by the professor’s sarcasm about his inexperience.
- Cconfused by the professor’s lack of respect for his opinion.
- Dfrustrated by the professor’s lack of interest in his theory.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks how the professor’s observations in paragraphs 15–17 create tension in the excerpt.
A. CORRECT. The professor criticizes “ ‘you young fellows’ ” (paragraph 15), suggesting that the ideas of young scientists like the narrator are unsupported (“ ‘like swimming squirrels’ ” [paragraph 17]) and inaccurate (“ ‘but you never land where you hope to—do you?’ ” [paragraph 17] and “ ‘you embark on a theory for destinations that don’t exist’ ” [paragraph 15]). The narrator then becomes “red in the face” (paragraph 18), indicating that the narrator is upset by the professor’s criticism, and asks the professor about the great auk in an attempt to defend himself.
B. Incorrect. While the narrator does experience a negative reaction to the professor’s words, the professor is being genuine, not sarcastic. In fact, the sarcasm comes from the narrator in paragraph 14 (“ ‘It is generally accepted,’ I replied, sarcastically, ‘that the great auk has been extinct for years. Therefore I may be pardoned for doubting that our correspondent possesses a pair of them alive’ ”), not from the professor.
C. Incorrect. The professor’s observations cause the narrator to blush with embarrassment (“rather red in the face” [paragraph 18]), but the narrator understands the point that the professor is making about the narrator’s acceptance of the idea that great auks do not exist. The narrator recognizes that the professor is criticizing his youthful ideas, not his opinion.
D. Incorrect. The professor shows amusement with the narrator’s perspective. The narrator is embarrassed and upset by the professor’s words, but the narrator does not display frustration with the professor’s lack of interest in a commonly held view of the existence of a certain species of bird.
Question analysis
In this question on In Search of the Unknown, Professor Farrago makes remarks about “you young fellows,” comparing them to swimming squirrels that never land where they hope. Students must decide how these remarks in paragraphs 15–17 make the narrator feel and so create tension. The comparison is odd and old-fashioned, and the four choices name similar negative feelings with different causes.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students infer feelings from a character’s reactions, usually from plainly stated emotions. Here the cause is a puzzling figurative jab about “swimming squirrels,” the reaction is shown only through a physical sign, and the choices offer four close negative feelings.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Figurative or literary language major
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Reading between the lines moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 9, 1066 words; question and choices: about grade 9, 52 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The professor’s two images are odd, and students must decode them as a comment on how the narrator reasons before they can say why he blushes. Every choice names an unpleasant feeling, so the decision rests on its cause. “You young fellows” makes sarcasm about inexperience the natural guess, but the sarcasm in this scene is the narrator’s own, and the professor smiles “wearily” and speaks in earnest. The narrator’s pointed reply shows he followed the criticism, not that it confused him.
Figurative or literary language major Understanding the question
The criticism comes in images: young men who “embark on a theory for destinations that don’t exist” and who, like swimming squirrels, “never land where you hope to,” a picture of reasoning that goes astray. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about annoyance at sarcasm and the right one both name a bad reaction to the professor’s remarks; they part on the cause, sincere criticism of his logic or mockery of his youth. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
The narrator never names his feeling; it shows only in “Rather red in the face” and in the defensive question that follows about whether the great auk is extinct. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Strategy: Paraphrase what the professor says about “you young fellows” in paragraphs 15–17, find how the narrator reacts in paragraph 18, and choose the feeling and the cause that both fit.
Traps
- Wrong tone or attitude: Misjudges the tone, attitude or point of view, such as reading admiration as criticism, or taking a character's or subject's feelings for the author's.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Word match: Repeats striking words or phrases from the text, so it looks supported, but its meaning does not fit the question.
The wrong answers, classified
B Wrong tone or attitude (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Hears mockery in “Oh, you young fellows,” but the professor is sincere; the sarcasm belongs to the narrator, who “sarcastically” insists in paragraph 14 that the great auk is extinct.
C Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Takes the blush in paragraph 18 as confusion, though the narrator answers at once with a pointed question, which shows he understood the professor’s point well enough to push back.
D Word match (Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Is drawn by “theory” in paragraph 15 and calls the professor uninterested, though he engages the narrator’s view closely enough to answer it with two vivid images.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks how the professor’s words in paragraphs 15–17 make the narrator feel. Tension is a feeling of strain between characters. Each choice names a feeling and a cause. Both parts must be right.
Read what the professor says
In paragraph 15 he says, “Oh, you young fellows,” and “you embark on a theory for destinations that don’t exist.” To embark means to set out on a trip. He means young men set out with an idea toward places that are not there. Their reasoning leads them to wrong answers. In paragraph 17 he adds, “Like swimming squirrels, you navigate with the help of Heaven and a stiff breeze, but you never land where you hope to—do you?”
Understand the picture
A swimming squirrel can’t really steer. It drifts with luck and the wind. The professor is saying the narrator’s thinking drifts the same way and misses the truth. That is a criticism of his logic, or reasoning. In paragraph 18, the narrator is “Rather red in the face.” He is flustered, which means embarrassed and upset.
Check each choice
- A fits. He turns red after the professor criticizes his reasoning.
- B does not fit. Sarcasm is saying the opposite of what you mean in order to mock. The professor means what he says. The sarcastic one is the narrator, in paragraph 14.
- C does not fit. He is not confused. He fires back a sharp question right away.
- D does not fit. The professor answers the narrator’s idea closely, so he is interested in it.
Watch out: B is tempting because “you young fellows” points to the narrator’s youth. But the professor is sincere, not sarcastic.
Choose the answer
The professor says the narrator’s reasoning goes astray, and the narrator turns red. So the answer is A, “flustered by the professor’s criticism of his logic.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong choice. Both A and B say the narrator feels bad. But B blames sarcasm. Paragraph 14 says the narrator “replied, sarcastically,” so the sarcasm is his own. The professor means his words seriously. A names the real cause: criticism of the narrator’s thinking.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 19 of 120
2026 Practice Test B English, question 19Uses the passage above: “Excerpt from In Search of the Unknown”.
Question
Which sentence from the excerpt best explains why the professor is eager to send the narrator on an expedition?
- A“I believe now that Professor Farrago perfectly interpreted my thoughts, but he betrayed neither resentment nor impatience.” (paragraph 25)
- B“Together we made out a list of articles necessary for me and itemized the expenses I might incur, and I set a date for my return, allowing no margin for a successful termination to the expedition.” (paragraph 26)
- C“ ‘What I want you to do is to get those birds here safely.’ ” (paragraph 27)
- D“ ‘I can’t get away from the idea that we are on the eve of acquiring the rarest of living creatures.’ ” (paragraph 33)
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The question asks which sentence from the excerpt best explains why the professor is eager to send the narrator on an expedition.
A. Incorrect. The sentence from paragraph 25 says that the professor “perfectly interpreted” the narrator’s thoughts: in paragraph 24, the narrator suspects the professor is losing his ability to reason because his request (to secure the great auk for the society) seems impossible. The professor is excited about the discovery, but the narrator doubts whether the discovery is real. The sentence does not explain why the professor is excited, however.
B. Incorrect. Paragraph 26 shows the professor and the narrator planning the logistics of the trip, but it does not explain why the professor is eager to send the narrator on the expedition.
C. Incorrect. Although the sentence from paragraph 27 expresses the professor’s interest in having the narrator bring the birds back safely, it does not show the underlying reason why the safety of the birds is so crucial, which is that the great auk is extremely rare.
D. CORRECT. The sentence from paragraph 33 reveals the professor’s excitement to get “ ‘the rarest of living creatures,’ ” the great auk. In paragraph 14, the narrator states that “it is generally accepted . . . that the great auk has been extinct for years,” which would make a living auk incredibly rare and explains the professor’s eagerness for the narrator to go on the expedition.
Question analysis
This textual evidence question asks which sentence from In Search of the Unknown best explains why Professor Farrago is eager to send the narrator to collect a pair of great auks from a man who wrote to the zoo. Students must find the sentence that gives the professor’s reason, and the four quotations, from paragraphs 25 to 33, all concern the expedition in some way.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Choosing the sentence that best explains a character’s motive is standard grade 7 evidence work. The four quotations are short and labeled, but students must tell a reason for the professor’s eagerness apart from sentences that merely relate to the trip.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Reading between the lines minor
- Hard words minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 9, 1066 words; question and choices: about grade 12, 109 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A detail in the explanation was attributed to the wrong paragraph; it was corrected.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Every quotation concerns the expedition, so the question rests on the difference between a sentence that relates to the trip and one that gives the professor’s reason for wanting it. The order to bring the birds back safely shows his eagerness plainly and draws students who stop there. Only the sentence about “the rarest of living creatures” supplies a motive, and it gains its weight from the narrator’s earlier claim that the great auk is extinct.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The professor’s order to “get those birds here safely” and the right sentence are both his words about the birds; one says what he wants, the other why he wants it. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines minor Working it out
The right sentence never mentions the expedition, and its force depends on paragraph 14, where the narrator says the great auk “has been extinct for years.” (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Hard words minor Understanding the question
“On the eve of acquiring” is an idiom for being about to obtain, and a student who takes “eve” as evening misses that the professor feels the prize is near. (Perfetti, 2007; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Strategy: Restate the question as “Why does the professor want the narrator to go?” and ask of each quotation whether it gives a reason or only describes part of the plan.
Traps
- Supports only part of the claim: In a question about evidence: a line that backs one half of the claim but not the other, or a related point rather than the claim itself.
- Word match: Repeats striking words or phrases from the text, so it looks supported, but its meaning does not fit the question.
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
The wrong answers, classified
A True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Picks the professor reading the narrator’s doubts with “neither resentment nor impatience,” a true picture of his calm that says nothing about why he wants the birds.
B Word match (Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Is drawn by “the expedition” at the end of the sentence, but the list of supplies, costs and a return date is planning, not the professor’s motive.
C Supports only part of the claim (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Takes the professor’s instruction to bring the birds safely as his reason, but it states what he wants done; why the birds matter appears only in paragraph 33.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: The DOE’s explanation of Option A says “In the sentence from paragraph 25, the narrator suspects the professor is losing his ability to reason.” That suspicion is in paragraph 24 (“Clearly, Professor Farrago was on the verge of dotage,” where dotage is “a loss of reasoning brought about by old age”). The sentence from paragraph 25, which is Option A, says that the professor “perfectly interpreted my thoughts” and showed “neither resentment nor impatience.” The site now says: “The sentence from paragraph 25 says that the professor ‘perfectly interpreted’ the narrator’s thoughts: in paragraph 24, the narrator suspects the professor is losing his ability to reason.” The rest of the explanation is unchanged: Option A is still wrong because the sentence does not explain why the professor is eager to send the narrator.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks for evidence: the sentence that best explains why the professor is eager to send the narrator. So look for a reason, not a plan or an order.
Recall what the narrator believes
In paragraph 14, the narrator says “that the great auk has been extinct for years.” Extinct means no longer alive anywhere on Earth. So a living great auk would be amazingly rare. The letter writer claims to have two of them.
Find the professor’s reason
In paragraph 33, the professor says, “I can’t get away from the idea that we are on the eve of acquiring the rarest of living creatures.” On the eve of means just about to. Acquiring means getting. He thinks the zoo is close to getting the rarest animal alive. That is why he is eager to send the narrator.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. It is from paragraph 25. It says the professor understood the narrator’s thoughts. Those thoughts are in paragraph 24: the professor was “on the verge of dotage,” or losing his reason in old age. A shows the professor’s calm, not his reason.
- B does not fit. It describes planning the trip, not why.
- C does not fit. It says what the professor wants done, but not why the birds matter.
- D fits. It gives his reason: a chance at the rarest of creatures.
Watch out: C is tempting because the professor is talking about the birds. But it is an order, not a reason.
Choose the answer
Only D explains what makes the trip so exciting to the professor. So the answer is D, “I can’t get away from the idea that we are on the eve of acquiring the rarest of living creatures.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong choice. In C, the professor says “What I want you to do is to get those birds here safely.” That tells what he wants. D tells why he wants it: the birds may be “the rarest of living creatures.” The question asks for the reason, so D fits better.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 20 of 120
2026 Practice Test B English, question 22Uses the passage above: “Excerpt from In Search of the Unknown”.
Question
How does the author develop the contrast between the narrator’s point of view and the professor’s point of view?
- Aby providing both the narrator’s and professor’s thoughts on how age and experience influence each other’s reasoning
- Bby using the conversation between the narrator and the professor to emphasize their reactions to the letter
- Cby describing the professor’s persistent efforts to change the narrator’s mind about the letter
- Dby including dialogue that explains why the professor is the supervisor and the narrator is his subordinate
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks how the author develops the contrast between the narrator’s point of view and the professor’s point of view.
A. Incorrect. The excerpt does not describe the narrator’s thoughts about how age and experience influence the professor’s reasoning in enough detail to fully contrast them against the thoughts about the narrator that the professor expresses in paragraphs 15–17. The narrator’s idea that the professor might be “on the verge of dotage” (paragraph 24) is meant in a humorous way.
B. CORRECT. The primary conflict of the excerpt revolves around the narrator’s disagreement with the professor about whether the letter about the great auks could be true. As the two men converse, their contrasting attitudes toward the letter become clear: the narrator dismisses the possibility of great auks out of hand (“ ‘of course the man is mistaken’ ” [paragraph 5]; “ ‘here is a man . . . who wants you to send somebody to take charge of a bird that doesn’t exist!’ ” [paragraph 12]), while the professor calmly admits that although “ ‘nine hundred and ninety-nine men in a thousand would throw that letter aside and condemn the writer’ ” (paragraph 9), he himself believes that the writer could be telling the truth (“ ‘How do you know,’ asked Professor Farrago, ‘that the bird in question does not exist?’ ” [paragraph 13]).
C. Incorrect. The professor explains why he disagrees with the narrator (paragraphs 19–21), but he does not make persistent efforts to convince the narrator to change his mind about the letter. Instead he states that the narrator will go on an expedition to retrieve “ ‘whatever it is that our correspondent has’ ” (paragraph 23), thereby requiring the narrator to go collect the great auks whether the narrator believes in them or not.
D. Incorrect. The point of the dialogue is not to explain the subordinate-supervisor relationship between the narrator and the professor but rather to contrast what each character believes about the contents of the letter.
Question analysis
This point-of-view question asks how Robert W. Chambers develops the contrast between the narrator’s outlook and Professor Farrago’s in the excerpt from In Search of the Unknown. Students must step back from single lines and judge the author’s method across the whole excerpt. The choices describe techniques in general terms, and several connect to real moments in the story.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Analyzing how an author contrasts two characters’ points of view is the grade 7 standard itself, but here students must judge the main method across the whole excerpt, and each choice names an abstract method that touches something in the text.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- How, not what major
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence in several places moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 9, 1066 words; question and choices: about grade 11, 84 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The right choice is plain enough to seem too obvious, so students look for something more specific. The excerpt offers a candidate: the professor teases “you young fellows,” and the narrator decides the old man is near “dotage,” which makes age look like the method. Those remarks are passing jokes, while the men’s opposite reactions to Halyard’s letter run through the whole conversation. The question rewards judging what carries the contrast from start to end rather than what is most striking.
How, not what major Working it out
The question asks for the author’s method across the whole excerpt, and every choice names an abstract technique, so students must step back from single lines to see that the dialogue carries the contrast. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about age and experience and the right one both describe the two men’s opposed views as they come out in the excerpt; they part on the subject, their ages or the letter. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
The contrast builds from the narrator’s “of course the man is mistaken” in paragraph 5 to the professor’s appeal to “instinct” in paragraph 33, so no single passage shows the method. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: For each choice, find where the excerpt does what the choice describes, and ask whether that method carries the contrast through the whole excerpt or appears only once or twice.
Traps
- Too narrow: A single detail offered as the central idea or a summary, or a summary that keeps minor details and leaves out an essential part.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Wrong purpose or structure: Names a purpose, structure or effect that the part does not serve, or describes what a part says when the question asks what it does.
The wrong answers, classified
A Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Notices the jab at “you young fellows” and the narrator’s thought of “dotage,” but two passing remarks about age are not how the author builds the contrast across the excerpt.
C Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Overstates the professor’s role, since he asks a few calm questions and then simply assigns the trip, never working to win the narrator over.
D Wrong purpose or structure (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Knows that the professor is the superior, but no line of dialogue explains how either man got his position; the talk is about the letter, not their ranks.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks about the author’s method. How does the author show that the two men see things differently? Look at how the whole excerpt is built, not just one line.
Notice how the excerpt is told
Most of the excerpt is a conversation. The two men talk back and forth about the letter. Each answer shows how one man reacts to it. So their reactions to the letter are where the contrast shows up. A contrast is a clear difference between two things.
Find the two reactions
The narrator says “of course the man is mistaken” (paragraph 5). He laughs at the idea of “a bird that doesn’t exist!” (paragraph 12). The professor stays open. In paragraph 13 he asks how the narrator can be sure “that the bird in question does not exist.” In paragraph 23, he is “daring to believe” it is the great auk.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. Age comes up only twice: “you young fellows” and the narrator’s thought about “dotage.” Two short remarks do not build the contrast.
- B fits. The talk about the letter shows their opposite reactions.
- C does not fit. The professor asks a few calm questions and then simply sends the narrator. He does not keep trying to change his mind.
- D does not fit. No line explains how either man got his job.
Watch out: A is tempting because those remarks about age are real. But they are passing moments, not the author’s main method.
Choose the answer
The author builds the contrast through the two men’s talk about the letter. So the answer is B, “by using the conversation between the narrator and the professor to emphasize their reactions to the letter.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong choice. The professor does tease “you young fellows,” and the narrator does think of “dotage.” But those are two quick remarks. From paragraph 5 to paragraph 33, the two men keep reacting to the letter in opposite ways. That steady back-and-forth builds the contrast, so B fits.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 21 of 120
2026 Practice Test B English, question 23Passage Looking for the Smallest Spark of Everything
Looking for the Smallest Spark of Everything
Located underground near Geneva, Switzerland, the Large Hadron Collider (LHC) helps scientists study and understand how the smallest particles of matter interact with one another. The LHC propels atomic particle beams along a 17-mile-long ring.
There are the things the world is made of,
things we can see and feel, and then
there are the things even smaller, things that seem
to exist only when we are looking right at them.
So beneath the level of molecules are atoms,
and beneath the level of atoms, we find
protons, electrons, neutrons; and beneath that—
what, exactly? Because we are talking about
everything here: your fingernail,
the candy at the back of your mouth,
the coffee your teacher drank this morning,
your little sister, and the stuffed dog
she used to carry around with her everywhere.
And everywhere.
Everything and everywhere
are made up of the same stuff, whatever
it is. How do we find it? We can listen for it
in the wavelengths from deep space,
talking back to us from unimaginable
distances. Or we can build long,
deep circular tunnels beneath the surface
of this Earth and race particles
(like racing cars, only very tiny cars
flashing along at close to the speed of light)
until everything we think we know
bangs against everything else we know.
And there, in the explosion, in the darkness,
briefly incandescent, they appear:
the quarks, the leptons, and the bosons;
the baryons and the mesons. Their names
sound like dinosaurs or maybe bands
playing terrible music in someone’s garage.
The one thing we know for sure
is that they spin. This is how gravity
enters our world, how our world is held
both together and apart, what keeps
together the pencil in your hand right now
as well as separate from, say,
Jupiter. They spin, and it is only down there
in the darkness—in the vast garage
where physicists jot down
what they can, whatever seems most real—
that they let us perceive their wild dancing,
combusting to the music they make.
Question
Read lines 5–8 from the poem.
So beneath the level of molecules are atoms,
and beneath the level of atoms, we find
protons, electrons, neutrons; and beneath that—
what, exactly?
The lines help develop a central idea of the poem by revealing the speaker’s
- Ainterest in determining how the parts of matter work together.
- Bcuriosity about what makes up matter.
- Cdesire to prove that particles make up matter.
- Dquestions about what tools are needed to study matter.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks what lines 5–8 reveal about the speaker to help develop a central idea of the poem.
A. Incorrect. In lines 5–8, the speaker is demonstrating knowledge about the structure of matter, not demonstrating interest in how matter’s parts work together; for example, “beneath the level of molecules are atoms, / and beneath the level of atoms, we find / protons, electrons, neutrons” (lines 5–7).
B. CORRECT. Lines 5–8 show the connection between the particles by using the words “beneath the level” repeatedly. The progression of particles of matter, from atoms to subatomic particles, “protons, electrons, neutrons” (line 7), ends with a question. By asking, “what, exactly?” (line 8), the speaker questions the mysteries that are still unsolved about the nature of matter, which is a central idea of the poem.
C. Incorrect. The speaker expresses curiosity in line 8 (“what, exactly?”) but does not use language in lines 5–8 that expresses a desire to prove a point. The poem does not show any conflict, either from within or from other scientists, about the concept that particles make up matter.
D. Incorrect. While the poem is about the Large Hadron Collider, which, according to the introductory text before the poem, is a tool that “helps scientists study and understand how the smallest particles of matter interact with one another,” lines 5–8 do not suggest the use of tools but rather question what comes after the “protons, electrons, neutrons” (line 7).
Question analysis
This question on the poem “Looking for the Smallest Spark of Everything,” about the Large Hadron Collider, quotes lines 5–8, which move from molecules down to atoms and smaller particles. Students decide what the lines reveal about the speaker and how that develops a central idea of the poem. The choices name related attitudes toward matter and science, so precise reading matters.
- Grade level
- Grade 6 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Below typical grade 7 demand: the four lines are quoted in the question and use everyday words, so a single step of interpretation links them to the speaker’s attitude and to the poem’s larger subject.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: 346 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 7, 76 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The lines move down level by level, molecules, atoms, protons, and then stop at a question, so the speaker’s curiosity is close to the surface. The choice about how the parts work together comes nearest to the right one, helped by the head-note, which says the collider studies how particles “interact.” Students who notice that the lines list what lies beneath what, and never how things interact, settle on curiosity about what matter is made of.
Reading between the lines minor Working it out
The speaker never names a feeling; the curiosity shows in the dash and the question “what, exactly?” that cut off a confident list of layers. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The choice about how the parts of matter work together and the right one both give the speaker an interest in matter; they part on its object, how parts interact or what matter is made of. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Read lines 5–8 as one sentence, describe in a word or two what the speaker is doing in them, and pick the choice that matches those exact lines.
Traps
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Wrong part of the text: A choice is true of another paragraph, stanza or speaker than the one asked about.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
The wrong answers, classified
A Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Keeps the speaker’s interest in matter but shifts it from what lies beneath atoms to how parts interact, the subject the head-note gives the collider, not these lines.
C Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Reads the confident list of layers as a case being argued, though the speaker treats them as known and ends on a question, seeking rather than proving.
D Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Jumps ahead to stanza 3, where the speaker asks “How do we find it?” and describes tunnels, but lines 5–8 say nothing about tools or ways of studying matter.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks what lines 5–8 show about the speaker, the voice talking in the poem. It also asks how that fits a central idea, a main point of the whole poem. Decide what the speaker is doing in these lines.
Read lines 5–8
The lines say “So beneath the level of molecules are atoms, / and beneath the level of atoms, we find / protons, electrons, neutrons; and beneath that— / what, exactly?” Matter is the stuff everything is made of. A molecule is a tiny group of atoms joined together. Protons, electrons and neutrons are the even tinier parts of an atom.
See what the speaker is doing
The speaker goes down layer by layer: molecules, then atoms, then the parts of atoms. Then the list stops with a dash and a question: “what, exactly?” The speaker does not know what lies beneath, and wants to know. That is curiosity. The whole poem keeps asking what everything is made of.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. The lines ask what is underneath, not how the parts work together.
- B fits. The speaker wonders what matter is made of at its smallest.
- C does not fit. The speaker is not trying to prove a point. The lines end with a question.
- D does not fit. Ways to search, like tunnels, come later, in lines 17–22. Lines 5–8 do not mention them.
Watch out: A is tempting because the note before the poem says scientists study how particles “interact,” or act on one another. But lines 5–8 are only about what lies beneath.
Choose the answer
The question “what, exactly?” shows a speaker who wants to know what matter is made of. So the answer is B, “curiosity about what makes up matter.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong choice, since it also shows interest in matter. But A is about how the parts work together. Lines 5–8 never talk about that. They go down layer by layer and end with “what, exactly?” That question asks what matter is made of, so B fits.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Looking for the Smallest Spark of Everything” as printed (pages 32–33)


Question 22 of 120
2026 Practice Test B English, question 32Passage Using Fire to Keep a Prairie Healthy
Using Fire to Keep a Prairie Healthy
Inside the 40,000-acre Joseph H. Williams Tallgrass Prairie Preserve in northern Oklahoma, herds of bison roam on the scenic land that is home to hundreds of different species of plants and animals. While one of the greatest threats to the prairie is wildfire, the use of controlled fires is actually an effective way to protect this idyllic landscape.
Fires that are started by lightning or other natural circumstances are inevitable, and the results can be disastrous. However, hundreds of years ago the American Indian people who inhabited the Great Plains area between Minnesota and Texas realized that these fires could also be helpful. The bison in the area seemed to prefer grazing on tender new grass on the recently burned land rather than on grass in the unburned areas. The American Indian people began to deliberately burn areas of land for bison to graze on, which enticed the herds away from the people’s crops.
Today conservationists at the Tallgrass Prairie Preserve and farmers in the Great Plains continue to use controlled burns for land management. Intentionally burning a portion of land can dramatically improve the quality of the vegetation that regrows there. The fires burn away weedy undergrowth and help limit the overcrowding of shrubs and trees in the burn area, creating less competition for water and nutrients. Additionally, the process of burning excess plant matter adds nitrogen, an essential element for plant growth, to the soil.
One common target of controlled burns at the preserve and the surrounding area is the invasive red cedar tree. A single red cedar tree can consume up to 40 gallons of water per day, taking this vital resource away from other plant life. These tall trees also cast shade that prevents sunlight from reaching the plants beneath them. The fast-growing red cedar trees tend to crowd out prairie grasses, the primary food source for wild and domestic animals that make the prairie their home. An imbalance in one component of the prairie’s ecosystem affects the entire web of life. Controlled burns help maintain this ecosystem’s delicate balance.
Of course, these controlled fires are intended to burn only a portion of an area. A total burn, which is a risk with an uncontrolled wildfire, would destroy all wildlife as well as the crops farmers plant for income. The key to using controlled fires is knowing which areas of land to burn and when. Conservation experts at the preserve employ the “patch-burn” approach, meaning they rotate which portion of land is burned each year. They study the land to find out which areas would most benefit from being burned, and then they arrange about a dozen burns over one-third of the land. This patch burning contains the fire within a specific area and allows animals in the burn area to safely relocate. The following year, conservationists will burn a different section of the preserve, while the land burned the previous year regrows healthier than before.
Researchers have tracked and studied the variety of plant species and animals that live on the preserve, and their studies show that the patch-burn approach has restored biodiversity to the area by promoting the growth of species that were at risk of being crowded out. The patch-burn system is so successful that the conservationists at the preserve provide training to prairie farmers about conducting controlled burns on their own land. Burning land to make it healthy may seem counterintuitive, but strategic controlled fires have helped the prairie sustain life for hundreds of years and, with careful management, will continue to do so.

Question
Which sentence supports the idea that farmers and people who manage land may be concerned about using fire as a way to benefit the land?
- A“While one of the greatest threats to the prairie is wildfire, the use of controlled fires is actually an effective way to protect this idyllic landscape.” (paragraph 1)
- B“The American Indian people began to deliberately burn areas of land for bison to graze on, which enticed the herds away from the people’s crops.” (paragraph 2)
- C“This patch burning contains the fire within a specific area and allows animals in the burn area to safely relocate.” (paragraph 5)
- D“The following year, conservationists will burn a different section of the preserve, while the land burned the previous year regrows healthier than before.” (paragraph 5)
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks which sentence supports the idea that farmers and people who manage land may be concerned about using fire as a way to benefit the land.
A. CORRECT. The sentence from paragraph 1 supports the idea that farmers and people who manage land may be concerned about using fire as a way to benefit the land because it acknowledges that “one of the greatest threats to the prairie is wildfire.”
B. Incorrect. Although the sentence from paragraph 2 relates how American Indians “began to deliberately burn areas of land for bison to graze on” and to protect people’s crops, the sentence does not support the idea that farmers and people who manage land may be concerned about using fire as a way to benefit the land. Instead, it focuses on the cause-and-effect relationship between bison and newly burned areas.
C. Incorrect. The sentence from paragraph 5 provides details about how “patch burning contains the fire” and “allows animals in the burn area to safely relocate,” but it does not adequately support the idea that farmers and people who manage land may be concerned about using fire as a way to benefit the land, because it does not mention that wildfires can be a threat to the prairie.
D. Incorrect. While the sentence from paragraph 5 does explain how “conservationists will burn a different section of the preserve” in order to rotate the process year after year so that the burned land has time to regrow, the sentence does not support the idea that farmers and people who manage land may be concerned about using fire as a way to benefit the land because it does not mention the potential for total burns.
Question analysis
This evidence question asks which sentence from the article on controlled prairie burns supports the idea that farmers and others who manage land may be concerned about using fire to benefit it. The passage never states that concern directly, so students must infer it, and all four quoted sentences, taken from across the article, talk about burning land in some way.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 evidence questions usually ask for support of an idea the text states. This idea, that people who manage land may worry about using fire, is never stated outright, so students must infer which sentence implies it, more than typical.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- Reading between the lines major
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Every choice must be checked minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one sentence or line
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 598 words; question and choices: about grade 13, 123 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The idea to support is about people’s feelings, yet none of the four sentences mentions farmers worrying, so students have to decide what would justify such worry. The opening sentence does it by naming wildfire as a great threat before praising controlled fire, a concession many students read past as background. The strongest pull is the sentence on containing the fire, which implies caution but presents patch burning as the answer, not the concern.
Reading between the lines major Working it out
No sentence mentions worry; students must see that calling wildfire “one of the greatest threats to the prairie” gives landowners a reason to fear fire, and that “actually” answers that fear. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The patch-burn sentence about containing the fire “within a specific area” also hints at fire’s danger; it differs from the right one by describing the safeguard without ever naming a threat. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Every choice must be checked minor Choosing the answer
The four sentences come from paragraphs 1, 2 and 5, and each is about burning land, so each must be tested for a hint of risk rather than for its topic. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Strategy: Before rereading the choices, decide what a sentence would need to say to show that landowners have reason to be wary of fire, then test each quoted sentence for exactly that.
Traps
- Supports only part of the claim: In a question about evidence: a line that backs one half of the claim but not the other, or a related point rather than the claim itself.
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
The wrong answers, classified
B True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Links “the people’s crops” to farmers, but the sentence tells how early burns drew bison away from the crops and shows no worry about fire itself.
C Supports only part of the claim (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Sees caution in containing the fire “within a specific area,” but the sentence explains how patch burning keeps animals safe and never says fire threatens the land.
D Supports only part of the claim (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Takes the yearly rotation as a careful precaution, but the sentence describes the schedule and land that “regrows healthier than before,” which backs the benefit, not the worry.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This is an evidence question. Evidence is the words in a text that back up an idea. The idea here is that farmers might worry about using fire to help land. No sentence says farmers are worried. So look for a sentence that gives them a reason to fear fire.
Decide what the evidence needs
A sentence that supports this idea must show that fire can be dangerous. If fire can harm land, people have a reason to be careful with it. So test each sentence with one question: does it say fire is a threat?
Look closely at paragraph 1
Choice A quotes paragraph 1. Its first half says “one of the greatest threats to the prairie is wildfire.” That is a reason to fear fire. Its second half says controlled fires are “actually” helpful. The word “actually” pushes back against that fear. It means: you might expect fire to hurt the land, but here it helps.
Check each choice
- A is right. It names wildfire as a great threat. That gives farmers a reason to worry about fire.
- B is wrong. It tells how early burns drew bison away from crops. It shows no danger from fire.
- C is wrong. It tells how patch burning keeps the fire in one area. It describes a safety step but never names a threat.
- D is wrong. It describes burning a new section each year. It shows a benefit: land that “regrows healthier than before.”
Watch out: C hints that fire must be contained, or kept in, so it sounds careful. But it describes the solution, not the danger.
Choose the answer
Only one sentence names fire as a danger. So the answer is A, the sentence from paragraph 1: “While one of the greatest threats to the prairie is wildfire, the use of controlled fires is actually an effective way to protect this idyllic landscape.” Idyllic means peaceful and lovely.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong answer, because keeping fire “within a specific area” suggests caution. But C only explains how patch burning works. It never says fire can harm the prairie. A does, by calling wildfire one of the greatest threats.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Using Fire to Keep a Prairie Healthy” as printed (page 41)

Question 23 of 120
2026 Practice Test B English, question 33Uses the passage above: “Using Fire to Keep a Prairie Healthy”.
Question
Read this sentence from paragraph 6.
Burning land to make it healthy may seem counterintuitive, but strategic controlled fires have helped the prairie sustain life for hundreds of years and, with careful management, will continue to do so.
The words “counterintuitive” and “strategic” in the sentence convey the idea that
- Athe safest methods are sometimes the least effective at solving complex challenges.
- Bthorough investigation of uncommon methodologies can lead to beneficial results.
- Cdetailed planning can ensure that a potentially destructive action has a positive impact.
- Dplans that entail a certain amount of risk almost always result in success.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks which idea the words “counterintuitive” and “strategic” convey in the last sentence in paragraph 6 in the passage.
A. Incorrect. Though the author states in paragraph 6 that conservationists have used safe and “strategic” methods, those methods have not been ineffective, since “the patch-burn system is so successful that the conservationists at the preserve provide training to prairie farmers about conducting controlled burns on their own land” (paragraph 6). Therefore, the words “counterintuitive” and “strategic” in the last sentence of paragraph 6 do not convey the idea that the safest methods are sometimes the least effective at solving complex challenges.
B. Incorrect. Although the author points out in paragraph 6 that researchers’ studies have shown “that the patch-burn approach has restored biodiversity to the area by promoting the growth of species that were at risk of being crowded out,” the author does not suggest that the methodologies conservationists used to conduct the patch burns are uncommon, since the methods were used by “the American Indian people [who] began to deliberately burn areas of land for bison to graze on” (paragraph 2). Therefore, the words “counterintuitive” and “strategic” in the last sentence of paragraph 6 do not convey the idea that thorough investigation of uncommon methodologies can lead to beneficial results.
C. CORRECT. In paragraph 1, the author states that “one of the greatest threats to the prairie is wildfire,” so the idea of conducting controlled burns suggests risk and runs “counter,” or contrary, to people’s common expectations, or “intuition,” about the dangers of fires. Thus, the words “counterintuitive” and “strategic” in the last sentence of paragraph 6 convey the idea that detailed planning can ensure that a potentially destructive action has a positive impact.
D. Incorrect. The author states in paragraph 6 that “the patch-burn system is so successful that the conservationists at the preserve provide training to prairie farmers.” This statement supports the idea of the action being “strategic” in order to achieve success. However, the statement does not suggest that because the process is “counterintuitive,” or unexpected, it involves a certain amount of risk to achieve that success. Therefore, the words “counterintuitive” and “strategic” in the last sentence of paragraph 6 do not convey the idea that plans that entail a certain amount of risk almost always result in success.
Question analysis
This vocabulary question takes the last sentence of the prairie article, which says burning land to make it healthy may seem counterintuitive, and asks what the words “counterintuitive” and “strategic” convey together. Students need the meaning of a hard word built from a prefix, then must match the pair to a general statement, and the choices are worded abstractly.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 A typical grade 7 vocabulary question asks what one word means in context. This one pairs a hard word, “counterintuitive,” with “strategic” and asks for the idea they express together, with four abstract general statements to weigh.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly understand
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Hard words moderate
- Combines ideas minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one sentence or line
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 598 words; question and choices: about grade 11, 97 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Students first need the meaning of “counterintuitive,” then must see what it says here: that burning land to heal it seems backward because fire destroys. “Strategic” supplies the other half, careful planning. The most tempting wrong answer gets the planning right but misreads the first word as “uncommon,” and others turn the pair into a rule about risk or a warning about safe methods. The question rewards translating each word before reading the abstract choices.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about “thorough investigation of uncommon methodologies” follows the key’s pattern, planning that leads to a good result, and differs only in calling the method uncommon instead of potentially destructive. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Hard words moderate Understanding the question
“Counterintuitive,” contrary to what one would expect, is an uncommon word, and the choices add “methodologies” and “entail,” so the options are as hard to read as the sentence. (Perfetti, 2007; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Combines ideas minor Working it out
The two words point different ways, one to burning that seems harmful and one to careful planning, and the answer must join both into a single general statement. (Embretson, 1998; Daniel & Embretson, 2010)
Strategy: Break “counterintuitive” into its parts, counter and intuitive, decide what each of the two words says about burning land, then find the statement that joins both meanings without adding claims of its own.
Traps
- Half right: One half of a two-part choice is right and the other is not.
- Too broad or too strong: A choice overstates, generalizes, or uses absolute words the text does not support.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
The wrong answers, classified
A Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Reads “counterintuitive” as a hint that the safe choice fails, but the sentence praises carefully managed fire and never says safer methods are less effective.
B Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Matches “strategic” to thorough investigation, since the experts “study the land,” but takes “counterintuitive” to mean uncommon, though the passage traces burning back hundreds of years.
D Too broad or too strong (King et al., 2004)
Hears risk in “counterintuitive” and success in “strategic” but turns them into a rule that risky plans “almost always” succeed, far more than one sentence about the prairie claims.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This question asks about two words in the last sentence: “counterintuitive” and “strategic.” You need the idea the two words give together. So first figure out what each word means here.
Break down “counterintuitive”
Counter means against. Intuitive means what you would naturally expect. So counterintuitive means the opposite of what you would expect. The sentence says “Burning land to make it healthy may seem counterintuitive.” Fire usually destroys things. So burning land to help it seems backward. Paragraph 1 even calls wildfire “one of the greatest threats to the prairie.”
Figure out “strategic”
Strategic means carefully planned to reach a goal. Paragraph 5 shows that planning. The experts “study the land to find out which areas would most benefit from being burned.” Then they burn only part of the land each year. Put the two words together. Fire seems harmful, but careful planning makes it helpful.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. The sentence doesn’t say safe methods fail. It praises a method that works.
- B is wrong. It treats counterintuitive as if it meant uncommon. But burning isn’t new. Paragraph 2 says people did it “hundreds of years ago.”
- C is right. Strategic matches detailed planning. Counterintuitive matches an action that could destroy, fire, which turns out to help.
- D is wrong. “Almost always” is far too strong. The sentence is about prairie fires, not all risky plans.
Watch out: B gets strategic right, since the experts study the land. But counterintuitive doesn’t mean uncommon. It means against what you would expect.
Choose the answer
Fire seems destructive, but a careful plan makes it helpful. So the answer is C: “detailed planning can ensure that a potentially destructive action has a positive impact.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong answer, because its first part, careful study, fits strategic. But its second part calls the method uncommon, and people have burned the prairie for hundreds of years. C fits both words: careful planning, and an action that seems harmful but helps.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 24 of 120
2026 Practice Test B English, question 37Passage Letter from Brooklyn
Letter from Brooklyn
by Jacob Scheier
I can already see how this will end.
How I will grow tired of the bridge’s
steep incline, and the absent-minded tourists
wandering into the bicycle path.
The weather will turn cold.
But that all happens later.
For now it is the early edge of fall,
leaves green still while the air narrows,
is slightly crisp, almost grazing
the hair of my arm like a passing stranger,
as though the air has been forced into intimacy
by the brevity of daylight.
But when it starts darkening at 4,
this closeness, I know, will be a felt distance,
like someone drawing your attention
to their lack of intimacy.
These days I am still walking at a cathedral pace
beneath the branches bending across avenues,
brownstones like rows of lived-in chapels,
like a pop-up picture book I could have had as a child,
but didn’t. How Brooklyn makes me nostalgic
for the moment I am walking inside of.
These late afternoons filled
with a loneliness that makes me feel
distinctly myself, and an awareness
of how rare that is.
“Letter from Brooklyn” from LETTER FROM BROOKLYN: POEMS by Jacob Scheier, published by ECW Press. Copyright © 2013 by Jacob Scheier All rights reserved.
brevity: briefness
cathedral: meditative
chapels: private places of prayer or worship
nostalgic: yearning for the past
Question
Which lines support the idea that a change in the weather will lessen the speaker’s appreciation for the city?
- A“as though the air has been forced into intimacy / by the brevity of daylight.” (lines 11–12)
- B“But when it starts darkening at 4, / this closeness, I know, will be a felt distance,” (lines 13–14)
- C“like someone drawing your attention / to their lack of intimacy.” (lines 15–16)
- D“These days I am still walking . . . / beneath the branches bending across avenues,” (lines 17–18)
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks which lines from the poem support the idea that a change in the weather will lessen the speaker’s appreciation for the city.
A. Incorrect. These lines focus on the positive way the air feels to the speaker during “the early edge of fall” (line 7). They suggest that the speaker appreciates this experience currently, while being aware that the feeling might not last.
B. CORRECT. In these lines, the speaker describes the shift in the “closeness” of the air as the weather changes and “it starts darkening at 4.” The speaker clearly indicates that the positive emotions surrounding this closeness, with “leaves green still” and the air “slightly crisp” (lines 8–9), will soon be “a felt distance,” suggesting that the turn in the weather will make the city less appealing.
C. Incorrect. Although these lines compare the darkening, changing weather to a person revealing a “lack of intimacy,” that specific comparison does not focus on a diminishing appreciation for the city.
D. Incorrect. These lines describe the “cathedral pace” (line 17) at which the speaker walks, emphasizing a meditative or thoughtful experience. Such a description suggests the speaker still appreciates the city, not that the speaker’s appreciation will lessen.
Question analysis
This evidence question asks which lines from “Letter from Brooklyn” support the idea that a change in the weather will lessen the speaker's appreciation for the city. All four choices come from the middle of the poem, where the speaker describes the feel of the early-fall air through figurative comparisons, so students must read each pair of lines closely for both parts of the idea.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Choosing lines that support an idea is standard grade 7 evidence work. Here the idea is carried by figurative comparisons about the air, and the four choices sit within a few lines of one another, so separating them takes closer reading than is typical.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Figurative or literary language moderate
- Reading between the lines minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one sentence or line
- Reading level
- Passage: 217 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 6, 74 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
All four choices come from lines 11–18, and three speak of closeness, distance or intimacy, so the vocabulary of the claim is everywhere. The idea has two parts, a change in the weather and a weaker feeling for the city, and only one pair of lines holds both. The strongest pull is the second half of the same sentence, which puts the loss of intimacy most vividly but leaves the darkening behind in the lines before.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
Lines 13–14 and 15–16 are one sentence split in two: the first half names the darkening at 4 and the coming distance, the second only describes what that distance feels like. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Figurative or literary language moderate Understanding the question
The weaker feeling for the city is never stated; it comes through images, the air’s “closeness” turning into “a felt distance,” like a person pointing out their “lack of intimacy.” (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Reading between the lines minor Working it out
Students must accept “when it starts darkening at 4” as the change in the weather the stem names, since the lines speak of daylight, not of cold or rain. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Strategy: Split the idea into its two parts, a change in the weather and a weaker feeling for the city, and choose the lines that hold both on their own, without help from the lines around them.
Traps
- Supports only part of the claim: In a question about evidence: a line that backs one half of the claim but not the other, or a related point rather than the claim itself.
The wrong answers, classified
A Supports only part of the claim (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Takes “the brevity of daylight” as the coming change, but these lines say the short days force the air “into intimacy,” a closeness the speaker enjoys now.
C Supports only part of the claim (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Chooses the vivid “lack of intimacy,” which does show the feeling weakening, but these lines only finish the simile and never mention the darkening that causes it.
D Supports only part of the claim (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Hears a coming change in “still walking,” but the lines show the speaker enjoying a slow walk under the branches now and say nothing of the weather turning.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This is an evidence question. The idea has two parts. First, the weather will change. Second, the speaker will enjoy the city less. You need the lines that hold both parts by themselves.
Read the lines around the choices
Lines 9–12 describe the early-fall air now. It is “almost grazing / the hair of my arm like a passing stranger.” Grazing here means lightly touching. The speaker says the air feels close, like “intimacy.” Intimacy means a warm, close feeling between people. Lines 13–16 then look ahead to shorter days.
Find both parts in lines 13–14
Lines 13–14 say: “But when it starts darkening at 4, / this closeness, I know, will be a felt distance”. Darkening at 4 means the sun setting at 4 o’clock, as days get shorter. That is the change in the weather. “This closeness” is the warm feeling the speaker has now. It will turn into distance. So the good feeling will fade.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. Lines 11–12 describe the closeness the speaker enjoys now. Nothing has faded yet.
- B is right. It names the change, the early dark, and the loss, closeness turning into “a felt distance.”
- C is wrong. Lines 15–16 finish the comparison: the distance feels like a person pointing out their “lack of intimacy.” But these lines never mention the weather.
- D is wrong. Lines 17–18 show the speaker enjoying a slow walk now. They say nothing about the weather turning.
Watch out: C is tempting because “lack of intimacy” sounds like a lost feeling. But the change in weather is back in lines 13–14.
Choose the answer
Only one pair of lines holds both the change and the fading feeling. So the answer is B, lines 13–14, which begin “But when it starts darkening at 4”.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong answer, because it shows the good feeling slipping away. But lines 15–16 only describe what that distance feels like. They don’t say what causes it. Lines 13–14 give both parts: the early dark and the fading closeness.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Letter from Brooklyn” as printed (page 50)

Question 25 of 120
2026 Practice Test B English, question 41Uses the passage above: “Letter from Brooklyn”.
Question
Read these lines from the poem.
I can already see how this will end. (line 1)
How Brooklyn makes me nostalgic
for the moment I am walking inside of. (lines 21–22)
The lines develop a central idea of the poem by
- Asuggesting the speaker’s desire to find a way to break free from the repetitive pattern of daily life.
- Brevealing the speaker’s feelings of disappointment over the predictable change in season.
- Cemphasizing the speaker’s awareness of the future significance of the present moment in the setting.
- Dshowing the speaker’s anticipation of specific emotions caused by an intimate knowledge of the setting.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks how line 1 and lines 21–22 develop a central idea of the poem.
A. Incorrect. Although these lines suggest that life is governed by repetitive patterns, such as the change of seasons, they do not suggest that the speaker wishes to break free from these natural cycles of change, and a desire for freedom is not a central idea of the poem.
B. Incorrect. Although the speaker acknowledges that colder weather will inevitably bring disappointment, the speaker does not suggest in these lines that the predictability of changing weather is itself disappointing. Rather, the speaker recognizes the value of enjoying the present moment.
C. CORRECT. These lines connect the present warmer weather with the future colder weather and develop the central idea that the present “moment I am walking inside of” must be embraced because the speaker will be “nostalgic” for it in the future.
D. Incorrect. In these lines, the speaker is aware that specific emotions will occur in the future, during cold weather, but this awareness is only part of the more complex central idea of the poem, which is that current emotions and feelings must be recognized, experienced, and appreciated.
Question analysis
This central-idea question pairs the first line of “Letter from Brooklyn” with lines 21–22, where Brooklyn makes the speaker nostalgic “for the moment I am walking inside of,” and asks how they develop a central idea of the poem. Students must link excerpts from opposite ends of the poem, untangle a paradoxical image and choose among four abstract statements.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students analyze how lines develop a central idea. Here two excerpts twenty lines apart must be read together, one of them built on a paradox, and the four choices are long and abstract, well beyond typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Among the hardest on the SHSAT: a non-obvious approach, heavy reading, or a well-hidden trap.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Figurative or literary language major
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence in several places moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: 217 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 7, 99 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
This is among the hardest questions in the set because the two excerpts must be joined through a paradox and then matched to four long, abstract statements. Line 1 foresees an ending; lines 21–22 miss a moment while it is still happening, so both look at now from the future. Students who see only the foresight pick the choice about anticipated emotions, while those who hear gloom in “how this will end” settle on disappointment or a wish to escape.
Figurative or literary language major Understanding the question
Lines 21–22 are a paradox: “nostalgic,” glossed as yearning for the past, is aimed at “the moment I am walking inside of,” so the speaker already feels the present as a future memory. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about anticipating “specific emotions” shares the key’s link between future and present; it differs by tracing those feelings to knowing the setting well, which neither excerpt says. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
The excerpts are the poem’s first line and lines 21–22, twenty lines apart, and what joins them, the speaker looking ahead at the present, shows only when they are read side by side. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: Paraphrase each excerpt on its own, using the glossary's meaning of “nostalgic,” then decide what the first line and the last two share and match that to a choice.
Traps
- Half right: One half of a two-part choice is right and the other is not.
- Wrong tone or attitude: Misjudges the tone, attitude or point of view, such as reading admiration as criticism, or taking a character's or subject's feelings for the author's.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
The wrong answers, classified
A Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Links “how this will end” and growing tired of the bridge to a dull routine and imagines a wish to escape it, which the poem never expresses.
B Wrong tone or attitude (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Hears resignation in “I can already see how this will end” and reads it as disappointment with the seasons, missing that the speaker treasures the present walk.
D Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Rightly sees the speaker foreseeing feelings in line 1, but traces them to an “intimate knowledge of the setting,” while lines 21–22 long for the present moment itself.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This question gives two pieces of the poem: line 1 and lines 21–22. You need the central idea they build together. A central idea is the main point the poem keeps working toward. Read each piece alone first, then join them.
Read line 1
Line 1 says “I can already see how this will end.” The speaker looks ahead. Lines 2–5 then list what will come: growing tired of the bridge, and the cold. So the speaker already pictures the future while living in the present.
Read lines 21–22
The lines say “How Brooklyn makes me nostalgic / for the moment I am walking inside of.” The glossary says nostalgic means “yearning for the past.” Yearning means longing. But the speaker longs for now, a moment still happening. That is a paradox, an idea that seems impossible but makes sense. The speaker knows this walk will be a precious memory.
Join the two pieces
Both pieces look at the present from the future. In line 1, the speaker sees the end coming. In lines 21–22, the speaker already misses the walk. So the speaker knows this present moment will matter later. Significance means importance.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. The speaker never wants to break free from daily routine.
- B is wrong. Line 1 can sound gloomy. But the speaker isn’t upset with the seasons. The speaker treasures the walk.
- C is right. The speaker sees that this moment in Brooklyn will be precious later.
- D is wrong. The speaker does foresee feelings. But neither piece says they come from knowing the place well.
Watch out: D gets the looking-ahead part of line 1 right. But lines 21–22 long for the moment itself, not for feelings caused by knowing the city.
Choose the answer
So the answer is C: “emphasizing the speaker’s awareness of the future significance of the present moment in the setting.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D is the closest wrong answer, because line 1 does show the speaker foreseeing feelings. But D says they come from an “intimate knowledge of the setting.” Neither piece says that. Lines 21–22 miss the moment while it is still happening. C captures that: the present will matter in the future.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 26 of 120
2026 Practice Test B English, question 44Passage The End of an Era
The End of an Era
(1) In 2004, the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) landed a rover, or robotic vehicle, named Opportunity on the surface of Mars. (2) The rover’s mission was to search for evidence of water and life on the planet. (3) The rover was designed to gather data on Mars for about 90 days, but Opportunity’s assignment did not come to an end until nearly 15 years later in 2019.
(4) During the rover’s mission, a high-resolution camera on the rover’s robotic arm took magnified photographs of the surface of Mars. (5) The photographs revealed small round rocks scattered across the surface of the planet. (6) The scientists nicknamed these rocks “blueberries” based on the rocks’ resemblance to the fruit. (7) These rocks were important because their spherical shape suggested that liquid water may have flowed over them for a substantial amount of time.
(8) Opportunity continued to provide valuable data about craters and other surface features. (9) Throughout the mission, the rover traveled a total of 28.06 miles across Mars’ surface. (10) When Opportunity had traveled nearly the length of a marathon, scientists celebrated the accomplishment by naming the valley that the rover was in Marathon Valley. (11) However, in 2018, a dust storm spread all over the planet, putting the rover’s progress on hold.
(12) Prior to this planet-wide dust storm, minor dust storms had periodically deposited a layer of dust onto the solar panels of the rover. (13) These prevented it from charging its batteries. (14) Scientists then had to rely on the passing winds and dust devils to clean off the solar panels. (15) After the massive 2018 dust storm subsided, scientists expected to be able to reestablish communication with Opportunity. (16) They made repeated attempts but to no avail. (17) In 2019, NASA finally declared Opportunity’s mission complete.
(18) Opportunity was an important asset in scientists’ study of Mars; it returned valuable data about our neighbor planet and survived powerful dust storms. (19) NASA described the mission of Opportunity as “one of the most successful and enduring feats of interplanetary exploration.” (20) Even though this rover’s journey ended, other rovers still roam the surface of Mars.
Question
Which word should be added to the beginning of sentence 8 to provide a better transition to the third paragraph (sentences 8–11)?
Move the correct answer to the box.
(8) ____ Opportunity continued to provide valuable data about craters and other surface features.
On the test you drag one of the tiles into the box; here, choose it.
- AOverall,
- BFurthermore,
- CMeanwhile,
- DConsequently,
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks for the word that should be added to the beginning of sentence 8 to provide a better transition to the third paragraph (sentences 8–11).
“Overall,” is incorrect and should not be added. While sentence 8 is a more general statement than sentence 7, the word “Overall” would imply that all of the third paragraph features general information about the Opportunity rover. Instead, paragraphs 2 and 3 both describe specific accomplishments of the Opportunity rover (the discovery of possible water on Mars and the distance the rover traveled), so these paragraphs require a word between them that does not transition from the specific to the general.
“Furthermore,” is incorrect and should not be added. The word “Furthermore” would suggest that the author is making an argument in paragraph 2 that is further developed by the statement in sentence 8 and the rest of paragraph 3. Because this is not the case, the word “Furthermore” is not a suitable transition from one paragraph to the next.
“Meanwhile,” is correct and should be added. The word “Meanwhile” is an appropriate transition to add to the beginning of sentence 8, since the actions of the Opportunity rover in paragraph 2 (taking photographs) and in paragraph 3 (traveling long distances) happened at the same time and both served critical functions to the overall mission.
“Consequently,” is incorrect and should not be added. The word “Consequently” would create a cause-and-effect relationship that does not exist between the paragraphs. The passage gives no indication that the rover’s actions in the third paragraph (traveling a far distance) resulted from the actions in the second paragraph (taking photographs).
Question analysis
In this transition question, sentence 8 opens the third paragraph of the Opportunity rover passage with a blank, and on the test students move one of four word tiles into the box. The paragraph before ends with the “blueberries,” small round rocks that hinted at water, so students must decide how the rover's further work relates to that discovery.
- NYS standards
- 7W2d transitions in informative writing
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Choosing a transition is regular grade 7 writing work, but this one links two paragraphs, and two of the four words fit the sentence's grammar and sound natural, so the choice turns on exactly how the paragraphs relate.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- How sentences fit together moderate
- Reading between the lines minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 337 words; question and choices: about grade 9, 43 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Two tiles sound natural in the blank, and the one most students reach for first is an all-purpose adding word. The key goes a step further: it marks the rover’s work in paragraph 3 as happening alongside the photographs of paragraph 2, a relationship the word “continued” supports. Students who test each tile against how the paragraphs relate, rather than against the sound of the sentence, also rule out a summing-up word and a cause word.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
“Furthermore” and “Meanwhile” both let paragraph 3 add to paragraph 2; only “Meanwhile” also says the rover’s further work went on during the same mission, as “continued” implies. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
How sentences fit together moderate Working it out
The tile must link the “blueberries” of paragraph 2 to the craters and miles of paragraph 3, so students must decide how two paragraphs relate, not just two sentences. (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Reading between the lines minor Working it out
The timing is never stated; it comes from “During the rover’s mission” in sentence 4 and “continued” in sentence 8, which place both kinds of work in the same years. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Strategy: State in your own words how what the rover did in paragraph 2 relates to what it did in paragraph 3, then test the relationship each tile signals against that.
Traps
- Wrong transition: A connecting word or phrase that signals the wrong relationship, such as contrast where the idea continues.
The wrong answers, classified
A Wrong transition (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Treats sentence 8 as a summing up because it is broader than sentence 7, though paragraph 3 goes on to give new specifics such as the 28.06 miles.
B Wrong transition (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Adds paragraph 3 as one more achievement, which sounds natural, but “Furthermore” signals a point being built up, not two kinds of work carried on during one mission.
D Wrong transition (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Hears “continued” as a result of the blueberry discovery and adds a cause-and-effect link, though nothing says the rover’s later work followed from its photographs.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
On the test, you move one word tile into the box at the start of sentence 8. The word is a transition, a word that shows how two ideas connect. Some transitions add an idea, some show a result, some sum up, and some show time. You need the one that links paragraph 2 to paragraph 3.
Compare the two paragraphs
Paragraph 2 begins “During the rover’s mission.” It tells how the camera found the round rocks called “blueberries.” Paragraph 3 begins “Opportunity continued to provide valuable data about craters and other surface features.” Craters are bowl-shaped holes in the ground. So paragraph 3 tells about other work the rover kept doing in those same years.
Test each transition
- Overall sums things up. But paragraph 3 gives new facts, like the 28.06 miles.
- Furthermore adds one more reason to an argument, as in Dogs are loyal. Furthermore, they are fun. But paragraph 2 isn’t arguing a point. It tells what the rover did.
- Meanwhile means during that same time. It links things that go on together.
- Consequently means as a result. But the photos didn’t cause the rover’s later work.
See why “Meanwhile” fits
While the camera was finding blueberries, the rover was also studying craters and driving many miles. The word “continued” in sentence 8 shows that the work kept going. “Meanwhile” tells the reader these jobs happened during the same mission.
Watch out: “Furthermore” sounds natural in the blank, so many students choose B. But it only says here is one more point. It doesn’t show two kinds of work going on at the same time.
Choose the answer
With the tile in place, sentence 8 reads: Meanwhile, Opportunity continued to provide valuable data about craters and other surface features. So the answer is C: move the tile “Meanwhile,” into the box.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B, “Furthermore,” is the closest wrong answer, because it also adds information. But it treats paragraph 2 as one point in an argument. The passage just tells what the rover did. “Meanwhile” links the two paragraphs in time, and it matches the word “continued.”
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “The End of an Era” as printed (page 60)

Question 27 of 120
2026 Practice Test B English, question 46Uses the passage above: “The End of an Era”.
Question
Read this sentence.
One of Opportunity’s major contributions was finding possible evidence of the presence of water on Mars.
Where should the sentence be added to the passage?
- Abetween sentences 2 and 3
- Bat the beginning of the second paragraph (before sentence 4)
- Cat the end of the second paragraph (after sentence 7)
- Dbetween sentences 8 and 9
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks where the sentence should be added to the passage.
A. Incorrect. While sentence 2 refers to Opportunity’s mission to search for evidence of water, sentence 3 mentions the rover lasting much longer than anticipated. Placing the sentence between these two ideas, rather than at the start of the second paragraph, where it introduces the topic of the paragraph, would create a disjointed and confusing experience for the reader.
B. CORRECT. The sentence introduces the idea of finding possible evidence of water on Mars, which is the main topic of the second paragraph.
C. Incorrect. The sentence sets up the main idea of paragraph 2, which is the possibility of water on Mars. As a concluding sentence, it would be repetitive and confusing.
D. Incorrect. The sentence introduces the possibility of water on Mars, while sentences 8 and 9 discuss other surface features and the distance traveled by the rover. Adding the sentence here would create a disorganized paragraph.
Question analysis
This organization question gives a new sentence about Opportunity's possible discovery of evidence of water on Mars and asks where it should be added to the rover passage. Students must follow the order of ideas across the first three paragraphs, because the sentence echoes ideas that appear in several places and could seem to fit more than one of them.
- NYS standards
- 7W2a introducing and organizing a topic
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Deciding where a sentence belongs is typical grade 7 revision work. The four positions span three paragraphs of a plain passage, and the sentence's wording connects to more than one of them, so the order of ideas must be checked.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- How sentences fit together moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 337 words; question and choices: about grade 7, 52 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The new sentence reads well in more than one place, because water comes up in sentence 2, in sentence 7 and near the “valuable data” of sentence 8. Its wording settles the matter: “One of Opportunity’s major contributions” announces a topic, so it belongs ahead of the evidence. The strongest pull places it as a closing line after sentence 7, where it restates the point the blueberries have just made.
How sentences fit together moderate Working it out
The new sentence names a contribution in general terms, so it belongs before sentence 4, where the camera and the “blueberries” supply the details, not after them. (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The two positions in paragraph 2, before sentence 4 and after sentence 7, both keep the sentence beside the water evidence; they differ only in whether it introduces the details or sums them up. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Find what the new sentence is about and where the passage discusses that, then read the sentence in each offered position and check whether it introduces, interrupts or repeats the ideas around it.
Traps
- Sentence in the wrong place: Puts a sentence where it breaks the order of ideas or separates it from what it refers to.
- Says it twice: Repeats an idea that the sentence or passage already states.
The wrong answers, classified
A Sentence in the wrong place (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Matches the sentence to sentence 2’s search for water, but there it announces the finding before the photographs are described and cuts into the account of the mission’s length.
C Says it twice (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Uses it as a wrap-up after the blueberries, a common paragraph shape, but there it only repeats sentence 7’s point about water instead of introducing the paragraph’s topic.
D Sentence in the wrong place (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Links “major contributions” to the “valuable data” of sentence 8, though paragraph 3 covers craters, distance traveled and the dust storm, not water.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This question asks where a new sentence belongs. First find what the sentence is about. Then find where the passage talks about that. Last, decide whether the sentence should start that part, interrupt it or end it.
Read the new sentence
It says that one of Opportunity’s major contributions was “finding possible evidence of the presence of water on Mars.” It names a big idea in general terms. A sentence like that is a topic sentence. A topic sentence tells what a paragraph will be about. It usually comes first. For example, Dogs help people in many ways. comes before the details about guiding, herding and comforting.
Find where water comes up
Paragraph 2 (sentences 4–7) gives the details. The camera took close-up photos. They showed small round rocks, nicknamed “blueberries.” Sentence 7 says the rocks’ round shape “suggested that liquid water may have flowed over them.” So the new sentence should come right before these details, at the start of paragraph 2.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. Between sentences 2 and 3, it would announce the finding before the photos are described. It would also break up the facts about the mission’s length.
- B is right. Before sentence 4, it introduces the paragraph about the round rocks and water.
- C is wrong. After sentence 7, it would only repeat the point sentence 7 just made.
- D is wrong. Paragraph 3 is about craters, miles and the dust storm, not water.
Watch out: C is tempting because some paragraphs end with a summary. But sentence 7 already makes the point about water.
Choose the answer
So the answer is B: “at the beginning of the second paragraph (before sentence 4).”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong answer, because it keeps the sentence in the paragraph about water. But the sentence names a topic, so it works best before the details. After sentence 7, it would repeat what the blueberries just showed. Before sentence 4, it tells readers what is coming.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 28 of 120
2026 Practice Test B Math, question 3Question
At a diner, 18 dozen buns were used yesterday for 150 lunch customers. Today, there were 250 lunch customers. Assuming that the bun usage rate is the same for both days, which proportions can be used to determine how many dozen buns are needed for 250 lunch customers?
Select the three correct answers.
Choose every answer that is correct, then check. The DOE has not published how answers with several parts are scored; this site counts one right only when every part is right.
- A
- B
- C
- D
- E
Show the answer
Correct answer: A, C, and D
The three correct answers are:
Set up a proportion to compare the number of buns per customer. These are all equivalent:
To check for equivalency, solve each proportion for x.
Each of the three correct proportions simplifies to .
Then solve for x to determine how many dozen buns are needed for 250 lunch customers:
Question analysis
A diner used 18 dozen buns for 150 lunch customers yesterday, and students select the three proportions, out of five, that can find how many dozen buns 250 customers need at the same rate. It tests setting up proportions and recognizing equivalent ones. All five equations use the same numbers, so each has to be checked for which quantities it pairs.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Setting up a proportion from a rate is everyday grade 7 work. Here nothing is solved: five setups built from the same numbers must each be judged, some arranged in unfamiliar ways, and all three usable ones found.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Every choice must be checked moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- An answer in an unexpected form minor
- Much to keep track of minor
- Solution
- 3 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 6, 54 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Nothing needs solving here; the question is which pairings keep the usage rate fixed. Students who check only for buns over customers on both sides find exactly three such setups, two of them wrong, and pass over the two right ones written another way. The wrong pair gives 10.8 dozen, fewer buns for more customers, which a quick sense check would catch, and cross-multiplying every setup settles all five.
Every choice must be checked moderate Choosing the answer
All five setups are built from 18, 150, 250 and x, so none can be dismissed on sight; each has to be cross-multiplied and compared with 150x = 18 × 250. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The first two setups differ only in where 150 and 250 sit, 18/150 = x/250 against 18/250 = x/150, and both show buns over customers on each side, so a units check passes both. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
An answer in an unexpected form minor Choosing the answer
One right setup puts customers over dozens of buns, and another sets today’s x over yesterday’s 18 equal to 250 customers over 150, forms that look wrong to students who learned only rate equals rate. (Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
Much to keep track of minor Working it out
Three of the five must be picked and all three must be right to score, so the verdict on each setup has to be kept until the last one is tested. (Sweller, 1988; Carpenter, Just & Shell, 1990)
Strategy: Write one proportion you trust by matching both units and days, cross-multiply it, then cross-multiply each choice and keep only those that give the same equation.
Traps
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
- Answer in another form: The right answer is written differently from the way you worked it out.
The wrong answers, classified
B Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Checks only that both fractions show dozens of buns over customers, missing that 18 sits over today’s 250 customers; cross-multiplying gives 250x = 2,700, so x = 10.8.
D Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Left out by students who expect each fraction to compare buns with customers, not seeing that today over yesterday for buns and for customers also gives 150x = 4,500.
E Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Accepts x over 150 because it shows buns over customers like the trusted setup, but today’s buns sit over yesterday’s customers, which yields only 10.8 dozen for more people.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- A rate
- The rate is how many dozen buns are used for each customer. Yesterday it was 18 dozen over 150 customers. Today it is x dozen over 250 customers. The question says the rate is the same both days, so those two fractions are equal.
- Cross-multiplying a proportion
- A proportion says two fractions are equal. a and c are the tops, and b and d are the bottoms. Multiply each top by the other bottom, and the two products are equal. This turns any proportion into a plain equation, so you can compare setups that look different.
Sort out the question
Yesterday the diner used 18 dozen buns for 150 customers. Today it has 250 customers. Let x be the number of dozen buns needed today. The bun usage rate is the same both days.
A proportion is two equal fractions. You must pick the three proportions that give the right value of x.
Write one proportion you trust
Put each day’s buns over that same day’s customers. The rates are equal, so the fractions are equal:
This is choice A. Cross-multiply it:
Any choice that leads to 150x = 4,500 is a right one.
Solve for x
Divide both sides by 150 to get x by itself:
So the diner needs 30 dozen buns today. A wrong setup gives a different number.
Test choices C and D
Cross-multiply each one.
- C: gives . That is the same equation, so C works. It is choice A with both fractions flipped.
- D: gives . The same equation again, so D works too.
D compares today with yesterday. Today’s buns over yesterday’s buns equals today’s customers over yesterday’s customers.
Watch out: D looks odd because it puts buns over buns. Do not skip it. It still keeps the rate the same.
Test choices B and E
- B: gives , so 250x = 2,700.
- E: gives , the same 250x = 2,700.
Both give . That is fewer buns for more customers, which makes no sense.
Watch out: B and E show buns over customers, so they look right. But each one mixes up the days. B puts yesterday’s 18 dozen over today’s 250 customers. E puts today’s buns over yesterday’s 150 customers.
Name the three answers
Choices A, C and D all give 150x = 4,500, so x = 30. On the test, you check the box next to each one. So the answers are A, C and D.
Check your answer
Find the buns a second way. Today has times as many customers as yesterday. So it needs 5/3 times as many buns: dozen. That matches the 30 from choices A, C and D.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 29 of 120
2026 Practice Test B Math, question 16Question
Which tables represent a proportional relationship between the number of books purchased and the total cost?
Select the two correct answers.
Choose every answer that is correct, then check. The DOE has not published how answers with several parts are scored; this site counts one right only when every part is right.
- A
Number of Books Purchased 10 15 20 25 Total Cost ($) 40 60 80 100 - B
Number of Books Purchased 10 15 20 25 Total Cost ($) 70 110 150 250 - C
Number of Books Purchased 10 15 20 25 Total Cost ($) 80 120 160 200 - D
Number of Books Purchased 10 15 20 25 Total Cost ($) 90 130 170 210 - E
Number of Books Purchased 10 15 20 25 Total Cost ($) 100 100 100 100
Show the answer
Correct answer: A and C
The two tables that represent a proportional relationship are tables A and C.
In table A, the total costs divided by the numbers of books for each set of quantities are:
These ratios are equivalent; therefore, these quantities are in a proportional relationship.
In table C, the total costs divided by the numbers of books for each set of quantities are:
These ratios are equivalent; therefore, these quantities are in a proportional relationship.
Question analysis
Five tables list the total cost of buying 10, 15, 20 and 25 books, and students select the two tables that show a proportional relationship between books and cost. It tests recognizing proportional relationships from a constant unit rate. A steady rise in cost is not enough on its own, so each pair of values has to be checked.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Deciding from a table whether two quantities are proportional is a core grade 7 skill, and the divisions here are easy. The demand lies in checking every column of five tables rather than judging by how the costs change.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Every choice must be checked minor
- Something you must already know minor
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 5, 51 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The divisions are easy, so the question tests what proportional means. Three tables grow by the same amount for every 5 books, and the one with a $10 head start looks just as regular as the right one it copies; only its cost per book, drifting from $9 down to $8.40, gives it away. The flat $100 table and the one that jumps to $250 catch fewer students, and dividing the first and last column of each table is a quick, reliable check.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The table running $90, $130, $170, $210 is the $80-to-$200 table with $10 added to every cost; both climb $40 for each 5 books, and only the cost per book separates them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Every choice must be checked minor Choosing the answer
Five tables of four columns each have to be tested by dividing cost by books, and both right tables must be picked to score, so no table can be judged from one column. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Something you must already know minor Working it out
Students must know that proportional means the same cost per book in every column, a line through zero, not merely a cost that grows by the same amount each time. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Strategy: Divide the total cost by the number of books in every column of each table; a table is proportional only when that cost per book stays the same all the way across.
Traps
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
The wrong answers, classified
B Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Sees the cost climb $40 for each 5 books across the first three columns and stops checking, though the cost per book goes $7, about $7.33, $7.50, then $10.
D Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Takes the steady rise of $40 for every 5 books as proportional, but 90 ÷ 10 = 9 while 210 ÷ 25 = 8.4, so the cost per book is not constant.
E Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Mistakes a cost that never changes for a constant ratio, though $100 for 10 books is $10 a book and $100 for 25 books is $4 a book.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Cost per book
- This is the unit rate, the price of one book. Divide the total cost in dollars by the number of books bought. If every book has the same price, this number comes out the same in every column.
- A proportional relationship
- x is the number of books, and y is the total cost in dollars. k is the cost per book, a number that never changes. In a proportional relationship, y is always k times x. So 0 books cost $0, and twice as many books cost twice as much.
Sort out the question
Each table shows the total cost of 10, 15, 20 and 25 books. Proportional means the cost per book is the same in every column. In other words, each book has one fixed price. You must pick the two tables where that is true.
Test the first table
Divide each total cost by its number of books. For table A:
Every column gives $4 per book. So table A is proportional.
Test the other four tables
Do the same division for every table. The numbers are dollars per book:
Table 10 books 15 books 20 books 25 books Same? A 4 4 4 4 Yes B 7 about 7.33 7.50 10 No C 8 8 8 8 Yes D 9 about 8.67 8.50 8.40 No E 10 about 6.67 5 4 No Only tables A and C keep the same price all the way across.
Watch for steady growth
Watch out: table D climbs $40 for every 5 more books, just like table C. That steady climb looks proportional, but it is not enough. D starts $10 higher than C, so its price per book slides from $9 down to $8.40.
Watch out: table E never changes. But $100 for 10 books is $10 each, and $100 for 25 books is $4 each. A total that stays the same is not a price that stays the same.
Name the two answers
Table A charges $4 per book and table C charges $8 per book, in every column. On the test, you check the box next to each of those tables. So the answers are A and C.
Check your answer
In a proportional table, twice the books cost twice as much. In table A, 10 books cost $40 and 20 books cost $80, which is double. In table C, $80 doubles to $160. In table D, $90 would have to double to $180, but the table shows $170. So D fails.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 30 of 120
2026 Practice Test B Math, question 24Question
A chemical decays in such a way that the amount left at the end of each week is 20% less than the amount at the beginning of that same week. What percentage of the original amount is left after two weeks?
- A40%
- B60%
- C64%
- D80%
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
Let x be the original amount of the chemical. It loses 20% after each week, which means 80% of the chemical remains at the end of each week. End of first week:
At the end of the second week, 80% of the amount left at the end of the first week remains.
End of second week: or 64%
Question analysis
A chemical loses 20% of the amount present at the start of each week, and students find what percentage of the original amount is left after two weeks. It tests applying a percent decrease more than once. The question turns on which amount each week's loss is measured against.
- NYS standards
- 7.RP.3 multistep ratio and percent problems
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 A typical grade 7 percent task applies one increase or decrease to one amount. This one applies a weekly decrease twice in a row, an early form of exponential decay that goes beyond typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer major
- Turning words into math moderate
- Variables instead of numbers minor
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 8, 40 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Two equal decreases in a row feel like one decrease of twice the size, and that is the trap: 20% and 20% suggest 40% gone. The stem states the rule, each loss measured from that week’s start, in one quick phrase. Working week by week from 100 shows the second loss is 16, not 20, which separates the answer from the choice four points away, while stopping after one week or reporting the loss costs the point more simply.
A very close wrong answer major Choosing the answer
The choices 60% and 64% sit four percentage points apart, so a rough estimate cannot choose between them; only seeing that the second 20% is taken from 80, not 100, does. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Turning words into math moderate Understanding the question
The phrase “the amount at the beginning of that same week” sets each week’s base, so the second week’s 20% is measured from what was left after the first week. (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; Koedinger & Nathan, 2004)
Variables instead of numbers minor Understanding the question
No starting amount is given, so students must pick one, such as 100 grams, or work with a percent of a percent, 0.8 × 0.8. (Koedinger & Nathan, 2004; Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
Strategy: Use a starting amount of 100 so that percents become units, find what remains after the first week, then apply the same 20% loss to that remainder.
Traps
- Percent of the wrong amount: Finding the whole from a part, or a percent change measured from the wrong starting amount.
- Stops one step early: A choice is a number from partway through the solution.
- Answers a different question: A choice is right for another quantity: the other unknown, the rest instead of the part, the part instead of the whole.
The wrong answers, classified
A Answers a different question (King et al., 2004; Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Adds the weekly losses, 20% + 20% = 40%, and gives that figure, which describes the amount lost rather than the percentage still left.
B Percent of the wrong amount (Parker & Leinhardt, 1995)
Subtracts 20% of the original amount twice, 100 − 20 − 20 = 60, though the second week’s 20% comes from the 80% left, not the starting amount.
D Stops one step early (King et al., 2004; Gierl et al., 2017)
Finds that 80% remains after the first week and stops, never taking the second week’s 20% from that remainder.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Percent of an amount
- p is the percent, and amount is the whole you take the percent of. Percent means out of 100, so 20% is 20/100. Multiply to find the part. Be sure the amount is the right whole. Here, each week uses the amount at the start of that week.
- Percent left after a loss
- The whole amount is 100%. If 20% goes away, the rest stays. So 80% of each week’s starting amount is left at the end of that week. Keeping 80% is the same as multiplying by 0.8.
Sort out the question
Each week the chemical loses 20% of what it has. The key words are “the amount at the beginning of that same week.” So each week’s 20% comes from that week’s starting amount. No amount is given. You need the percent of the original amount that is left after two weeks.
Pick an easy starting amount
Pretend the chemical starts at 100 grams. With 100, the number of grams left is the same as the percent left. Any starting amount gives the same percent, so choose the easiest one.
Work out the first week
Use the percent formula. The first week starts with 100 grams:
The chemical loses 20 grams, so grams are left. That is 80% after one week.
Watch out: 80% is only the first week. Stopping here gives choice D.
Work out the second week
The second week starts with 80 grams, not 100. So take 20% of 80:
This time the chemical loses only 16 grams, so grams are left.
Watch out: taking away 20 grams again uses the original amount. That gives 60%, choice B. Choice A, 40%, adds the two losses. But the question asks what is left, and only 36% was lost.
Read the answer as a percent
Week Start (grams) Loss (grams) Left (grams) 1 100 20 80 2 80 16 64 Another way: each week keeps 80%, or 0.8, of its start. Two weeks gives , which is 64%.
64 grams out of the original 100 grams is 64%. So the answer is C, 64%.
Check your answer
Think about the size of the second loss. The second week starts with less, so it loses less than 20 grams. That means more than 60% is left. It does lose something, so less than 80% is left. Of the four choices, only 64% is between 60% and 80%.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 31 of 120
2026 Practice Test C English, question 20Passage Bird Talk
Bird Talk
by Carl Sandburg
And now when the branches were beginning to be heavy,
It was the time when they once had said, “This is the
beginning of summer.”
The shrilling of the frogs was not so shrill as in the
first weeks after the broken winter;
The birds took their hops and zigzags a little more
anxious; a home is a home; worms are worms.
The yellow spreads of the dandelions and buttercups
reached across the green pastures.
Tee whee and tee whee came on the breezes, and the grackles
chuzzled their syllables.
And it was the leaves with a strong soft wind over them
that talked most of all and said more than any others
though speaking the fewest words.
It was the green leaves trickling out the gaunt nowhere
of winter, out on the gray hungry branches—
It was the leaves on the branches, beginning to be heavy,
who said as they said one time before, “This is the be-
ginning of summer.”
We shall never blame the birds who come
where the river and the road make the Grand Crossing
and talk there, sitting in circles talking bird talk.
If they ask in their circles as to who is here
and as to who is not here and who used to be here,
Or if instead of counting up last year as against
this year, they count up this year as against next
year, and have their bird chatter about who is here
this year who won’t be here next year,
We shall never blame the birds.
If I have put your face among leaf faces, child,
Or if I have put your voice among bird voices,
Blame me no more than the bluejays.
“Bird Talk” by Carl Sandburg—Public domain.
Question
Read lines 6–7 from the poem.
The birds took their hops and zigzags a little more
anxious; a home is a home; worms are worms.
What idea from the second stanza do the lines help develop?
- AThe birds are eager for the return of warmer months.
- BThe birds are most likely to thrive during the spring.
- CThe birds naturally adjust to the seasonal changes.
- DThe birds instinctively prepare for the future.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks how lines 6–7 from the poem develop an idea from the second stanza.
A. Incorrect. In lines 2–3, the tree branches exclaim that “ ‘This is the / beginning of summer,’ ” and the birds respond by taking “their hops and zigzags a little more / anxious” (lines 6–7); however, the birds’ eager reaction to the return of warmer weather is not referenced in the second stanza of the poem, which is more about the nature of birds generally than the changing of the seasons.
B. Incorrect. Birds are more likely to thrive in warmer weather as evidenced by some birds’ migration to a warmer climate during winter, and the creatures in the first stanza are responding to the “ ‘beginning of summer’ ” (line 3) in their own way, such as the birds who are taking “their hops and zigzags a little more / anxious” (lines 6–7). However, the thriving of birds during a particular season is not the focus of the second stanza; rather, it is focused on the general nature of birds.
C. CORRECT. The birds are taking “their hops and zigzags a little more / anxious” (lines 6–7) in light of warmer weather, but they are not making a big to-do of the change because “a home is a home; worms are worms” (line 7) any time of the year. Such a natural adjustment to seasonal changes is reflected in the second stanza, where the birds “count up this year as against next / year” (lines 26–27) because they are well accustomed to the cyclical nature of things.
D. Incorrect. Although the birds’ actions of “hops and zigzags” (line 6) may indicate some sort of preparation, these actions are not preparation but rather the internalized cognizance of the change that has occurred with little conscious thought. As revealed in the second stanza, birds do not ponder much about past or future but rather adapt naturally as things change.
Question analysis
This question on Carl Sandburg’s poem “Bird Talk” quotes lines 6–7, where the birds hop and zigzag “a little more anxious,” and asks which idea from the second stanza they help develop. Students must link two compressed lines in the first stanza to a later stanza about birds gathered at the Grand Crossing, and every choice sounds like a fair claim about birds.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Typical grade 7 poetry questions ask what one line or stanza shows on its own. Here two compressed lines from the first stanza must be tied to an idea the second stanza never states, in Sandburg’s loose, unusual phrasing.
- Estimated difficulty
- Among the hardest on the SHSAT: a non-obvious approach, heavy reading, or a well-hidden trap.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Reading between the lines major
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence in several places moderate
- Figurative or literary language moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: 296 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 5, 70 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The stem runs in an unusual direction: two lines from the first stanza must help develop an idea that only the second stanza holds, and the poem never states it. Students who read “next year” as planning are drawn to preparation, a choice built on the key’s own frame, while others answer from the first stanza’s summer or from what they know about birds. The question rewards hearing the birds’ roll call of who is gone as the same matter-of-fact acceptance as “worms are worms.”
Reading between the lines major Working it out
Neither stanza states the shared idea: students must hear calm acceptance in “a home is a home; worms are worms” and in birds tallying “who won’t be here next year,” then call it adjusting to change. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about instinctive preparation shares the key’s shape, birds acting by nature as time passes; it differs only in what the birds do, prepare for the future rather than adjust to the seasons. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
Lines 6–7 sit in the first stanza and the idea lives in the second, lines 20–29, so students must carry two lines across the poem and match them to the gathering at the Grand Crossing. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Figurative or literary language moderate Understanding the question
“A home is a home; worms are worms” says nothing on its surface; its meaning, a shrug that life goes on as it always has, has to be read from the repetition. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Strategy: Paraphrase the second stanza first: what are the birds doing and saying at the Grand Crossing? Then reread lines 6–7 and ask which idea about birds both passages share.
Traps
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Wrong part of the text: A choice is true of another paragraph, stanza or speaker than the one asked about.
- Outside knowledge: A choice is plausible in the real world but not supported by this text.
The wrong answers, classified
A Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Hears “a little more anxious” as eagerness for the summer announced in lines 2–3, an idea of the first stanza, while the second stanza never mentions weather or warmth.
B Outside knowledge (King et al., 2004; Recht & Leslie, 1988)
Brings in the real fact that birds do well in warm weather, which neither lines 6–7 nor the birds’ talk of who is gone says, and the poem’s season is summer, not spring.
D Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Sees nest-building in “a home is a home” and planning in counting “this year as against next / year,” but the birds only note who will be missing and make no preparations.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This question points in an unusual direction. Lines 6–7 are in the first stanza. A stanza is a group of lines set apart by a blank line. But the idea you need is in the second stanza, lines 20–29. The question asks which idea in stanza 2 these earlier lines also help build. So find the idea in stanza 2 first. Then see how lines 6–7 support it.
Find the idea in stanza 2
In stanza 2, birds sit “in circles talking bird talk.” They ask “who is here / and as to who is not here and who used to be here.” They also talk about “who is here / this year who won’t be here next year.” The birds simply count the changes. They are not upset by them. The speaker says, “We shall never blame the birds.” The idea: birds take the changes that time brings as a normal part of life.
Read lines 6–7 closely
Lines 6–7 say “The birds took their hops and zigzags a little more / anxious; a home is a home; worms are worms.” As summer comes, the birds hop about a little more nervously and busily. That is a small change. Then the speaker shrugs: “a home is a home; worms are worms.” Life goes on as it always does. The birds change a little and carry on, with no fuss.
See what the two parts share
Both parts show birds meeting change calmly. In lines 6–7, the season turns, and the birds adjust a little. To adjust is to change a little to fit something new. In stanza 2, the birds note who has come and gone, and life goes on. So lines 6–7 help build stanza 2’s idea: birds naturally adjust to the changing seasons.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. Stanza 2 never mentions warm weather or being eager for it.
- B does not fit. Nothing in the poem says birds do best in spring. The poem’s season is the start of summer.
- C fits. Both parts show birds taking seasonal change calmly, as a matter of course.
- D does not fit. The birds talk about next year, but they make no plans for it.
Watch out: D is tempting because “a home is a home” can sound like nest building. But the birds only count who will be missing. They do not get ready for anything.
Choose the answer
Lines 6–7 and stanza 2 both show birds accepting change as natural. So the answer is C, “The birds naturally adjust to the seasonal changes.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D is the closest wrong choice. Like C, it says birds act by nature as time passes. But D says they prepare, or get ready. In stanza 2, the birds talk about next year only to count who “won’t be here next year.” In lines 6–7, they hop about and carry on. They adjust to change. They do not plan for it.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Bird Talk” as printed (page 32)

Question 32 of 120
2026 Practice Test C English, question 24Uses the passage above: “Bird Talk”.
Question
Throughout the poem, the poet conveys the speaker’s point of view by
- Agradually moving the speaker’s attention from one element of nature to another.
- Bproviding the speaker’s motivation for describing the landscape in great detail.
- Chighlighting the speaker’s emotional response as each season passes.
- Dshifting the speaker’s focus from external observations to personal reflection.
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
This question asks for an explanation of how the poet conveys the speaker’s point of view on the natural world and the change of seasons as presented in the poem.
A. Incorrect. Though in the first stanza the speaker describes various elements of nature such as branches, frogs, birds, flowers, and leaves, these elemental shifts are not precisely gradual and occur only in the first stanza. Further, the first stanza, though appreciative of the natural world, is primarily descriptive and does not develop the speaker’s perspective to the degree that other parts of the poem do.
B. Incorrect. While it may be inferred that the speaker describes the landscape to such a degree because it has revealed a seasonal shift, that this is indeed the speaker’s motivation is never explicitly conveyed by the poet.
C. Incorrect. Multiple seasons do not pass in the poem; only the shift to the “ ‘beginning of summer’ ” (line 3) occurs in an endless cycle. Further, the speaker does not reveal an emotional response; it is the responses of nature that the speaker describes.
D. CORRECT. The first stanza is the speaker’s observations of the natural world embracing a new season. In the second stanza, the speaker begins to reflect on how the natural world, as embodied by the birds, calmly accepts seasonal change in its perpetual sameness. The reflection continues in the third stanza, where it is revealed that the speaker has been addressing these observations to a child.
Question analysis
This point-of-view question asks how the poet of “Bird Talk” conveys the speaker’s point of view throughout the poem. Students must keep in mind the long opening description of early summer and the two shorter stanzas after it, and decide which description of the poet’s method holds from the first line to the last.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 point-of-view questions often ask what a speaker thinks. This one asks how the poet conveys that view across all three stanzas of a long free-verse poem, and the choices name methods in general terms, closer to grade 8 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Evidence in several places moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- How, not what moderate
- Figurative or literary language minor
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: 296 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 10, 54 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The first stanza takes up 19 of the poem’s 32 lines and moves steadily from branches to frogs, birds, flowers and leaves, so a choice that describes it alone feels right. The point of view shows only when the poem turns to “We” and then to “I” addressing a child, and that third stanza is three hard lines. Students must keep the whole poem’s course in mind and choose the method that holds from first line to last.
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
The answer depends on all three stanzas at once: the long catalog of the season in lines 1–19, the shift to “We shall never blame the birds,” and the closing “If I have put your face … child.” (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about moving from one element of nature to another and the key both describe a shift in the speaker’s attention; they differ in what shifts, nature to nature or the outside world to the speaker’s own thoughts. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
How, not what moderate Working it out
The stem asks how the poet conveys a point of view, a method, so a choice must describe what the speaker does across the poem, not what the speaker sees. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Figurative or literary language minor Understanding the question
The last stanza is cryptic, “Blame me no more than the bluejays,” and students who miss that the speaker is now talking about putting a child into the poem lose the move to reflection. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Strategy: Write one phrase for what the speaker attends to in each stanza, then keep only a choice that describes the whole sequence, not one stanza.
Traps
- Too narrow: A single detail offered as the central idea or a summary, or a summary that keeps minor details and leaves out an essential part.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
The wrong answers, classified
A Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Describes the first stanza well, its walk from branches to frogs, birds, flowers and leaves, but misses the later turn to “We” and to the speaker’s own “I.”
B Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Supplies a reason for all the description, perhaps from the closing words to a child, but the speaker never says why the landscape is described, and the reflection is not a motive.
C Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Sees that the poem follows nature through a change of season but makes it many seasons and hands the creatures’ reactions, such as the birds’ anxious hops, to the speaker as feelings.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks about point of view: how the speaker, the voice talking in the poem, sees things. It also asks how the poet shows that view across the whole poem. So look at what the speaker pays attention to in each of the three stanzas. A stanza is a group of lines set apart by a blank line.
Follow the speaker through the stanzas
- Stanza 1, lines 1–19: the speaker describes the world outside. There are branches, frogs, birds, flowers and leaves at the start of summer.
- Stanza 2, lines 20–29: the speaker starts to judge and think. “We shall never blame the birds.”
- Stanza 3, lines 30–32: the speaker says “I” and talks to a child: “If I have put your face among leaf faces, child.”
Name the change in focus
The poem starts with external observations, or things the speaker sees and hears outside. It ends with personal reflection, or the speaker’s own thoughts. In the last stanza, the speaker admits to putting a child’s face and voice into the poem. The speaker asks to be blamed “no more than the bluejays.” Since “We shall never blame the birds,” that means not at all. This move from looking outward to looking inward is how the speaker’s view comes through.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. Moving from branches to frogs to birds happens only in stanza 1. It misses the turn to “We” and “I.”
- B does not fit. The speaker never says why the landscape is described.
- C does not fit. Only one change of season happens, the start of summer. The anxious feelings belong to the birds, not the speaker.
- D fits. The speaker moves from describing nature to thinking about it.
Watch out: A describes stanza 1 very well. But the question says “Throughout the poem,” so the answer must cover all three stanzas.
Choose the answer
The speaker starts by watching nature and ends by thinking aloud to a child. So the answer is D, “shifting the speaker’s focus from external observations to personal reflection.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong choice. Stanza 1 really does move from one part of nature to another. But that is only 19 of the 32 lines. In stanzas 2 and 3, the speaker turns to “We” and then “I,” and shares personal thoughts. Only D describes the speaker’s path from the first line to the last.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 33 of 120
2026 Practice Test C English, question 25Uses the passage above: “Bird Talk”.
Question
Over the course of the poem, a central idea is developed mainly through the speaker’s
- Asense of eager anticipation as winter ends.
- Bdescription of the changes in nature as the seasons transition.
- Cobservation of the birds’ behavior as summer begins.
- Dprediction of future alterations in the physical landscape.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks how the central idea about the natural acceptance of change by nature is developed by the speaker of the poem.
A. Incorrect. The speaker is an observer of the changes in nature as propelled by the seasons and shows no personal eagerness for the end of winter. Further, even though nature rejoices at the end of winter as exemplified by “the shrilling of the frogs” (line 4), the speaker merely records this and does not share in this display.
B. CORRECT. The response of nature to the “beginning of summer” (line 3) is the primary focus of the poem as revealed by the speaker through vivid descriptions of the sights, sounds, movements, and attitudes of the natural world.
C. Incorrect. The second stanza of the poem begins a reflection on birds “sitting in circles talking bird talk” (line 22) and taking a sort of attendance of who is present, but this behavioral description is largely figurative and meant to illustrate a point about the way the birds adapt quickly to change, not to develop a central idea of the poem in terms of how nature responds generally.
D. Incorrect. Seasonal changes are inevitable and cyclical per the speaker, but the speaker does not predict future changes to the landscape as a method of developing the central idea. Rather, the speaker describes nature’s response to changes that have already occurred.
Question analysis
Students decide how the speaker of Carl Sandburg’s “Bird Talk” mainly develops a central idea of the poem. The question does not name the idea, so students must work it out across the poem’s three stanzas and then weigh four accounts of what the speaker does, each tied to a different part or feature of the poem.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Tracing how a central idea develops is core grade 7 work. Here the idea is never stated, so students must first infer it from 32 lines of free verse and then judge what the speaker mainly does to build it.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Reading between the lines moderate
- Evidence in several places minor
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: 296 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 9, 48 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The title “Bird Talk” and the whole second stanza push students toward the birds, and the key differs from that choice only in taking in all of nature. Two other choices credit the speaker with something the poem gives elsewhere: the eagerness belongs to the frogs and birds, and the only look ahead is the birds’ talk of next year. Weighing what the speaker does across all 32 lines points to the description of nature changing.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about the birds’ behavior as summer begins matches the key’s frame, the speaker watching nature at the turn of the season; it differs only in narrowing nature to birds. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
The central idea is never stated, so students must first work out that the poem is about nature meeting the year’s turn calmly, then judge which of the speaker’s acts builds it most. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Evidence in several places minor Working it out
Birds appear in lines 6–7, 10–11, 20–29 and 31–32, so the title and the second stanza make them look central until the branches, frogs, flowers and leaves are counted too. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: Put the poem’s central idea into a sentence of your own, then ask which choice describes something the speaker really does and does the most to build that idea.
Traps
- Too narrow: A single detail offered as the central idea or a summary, or a summary that keeps minor details and leaves out an essential part.
- Wrong tone or attitude: Misjudges the tone, attitude or point of view, such as reading admiration as criticism, or taking a character's or subject's feelings for the author's.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
The wrong answers, classified
A Wrong tone or attitude (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Gives the speaker the stir of the shrilling frogs and anxious birds, but the speaker records it calmly, and the poem opens after winter, at “the beginning of summer.”
C Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Follows the title and the birds’ circles at the Grand Crossing, but birds are one thread in a poem that also tracks branches, frogs, dandelions and leaves into summer.
D Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Builds a forecast from the birds counting “this year as against next / year,” but that talk concerns who will be gone, not the land, and the speaker predicts nothing.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks how a central idea is mainly built. A central idea is a big point the whole poem makes. First, put that idea in your own words. Then ask what the speaker does most, across the whole poem, to build it.
Find the central idea
The poem shows nature at “the beginning of summer.” The branches grow heavy, the frogs quiet down, the flowers spread and the leaves come out. In stanza 2, the birds calmly count who has come and gone. A central idea is that nature moves through the seasons, and living things accept the change as natural.
See how the speaker builds it
Most of the poem is description. Stanza 1 fills 19 of the 32 lines with changes in nature. It shows “The yellow spreads of the dandelions and buttercups” and “the green leaves trickling out the gaunt nowhere / of winter.” Trickling out means coming out slowly, a little at a time. Gaunt means thin and bare. Detail by detail, the speaker shows the season turning. That description is the main way the idea is built.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. The frogs and birds are stirred up, but the speaker describes them calmly. The poem also starts after winter is over.
- B fits. The speaker describes nature changing as the seasons turn.
- C does not fit. Birds are only one part. The poem also covers branches, frogs, flowers and leaves.
- D does not fit. The speaker predicts nothing about the land. The birds’ talk of next year is about who will be gone.
Watch out: C is tempting because the poem is called “Bird Talk” and stanza 2 is all about birds. But the central idea is about all of nature.
Choose the answer
The speaker builds the idea mostly through details of nature changing as summer begins. So the answer is B, “description of the changes in nature as the seasons transition.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong choice. It also has the speaker watching nature as summer begins. But it narrows nature to birds. The poem’s changes come from many living things: branches, frogs, dandelions, buttercups and leaves. Only B takes in all of them, so only B describes how the whole poem builds its idea.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 34 of 120
2026 Practice Test C English, question 26Passage Serpent Mound
Serpent Mound
The Great Serpent Mound, located in Adams County, Ohio, is a human-made mound of earth that researchers believe was created between 300 B.C. and A.D. 1100 by an indigenous culture.
Ohio, 1846
Brush Creek stood low when the museum men came
with their measuring tapes and sketchbooks.
It was winter. Fringed with ice,
the creek doubled back on itself
as if it had forgotten something.
Pa was in Cincinnati, or else on his way home,
so Ma told me to lead the men
into the marshy low grounds. It being winter,
there was little underbrush to speak of—
in the summer there would have been
briars, poison ivy, biting flies. I listened
for the swish of a beaver’s heavy tail,
the chitter of a chickadee, or the cry of a hawk,
but the winter silence of the creek pressed
down on all of us like a weight.
The humps in the ground were all but
invisible until you were right up on them. The figure
was even less obvious: the sinuous body,
the tail coiled three times around,
and at the other end, the mouth wide open.
In the summer the creek bottom was crowded
with so much life that you could trip over
the ridges of earth before you saw
anything at all. In winter you could climb
a tree and get some idea of the whole thing:
the serpent’s body undulating, slithering
silently across the ancient
earth. At the mouth end, there was an oval mound
as if the snake were about to swallow an egg—
as snakes sometimes did in our rickety
henhouse—my Pa always said, or
as if swallowing the sun, one of the museum
men suggested, taking notes with his quill pen,
an old-style inkhorn slung at his side.
I liked that: swallowing the sun,
just the sort of thing a snake might do,
might want to do. When, later, I told my sister Ruth,
she disagreed. It is singing to the sun,
she insisted. That is why its mouth
is wide open. She said, “Sometimes I think
I hear it on summer nights. Not swallowing, singing.”
Question
How does the poem’s form contribute to the poem’s meaning?
- AThe use of one continuous stanza and the pattern of the lines mimic the long and winding shape of the mound.
- BThe uneven line lengths emphasize the variety of ways people interpret the meaning of the mound.
- CThe dashes throughout the poem highlight the speaker’s changing thoughts about the significance of the mound.
- DThe lack of a regular rhyme scheme and meter convey that the speaker struggles to comprehend the vastness of the mound.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks how the poem’s form contributes to the poem’s meaning.
A. CORRECT. The poem is structured as one long stanza. The line lengths throughout the poem and the line indents (such as those in lines 7–10) create a visual effect so that the poem itself mimics the shape of the Serpent Mound.
B. Incorrect. The uneven line lengths in the poem do not indicate the different interpretations of the mound; separate stanzas or other stopping points would more effectively point to contrasting ideas.
C. Incorrect. The dashes in the poem lead to further explanation of a thought, not a change of thought.
D. Incorrect. The lack of regular rhyme and meter is intended to create a conversational tone rather than show the speaker’s struggle to grasp how large the mound is.
Question analysis
This question about poetic form asks how the form of “Serpent Mound,” a poem set in 1846 at the ancient earthwork in Adams County, Ohio, contributes to its meaning. Students must consider features such as the single stanza, the uneven lines, the dashes and the lack of rhyme, and decide which feature the poem actually puts to work, and how.
- NYS standards
- 7R5 structure and genre features
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Asking how a poem’s form adds to its meaning is a grade 7 standard. Each choice names a feature that is easy to check on the page and pairs it with a meaning that must also be tested, a typical demand.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- How, not what major
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Something you must already know minor
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: 354 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 8, 84 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Every choice names something really on the page, so the work is in the meaning each attaches. The strongest pull pairs the uneven lines with the poem’s real ending, three readings of the oval mound, and the free-verse choice can lean on line 25’s “some idea of the whole thing.” Seeing the key takes a step back from the words to the poem’s outline, which on the test means scrolling through all 41 lines.
How, not what major Working it out
This is a form question: students must see that the single stanza and the indents stepping right and back, as in lines 6–12, draw a winding body on the page, an effect of layout, not of words. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about uneven line lengths names nearly the same feature as the key, the shape of the lines, but gives it another meaning: the mound’s many interpretations instead of its long, winding form. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Something you must already know minor Working it out
The choices assume “stanza,” “rhyme scheme” and “meter,” and the idea that a poem’s outline can picture its subject, which the poem never explains. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Strategy: Test each choice in two steps: confirm that the feature it names is really in the poem, then ask whether the poem supports the meaning the choice attaches to it.
Traps
- Wrong purpose or structure: Names a purpose, structure or effect that the part does not serve, or describes what a part says when the question asks what it does.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
The wrong answers, classified
B Wrong purpose or structure (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Pairs two real things, the uneven lines and the different readings of the mound at the end, but nothing ties the line lengths to those readings, which come only in lines 29–41.
C Wrong purpose or structure (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Spots the dashes in lines 9, 29 and 31, but each one leads into more detail on the thought before it, not into a change in what the speaker thinks of the mound.
D Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Links free verse to line 25, where a climbed tree gives only “some idea of the whole thing,” but that is about seeing the shape, and the speaker never seems overwhelmed by it.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks about form. Form is how a poem is built and how it looks on the page. It includes stanzas, which are groups of lines set apart by blank lines. It also includes line lengths, indents, rhyme and rhythm. An indent is space at the start of a line that pushes it to the right. You need the choice that ties a real feature of form to the poem’s meaning.
Look at the shape on the page
Don’t read the words yet. Just look. The poem is one long block of 41 lines with no blank lines. So it is one continuous stanza. Its lines do not all start at the left edge. Some are pushed in one step, some two, and some three. The steps go in and come back out, again and again.
Follow the lines in and out
Take lines 6–12. Line 6 starts one step in. Lines 7 and 8 start two steps in. Lines 9 and 10 start three steps in. Line 11 comes back to two steps, and line 12 is back at the left edge. The same swing out and back happens again in lines 19–27 and in lines 33–41. Look down the whole poem. Its left edge curves out and back like a snake winding down the page.
Connect the shape to the mound
The poem is about a giant earth mound shaped like a snake. Line 18 calls it “the sinuous body.” Sinuous means full of curves. Line 26 shows “the serpent’s body undulating, slithering.” Undulating means moving in waves. The one long stanza is like the snake’s long body. The lines curving in and out are like its winding shape. The poem looks like what it describes.
Check each choice
- A fits. The single stanza and the winding lines copy the mound’s long, curving shape.
- B does not fit. The lines are uneven. But the different ideas about the mound come only at the end, in lines 29–41. The line lengths are not tied to them.
- C does not fit. The dashes in lines 9, 29 and 31 lead into more detail. They do not show the speaker’s thoughts changing.
- D does not fit. The poem has no rhyme scheme, or pattern of rhymes, and no meter, or steady beat. But the speaker never struggles to grasp how big the mound is.
Watch out: B is tempting because both of its parts are true. But nothing links the line lengths to the different ideas about the mound.
Choose the answer
The poem’s one long stanza and its in-and-out lines draw a winding snake on the page. So the answer is A, “The use of one continuous stanza and the pattern of the lines mimic the long and winding shape of the mound.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong choice. It also points to how the lines look, and the poem does give different ideas about the mound. But the uneven lines run through the whole poem, while those ideas come only at the end. The in-and-out pattern draws a shape, not a set of opinions. That shape is the mound’s long, winding body.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Serpent Mound” as printed (page 40)

Question 35 of 120
2026 Practice Test C English, question 29Uses the passage above: “Serpent Mound”.
Question
Read line 28 from the poem.
At the mouth end, there was an oval mound
How does the line contribute to the development of ideas in the poem?
- AIt describes a feature of the mound that the men from the museum need to document.
- BIt introduces a comparison of the body of the mound with the head of the mound.
- CIt introduces a feature of the mound that has a different meaning to different people.
- DIt describes a part of the mound that is difficult to see from far away.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks how line 28 contributes to the development of ideas in the poem.
A. Incorrect. Although the museum men are documenting the shape of the mound in line 33, lines 29–32 and 35–41 focus on what the oval mound represents as interpreted by the museum men, the speaker, and the speaker’s sister.
B. Incorrect. While the lines preceding line 28 describe the body of the snake in detail (“you could climb / a tree and get some idea of the whole thing: / the serpent’s body undulating, slithering / silently across the ancient / earth” [lines 24–28]), the purpose of line 28 is to begin the development of the ideas about the oval shape at the end of the mound: the serpent’s mouth.
C. CORRECT. Line 28 introduces the presence of the oval mound at the mouth of the snake. The meaning of this oval is of great interest to the museum men and the speaker. Line 28 leads to the idea that there is speculation about the oval mound (“as if the snake were about to swallow an egg” [line 29], “as if swallowing the sun” [line 32], and “It is singing to the sun” [line 38]).
D. Incorrect. The speaker does not say that the oval shape near the end of the mound is difficult to see. Earlier, the speaker says that the ridges of earth are difficult to see unless you are near them, but the speaker does not say this about the oval shape.
Question analysis
Students explain how line 28 of “Serpent Mound,” which introduces an oval mound at the serpent’s mouth end, contributes to the development of ideas in the poem. The line is a plain piece of description in a poem about museum men surveying the mound, so students must work out what part it plays in the poem as a whole.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Explaining how one line contributes to a poem is standard grade 7 structure work. The line is a plain description, but its role depends on how it connects to the lines around it.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- How, not what moderate
- Evidence in several places minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: 354 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 5, 89 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Because the museum men came to measure and sketch, a line naming a new feature looks like a note for their records, and that reading is the strong pull. Others see a comparison with the serpent’s body described just before, or carry over the earlier point about humps that are hard to see. The line’s job shows in what follows it: the oval is where Pa, a museum man and Ruth each see something different.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The documenting choice and the key both say line 28 presents a feature of the mound; they differ in what follows, the men’s records or the egg, sun and singing readings in lines 29–41. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
How, not what moderate Working it out
The line is plain description, so its role shows only in what it sets up: the oval becomes the egg, the swallowed sun and the open singing mouth that the rest of the poem weighs. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Evidence in several places minor Working it out
The readings are spread over thirteen lines and three people, Pa in lines 29–31, a museum man in lines 32–33 and Ruth in lines 37–41, so students must gather them. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: Read line 28 together with the lines on either side of it, then test each choice against what those lines actually show.
Traps
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
- Wrong part of the text: A choice is true of another paragraph, stanza or speaker than the one asked about.
- Wrong purpose or structure: Names a purpose, structure or effect that the part does not serve, or describes what a part says when the question asks what it does.
The wrong answers, classified
A True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Knows the men came “with their measuring tapes and sketchbooks,” so any new feature seems one to record, but the lines after 28 dwell on what the oval means, not on recording it.
B Wrong purpose or structure (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Notices that lines 24–28 describe the serpent’s body just before the oval appears, but line 28 moves on to the mouth end and never sets head and body side by side.
D Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Carries over lines 16–17, where the humps are “all but / invisible” until you are close, to the oval mound, which the poem never calls hard to see.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks how one line helps build the poem’s ideas. Line 28 is a plain description: “At the mouth end, there was an oval mound.” Oval means egg-shaped. To see the line’s job, look at what comes right after it.
Read what follows line 28
The next lines give three ideas about the oval mound.
- Pa always said it was “as if the snake were about to swallow an egg,” as snakes did in the family’s henhouse (lines 29–31).
- A museum man says “as if swallowing the sun” (line 32).
- Ruth says “It is singing to the sun” (line 38).
Name the line’s job
Line 28 brings in the oval mound. Then each person sees something different in it: an egg, the sun being swallowed, or a song. Each idea comes from that person’s own life. Pa thinks of his henhouse. Ruth thinks of what she seems to hear on summer nights. So the line sets up a feature that means different things to different people.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. The men did come to measure and sketch. But the lines after 28 are about what the oval means, not about recording it.
- B does not fit. Line 28 moves on from the body to the mouth. It never compares the two.
- C fits. The oval gets three different meanings from three people.
- D does not fit. Lines 16–17 say the humps are hard to see. The poem never says that about the oval.
Watch out: A is tempting because the men came “with their measuring tapes and sketchbooks.” But the poem spends its last 13 lines on meanings, not measurements.
Choose the answer
Line 28 brings in the oval mound that Pa, a museum man and Ruth each see in their own way. So the answer is C, “It introduces a feature of the mound that has a different meaning to different people.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong choice. The museum men are there to document, or record, the mound, and one is taking notes. But the lines after 28 are not about notes. They give an egg, a swallowed sun and a singing snake. That is a feature with a different meaning to different people, just as C says.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 36 of 120
2026 Practice Test C English, question 31Uses the passage above: “Serpent Mound”.
Question
What impact do the words “swish,” “chitter,” and “cry” in lines 12–13 have in the poem?
- AThey illustrate how lively the mound’s surroundings are during the summer.
- BThey show how the mound disrupts natural life in the marsh.
- CThey indicate the variety of wildlife found in the area around the mound.
- DThey suggest that the speaker prefers the mound’s appearance in winter.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks what impact the words “swish,” “chitter,” and “cry” in lines 12–13 have in the poem.
A. CORRECT. The words highlight the sounds of the animals that visit the mound in the summer: the “swish of a beaver’s heavy tail” (line 12), the “chitter of a chickadee” (line 13), and the “cry of a hawk” (line 13). These words help contrast the quiet stillness of the setting around the mound in the winter.
B. Incorrect. While the words in lines 12–13 convey the sounds certain animals make in the summer, the sounds of the animals that live near the mound are a natural part of life in the area, not a disruption.
C. Incorrect. The speaker is contrasting the sounds of the animals around the mound during the rest of the year with the silence of the winter months, not merely indicating the variety of wildlife.
D. Incorrect. The speaker expresses the idea that the mound is more visible in the winter because of the lack of brush (“It being winter, / there was little underbrush to speak of” [lines 8–9]). Then lines 12–13 describe sounds, not the appearance of the mound in winter.
Question analysis
This question about word choice asks what impact the sound words “swish,” “chitter” and “cry” in lines 12–13 of “Serpent Mound” have in the poem. They belong to a beaver, a chickadee and a hawk near the creek, and more than one choice sounds like a fair account of them, so students must read the surrounding lines closely.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students often explain what sensory words add to a description. These three words sit inside a long sentence that runs across several lines, so their effect has to be worked out from the lines around them, beyond typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer major
- Reading between the lines moderate
- Complex sentences minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: 354 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 6, 61 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Three vivid animal sounds invite the easy reading that the poem is showing off the creek’s wildlife, and that choice is true as far as it goes. The words matter because they are missing: the speaker listens for them, and “the winter silence” answers. Students must also accept that the key’s “during the summer” comes from the poem’s later picture of a crowded summer creek, not from lines 12–13 themselves.
A very close wrong answer major Choosing the answer
The variety choice is literally true, since a beaver, a chickadee and a hawk are three kinds of animal; it differs from the key in missing why the sounds are named, as a contrast with winter. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
The speaker listens for these sounds and does not hear them, so students must infer that they stand for the creek’s life in warmer months, which lines 21–22 call “crowded / with so much life.” (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Complex sentences minor Understanding the question
The three words sit in one sentence that runs from “I listened” in line 11 to “like a weight” in line 15 and turns on “but,” so their point arrives only at its end. (Abedi & Lord, 2001; Freedle & Kostin, 1993; Messick, 1989)
Strategy: Read the full sentence that holds these words, from “I listened” in line 11 to the end of line 15, then decide what the three sound words add to the scene.
Traps
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
- Wrong part of the text: A choice is true of another paragraph, stanza or speaker than the one asked about.
The wrong answers, classified
B Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Notices that the beaver, chickadee and hawk go unheard but blames the mound for the hush, though line 14 calls it “the winter silence of the creek.”
C True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Rightly counts three different animals in lines 12–13, but the speaker listens for them in vain, so the point is their absence in winter, not the range of species.
D Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Remembers from lines 8–9 and 24–25 that winter makes the mound easier to see, but lines 12–13 are about sounds and state no preference for either season.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks what three sound words do in the poem. They are “swish,” “chitter” and “cry,” in lines 12–13. Read the whole sentence they sit in. It starts at “I listened” in line 11 and ends with “like a weight” in line 15.
Read the full sentence
Lines 11–15 say “I listened / for the swish of a beaver’s heavy tail, / the chitter of a chickadee, or the cry of a hawk, / but the winter silence of the creek pressed / down on all of us like a weight.” A chickadee is a small bird, and a chitter is its quick, chirping sound. The speaker listens for these sounds. But the word “but” tells you they never come. Only silence answers.
Work out why the sounds are named
A beaver, a chickadee and a hawk are signs of a creek full of life. The speaker hears none of them in winter. Later lines tell you when the creek is lively. Lines 21–22 say “In the summer the creek bottom was crowded / with so much life.” So the missing sounds remind you how lively the place is in summer. They also make the winter silence feel even emptier.
Check each choice
- A fits. The sounds stand for the busy life around the mound in the warm months.
- B does not fit. The quiet comes from the season: “the winter silence of the creek.” The mound does not cause it.
- C does not fit. There are three kinds of animals, but the point is that their sounds are missing.
- D does not fit. These lines are about sounds. The speaker says nothing about liking how the mound looks in winter.
Watch out: C is true as far as it goes. But it misses why the speaker names the sounds at all: to set them against the silence.
Choose the answer
The sounds the speaker listens for, and doesn’t hear, show how lively the creek is in summer. So the answer is A, “They illustrate how lively the mound’s surroundings are during the summer.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong choice, because a beaver, a chickadee and a hawk really are three kinds of wildlife. But the speaker listens for them and hears nothing. The word “but” turns the sentence to “the winter silence.” The sounds matter because they are missing. They show the creek in its lively season, which line 21 names as summer.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 37 of 120
2026 Practice Test C English, question 32Uses the passage above: “Serpent Mound”.
Question
How does the speaker’s interaction with Ruth in lines 37–41 convey a central idea of the poem?
- AIt suggests that the most accurate interpretations of the mound come from knowing the purpose of the mound.
- BIt emphasizes that there are multiple interpretations of the mound based on feelings and experiences.
- CIt reveals the benefit of considering different interpretations of the mound’s significance.
- DIt implies that scientific study of the mound’s purpose will affect what the mound symbolizes to people.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks how the interaction between the speaker and Ruth in lines 37–41 conveys a central idea of the poem.
A. Incorrect. While there are many different interpretations of the mound’s meaning, there is no way to determine which of the interpretations is most accurate, and there is no way to know the mound’s true purpose.
B. CORRECT. The interaction references Ruth’s interpretation of the open-mouth shape as a serpent singing to the sun. This interpretation creates a joyful mood. The speaker contrasts this perspective with the idea that the mound is swallowing the sun, which creates a more aggressive feeling. These various interpretations of a physical shape arise out of what the individuals feel when they look at the mound.
C. Incorrect. The speaker does not describe any benefit to considering what different people imagine when they see the mound. Instead, the speaker is simply describing different interpretations.
D. Incorrect. Ruth’s interpretation of the mound’s shape is fanciful and symbolic. It is unlikely that scientific study would change the minds of people such as Ruth about the meaning of the mound.
Question analysis
This central idea question asks how the speaker’s conversation with a sister, Ruth, in lines 37–41 of “Serpent Mound” conveys a central idea of the poem. Ruth explains the serpent’s open mouth in her own way, and students must connect this short exchange to the rest of the poem before choosing among four claims about what it shows.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Linking a short exchange between two characters to a poem’s central idea is standard grade 7 work. The language is plain, though the choices differ in what they claim the exchange shows, so each must be checked closely.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Reading between the lines moderate
- Evidence in several places minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: 354 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 10, 78 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Ruth’s “Not swallowing, singing” makes the disagreement plain, so most students see that the mound is read in more than one way. The difficulty is in what the choices add to that: a lesson about the benefit of differing views, a ranking of readings by the mound’s purpose, or a role for science. The poem only sets the readings side by side, each rooted in what its speaker has lived or felt.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about the benefit of considering different interpretations shares the key’s subject, several readings of the mound, and differs only in adding a lesson, that weighing them is worthwhile. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
The exchange is a plain disagreement, swallowing against singing, and students must infer the central idea it serves, that people see the mound through their own feelings and experiences. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Evidence in several places minor Working it out
Ruth’s reading answers earlier ones, Pa’s egg from the henhouse in lines 29–31 and the museum man’s sun in line 32, so her lines must be read against them. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: Sum up what Ruth says and how the speaker reacts, compare it with the earlier ideas about the oval mound, and pick the claim the poem shows rather than one it might only suggest.
Traps
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Outside knowledge: A choice is plausible in the real world but not supported by this text.
The wrong answers, classified
A Outside knowledge (King et al., 2004; Recht & Leslie, 1988)
Applies the sensible idea that knowing why something was built settles what it means, but the poem never ranks the readings or says anyone knows the mound’s purpose.
C Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Rightly sees several readings of the mound, then adds a moral, that weighing them is helpful, which the poem never states; Ruth and the speaker simply disagree.
D Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Connects the museum men’s measuring with the family’s readings at the end, but nobody suggests that study will change what the mound means to Ruth or anyone else.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks how the talk between the speaker and Ruth, in lines 37–41, shows a central idea. A central idea is a big point the whole poem makes. Compare Ruth’s idea about the mound with the speaker’s, and with the ideas that come before.
Read the talk with Ruth
The speaker liked a museum man’s idea that the snake was “swallowing the sun.” But when the speaker told Ruth, “she disagreed. It is singing to the sun, / she insisted.” Ruth explains, “That is why its mouth / is wide open.” Then she says, “Sometimes I think / I hear it on summer nights. Not swallowing, singing.”
See where each idea comes from
Each person sees the same oval mound in a different way. Pa always said it was like a snake about to swallow an egg, as snakes did in the family’s henhouse. A museum man saw it swallowing the sun. Ruth hears it singing on summer nights. Each idea grows out of that person’s own feelings and experiences, or what they have lived through. That is a central idea: people see the mound in many ways.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. No one in the poem knows the mound’s purpose, and no idea is called the most accurate.
- B fits. Ruth and the speaker see the mound differently, each from what they feel and have lived.
- C does not fit. The poem never says that thinking about other ideas helps anyone. Ruth and the speaker just disagree.
- D does not fit. Nobody says the men’s study will change what the mound means to people.
Watch out: C starts out right, since there are different ideas. But it adds a lesson, a “benefit,” that the poem never gives.
Choose the answer
The disagreement shows more than one way to see the mound, each rooted in a person’s own feelings and experiences. So the answer is B, “It emphasizes that there are multiple interpretations of the mound based on feelings and experiences.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong choice. It also says there are different ideas about the mound. But it claims there is a benefit, or gain, in thinking them over. The poem shows no one gaining anything. Ruth keeps her own idea, and the poem never says who is right. It simply sets the ideas side by side, each from a person’s own life.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 38 of 120
2026 Practice Test C English, question 33Uses the passage above: “Serpent Mound”.
Question
The poet contrasts the speaker’s and Ruth’s points of view regarding the mound by using dialogue to
- Aimply that Ruth is worried that her interpretation of the mound will be seen as too abstract.
- Bindicate that Ruth hopes her interpretation of the mound will be shared by the men from the museum.
- Csuggest that Ruth wants the speaker to agree with her interpretation of the mound.
- Dshow that Ruth has already decided on her interpretation of the mound.
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The question asks how the poet uses dialogue to contrast the points of view of the speaker and Ruth regarding the mound.
A. Incorrect. The interpretation Ruth offers of the mound as a snake singing is abstract, but Ruth does not seem concerned that it is an overly metaphorical or figurative interpretation. The dialogue serves to highlight that Ruth is firm in her belief.
B. Incorrect. There is no indication that the museum men are considering Ruth’s interpretation of the mound or that Ruth wants them to share her interpretation. Ruth’s interpretation is meant to convey an abstract idea, while the museum men would be looking for a firm academic explanation of the mound. Ruth is persistent in her belief, and the dialogue does not suggest that she is concerned with the museum men’s interpretation or findings.
C. Incorrect. Ruth merely states her interpretation and says that she thinks she hears the Serpent Mound singing sometimes. She does not seek to make the speaker agree with her.
D. CORRECT. Beginning in line 37, after the speaker suggests the mound is swallowing the sun, Ruth disagrees. The poet uses the word “insisted” in line 39 to show that Ruth firmly believes in her own interpretation of the mound.
Question analysis
This point-of-view question asks how the poet of “Serpent Mound” uses dialogue to contrast the speaker’s and Ruth’s views of the mound in the poem’s closing lines. Students must read Ruth’s few words closely, since each choice credits her with a different attitude toward her own interpretation.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Analyzing how a writer contrasts two characters’ points of view is exactly what the grade 7 standard describes. The dialogue is only a few lines long, but each choice describes Ruth’s attitude in a different way.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Reading between the lines moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: 354 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 8, 78 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The dialogue is only a few lines, and every choice is about Ruth’s attitude toward her own reading. “Insisted” is the hinge: it can sound like pressing someone to agree, but nothing follows that asks the speaker anything. The hedge “Sometimes I think” can also be misread as worry, though it introduces what she hears, not doubt about her view.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about Ruth wanting agreement and the key both rest on “she insisted”; they differ in whether insisting aims to win the speaker over or shows her mind is already made up. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
Ruth’s attitude is never named, so students must read it from “she disagreed,” “she insisted” and the clipped “Not swallowing, singing,” and from what she does not do: ask for agreement. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Strategy: Reread lines 37–41 and describe Ruth’s attitude in a few words of your own before looking at the choices, then pick the one the lines themselves show.
Traps
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Wrong tone or attitude: Misjudges the tone, attitude or point of view, such as reading admiration as criticism, or taking a character's or subject's feelings for the author's.
The wrong answers, classified
A Wrong tone or attitude (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Hears doubt in “Sometimes I think / I hear it,” but that hedge is about a sound on summer nights, and “insisted” shows confidence, not worry about seeming too fanciful.
B Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Brings the museum men into a talk they are not part of; Ruth speaks only to the speaker, later, and never mentions the men or their findings.
C Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Reads “insisted” as an effort to win the speaker over, but Ruth only states her view and what she hears, and asks for no agreement.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks what the poet shows by using dialogue, the words people say to each other. The speaker and Ruth have different points of view about the mound. You need to decide what Ruth’s words show about her attitude, or how she feels about her own idea.
Read the dialogue in lines 37–41
The speaker tells Ruth the idea of “swallowing the sun.” The poem says “she disagreed. It is singing to the sun, / she insisted. That is why its mouth / is wide open.” Then she says, “Sometimes I think / I hear it on summer nights. Not swallowing, singing.”
Look closely at the word insisted
To insist is to say something firmly and refuse to back down. Ruth doesn’t say “maybe.” She doesn’t ask what the speaker thinks. She ends with three short words: “Not swallowing, singing.” That sounds final. She has her own reason, too: what she hears on summer nights. Her mind was made up before this talk began.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. “Sometimes I think” is about a sound she hears. It is not worry that her idea is too abstract, or too far from real things.
- B does not fit. Ruth talks only to the speaker, later. She never mentions the museum men.
- C does not fit. Ruth states her view, but she never asks the speaker to agree.
- D fits. “Insisted” and her firm last words show that her mind is made up.
Watch out: “Insisted” can sound like pushing someone to agree, which leads to C. But nothing in her words asks for agreement.
Choose the answer
Ruth’s firm words show she is sure of her own idea. So the answer is D, “show that Ruth has already decided on her interpretation of the mound.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong choice. Both C and D rest on the word “insisted.” But insisting can show that you are sure without trying to win anyone over. Ruth never asks whether the speaker agrees. She just states her view and what she hears. That shows her mind is already made up, which is what D says.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 39 of 120
2026 Practice Test C English, question 34Passage Excerpt from “Growing Peppers on the ISS Is Just the Start of Space Farming”
Excerpt from “Growing Peppers on the ISS Is Just the Start of Space Farming”
by Melanie Canales
The author, Melanie Canales, is a first-generation Peruvian American farmer and beekeeper based in Virginia’s Shenandoah Valley, on lands of the indigenous Monacan and Manahoac tribes. Her work focuses on creating healthy relationships between people and their surrounding ecosystems.
Unburdened by the constraints of gravity, red and green peppers jut out at 45-degree angles inside the Advanced Plant Habitat (APH), a sort of space terrarium not much larger than a microwave. Four chile pepper plants stand effortlessly upright, despite the dozens of glossy fruits weighing them down. These plants have lived entirely in space; their leaves have never been chewed on by insects or rustled by a summer breeze, [and] their stems are unfamiliar with bending toward the sun’s arc across the sky. Scissors glint under the tank’s white and blue lights as astronaut Mark Vande Hei and his team snip the stems of those that are ready for harvest. The peppers whirl around their heads until the astronauts catch them and tape them against a board to photograph.
Back on Earth, the Plant Habitat-04 team of engineers and plant scientists are observing and conferring with the astronauts. Of the 26 peppers in this batch, only the 14 finest will stay on the International Space Station [ISS] for consumption. The rest will be wrapped in foil, sealed in a Ziploc bag, then frozen at a brisk −80 degrees, until they can come roaring back to Earth in the next cargo capsule to be studied later. Now, after a 137-day growth cycle, the astronauts remove the plants from the module and trash them. Project Plant Habitat-04 is complete. It’s taco night on the ISS.
Since 2014, NASA1 has experimented with growing lettuces, brassicas,2 and zinnias3 in space, an endeavor that relies on highly specialized technology over 50 years in the making. [Fall 2021’s] two successful pepper harvests . . . will provide data on the nutritional and psychological benefits of growing vegetables on-craft, as well as a crop’s ability to reliably produce long-term in microgravity. While controlled environmental agriculture is not new, the APH experiment represents an evolution in specialized growth habitats. It doesn’t aim to re-create Earth’s conditions, but to perfect each isolated variable of plant growth in the clinical environment of a spaceship.
“The Advanced Plant Habitat is the most complex plant growth system on orbit today,” says Lashelle Spencer, a plant scientist at NASA’s Kennedy Space Center. Its more than 180 sensors control and monitor temperature, humidity, and carbon dioxide. The astronauts can adjust the color and intensity of the light, and how much moisture the plants’ roots are getting. It waters itself.
It’s the day after Thanksgiving, and Spencer has been at Kennedy since 5 a.m. to facilitate the peppers’ final harvest. As part of the project team, she played a crucial role in preparing the seeds that were sent hurtling into space in June and guiding the astronauts through maintaining the plants in orbit. . . . Though astronauts can spend upwards of 100 days in space, their on-mission meals come dehydrated and pre-packaged; their vitamins and minerals are isolated in supplements, which lose nutritional value the longer they’re stored. Spencer’s goal is to create the conditions necessary for cultivating healthy plants in space, so those plants can sustain healthy astronauts on long-term missions. Astronaut food is great, she says—“especially the shrimp cocktail. But you’re missing that crunch. You’re missing that fresh pop of flavor, the green flavor that’s not there in that packaged food.”
The sensory experience of growing productive crops can also help mitigate4 the psychological effects of long-term space travel. . . . Spencer says the team cracked open the door of the APH every day to observe their vegetable companions with all the tenderness of home gardeners. When harvest day came, they batted their bounty around the ISS, taking selfies and delighting in watching the fruits pirouetting around the spacecraft. . . .
“We were thinking no heat, so that [the peppers] wouldn’t be dangerous, but maybe the astronauts need a little spice in their life,” says Paul Bosland, who along with his colleagues at the Chile Pepper Institute genetically engineered5 the NuMex Española Improved chile pepper seeds grown in Plant Habitat-04. . . .
Working with NASA, Bosland cultivated a variety that could accommodate both the nutritional needs of astronauts as well as the logistics of growing a plant in space. . . .
. . . The experiment is helping gather the data necessary to determine the nutritional content of crops grown in space, and therefore how many people they can feed, and for how long. Though much is still unknown, Spencer is certain of one thing that future astronauts will need to do: “I think in an optimal world, a scientist like me would say that they would be growing plants from day one. From the day they left to the day they came back, they would be growing them.”
From “Growing Peppers on the ISS Is Just the Start of Space Farming” by Melanie Canales from WIRED, December 21, 2021. Copyright © 2021 Condé Nast. All rights reserved.
1NASA: National Aeronautics and Space Administration
2brassicas: a large genus of herbs, such as broccoli and cabbage
3zinnias: a genus of herbs and low shrubs that have flowers at their heads
4mitigate: to make something less severe or harmful
5genetically engineered: combined parts of DNA from different plants to produce a new plant
Question
What is the best summary of the astronauts’ process for Project Plant Habitat-04?
- AAfter a 137-day growth cycle, the astronauts harvest the peppers while being observed and advised by plant scientists. The astronauts remove the peppers from the APH and photograph them before eating the most nutritious ones.
- BThe astronauts confer with plant scientists and engineers before selecting the 14 finest peppers to keep aboard the ISS for consumption. The remaining peppers are wrapped in foil and sent back to Kennedy Space Center to be studied.
- CWith the help of plant scientists, the astronauts carefully control and monitor the growing conditions in the APH, ultimately harvesting the peppers after a 137-day growth cycle. The astronauts choose 14 of the peppers for consumption and send the rest back to be studied.
- DAstronauts use specialized tools to plant and maintain genetically modified peppers aboard the ISS. After harvesting the fruit, the astronauts tape the peppers to a board to prevent them from floating around the module.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks for the best summary of the astronauts’ process for Project Plant Habitat-04.
A. Incorrect. Although this summary mentions the pepper harvest and photographing and eating the peppers, it leaves out an important part of the process: the team’s preparation for growing the peppers and the return to Earth of some harvested peppers for study.
B. Incorrect. This summary includes the selection of some peppers for consumption and the return of some peppers for research; however, it omits important information about the previous steps required to develop the process for growing peppers.
C. CORRECT. This summary accurately and completely summarizes the astronauts’ process for Project Plant Habitat-04: collaborating with plant scientists, controlling the APH conditions, completing the 137-day growth cycle, harvesting the peppers, choosing 14 peppers to eat, and sending the remaining peppers back for study.
D. Incorrect. This summary focuses on information incidental to the process of growing peppers for Project Plant Habitat-04, mentioning the use of genetically modified peppers and the taping of harvested peppers to a board to keep them from floating, while omitting important steps such as the monitoring of growth and the selection of peppers for consumption and study.
Question analysis
This summary question asks which of four two-sentence summaries best captures the astronauts’ process for Project Plant Habitat-04, the chile pepper experiment aboard the International Space Station described in a WIRED article on space farming. Every choice repeats real details from the excerpt, so students must check each one for accuracy and for completeness instead of stopping at the first familiar fact.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Summarizing a process is regular grade 7 work. These choices are long and two-part, and the steps are spread over several paragraphs of a technical article, but the excerpt tells the process in order, so the overall demand stays typical.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly understand
- What makes it hard
- Evidence in several places moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- A lot to read minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 10, 890 words; question and choices: about grade 11, 162 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Every summary is built from real details of the experiment, so the decision rests on completeness and accuracy rather than on recognition. Students who remember paragraph 2 best are drawn to the version that reports only the selection and the frozen peppers, while those who trust vivid details accept a meal of “the most nutritious” peppers or tape that stops them floating. The question rewards listing the stages, tending, harvesting, choosing and returning, before reading the choices.
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
The process has to be pieced together out of order: the harvest opens paragraph 1, the 14 kept and the rest frozen come in paragraph 2, and the adjustable light and moisture only in paragraph 4. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The summary about the 14 finest peppers and the frozen remainder is the key’s second sentence on its own; only the key adds the controlled growing conditions and the 137-day cycle before the harvest. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
A lot to read minor Understanding the question
Each choice is two sentences of 34 to 44 words, so four summaries that mix accurate and inaccurate details must be read and compared one step at a time. (Kintsch, 1998; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Strategy: Before reading the choices, list in order what happens to the pepper plants across the opening paragraphs, then test each summary for details the excerpt does not support and for stages it leaves out.
Traps
- Too narrow: A single detail offered as the central idea or a summary, or a summary that keeps minor details and leaves out an essential part.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
The wrong answers, classified
A Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Keeps the harvest, the photographs and the meal but drops the months of tending and the peppers sent back for study, and turns the “14 finest” into the most nutritious.
B Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Reports paragraph 2 faithfully, the 14 finest kept for meals and the rest frozen for study, but covers only harvest day and leaves out the 137 days of growing before it.
D Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Strings together side details, the engineered seeds and the board, and says the peppers were taped to stop them floating, though paragraph 1 says they were taped up to be photographed.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This question asks for the best summary. A summary retells the main steps in order, in a few words. It leaves out small details. It must also be accurate, with no facts the article doesn’t give. Here you sum up what the astronauts did in Project Plant Habitat-04, from start to finish.
Find the steps in the article
The steps are spread over several paragraphs, and not in order.
- Growing: Spencer guided “the astronauts through maintaining the plants in orbit” (paragraph 5). The astronauts “can adjust the color and intensity of the light” (paragraph 4).
- Harvest: the crew snips the ripe peppers (paragraph 1) “after a 137-day growth cycle” (paragraph 2).
- Choosing: “only the 14 finest will stay” on the station “for consumption” (paragraph 2). Consumption means eating.
- Sending back: the rest are frozen and sent “back to Earth in the next cargo capsule to be studied later” (paragraph 2).
Put the process in plain words
So the whole process has four parts. First, the astronauts tend the plants for months, with help from scientists on Earth. Second, they harvest the peppers after 137 days. Third, they keep the 14 best peppers to eat. Fourth, they send the rest back to Earth to be studied. A good summary needs all four parts.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. It skips the months of growing and the peppers sent back. It also says they ate “the most nutritious ones,” but the article says “the 14 finest.”
- B is wrong. It covers only harvest day and leaves out the 137 days of growing. The article also never says the peppers go to Kennedy Space Center.
- C is right. It has all four parts: tending the plants with the scientists’ help, harvesting after 137 days, keeping 14, and sending the rest back.
- D is wrong. It strings together side details. The peppers were taped to a board “to photograph,” not to stop them floating.
Watch out: B closely repeats paragraph 2, so it feels right. But a summary of the process must include the growing, too.
Choose the answer
Only one summary covers the whole process, from tending the plants to sending peppers home. So the answer is C, “With the help of plant scientists, the astronauts carefully control and monitor the growing conditions in the APH, ultimately harvesting the peppers after a 137-day growth cycle. The astronauts choose 14 of the peppers for consumption and send the rest back to be studied.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong answer. Its facts come from paragraph 2. But it starts on harvest day, so a reader would never learn that the astronauts tended the plants for 137 days. C keeps B’s ending and adds that growing stage. That makes C complete.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Excerpt from “Growing Peppers on the ISS Is Just the Start of Space Farming”” as printed (pages 50–51)


Question 40 of 120
2026 Practice Test C English, question 41Uses the passage above: “Excerpt from “Growing Peppers on the ISS Is Just the Start of Space Farming””.
Question
How is the quotation from Lashelle Spencer at the end of paragraph 9 relevant to the discussion of the peppers referred to in paragraph 2?
- AThe quotation indicates that larger batches of peppers need to be grown during future missions and suggests a slight criticism of the astronauts discussed in paragraph 2 for not dedicating more of their time to growing peppers during their mission.
- BThe quotation explains why the 137-day growth cycle mentioned in paragraph 2 is necessary and provides a suggestion on how to grow more peppers during the same growth cycle in future missions.
- CThe quotation helps explain why some of the peppers discussed in paragraph 2 needed to be sent back to Earth and that increasing the overall number of peppers grown in space will be important in future missions.
- DThe quotation provides context for understanding why the peppers discussed in paragraph 2 must be sealed and frozen prior to their return to Earth and suggests how this method might be improved in upcoming missions.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks how the quotation from Lashelle Spencer at the end of paragraph 9 is relevant to the discussion of the peppers referred to in paragraph 2.
A. Incorrect. The quotation from Spencer in paragraph 9 suggests that astronauts should spend more time on growing larger and more continuous batches of peppers during long missions, but it does not criticize astronauts for discarding plants and ending the experiment after the 137-day growth cycle.
B. Incorrect. While the quotation from Spencer in paragraph 9 stresses the value of spending more time growing plants in space, it does not provide specific details about the 137-day growth cycle or offer specific methods for producing more peppers within the same time frame.
C. CORRECT. The quotation from Spencer in paragraph 9 is relevant to the discussion of the peppers on the ISS in paragraph 2 because it emphasizes the importance of expanding plant-growing efforts on future space missions. Spencer suggests that rather than ending the experiment after the 137-day growth cycle, astronauts could continually replant and replenish their food supply from the beginning to the end of a long mission.
D. Incorrect. Although the quotation from Spencer in paragraph 9 conveys the importance of dedicating more time to growing plants in space, it does not explain why the peppers were sealed and frozen, nor does it suggest how this method for preserving them might be improved.
Question analysis
This question asks how Lashelle Spencer’s quotation at the end of the space-farming excerpt, her view of what future astronauts will need to do, relates to the account in paragraph 2 of how the pepper harvest was handled. Students must connect the article’s ending to its opening, and every choice is a long two-part statement whose halves have to be checked separately.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 readers explain how parts of a text relate, usually neighboring ones. This item links the last paragraph to the second, and its four choices run about forty words each in two parts, so it asks more than typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Reading between the lines moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- A lot to read moderate
- Evidence in several places minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 10, 890 words; question and choices: about grade 16, 163 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Each choice has one half that sounds connected to the quotation, so students must test both halves of all four. The criticism choice is the hardest to reject, since it correctly hears a call for more growing and only then misreads Spencer’s tone. The key itself is not airtight: its first half leans on the sentence before the quotation, about gathering nutrition data, so the answer is best confirmed by ruling out the others.
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
Spencer’s quotation never mentions paragraph 2; the link is that plants grown “from day one” to “the day they came back” contrast with one 137-day batch harvested and thrown away. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The criticism choice shares the key’s call for more growing on future missions and differs in its other half, a slight criticism of the crew that Spencer’s hopeful “in an optimal world” never makes. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
A lot to read moderate Understanding the question
The four choices run 32 to 40 words, and each joins two claims with “and,” so eight separate statements must be checked against the quotation and paragraph 2. (Kintsch, 1998; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Evidence in several places minor Working it out
The two parts to connect are the excerpt’s second paragraph and its last sentence, with six paragraphs on the habitat, Spencer and Bosland in between. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: Put Spencer’s closing quotation into your own words and recall how the pepper project ended in paragraph 2, then weigh both halves of every choice and keep the one the quotation and its paragraph best support.
Traps
- Half right: One half of a two-part choice is right and the other is not.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
The wrong answers, classified
A Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Rightly hears a call for larger, continuous harvests in “from day one,” then adds a criticism of the crew, though Spencer describes an ideal and blames no one.
B Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Connects the quotation to the 137-day cycle because both concern time, but Spencer neither explains why the cycle lasted that long nor suggests packing more peppers into it.
D Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Ties the quotation to the foil, sealing and freezing in paragraph 2 and to improving that method, though Spencer’s improvement is growing plants all mission long, not storing peppers.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This question links the end of the article to its beginning. Spencer speaks at the end of paragraph 9. Paragraph 2 tells what happened to the peppers. You need the choice that best explains how her words connect to those peppers. Each choice has two parts, and both must be true.
Recall the peppers in paragraph 2
Paragraph 2 says only “the 14 finest” peppers stay on the ISS to eat. The rest are frozen and sent “back to Earth in the next cargo capsule to be studied later.” Then, “after a 137-day growth cycle, the astronauts remove the plants from the module and trash them.” So the crew grew one batch, ate some, sent some home and threw the plants away.
Read the end of paragraph 9
Just before Spencer speaks, paragraph 9 says: “The experiment is helping gather the data necessary to determine the nutritional content of crops grown in space, and therefore how many people they can feed, and for how long.” Then Spencer says that in “an optimal world,” meaning the best possible world, astronauts “would be growing plants from day one.” She adds: “From the day they left to the day they came back, they would be growing them.”
Connect the two parts
The peppers sent home are studied. That gives the data paragraph 9 describes: how healthy space crops are and how many people they can feed. Spencer’s plan needs that data. You must know what a crop can feed before you plan meals for a whole trip. Her words also point to the future. Instead of one batch that ends in the trash, crews would grow plants all trip long. That means many more peppers.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. Spencer wants more growing, but she doesn’t criticize the crew. “In an optimal world” describes a hope, not a complaint.
- B is wrong. She never says why the cycle took 137 days. She doesn’t suggest squeezing more peppers into it, either.
- C is right. The returned peppers give the data, and growing “from day one” means more peppers in the future.
- D is wrong. She says nothing about freezing the peppers or a better way to store them.
Watch out: A gets the first half right. The criticism in its second half is what makes it wrong.
Choose the answer
Her words explain why some peppers went home to be studied and why more growing matters next time. So the answer is C, “The quotation helps explain why some of the peppers discussed in paragraph 2 needed to be sent back to Earth and that increasing the overall number of peppers grown in space will be important in future missions.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong answer. Like C, it hears Spencer calling for more plants on future trips. But A also says she criticizes the astronauts. She doesn’t. She calmly describes a perfect world. C keeps the right half and adds a link the paragraph supports: the peppers sent home give the data.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 41 of 120
2026 Practice Test C English, question 44Passage New York City and the Hudson Valley Brickmaking Industry
New York City and the Hudson Valley Brickmaking Industry
(1) Residents of New York City cannot help but notice that the buildings they are surrounded by are predominantly made of brick. (2) Indeed, one author described the bricks that make up some of New York City’s most recognizable landmarks, including the Empire State Building and the arches of the Brooklyn Bridge, as “an inescapable presence.” (3) Nearly 65 million people visit New York City every year to see these and other attractions. (4) Why was so much brick used in buildings constructed during the century before World War II? (5) The answer involves an explosion in New York City’s population that caused an increase in demand for bricks starting in the mid-1800s and lasting into the 1940s that affected the area more than 100 miles up the Hudson River Valley toward Albany. (6) When demand later declined, the industry would entirely disappear.
(7) New York City’s appetite for brick was fueled by surging population and demand for safer building materials. (8) The city’s population ballooned from about 313,000 people in 1840 to more than 7 million a century later. (9) Following large, destructive fires in the 1830s, the city had enacted laws requiring the use of fire-resistant materials. (10) Bricks turned out to be an inexpensive way for builders to quickly throw together a lot of structures while keeping building owners and safety inspectors happy.
(11) The brickmaking industry in the Hudson Valley skyrocketed. (12) At the industry’s peak, approximately 130 brick factories crammed themselves into a 120-mile stretch along the Hudson River. (13) These factories employed much of the region’s population. (14) Population growth in the Hudson River Valley after the mid-1800s was substantial, though percentage increases were smaller than those in New York City. (15) Even though the factories operated only during the summers, their production was immense. (16) Hudson Valley factories shipped over a billion bricks on barges down the river to New York City annually. (17) In fact, The New York Times declared, “It’s fairly safe to assume that any brick building constructed between 1800 and 1950 includes some form of sediment from the banks of the Hudson River.”
(18) History has proven, however, that boom times eventually end. (19) Shifting architectural trends halted not only the Hudson Valley’s brickmaking boom, but its entire industry. (20) Starting early in the twentieth century, architects and builders increasingly favored steel, glass, and concrete instead of brick. (21) By 1979, reduced demand for brick had driven every Hudson Valley brick factory out of business.
(22) The Hudson Valley’s brickmaking legacy lives on in the architecture of New York City. (23) Throughout the city, famous and ordinary buildings stand as evidence of the remarkable productivity achieved by the Valley’s brickmakers. (24) The brick buildings surrounding New Yorkers today serve as a reminder that, as one amateur brick historian put it, “The skyline of New York City used to be the landscape of the Hudson River Valley.”
Question
Which revision of sentence 10 would best maintain the style established in the passage?
- ABuilders turned to brick, which was an affordable material that met safety standards while satisfying the city’s large demand for buildings.
- BFiguring out that bricks were inexpensive, builders used tons of them to satisfy inspectors and the city’s desperate construction needs.
- CBuilders favored brick as a pleasingly economical way to meet significant construction demand while following municipal regulations.
- DOnce builders realized that low-cost brick was a law-abiding way to meet the city’s building needs, they hardly ever used any other materials.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks for the revision of sentence 10 that would best maintain the style established in the passage.
A. CORRECT. This sentence maintains the style established in the passage because it uses clear, precise, and formal language. The phrases “affordable material” and “met safety standards” are accurate and appropriate to the historical and technical context. The word “satisfying” is a precise replacement for “keeping building owners . . . happy” from the original sentence, preserving both the meaning and the formal tone of the passage.
B. Incorrect. Although the sentence conveys the same basic ideas as the passage, the phrases “Figuring out” and “tons of them” are informal and inconsistent with the passage’s formal style. In addition, the word “desperate” introduces a subjective and emotional tone, whereas the passage maintains an objective, fact-based style.
C. Incorrect. Although this sentence incorporates some formal vocabulary, the phrase “pleasingly economical” introduces an opinion that is inconsistent with formal historical writing. The passage’s style avoids subjective language and focuses on precise, factual descriptions of events and conditions. The phrase “municipal regulations” is also more technical and at the same time less clear and precise than the style established in the passage.
D. Incorrect. This sentence does not maintain the passage’s formal style because the phrase “law-abiding way” is awkward and informal for a historical description, and the expression “hardly ever” is conversational. The passage uses precise, objective language when describing building practices and material choices, avoiding casual or conversational phrasing.
Question analysis
This style question asks which revision of sentence 10 of the passage “New York City and the Hudson Valley Brickmaking Industry” best keeps the passage’s style. The original says bricks let builders “quickly throw together a lot of structures” while keeping owners and inspectors “happy.” Students compare four rewrites for wording that sounds casual, emotional or out of place.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Choosing wording that fits a passage’s formal style is regular grade 7 writing work. The four rewrites are single sentences on a familiar subject, but they differ in small word choices that must each be weighed, a typical grade 7 demand.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Every choice must be checked minor
- Something you must already know minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one sentence or line
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 12, 465 words; question and choices: about grade 13, 94 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A misquotation of the passage in the explanation was corrected.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Sentence 10 is the passage’s most casual sentence, so the task is to raise its register without overshooting. Students who equate formality with long words fall for the rewrite with “pleasingly economical” and “municipal regulations,” which sounds official but adds an opinion. Others overlook the chatty “tons of them,” or miss that “hardly ever used any other materials” claims more than the original does. The plain, accurate key can look too ordinary to be best.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The “pleasingly economical” rewrite carries the same three ideas as the key, low cost, heavy demand and the rules, in grander words; only its opinion word and the stiffer “municipal regulations” set it apart. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Every choice must be checked minor Choosing the answer
Each rewrite hides its off-key words among neutral ones, “tons of them” and “desperate,” “pleasingly,” “hardly ever,” so every phrase must be checked, not the overall sound. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Something you must already know minor Working it out
Students must already know what counts as formal written English, and the passage’s own lively verbs, “ballooned,” “skyrocketed” and “crammed themselves,” make its style harder to pin down. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Strategy: Spot what makes sentence 10 sound casual, then check every phrase of each rewrite, not just its overall sound, for chatty, emotional or opinionated wording, and make sure the facts stay the same.
Traps
- Wordy, vague or informal: A revision is grammatical but wordy, imprecise or too casual for the passage.
- Changes the meaning: A revision is correct English but no longer says what the writer meant.
The wrong answers, classified
B Wordy, vague or informal (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Keeps the meaning but slips into casual talk, “Figuring out” and “tons of them,” and adds the emotional “desperate,” none of which fits the passage’s factual voice.
C Wordy, vague or informal (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Mistakes elevated words for good style: “municipal regulations” sounds official, but “pleasingly economical” injects an opinion and the wording is less clear than the passage’s plain statements.
D Changes the meaning (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Overlooks the conversational “hardly ever” and claims builders almost never used other materials, far more than sentence 10, which says only that brick was cheap, quick and acceptable to inspectors.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: The handbook’s explanation of Option A calls “satisfying” a replacement for “keeping owners happy” from the original sentence. Sentence 10 ends “while keeping building owners and safety inspectors happy,” so the site now quotes “keeping building owners . . . happy.”
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This question is about style, the way a passage sounds. You need a new version of sentence 10 that sounds like the rest of the passage. The passage is an informational article. It uses clear, serious, factual language. It has no slang or chatty phrases, and the writer doesn’t share feelings.
Spot the casual words in sentence 10
Sentence 10 says: “Bricks turned out to be an inexpensive way for builders to quickly throw together a lot of structures while keeping building owners and safety inspectors happy.” Three phrases sound like everyday talk: “throw together,” “a lot of,” and “keeping … happy.” Here is the rule with a made-up example. Casual: The kids threw together a ton of posters. Formal: The students quickly made many posters.
See how A keeps the meaning
Choice A says the same things in formal words. “Inexpensive” becomes “affordable material.” Keeping the safety inspectors happy becomes “met safety standards.” The word “satisfying” takes the place of keeping the building owners happy. And the many buildings become the city’s “large demand for buildings.” Nothing is added, and no feelings slip in.
Check each choice
- A is right. It is clear, exact and serious, like the rest of the passage.
- B is wrong. “Figuring out” and “tons of them” are chatty. “Desperate” adds strong feeling.
- C is wrong. “Pleasingly” gives the writer’s opinion. “Municipal regulations” is stiff and less clear than plain words like city rules.
- D is wrong. “Hardly ever” is chatty, and “law-abiding way” is awkward. It also claims builders almost never used other materials. Sentence 10 never says that.
Watch out: C uses long, official-sounding words, so it can seem the most formal. But formal writing still avoids opinions.
Choose the answer
Only one version sounds like the rest of the passage and keeps the meaning. So the answer is A, “Builders turned to brick, which was an affordable material that met safety standards while satisfying the city’s large demand for buildings.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong answer. It carries the same three ideas as A: low cost, high demand and the rules. But “pleasingly economical” tells you how the writer feels about brick. The passage reports facts and doesn’t judge. A says the same things plainly and without an opinion.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “New York City and the Hudson Valley Brickmaking Industry” as printed (page 64)

Question 42 of 120
2026 Practice Test C English, question 45Uses the passage above: “New York City and the Hudson Valley Brickmaking Industry”.
Question
Which two sentences present information irrelevant to the ideas in the passage and should be deleted?
Move the two correct answers to the box.
Should Be Deleted
On the test you drag tiles into the box; here, choose them below. The DOE has not published how answers with several parts are scored; this site counts one right only when every part is right.
- A“Nearly 65 million people visit New York City every year to see these and other attractions.” (sentence 3)
- B“The city’s population ballooned from about 313,000 people in 1840 to more than 7 million a century later.” (sentence 8)
- C“Population growth in the Hudson River Valley after the mid-1800s was substantial, though percentage increases were smaller than those in New York City.” (sentence 14)
- D“History has proven, however, that boom times eventually end.” (sentence 18)
- E“Throughout the city, famous and ordinary buildings stand as evidence of the remarkable productivity achieved by the Valley’s brickmakers.” (sentence 23)
Show the answer
Correct answer: A and C
The question asks which two sentences present information irrelevant to the ideas of the passage and should be deleted.
CORRECT. “Nearly 65 million people visit New York City every year to see these and other attractions” (sentence 3) presents irrelevant information and should be deleted. While the statistic is interesting, it focuses on tourism, which is not relevant to either the topic of the passage—the growth and decline of the brickmaking industry—or to the ideas in the first paragraph (sentences 1–6), which focus on the prominence of brick in New York City’s buildings.
Incorrect. “The city’s population ballooned from about 313,000 people in 1840 to more than 7 million a century later” (sentence 8) is relevant to the ideas of the passage and should not be deleted. The numerical details in sentence 8 about the rapid growth in New York City provide relevant evidence that supports a central idea of the passage: that the brickmaking industry of the Hudson River Valley expanded quickly to supply the demands of builders who were, in turn, meeting the demands of a booming population.
CORRECT. “Population growth in the Hudson River Valley after the mid-1800s was substantial, though percentage increases were smaller than those in New York City” (sentence 14) presents irrelevant details and should be deleted. The information in sentence 14 comparing population growth rates between the region and New York City is not needed to develop the passage’s central focus on the rise and decline of the Hudson River Valley’s brickmaking industry. The sentence also does not support ideas in the third paragraph (sentences 11–17). Although it mentions that brick factories employed much of the Hudson River Valley population, the productivity of the factories, rather than the Valley’s population, is the topic of the paragraph.
Incorrect. “History has proven, however, that boom times eventually end” (sentence 18) is relevant to the ideas of the passage and should not be deleted. Sentence 18 effectively introduces the central idea of the passage: the decline of the Hudson River Valley brickmaking industry. The sentence also serves as a clear transition from the third paragraph (sentences 11–17), which provides evidence of the industry’s boom, to the fourth paragraph (sentences 18–21), which provides details about how the industry came to an end.
Incorrect. “Throughout the city, famous and ordinary buildings stand as evidence of the remarkable productivity achieved by the Valley’s brickmakers” (sentence 23) is relevant to the ideas of the passage and should not be deleted. The mention of famous and ordinary buildings provides an effective link to introductory sentences 1 and 2, strengthening the passage’s conclusion, while also emphasizing the productivity of the Hudson Valley brickmaking industry detailed in the third paragraph (sentences 11–17).
Question analysis
This revising question asks which two of five sentences from the passage on the Hudson Valley brickmaking industry present irrelevant information and should be deleted. On the test students move two sentence tiles into a box labeled Should Be Deleted, and both must be right. The five sentences come one from each paragraph, so each must be judged against its own paragraph and the whole passage.
- NYS standards
- 7W2b developing a topic
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 revision usually asks for one off-topic sentence within one paragraph. Here students check five sentences spread over the whole passage, must find two, and get credit only if both are right, a broader demand than typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- How sentences fit together moderate
- Much to keep track of minor
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 12, 465 words; question and choices: about grade 10, 114 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A missing hyphen in a quotation in the explanation was restored.
- A grammatical error in the explanation was corrected.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Sentence 3 announces itself: tourism has nothing to do with brick. The second deletion is the trap, because sentence 14 sits after a sentence about factories employing the region’s population and looks like a continuation. Students who reject population as a topic often delete sentence 8 instead, which measures a cause the passage names, and students who judge by sound cut the general “boom times eventually end,” which turns the passage toward the industry’s decline.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
Sentences 8 and 14 are both population statistics; what separates them is that sentence 8 measures the “surging population” sentence 7 names as a cause, while the Valley’s growth in sentence 14 explains nothing. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
How sentences fit together moderate Working it out
Each kept sentence earns its place by its links: sentence 18 turns from boom to decline, sentence 23 echoes the landmarks of sentences 1–2, and sentence 14 merely follows sentence 13’s “region’s population.” (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Much to keep track of minor Working it out
Five tiles, one from each paragraph, are judged against both their paragraph and the whole passage, and both picks must be right, so two relevance tests run side by side. (Sweller, 1988; Carpenter, Just & Shell, 1990)
Strategy: Sum up the passage’s topic in one phrase, then read each of the five sentences in its paragraph and ask whether removing it would leave a gap in the ideas around it; delete only sentences that leave none.
Traps
- Fixes what isn't broken: Changes a part of the sentence that was already correct, while the real error stays; or, where the question asks which sentence has an error or should go, picks one that is correct and belongs.
- Off the point: Adds or keeps something that does not support the paragraph's or the passage's focus, or an introduction or conclusion that misses the main point.
The wrong answers, classified
B Fixes what isn't broken (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Sees a population figure in a passage about bricks and cuts it, missing that sentence 7 names “surging population” as a cause of demand and sentence 8 measures it.
D Fixes what isn't broken (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Hears “boom times eventually end” as a cliché that adds nothing, though sentence 18 opens the fourth paragraph and turns the passage from the industry’s growth to its decline.
E Fixes what isn't broken (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Thinks sentence 23 only repeats the conclusion around it, though it ties the brickmakers’ output back to the famous buildings of sentences 1–2.
C Off the point (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Left unchosen by students who link it to factories that “employed much of the region’s population,” though the paragraph is about the factories’ output, not the Valley’s growth.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: The handbook’s explanation quotes sentence 14 as “Population growth in the Hudson River Valley after the mid 1800s was substantial.” The passage and the tile say “mid-1800s,” so the site now quotes it that way.
- Explanation: The handbook’s explanation says “The information in sentence 14 comparing population growth rates between the region and New York City are not needed.” The subject is “information,” so the site now says “is not needed.”
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
You need to find two sentences that don’t belong. A sentence is irrelevant when it has nothing to do with the main ideas. You can delete it without leaving a gap. On the test you drag two tiles into the Should Be Deleted box. Here, you choose two of the five. Both must be right.
Name the topic of the passage
The passage explains why New York City has so many brick buildings. It tells how the Hudson Valley brick industry grew to meet that demand, then died out. Each paragraph has its own job. Paragraph 1 asks why so much brick was used. Paragraph 2 gives the causes. Paragraph 3 shows how much the factories made. Paragraph 4 tells how the industry ended. Paragraph 5 sums up.
Test sentences 3 and 14
Sentence 3 says: “Nearly 65 million people visit New York City every year to see these and other attractions.” That is about tourists, not bricks. Sentence 14 says: “Population growth in the Hudson River Valley after the mid-1800s was substantial, though percentage increases were smaller than those in New York City.” Paragraph 3 is about how much the factories made, “over a billion bricks” a year. How fast the Valley grew explains nothing about bricks.
Test the other three sentences
- Sentence 8 stays. Sentence 7 says the hunger for brick was “fueled by surging population.” Sentence 8 gives the numbers that show it.
- Sentence 18 stays. It turns the passage from the boom to the decline. A boom is a time of fast growth.
- Sentence 23 stays. It links back to the famous buildings in sentences 1 and 2 and praises the brickmakers.
Watch out: Sentence 14 comes right after one about factories that “employed much of the region’s population.” So it seems to fit. But it changes the topic from factories to population.
Choose the answers
Sentences 3 and 14 add facts that don’t help explain the brick industry. So the answers are A and C. Move these two tiles into the Should Be Deleted box. A is “Nearly 65 million people visit New York City every year to see these and other attractions.” (sentence 3). C is “Population growth in the Hudson River Valley after the mid-1800s was substantial, though percentage increases were smaller than those in New York City.” (sentence 14).
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong answer, since sentences 8 and 14 are both about population. But sentence 8 measures the “surging population” that sentence 7 names as a cause of the demand for brick. Sentence 14 explains nothing about bricks. So delete 14 and keep 8.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 43 of 120
2026 Practice Test C English, question 46Uses the passage above: “New York City and the Hudson Valley Brickmaking Industry”.
Question
Which phrase should be added to the beginning of sentence 11 to provide the best transition from the ideas in sentence 10?
- AWhile adapting to new uses for brick,
- BBecause the building boom preferred brick,
- CAs a result of New York City’s building boom,
- DAlthough reliance on brick became the norm,
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks which phrase should be added to the beginning of sentence 11 to provide the best transition from the ideas in sentence 10.
A. Incorrect. The phrase “While adapting to new uses for brick” is not the best transition to place at the beginning of sentence 11 because it does not accurately describe the content of sentence 10. Although sentence 10 conveys that brick was a low-cost way for builders to adapt to two new demands—New York City’s need for a lot of new buildings and its recently changed fire-safety laws—neither sentence 10 nor any of the preceding sentences in the second paragraph (sentences 7–10) indicate that builders found any new ways to use bricks. The focus is on the amount of bricks used, rather than any changes in how the builders used them.
B. Incorrect. Although the phrase “Because the building boom preferred brick” accurately indicates a cause-and-effect relationship between builders using a lot of bricks and the skyrocketing brick production mentioned in sentence 11, it overstates the position of builders described in sentence 10. While sentence 10 says that builders found bricks to be a low-cost way of meeting several needs, it does not say that builders actually preferred to use bricks. In addition, the phrase is awkward and imprecise because a “building boom” cannot literally “prefer” something. Thus, this is not the best transition phrase to add to sentence 11.
C. CORRECT. The transition phrase “As a result of New York City’s building boom” clearly conveys the cause-and-effect relationship between sentence 10, which describes a trend among New York City’s builders to use a lot of bricks to “quickly throw together a lot of structures while keeping building owners and safety inspectors happy,” and sentence 11, which points out a result of the building trend: brickmaking skyrocketed in the nearby Hudson River Valley.
D. Incorrect. The word “although” in the transition phrase “Although reliance on brick became the norm,” incorrectly indicates an opposing relationship that does not exist between the ideas in sentences 10 and 11. Sentence 10 explains how using a lot of bricks helped New York City’s builders meet the demands of a building boom and new safety regulations. As sentence 16 details, many of the bricks made in the Hudson River Valley were shipped “down the river to New York City.” Thus, it is not logical that the skyrocketing growth of the brickmaking industry in the Hudson River Valley described in sentence 11 happened “although” or despite New York City builders using a lot of brick. Therefore, this transition is not the best one to place at the beginning of sentence 11.
Question analysis
This transition question asks which phrase should open sentence 11 of the brickmaking passage, where the third paragraph begins with the Hudson Valley industry that “skyrocketed,” to connect it with sentence 10 about how New York City’s builders used brick. Students must name the relationship between the two paragraphs, and more than one phrase sounds reasonable on a first reading.
- NYS standards
- 7W2d transitions in informative writing
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Choosing a transition that shows how ideas relate is standard grade 7 writing work. Here the link crosses from one paragraph to the next, and each phrase must be checked for the relationship it signals and for accurate wording, a typical grade 7 demand.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- How sentences fit together moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 12, 465 words; question and choices: about grade 5, 49 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Most students sense that the Hudson Valley boom follows from New York City’s appetite for brick, which rules out the contrast of “Although” quickly. The real decision is between two phrases that both signal a cause: one names the building boom accurately, the other gives the boom a preference it cannot have and that sentence 10 never states. The question rewards checking a transition’s own words as well as the relationship it signals.
How sentences fit together moderate Working it out
The phrase must bridge two paragraphs: sentence 10 ends the account of New York City’s builders turning to brick, and sentence 11 opens with the Hudson Valley industry that “skyrocketed,” its result. (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The “Because the building boom preferred brick” phrase signals the same cause and effect as the key; only its wording, a boom that “preferred” something, separates the two. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Before reading the phrases, name how sentence 11 relates to sentences 7–10, then pick the phrase that signals that relationship and is also accurate and logical in its own words.
Traps
- Wrong transition: A connecting word or phrase that signals the wrong relationship, such as contrast where the idea continues.
- Changes the meaning: A revision is correct English but no longer says what the writer meant.
- Wordy, vague or informal: A revision is grammatical but wordy, imprecise or too casual for the passage.
The wrong answers, classified
A Changes the meaning (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Accepts an opener about “adapting to new uses for brick,” though sentence 10 describes builders using more brick, not new uses, and “While” hides the cause and effect.
B Wordy, vague or informal (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Sees the cause and effect correctly but accepts a phrase in which a building boom “preferred” brick, which is illogical and claims a preference sentence 10 never states.
D Wrong transition (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Likes “reliance on brick became the norm” as a summary of sentence 10, but “Although” signals a contrast where the Valley’s growth follows from that reliance.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
A transition is a word or phrase that shows how two ideas connect. You need one to start sentence 11. It must show how sentence 11 follows from sentence 10. It must also make sense in its own words.
Read sentences 10 and 11
Sentence 10 says bricks were a cheap way for builders “to quickly throw together a lot of structures.” That ends a paragraph about New York City’s huge demand for brick. Sentence 11 starts a new paragraph: “The brickmaking industry in the Hudson Valley skyrocketed.” Skyrocketed means it grew very fast.
Name the link between them
Why did the brick industry grow so fast? Because New York City was building so much with brick. So sentence 10 is the cause, and sentence 11 is the effect. Here is a made-up example: It rained all week. As a result, the river rose. You need a phrase that shows cause and effect, in accurate words.
Check each phrase
- A is wrong. The passage never mentions “new uses for brick.” Builders used more brick, not new kinds. “While” also hides the cause.
- B is wrong. It shows cause and effect, but a building boom can’t “prefer” anything. Only people can. And sentence 10 says brick was cheap, not that builders liked it best.
- C is right. “As a result of” shows cause and effect. A building boom, a time of very fast building, matches sentences 7–10.
- D is wrong. “Although” signals a contrast, a turn against the idea before. There is no contrast here.
Watch out: B gets the link right. Its words are what make it wrong.
Choose the answer
With the phrase in place, sentence 11 reads: As a result of New York City’s building boom, the brickmaking industry in the Hudson Valley skyrocketed. So the answer is C, “As a result of New York City’s building boom,”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong answer. Like C, it shows that the Valley’s growth was caused by the building boom. But it says the boom “preferred” brick, as if a boom could have opinions. Sentence 10 also never says brick was preferred. C names the cause in clear, accurate words.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 44 of 120
2026 Practice Test C Math, question 1Question
What is the prime factorization of 756?
- A
- B
- C
- D
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
Determine the prime factors of 756 using a factor tree:

The prime factors are 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, and 7, or , which can be expressed using exponents as .
Question analysis
This number question asks for the prime factorization of 756, written with exponents. Students break the number into prime factors, with a factor tree or repeated division, and match the result to one of four products. Every choice multiplies back to 756, so the real test is whether each factor shown is actually prime.
- Grade level
- Grade 6 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Factor trees and exponent notation are grade 6 skills, and 756 splits quickly by small divisors. What adds a little is that every choice multiplies out to 756, so checking the product alone settles nothing.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Something you must already know minor
- Solution
- 3 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 11, 10 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The factoring itself is quick: halving twice and dividing by 3 three times leaves 7. The question is built so that multiplying back proves nothing, since every choice equals 756, and three of them simply stop the factor tree at a composite number. Students who check only the product, or who take an odd factor such as 21 or 27 for a prime, pick a factorization that is unfinished.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
2² · 3² · 21 shares the right answer's 2² and differs only in 3² · 21 against 3³ · 7, and both equal 756, so neither an estimate nor a product check separates them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Something you must already know minor Working it out
Students must know that a prime factorization may hold only primes, and must spot that 21, 9 and 27 are composite even though none of them is even. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Strategy: Divide 756 by 2 while the result is even, then by 3 while it divides evenly, and keep going until every factor left is prime; then compare factor by factor, not by product.
Traps
- Stops one step early: A choice is a number from partway through the solution.
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
The wrong answers, classified
A Stops one step early (King et al., 2004; Gierl et al., 2017)
Divides out 2 twice and 3 twice, then stops at 21, which is 3 × 7, so one composite factor remains in a product that still equals 756.
B Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Splits off a 3 and a 7 but keeps 9 as if it were prime, perhaps because it is odd, though 9 = 3 × 3.
C Stops one step early (King et al., 2004; Gierl et al., 2017)
Splits 756 into 4 × 189 and 189 into 7 × 27, then stops, not seeing that 27 is 3 × 3 × 3.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Writing a repeated factor with an exponent
- a is the number being multiplied, called the base. n is the exponent, the small raised number. It tells how many times a appears in the product. So 2² means 2 × 2, and 3³ means 3 × 3 × 3. Exponents are a short way to write a factor that repeats.
Sort out the question
You need the prime factorization of 756. That means writing 756 as a product of prime numbers only. A product is the answer to a multiplication. A prime number has exactly two factors, 1 and itself. Examples are 2, 3, 5 and 7.
All four choices multiply to 756. So multiplying a choice back does not pick the answer. You must check that every factor is prime.
Divide by 2 while you can
A factor tree splits a number into two factors, again and again. Start with the smallest prime, 2. 756 is even, so 2 goes into it:
378 is even too:
189 is odd, so 2 does not go into it. You have pulled out two 2s.
Divide by 3 while you can
Add the digits of 189: . A number can be divided by 3 when its digits add up to a number that 3 goes into. 3 goes into 18, so it goes into 189:
7 is prime, so the tree stops. You have pulled out three 3s and one 7.
Write the factors with exponents
Collect every prime you pulled out:
Use the exponent rule. Two 2s make , and three 3s make . The choices use a raised dot, ·, for times. So 756 is .
Choose the answer
Watch out: each wrong choice is a factor tree that stopped too soon. A ends in 21, which is 3 × 7. B has 9, which is 3 × 3. C has 27, which is 3 × 3 × 3. Being odd does not make a number prime.
Only D uses primes alone. So the answer is D, .
Check your answer
Multiply your answer back: , and . Then look at each factor. 2, 3 and 7 are all prime. D passes both tests.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 45 of 120
2026 Practice Test C Math, question 3Question
What is the value of x in the equation shown above?
- A336
- B240
- C−240
- D−336
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
Simplify . First, subtract x from both sides of the equation. Then, divide both sides by 5.
Question analysis
This algebra question gives the equation 6x = x − 1,680, with x on both sides, and asks for the value of x. Students collect the x terms on one side and divide by the coefficient that remains. The choices pair two sizes with both signs, so every move across the equals sign has to keep its sign right.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 An unknown on both sides of the equals sign is a grade 8 topic, yet gathering the x terms here takes one subtraction and one division, the same work as a two-step grade 7 equation.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Error-prone arithmetic moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 5, 12 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A line of the explanation’s working, printed without its fraction bars and equals sign, was restored.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Collecting the x terms takes one subtraction, and the only way the method goes wrong is moving x across the equals sign, which turns the 5 into a 7. The sign is the bigger hazard: 6x equals x minus a large number, so x must be negative, yet the division 1,680 ÷ 5 is done on positive numbers. Substituting −336 back gives −2,016 on each side, which confirms both the size and the sign.
Error-prone arithmetic moderate Working it out
Subtracting x from both sides leaves 5x = −1,680, and 1,680 ÷ 5 = 336 has to be worked out by hand while the negative sign is carried through to the result. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choices are two sizes, 336 and 240, each offered with both signs, so 336 and −336 are written the same except for the minus; only tracking the sign of 1,680 separates them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Subtract x from both sides so the unknown appears once, divide by the coefficient that is left, and substitute the result into both sides to check that they match.
Traps
- Negatives and direction: Arithmetic with negative numbers, the order of a subtraction, or direction on a number line. (Moving a term across the equals sign without changing its sign is a faulty procedure.)
- A faulty procedure: A systematic but wrong procedure: adding fractions straight across, applying an exponent to each term of a sum, dropping a sign when moving a term.
The wrong answers, classified
A Negatives and direction (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Reaches 5x = −1,680 correctly but drops the negative sign when dividing by 5, giving a positive 336 of the right size.
B A faulty procedure (Brown & Burton, 1978; Tatsuoka, 1983)
Moves x to the left without changing its sign, getting 7x, and also loses the minus on 1,680, so 1,680 ÷ 7 = 240.
C A faulty procedure (Brown & Burton, 1978; Tatsuoka, 1983)
Moves x to the left side without changing its sign, writing 6x + x = −1,680, so divides by 7 and gets −240.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: The DOE’s explanation page for this question is one of the pages replaced in the appendix, and on it the step between 5x = −1,680 and x = −336 shows only 5x over 5 and −1,680 over 5: the two fraction bars and the equals sign between them are missing, so the line is not an equation. The sentence above it says to divide both sides by 5, and the 2022–23 guide, which first printed this explanation, prints the step as 5x/5 = −1,680/5. The site shows 5x/5 = −1,680/5.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Keeping an equation balanced
- a and b are the two sides of an equation, and c is any number (not 0 when you divide). An equation is like a balanced scale. Subtract the same thing from both sides, or divide both sides by the same number, and it stays balanced.
- Dividing a negative by a positive
- a and b are positive numbers, so −a is negative. Divide the sizes as usual. Then give the answer a minus sign, because a negative divided by a positive is negative.
Sort out the question
The equation is . You need the value of x. Here 6x means 6 times x. The unknown x is on both sides. So first gather it on one side.
Subtract x from both sides
Take x away from both sides. On the right, x − x is 0, so only −1,680 is left:
Six x’s take away one x leaves five x’s.
Watch out: moving x to the left without changing its sign gives 7x. Dividing by 7 then leads to choice C, −240, or B, 240.
Divide both sides by 5
5x means 5 times x. Divide both sides by 5 to undo it:
Find the size first. Split 1,680 into 1,500 + 180:
A negative divided by a positive is negative:
Choose the answer
Watch out: the minus sign is easy to drop. Positive 336 is choice A. Carry the sign of −1,680 all the way to the end.
So the answer is D, −336.
Check your answer
Put −336 into both sides. The left side is . The right side is . The two sides match, so x = −336 is right.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 46 of 120
2026 Practice Test C Math, question 7Question
For what values of x is the above inequality true?
- A
- B
- C
- D
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
Divide to solve for x:
Rewriting with the x term first requires reversing the inequality symbol in order to keep the meaning “x is less than ”.
Question analysis
This inequality question asks which values of x make −12 > 6x true. Students solve a one-step inequality by dividing and then state the solution with x written first. A negative number on one side and the variable on the other make the direction of the symbol the main thing to get right.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Grade 7 inequalities usually take two steps, such as 3x + 4 > 19. This one needs a single division, and the care goes into reading the result correctly when the variable ends up on the right of the symbol.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Something you must already know minor
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 10, 15 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
One division finds the boundary, so the question is really about direction. Two things pull students the wrong way: the −12 on the left makes the inequality look like one that must be flipped, and the result −2 > x has x on the right, where it is easy to read backward. Testing x = −3, which gives −12 > −18, shows that values below −2 work.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
x < −2 and x > −2 share the boundary −2 and differ only in direction, so finding the right number settles nothing until the direction is read correctly. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Something you must already know minor Working it out
Students must know that the symbol flips only when both sides are multiplied or divided by a negative number, and that −2 > x says the same as x < −2. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Strategy: Divide both sides by 6, asking whether you divided by a negative number, then rewrite the result with x on the left so that the symbol still opens toward the larger side.
Traps
- Negatives and direction: Arithmetic with negative numbers, the order of a subtraction, or direction on a number line. (Moving a term across the equals sign without changing its sign is a faulty procedure.)
- Wrong operation: Adds instead of multiplying, divides the wrong way round, turns a ratio or rate upside down, or undoes a step in the wrong direction (subtracts what should be added back).
The wrong answers, classified
A Wrong operation (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; King et al., 2004)
Adds 6 to −12 instead of dividing by 6, getting −6, and also reverses the direction, so both the boundary and the symbol are wrong.
B Wrong operation (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; King et al., 2004)
Undoes the 6 by adding it to −12 rather than dividing, as if 6x meant x − 6, getting −6 > x and so x < −6.
D Negatives and direction (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Finds −2 > x but flips the symbol because −12 is negative, or reads −2 > x as x > −2, though dividing by a positive 6 keeps the direction.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Dividing both sides of an inequality
- a and b are the two sides of an inequality, and c is the number you divide by. If c is positive, the symbol stays the same. It flips only when you multiply or divide both sides by a negative number. Here c is 6, which is positive.
- Reading an inequality the other way
- a and b are any two numbers. Saying a is greater than b is the same as saying b is less than a. When you swap the two sides, turn the symbol around. Its point still aims at the smaller number.
Sort out the question
The inequality is . The symbol > means is greater than. So it says −12 is greater than 6 times x. You need every value of x that makes this true.
Divide both sides by 6
To get x alone, divide both sides by 6:
You divided by 6, which is positive. So the symbol does not flip.
Watch out: −12 is negative, but that does not matter. Only dividing by a negative number flips the symbol.
Put x first
says −2 is greater than x. That means x is less than −2. Swap the sides and turn the symbol around:
Watch out: keeping > when you swap the sides gives choice D, . That is the opposite meaning.
Choose the answer
Choices A and B use −6. That comes from adding 6 to −12 instead of dividing by 6. The right boundary is −2, and x is below it.
So the answer is C, .
Check your answer
Test a number below −2, such as −3. Then , and is true. Now test 0, which is above −2. Then , and is false. So only numbers below −2 work.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 47 of 120
2026 Practice Test C Math, question 8Question
Jordan is helping plan snacks for a school dance. He knows that 0.75 of the students voted for pizza, and he wants to record the same amount using a fraction.
Which fractions are equivalent to the decimal 0.75?
Select the four correct answers.
Choose every answer that is correct, then check. The DOE has not published how answers with several parts are scored; this site counts one right only when every part is right.
- A
- B
- C
- D
- E
- F
Show the answer
Correct answer: A, B, C, and E
Check each fraction to determine whether it is equal to 0.75 when simplified or converted to a decimal.
This is the most common fraction equal to 0.75.
Simplifies to 3/4, because 15 and 20 can both be divided by 5.
This is a direct match to 0.75 when written as a decimal.
, which is less than 0.75.
Simplifies to because both 6 and 8 can be divided by 2.
, which is more than 0.75.
Question analysis
Jordan wants to record 0.75 of the students' pizza votes as a fraction, and students select the four fractions, out of six, that equal 0.75. It tests converting between decimals and fractions and recognizing equivalent fractions. Each choice has to be checked by its value, not by how its numbers look.
- NYS standards
- 7.NS.2d fractions to decimals by long division
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Matching fractions to a decimal such as 0.75 builds on grade 4 to 6 work, and the denominators here divide easily. The added demand is the format: four of the six must be chosen, and one wrong or missing pick loses the item.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Every choice must be checked moderate
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Much to keep track of minor
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 5, 47 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Three of the four right fractions, 3/4, 75/100 and 6/8, are familiar forms of 0.75, so the item comes down to the fourth. Students who stop after the familiar ones must decide between 15/20, which needs dividing by 5 to recognize, and 8/10, which sits close to 0.75 on a number line. Dividing each numerator by its denominator, or scaling 3/4 up by 5, settles it.
Every choice must be checked moderate Choosing the answer
Six fractions with six different denominators have to be tested one by one, by dividing or by simplifying, since 15/20 and 8/10 cannot be judged by how they look. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
8/10 is 0.8, only 0.05 above 0.75, and it follows 6/8 by adding 2 to the top and the bottom, so it looks like one more member of the family. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Much to keep track of minor Working it out
Four of the six must be chosen and all four must be right for the item to count, so each verdict has to be kept while the remaining fractions are tested. (Sweller, 1988; Carpenter, Just & Shell, 1990)
Strategy: Turn each choice into a decimal by dividing its numerator by its denominator, or reduce it to lowest terms, and keep only the ones whose value is exactly the decimal given.
Traps
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
The wrong answers, classified
D Little reason to choose it (Haladyna & Downing, 1993; Rodriguez, 2005)
No usual working links 2/5 to 0.75, since 2 ÷ 5 = 0.4, so it mostly catches students filling the fourth slot by guessing.
F Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Builds 8/10 from 6/8 by adding 2 to the top and the bottom, as if equal additions kept a fraction's value, or accepts 0.8 as close enough.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Changing a fraction to a decimal
- a is the numerator, the top. b is the denominator, the bottom. A fraction bar means divide. So dividing the top by the bottom gives the fraction’s value as a decimal.
- Equivalent fractions
- a is the top and b is the bottom. n is a number that goes evenly into both. Dividing the top and the bottom by the same number gives an equal fraction. Equivalent fractions name the same amount in different ways.
Sort out the question
Six fractions are given, A to F. You need the four that equal the decimal 0.75. Equivalent means equal in value. Test every choice, because some fractions look alike but are not equal.
Write 0.75 as a fraction
0.75 means 75 hundredths:
So choice C works. Now simplify it. 25 goes into both 75 and 100:
So choice A, 3/4, works too.
Test choices B and E
Simplify each one to see if it becomes 3/4:
- B: 5 goes into 15 and 20. . It works.
- E: 2 goes into 6 and 8. . It works.
Test choices D and F
Divide the top by the bottom:
- D: . That is less than 0.75.
- F: . That is more than 0.75.
Watch out: F looks like 6/8 with 2 added to the top and the bottom. Adding the same number to both changes the value. Only multiplying or dividing both keeps it.
Name the four answers
A, B, C and E all equal 0.75. On the test, you check the box beside each of them. On this site, you choose all four, then check your answer.
So the answers are A, B, C and E.
Check your answer
Turn each answer into a decimal. , , and all give 0.75. Exactly four choices passed, and the question asks for four. So none were missed.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 48 of 120
2026 Practice Test C Math, question 11Question
Allison has 5 stamp albums with 576 stamps in each album. If she transfers her stamp collection to 6 albums, each holding 378 stamps, how many stamps will be left over?
- A198
- B612
- C620
- D632
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
Determine the total number of stamps in 5 albums holding 576 stamps:
Determine the total number of stamps in 6 albums holding 378 stamps:
Subtract 2,268 from 2,880 to find the number of stamps that will be left over:
Question analysis
Allison moves a stamp collection from 5 albums of 576 stamps into 6 albums that hold 378 each, and students find how many stamps are left over. It tests multiplying and subtracting large whole numbers in a word problem. The question gives no total, so the collection has to be counted before the new albums' capacity is taken away.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Whole-number multiplication and subtraction in a three-step word problem is easier than grade 7 work with fractions, decimals or negatives. Because the products are large, a slip or a rounded estimate easily gives another choice.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Error-prone arithmetic minor
- Solution
- 3 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 6, 27 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The plan is clear from the stem: count the stamps, then take away what the six new albums hold, so the question tests careful arithmetic. Its choices punish the estimating that saves time elsewhere, since rounding either factor shifts the result by only a few tens, onto another listed number. Students who skip the album counts altogether and compare one album with one album find 198 waiting.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
612, 620 and 632 lie within 20 of one another, so rounding 576 and 378 to friendly numbers before multiplying lands on a wrong choice; only exact products separate them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Error-prone arithmetic minor Working it out
Two products of three-digit numbers, 5 × 576 = 2,880 and 6 × 378 = 2,268, must be done by hand and then subtracted with regrouping. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
Strategy: Multiply to find the total number of stamps, multiply again to find how many the six new albums hold, subtract, and check the last digit of each product.
Traps
- Rounds too early: Rounds a value partway through, or rounds the wrong way, so the final answer drifts from the exact one.
- Numbers taken from the question: Combines the numbers in the question without a model of the situation, or is simply a number that appears in the question.
The wrong answers, classified
A Numbers taken from the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Subtracts 378 from 576, comparing one old album with one new album, and ignores that there are 5 old albums and 6 new ones.
C Rounds too early (King et al., 2004)
Rounds 576 to 580 and 378 to 380 before multiplying, so 2,900 − 2,280 = 620, an estimate rather than the exact number left over.
D Rounds too early (King et al., 2004)
Rounds only 576 up to 580, getting 2,900 stamps, then subtracts the exact 2,268, so the count comes out 20 too high.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Total in equal groups
- Here the groups are albums. The amount in each group is how many stamps one album holds. When every group is the same size, multiplying is a fast way to add them all up.
Sort out the question
Allison has 5 albums with 576 stamps in each. She moves all her stamps into 6 new albums. Each new album holds 378 stamps. Some stamps will not fit. You need the number left over.
Count all her stamps
Use the equal-groups formula. Split 576 into 500 + 76 to make it easy:
Allison has 2,880 stamps.
Count what the new albums hold
Do the same for the 6 new albums. Split 378 into 300 + 78:
The new albums hold 2,268 stamps in all.
Subtract to find the leftovers
The stamps left over are the ones she has minus the ones that fit:
Watch out: , choice A, compares just one old album with one new one. Rounding to 580 and 380 first gives 620, choice C. Rounding only 576 gives 632, choice D. Use the exact numbers.
So the answer is B, 612.
Check your answer
Add the leftovers to the stamps that fit: . That is exactly the number Allison started with. So no stamps were lost or counted twice.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 49 of 120
2026 Practice Test C Math, question 13Question
Start with the number 135.28 and perform the following steps in order:
- Step 1: Multiply by 10.
- Step 2: Add 0.5 to the result of Step 1.
- Step 3: Drop the digits after the decimal point.
- Step 4: Divide by 10.
What is the result?
- A13.5
- B135
- C135.2
- D135.3
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
Begin by multiplying 135.28 by 10:
Add 0.5:
Drop the digits after the decimal point, so becomes .
Divide by 10:
Question analysis
Students start with 135.28 and carry out four listed steps: multiply by 10, add 0.5, drop the digits after the decimal point, and divide by 10. It tests place value and operations with decimals. Skipping a step, or doing two of them in the wrong order, changes the result, and the choices are built from those slips.
- NYS standards
- 6.NS.3 multi-digit decimal operations
- Grade level
- Grade 6 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Multiplying and dividing a decimal by 10 and adding 0.5 are grade 5 and 6 skills. The four steps are spelled out, so the demand is following them exactly and in order, not choosing a method.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Many steps minor
- Error-prone arithmetic minor
- Solution
- 4 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 3, 36 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The steps spell out how to round 135.28 to the nearest tenth, but nothing says so, and they have to be followed exactly. The decisive moment is step 2, where adding 0.5 pushes 1,352.8 past 1,353; skip it and the digits are simply cut, not rounded. Students who recognize the routine can check the result directly, since 135.28 lies closer to 135.3 than to 135.2.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
135.3 and 135.2 differ only in the tenths digit, and 135 shares their whole-number part, so a rough sense of the result's size rules out nothing. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Many steps minor Working it out
Four listed steps move the decimal point twice, and doing them in another order, or skipping one, still produces a believable number near 135. (Daniel & Embretson, 2010; Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
Error-prone arithmetic minor Working it out
Adding 0.5 to 1,352.8 carries into the ones place, since 8 tenths and 5 tenths make 1.3, which turns 1,352 into 1,353 before the decimals are dropped. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
Strategy: Write down the number after each step instead of doing them in your head, and carry out the steps exactly in the order listed.
Traps
- Misreads the question: Misses or misreads a condition or a word in the question: "at least", "each", "remaining", "not".
- Rounds too early: Rounds a value partway through, or rounds the wrong way, so the final answer drifts from the exact one.
The wrong answers, classified
A Misreads the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Skips step 1, so adds 0.5 to 135.28, drops the decimals to get 135, and then divides by 10 to reach 13.5.
B Misreads the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Divides by 10 before dropping the digits after the decimal point, so 1,353.3 becomes 135.33 and then 135, doing steps 3 and 4 in reverse order.
C Rounds too early (King et al., 2004)
Leaves out step 2, or adds 0.5 without carrying, so 1,352 is kept and 135.2 results: 135.28 cut down instead of rounded up.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Multiplying and dividing by 10
- a is any decimal number. Multiplying by 10 moves its decimal point one place to the right, so each digit is worth ten times as much. Dividing by 10 moves the point one place to the left. The two steps undo each other.
Sort out the question
You start with 135.28 and do four steps, in order. Write down the number after each step. Doing them in your head, or in another order, leads to a wrong choice. You need the number at the end.
Multiply by 10
Step 1. Multiplying by 10 moves the decimal point one place to the right:
The digits stay the same. Only the decimal point moves.
Add 0.5
Step 2. Line up the decimal points. 8 tenths plus 5 tenths is 13 tenths. That is 1 whole and 3 tenths, so carry the 1 into the ones place:
Watch out: skipping this step, or forgetting to carry, keeps 1,352. That leads to choice C, 135.2.
Drop the digits after the point
Step 3. Cut off the digits after the decimal point. Do not round. So 1,353.3 becomes 1,353.
Watch out: do step 3 before step 4. Dividing first gives 135.33. Dropping its decimals then gives 135, choice B.
Divide by 10
Step 4. Dividing by 10 moves the decimal point one place to the left:
Skipping step 1 gives 13.5, choice A. So the answer is D, 135.3.
Check your answer
These four steps are a recipe for rounding to the nearest tenth. 135.28 is between 135.2 and 135.3. Its hundredths digit is 8, which is 5 or more, so it rounds up to 135.3. The recipe and the rounding agree.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 50 of 120
2026 Practice Test C Math, question 19Question
What is the value of ?
- A
- B
- C
- D
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
Evaluate the expression by multiplying the terms in the numerator and the terms in the denominator. The product of two negative values is positive:
Simplify the result:
Question analysis
This question asks for the product of negative three fourths and negative two fifths. Students multiply the fractions, settle the sign of the result, and simplify. The choices mix positive and negative answers with results from other operations, so both the sign and the operation have to be right.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Multiplying two negative fractions is a standard grade 7 exercise, done here in one product and one simplification. It matches typical classroom work, with the sign rule and lowest terms as the only points of care.
- Estimated difficulty
- Routine: one familiar step, little to misread.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Error-prone arithmetic minor
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 10, 10 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
This is a single product of two fractions, and most students finish it quickly. The choices are built around two decisions, the sign of the product and the operation itself: two of them come from subtracting the fractions, and one keeps a minus sign that two negative factors cancel. Settling the sign first, positive, rules out half of the choices before any multiplying.
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
3/10 and −3/10 are identical except for the sign, so the size alone does not separate them; only the rule for multiplying two negatives does. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Error-prone arithmetic minor Working it out
Two negative fractions are multiplied, 3 × 2 over 4 × 5, and the product 6/20 has to be reduced to 3/10 before it matches a choice. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
Strategy: Decide the sign of the product first, then multiply the numerators and the denominators and reduce the fraction to lowest terms.
Traps
- Negatives and direction: Arithmetic with negative numbers, the order of a subtraction, or direction on a number line. (Moving a term across the equals sign without changing its sign is a faulty procedure.)
- Wrong operation: Adds instead of multiplying, divides the wrong way round, turns a ratio or rate upside down, or undoes a step in the wrong direction (subtracts what should be added back).
The wrong answers, classified
A Wrong operation (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; King et al., 2004)
Subtracts the fractions instead of multiplying them, −3/4 − (−2/5) = −15/20 + 8/20, which gives −7/20.
B Negatives and direction (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Multiplies the sizes correctly, 3/4 × 2/5 = 6/20 = 3/10, but keeps a minus sign, though two negative factors give a positive product.
D Wrong operation (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; King et al., 2004)
Drops both signs and subtracts the sizes, 3/4 − 2/5 = 15/20 − 8/20 = 7/20, instead of multiplying the fractions.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Multiplying fractions
- a and c are the tops (numerators). b and d are the bottoms (denominators). Multiply the tops together and the bottoms together. You do not need a common denominator to multiply. That is only for adding and subtracting.
- Multiplying two negatives
- a and b are positive numbers, so −a and −b are negative. A negative times a negative is positive. So when both factors are negative, the minus signs cancel.
Sort out the question
The two fractions sit side by side in parentheses, with nothing between them. That means multiply. Both fractions are negative. You need their product, the answer to the multiplication.
Decide the sign first
A negative times a negative is positive. So the answer will be positive. That rules out choices A and B.
Watch out: choice B, −3/10, has the right size but the wrong sign. The two minus signs cancel.
Multiply tops and bottoms
Now multiply the sizes. Multiply the tops, then the bottoms:
Watch out: do not find a common denominator. That is for adding and subtracting. Subtracting the fractions gives 7/20 or −7/20, choices D and A.
Simplify the fraction
2 goes into both 6 and 20. Divide the top and the bottom by 2:
The product is positive 3/10. So the answer is C, 3/10.
Check your answer
Use decimals. 3/4 is 0.75 and 2/5 is 0.4. Then , which is 3/10. Two negatives give a positive, so the product is positive 3/10.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 51 of 120
2026 Practice Test C Math, question 44Question
A smartphone screen is designed to be 72 millimeters wide. The quality control team allows for a variation of in the width. Select the minimum and maximum screen widths that fall within the acceptable range of screen widths, in millimeters.
Select the correct answer from each drop-down to complete the sentence.
The acceptable screen width is from to millimeters.
Choose an answer from each menu, then check. The DOE has not published how answers with several parts are scored; this site counts one right only when every part is right.
Show the answer
Correct answer: blank 1: 69.12; blank 2: 74.88
A variation of in the width means that the width of the smartphone can be from 4% less than the standard of 72 mm to 4% greater than 72 mm.
The least allowed measure is
The greatest allowed measure is
Therefore, the allowable range is from 69.12 mm to 74.88 mm in width.
Question analysis
A smartphone screen is designed to be 72 millimeters wide, and quality control allows a variation of plus or minus 4%. Students choose the minimum and maximum acceptable widths from two drop-down menus. It tests finding a percent of a quantity, and the 4% has to be turned into millimeters before it is added or subtracted.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Finding a percent of a number and adding or subtracting it is grade 7 percent work. The ± sign, the decimal result and two linked menus, which must both be right, add a little to the usual demand.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Error-prone arithmetic moderate
- Turning words into math minor
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Many steps minor
- Solution
- 3 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 8, 59 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The question rewards turning the percent into millimeters before doing anything else. Students who treat ±4% as ±4 millimeters find the two whole-number options at either end of the menus, 68.00 and 76.00, which look like a natural pair. Those who compute 2.88 correctly can still lose the item on the maximum by rounding to 3 and picking 75.00. Multiplying 72 by 0.96 and by 1.04 is a quick double-check.
Error-prone arithmetic moderate Working it out
Four percent of 72 is 0.04 × 72 = 2.88, a decimal product, and taking it from 72 means borrowing across the decimal point to reach 69.12. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
Turning words into math minor Understanding the question
The phrase “a variation of ±4% in the width” has to become 4% of 72 millimeters, a length of 2.88 mm, before anything is added or subtracted. (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; Koedinger & Nathan, 2004)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The second menu lists 75.00 just 0.12 above 74.88, so a rounded estimate of 72 + 3 lands on the wrong option, and estimating cannot separate the two. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Many steps minor Working it out
Both menus must be right to score, so the minimum and the maximum each need their own subtraction or addition after the shared percent is found. (Daniel & Embretson, 2010; Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
Strategy: Find 4% of the 72-millimeter design width first, then subtract that amount for the minimum and add it for the maximum, before looking at the menus.
Traps
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
- Rounds too early: Rounds a value partway through, or rounds the wrong way, so the final answer drifts from the exact one.
The wrong answers, classified
AD Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Reads ±4% as ±4 millimeters, so the widths run from 72 − 4 = 68.00 to 72 + 4 = 76.00.
BC Rounds too early (King et al., 2004)
Finds the 69.12 minimum, then estimates the maximum by rounding the 2.88 change up to 3, so 72 + 3 = 75.00 is picked over 74.88.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Percent of a number
- The percent is how many out of 100. Dividing it by 100 turns it into a decimal, so 4% becomes 0.04. The whole is the amount you take the percent of. The part is the amount that the percent stands for.
Sort out the question
The screen is designed to be 72 millimeters (mm) wide. The sign ±4% means plus or minus 4%. So a screen may be up to 4% narrower or up to 4% wider than 72 mm.
You need the minimum, the smallest allowed width, and the maximum, the largest. You pick each one from a drop-down menu.
Find 4% of 72 mm
Use the percent formula. 4% is :
So the width may change by up to 2.88 mm either way.
Watch out: 4% is not 4 mm. Taking 4 away and adding 4 gives 68.00 and 76.00. Both are in the menus, and both are wrong.
Find the minimum width
Take the change away from the design width:
The narrowest allowed screen is 69.12 mm wide.
Find the maximum width
Add the change to the design width:
The widest allowed screen is 74.88 mm wide.
Watch out: rounding 2.88 up to 3 gives 75.00. That is in the second menu too, but it is too wide.
Choose from each menu
Open the first drop-down menu and choose 69.12. Open the second one and choose 74.88.
So the sentence reads: the acceptable screen width is from 69.12 to 74.88 millimeters.
Check your answer
Use multipliers. A screen 4% narrower keeps 96% of the width: . A screen 4% wider is 104% of it: . Both match. Also, both ends are the same 2.88 mm away from 72.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 52 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 1Passage A Memory Revolution
A Memory Revolution
A high school senior logs on to a computer at the library to double-check the application due date listed on a college admissions website. Nearby, a librarian helps a group of biology students use a database to search for recent studies about mammals. In the past few decades, the Internet has become an integral component of daily life for many people. The seemingly limitless power of search engines made the Internet search extremely common, and today people increasingly rely on the Internet’s vast accumulation of sources to access all types of information. Scientists are beginning to examine how this reliance is modifying the strategies people use to store and prioritize information in their mind.
A Dependable and Valuable Asset
Psychologist Benjamin Storm from the University of California, Santa Cruz, and researchers Sean Stone and Aaron Benjamin devised an experiment to study students’ tendency to depend on the Internet for facts. To begin, the scientists divided sixty participants into multiple groups, including an “Internet” group and a “memory” group, and placed them in front of computers. The Internet group was required to use the search engine Google to answer eight challenging trivia questions. In contrast, participants in the memory group were permitted to use only their personal knowledge to answer the questions. In the second round, the researchers administered notably easier questions. This time, they allowed each group the option of using Google as they answered. Their results showed that 83 percent of the Internet group continued to consult Google in the second round, while only 63 percent of the memory group chose to do so.
People’s growing inclination to rely on the Internet in order to retrieve information, particularly facts and figures, is called cognitive offloading. Canadian researcher Evan F. Risko and British researcher Sam Gilbert, who have written extensively about the topic, say a similar process has been taking place for centuries. In the past, people used resources like encyclopedias to assist their memories; however, today the Internet, serving as a vast extended memory, allows people to digitally access and retrieve much larger volumes of information. Consequently, people’s minds are free for other cognitive feats, such as connecting data, learning new information, or solving problems.
Filing Information Away
The use of the Internet also appears to be modifying the strategies people use to store information in their mind. Researchers Betsy Sparrow from Columbia University, Jenny Liu from the University of Wisconsin-Madison, and Daniel Wegner from Harvard University conducted several studies to discover how people efficiently manage their information intake.
To begin, the researchers examined how people evaluate which information deserves their effort to remember. For this experiment, participants read forty trivia facts, such as “An ostrich’s eye is bigger than its brain,” and typed the statements into a computer file. Half the participants had been previously told the file would be saved, while half believed it would be erased. Next, the participants wrote down every fact they could recall. Those who believed the information would be erased and no longer available could recall 40 percent more facts than those who thought the information would be saved.
In another experiment, the same researchers tested the ability of study participants to remember where to access information. For this trial, participants read and typed trivia statements, which they saved in folders with generic names such as “Facts” and “Items.” After spending ten minutes writing down all the facts they could recall from memory, participants were asked which folder contained a particular fact based on a keyword. For example, “Which folder has the fact about ostriches?” Overall, participants recalled the information’s location more often than the content itself, correctly identifying 49 percent of the folders for specific facts while remembering only 23 percent of the actual trivia. The researchers concluded that our memory is adapting to the Internet age by prioritizing where to locate information even when the specific details are forgotten. According to Sparrow, the Internet has become an important form of transactive memory, an external source of the recollections and associative networks that constitute memory.
As the Internet’s resources continue to expand our “external” memory, some question whether the process may cause people to depend too heavily on technology. However, Steven Pinker, a professor of psychology at Harvard University, says, “Knowledge is increasing exponentially; human brainpower and waking hours are not. Fortunately, the Internet and information technologies are helping us manage, search and retrieve our collective intellectual output at different scales, from Twitter and previews to e-books and online encyclopedias. Far from making us stupid, these technologies are the only things that will keep us smart.”

Question
The details in paragraph 3 about cognitive offloading convey a central idea of the passage by
- Asuggesting that reliance on the Internet for information is inevitable.
- Bdemonstrating how the methods used to store and find information have changed over time.
- Cexplaining how encyclopedias and the Internet are similar sources of information.
- Dimplying that more information can be understood now than ever before.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks how the details in paragraph 3 about cognitive offloading convey a central idea of the passage.
A. Incorrect. Although paragraph 3 describes the Internet as “a vast extended memory,” it does not present reliance on the Internet for information as inevitable. The paragraph states that the Internet “allows people to digitally access and retrieve much larger volumes of information” and indicates that this benefit leaves people free to focus on “connecting data, learning new information, or solving problems.” However, these details about the benefits of the Internet do not express an opinion about the inevitability of Internet reliance.
B. CORRECT. A central idea of the passage is that the Internet is changing how people retain information. Paragraph 3 supports this idea by stating that “a similar process has been taking place for centuries” and that “in the past,” resources such as encyclopedias were used to store and find information. The details provided in paragraph 3 about encyclopedias and the Internet show that people have always used resources to remember information and that these resources change over time as people develop new ways to “assist their memories.”
C. Incorrect. While paragraph 3 does compare the use of encyclopedias to obtain information in the past with the use of today’s Internet, this comparison fails to convey the central idea of the passage that the Internet is changing how people remember information.
D. Incorrect. Although paragraph 3 states that “much larger volumes of information” are available on the Internet than what has been available in previous methods of information storage, such as encyclopedias, this fact does not relate to an increase in the ability to understand that information and is not a central idea of the passage.
Question analysis
This central-idea question on “A Memory Revolution,” an article about how relying on the Internet affects the way people remember, asks how the details about cognitive offloading in paragraph 3 convey a central idea of the passage. The paragraph mentions encyclopedias, the Internet and freed-up minds, and the choices each build on a different detail, so students must see what the paragraph adds to the article as a whole.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Tying one paragraph’s details to a central idea is regular grade 7 work. Paragraph 3 is short, but terms such as “cognitive offloading” and “extended memory” are abstract, and students must settle on the article’s central idea before judging the paragraph.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly understand
- What makes it hard
- The right answer is reworded moderate
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Hard words minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 14, 763 words; question and choices: about grade 11, 61 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- An inaccurate statement about paragraph 3 in the explanation was corrected.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Paragraph 3 is built on a then-and-now contrast: encyclopedias once helped people remember, and today the Internet does the same job on a far larger scale. Students who notice only the pairing take it for a likeness, while those who stop at the opening “growing inclination to rely on the Internet” are tempted to call the reliance unstoppable. The point goes to students who first name the article’s central idea, that the Internet is changing how people remember, and then read the paragraph as one stage in a long history.
The right answer is reworded moderate Choosing the answer
The key’s “methods used to store and find information have changed over time” appears nowhere in paragraph 3, while the wrong choices stay near its own wording: reliance on the Internet, encyclopedias beside the Internet, and more information. (Freedle & Kostin, 1993; Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The choice calling encyclopedias and the Internet similar sources sets up the same old-and-new pairing as the key; it parts only on likeness versus change, which the paragraph’s “however, today” decides. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Hard words minor Understanding the question
The paragraph explains its idea in abstract terms, “cognitive offloading,” “a vast extended memory” and “other cognitive feats,” which must be decoded before its then-and-now structure shows. (Perfetti, 2007; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Strategy: Put the article’s central idea about the Internet and memory into your own words first, then test each choice against what paragraph 3’s sentences actually say, not against a word it shares with them.
Traps
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Too broad or too strong: A choice overstates, generalizes, or uses absolute words the text does not support.
The wrong answers, classified
A Too broad or too strong (King et al., 2004)
Builds on the “growing inclination to rely on the Internet” and a process “taking place for centuries,” then hardens them into “inevitable,” a claim the paragraph never makes.
C True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Sees, accurately, that paragraph 3 sets encyclopedias beside the Internet as aids to memory, but stops at the likeness and misses the “however” that turns the comparison into a change.
D Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Matches “much larger volumes of information” to more information and swaps the paragraph’s “access and retrieve” for “understood,” though reaching more facts is not grasping them better.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: The DOE’s explanation of Option A says that paragraph 3 “does not discuss reliance on the Internet for information.” It does: the paragraph opens “People’s growing inclination to rely on the Internet in order to retrieve information, particularly facts and figures, is called cognitive offloading.” What the paragraph does not do is present that reliance as inevitable, which is why Option A is wrong, as the explanation’s last sentence says. The site now reads “it does not present reliance on the Internet for information as inevitable.”
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This is a central idea question. A central idea is a main point the whole article makes. Here the main point is that the Internet is changing how people remember. The question asks how paragraph 3 adds to that point. Paragraph 3 is about “cognitive offloading,” so first work out what that term means.
Read paragraph 3 closely
Paragraph 3 begins: “People’s growing inclination to rely on the Internet in order to retrieve information, particularly facts and figures, is called cognitive offloading.” Then it says “a similar process has been taking place for centuries.” Next comes the key sentence: “In the past, people used resources like encyclopedias to assist their memories; however, today the Internet, serving as a vast extended memory, allows people to digitally access and retrieve much larger volumes of information.”
Put the paragraph in plain words
An inclination is a habit of leaning toward something. Cognitive means having to do with thinking. To offload is to hand a load to someone else. So cognitive offloading means letting an outside tool do some of your remembering. People have done this for a long time. Long ago they used encyclopedias, books full of facts. Today they use the Internet. The word “however” marks the change from then to now. So the paragraph shows the tools for storing and finding facts changing over time.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. The paragraph does talk about people relying on the Internet. But it never says that reliance is inevitable, which means it cannot be avoided.
- B fits. The paragraph moves from encyclopedias “in the past” to the Internet “today.” That is a change in how people store and find information.
- C does not fit. The paragraph does set the two side by side. But it uses them to show a change, not to say they are alike.
- D does not fit. People can “access and retrieve” more information. That means find it and pull it up, not understand it.
Watch out: C is tempting because encyclopedias and the Internet both help memory. Read past the likeness to the word “however.”
Choose the answer
Paragraph 3 shows people moving from encyclopedias to the Internet to help them remember. That supports the article’s point that the Internet is changing memory. So the answer is B, “demonstrating how the methods used to store and find information have changed over time.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong choice. Paragraph 3 does compare encyclopedias and the Internet. But the comparison makes a point about change: the Internet now holds “much larger volumes of information.” B names that change. C stops at the likeness, so it misses what the paragraph adds to the article.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “A Memory Revolution” as printed (pages 3–4)


Question 53 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 2Uses the passage above: “A Memory Revolution”.
Question
How do the details about the experiment described in paragraph 5 convey a central idea of the passage?
- AThey suggest that the act of repeating information by typing it on a keyboard may improve a person’s memory.
- BThey explain that a person will forget information faster if the information is considered unimportant.
- CThey indicate that a person may start to forget details when the amount of information becomes overwhelming.
- DThey suggest that memory is affected by whether a person expects to have access to the information in the future.
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The question asks how the details of the experiment described in paragraph 5 convey a central idea of the passage.
A. Incorrect. Although paragraph 5 states that participants read the trivia facts and then “typed the statements into a computer file,” it does not explain the impact of repetition on memory, nor does this convey a central idea of the passage.
B. Incorrect. Paragraph 5 acknowledges that people evaluate which information is important enough to remember, but it does not describe the rate at which people forget unimportant information. According to the paragraph, information is considered less important to remember if a person believes that he or she will be able to retrieve that information easily in the future. This does not mean the information is unimportant but rather that it is readily available for future access.
C. Incorrect. Paragraph 5 specifies the number of trivia facts that study participants were given to read (forty), but it does not describe the amount of information as a factor in the participants’ memory performance. According to the paragraph, it was not the amount of information but rather the expectation of future availability that affected how much information participants were able to recall.
D. CORRECT. A central idea of the passage is that the way the human memory stores information is changing because of the Internet. The details of the experiment support this idea by indicating that study participants remembered different amounts of information based on whether they “thought the information would be saved” (paragraph 5). Those who “believed the information would be erased and no longer available” (paragraph 5) remembered 40 percent more than those who expected to be able to access the information again in a saved computer file. Therefore, paragraph 5 conveys the central idea that the expectation of future access to information is a key element in “how people evaluate which information deserves their effort to remember.”
Question analysis
Paragraph 5 of “A Memory Revolution” describes an experiment in which people typed forty trivia facts, such as one about an ostrich’s eye, into a computer file and then wrote down all they could recall. This central-idea question asks how the experiment’s details convey a central idea of the passage. Each choice offers a different lesson about memory, so the experiment’s actual result must decide.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Explaining what an experiment’s results show is common grade 7 reading. The experiment in paragraph 5 is told in plain words and its result is a single comparison, so the main demand is restating that result as an idea.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly understand
- What makes it hard
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 14, 763 words; question and choices: about grade 12, 88 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The experiment is short and its result fits in one sentence, so most students find the idea once they ask what differed between the two groups. The trap is the paragraph’s framing, “which information deserves their effort to remember,” which invites talk of important and unimportant facts and leads to the choice about forgetting. Others reach for what they know about studying, such as writing things down, instead of the one condition the researchers changed.
Reading between the lines minor Working it out
Paragraph 5 never names the cause; students must see that both groups read and typed the same forty facts, so only what they were told about the file can explain the 40 percent gap. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The choice about forgetting unimportant information shares the key’s idea that how people regard information affects memory; it differs in the reason, importance rather than expected access, and adds a speed nobody measured. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Restate the experiment in paragraph 5 and its result in one sentence of your own, then reject any choice that rests on something the experiment did not set up or measure.
Traps
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Outside knowledge: A choice is plausible in the real world but not supported by this text.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
The wrong answers, classified
A Outside knowledge (King et al., 2004; Recht & Leslie, 1988)
Brings in the study tip that writing facts down helps memory, but both groups typed the same statements, so typing cannot explain why one group recalled 40 percent more.
B Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Starts from “which information deserves their effort to remember” and calls the saved facts unimportant, though they were only expected to stay available, and no speed of forgetting was measured.
C Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Takes forty trivia facts for an overload that made people forget, though both groups read the same forty, so the amount cannot explain the difference between them.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This is a central idea question. It asks what the experiment in paragraph 5 shows. It also asks how that result supports a main point of the article. The article’s main point is that the Internet is changing how people remember.
Find the experiment in paragraph 5
In paragraph 5, participants, the people in the study, “read forty trivia facts” and “typed the statements into a computer file.” Then: “Half the participants had been previously told the file would be saved, while half believed it would be erased.” The result: “Those who believed the information would be erased and no longer available could recall 40 percent more facts than those who thought the information would be saved.”
Work out what the result means
Both groups read the same forty facts. Both typed them the same way. Only one thing was different: what each group expected to happen to the file. People who thought the facts would be gone remembered more. People who thought the facts would be saved remembered less. So your memory depends on whether you expect to look the facts up later. This fits the article’s point. When people know they can find facts again, they work less to remember them.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. Both groups typed the facts, so typing cannot explain why one group remembered more.
- B does not fit. Nobody called the saved facts unimportant. They were just expected to stay available. The study also never measured how fast people forget.
- C does not fit. Both groups read forty facts, so the amount was the same for everyone.
- D fits. What people expected about later access changed how much they remembered.
Watch out: B is tempting because the paragraph talks about “which information deserves their effort to remember.” But the saved facts were not judged unimportant. They were judged easy to find later.
Choose the answer
The only difference between the groups was whether they expected the file to be saved. So the answer is D, “They suggest that memory is affected by whether a person expects to have access to the information in the future.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong choice. Like D, it says that how people see information affects memory. But B gives the wrong reason and adds a speed of forgetting. The study never tested importance or speed. The one thing it changed was whether people expected to see the facts again. That is exactly what D says.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 54 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 3Uses the passage above: “A Memory Revolution”.
Question
Read this sentence from paragraph 7.
As the Internet’s resources continue to expand our “external” memory, some question whether the process may cause people to depend too heavily on technology.
How does the sentence contribute to the structure and development of ideas in the passage?
- AIt presents a claim about the risks of relying on the Internet that prompted the research described in paragraphs 2 and 6.
- BIt contrasts a disadvantage of relying on the Internet with the benefits of Internet use that are described in paragraphs 2 and 6.
- CIt signals a shift from a neutral viewpoint in paragraphs 2 and 6 to a presentation of an argument and a counterargument.
- DIt introduces a counterargument and marks a transition from an optimistic tone in paragraphs 2 and 6 to a cautious tone as the counterargument is developed.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks how the sentence from paragraph 7 contributes to the structure and development of ideas in the passage.
A. Incorrect. Although the studies showed, in part, that reliance on the Internet is increasing (“participants recalled the information’s location more often than the content itself” [paragraph 6]), the studies were not conducted in order to determine the risks of Internet use. The claim in the sentence did not prompt the research described in paragraphs 2 and 6.
B. Incorrect. While the sentence in paragraph 7 poses a question about the disadvantages of relying on the Internet, paragraphs 2 and 6 present the study data on Internet use and memory in a neutral tone (“correctly identifying 49 percent of the folders for specific facts while remembering only 23 percent of the actual trivia” [paragraph 6]). Neither study describes the availability of information on the Internet as an advantage or a disadvantage.
C. CORRECT. Paragraphs 2 and 6 describe the results of experiments related to the Internet’s effect on memory without commenting on the advantages or disadvantages of relying on that technology, and the sentence in paragraph 7 presents a questioning viewpoint that moves away from the neutral perspective of the broader passage. The opinion in the sentence is directly argued against in the three sentences that follow it, which present an extended quote from Steven Pinker, a psychology professor at Harvard University. Pinker refutes the idea expressed by the sentence, stating that “knowledge is increasing exponentially; human brainpower and waking hours are not.” He adds that technologies such as the Internet “are the only things that will keep us smart.”
D. Incorrect. Although the sentence in paragraph 7 expresses caution about the possible effects of the Internet on memory, the passage does not shift from an optimistic tone to a cautious tone. Actually, paragraph 6 provides the data on Internet use and memory in a neutral tone. The argument expressed by the sentence is also not elaborated on in the sentences that follow, but is immediately argued against by Steven Pinker, a professor of psychology. The last sentence of paragraph 7 in fact refutes the culled sentence: “ ‘Far from making us stupid, these technologies are the only things that will keep us smart.’ ”
Question analysis
This text-structure question quotes the sentence that opens the last paragraph of “A Memory Revolution,” where some people question whether the Internet may make us depend too heavily on technology. Students decide how it contributes to the structure and development of ideas in the article. Every choice also describes the experiments in paragraphs 2 and 6, so students must judge how the article presents them and what follows.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 structure questions often ask what one sentence does in its paragraph. This one asks how a sentence turns the whole article, and every choice also characterizes paragraphs 2 and 6, closer to grade 8 work on opposing viewpoints.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- How, not what moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence in several places moderate
- Hard words minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 14, 763 words; question and choices: about grade 12, 129 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The quoted sentence is the article’s only worried note, and the question asks what it does there. Students must judge two things at once: how the earlier studies sound, plain numbers such as 49 and 23 percent with no verdict, and what follows, Pinker’s “However” and a confident rebuttal. The near miss rightly calls the sentence an opposing view but hears the studies as cheerful and expects caution to follow, so only students who read on to the end of paragraph 7 can rule it out.
How, not what moderate Working it out
The stem asks what the sentence does in the article, and its job is a turn: from studies reported without judgment to a worry that Pinker’s quotation rebuts in the same paragraph. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about a counterargument and a cautious tone shares the key’s frame, a shift away from paragraphs 2 and 6 toward opposing views; it differs in calling those paragraphs optimistic and the ending cautious. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
Every choice also characterizes paragraphs 2 and 6, so students must recall how the Google study and the folder study were reported, as percentages with no praise or blame, before judging the sentence. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Hard words minor Understanding the question
The choices judge structure in abstract words, “neutral viewpoint,” “counterargument,” “optimistic tone” and “cautious tone,” which students must match to how the article actually sounds. (Perfetti, 2007; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Strategy: Describe in a word or two how paragraphs 2 and 6 present their studies and what the rest of paragraph 7 does with the quoted sentence’s idea, then test both halves of every choice.
Traps
- Wrong tone or attitude: Misjudges the tone, attitude or point of view, such as reading admiration as criticism, or taking a character's or subject's feelings for the author's.
- Wrong part of the text: A choice is true of another paragraph, stanza or speaker than the one asked about.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
The wrong answers, classified
A Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Assumes the worry about depending on technology launched the research, though it appears only after the studies, and paragraph 2 says its experiment set out to study a “tendency to depend on the Internet.”
B Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Credits paragraphs 2 and 6 with benefits found elsewhere, the freed-up minds of paragraph 3 under the heading “A Dependable and Valuable Asset,” though the two studies report results without calling them good.
D Wrong tone or attitude (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Rightly sees an opposing view raised but hears the studies as optimistic and the ending as cautious, when Pinker’s quotation answers the worry at once and closes on “keep us smart.”
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This is a structure question. Structure is how the parts of an article fit together. The question asks what the sentence does at the start of paragraph 7. Each choice also describes paragraphs 2 and 6. So you must check two things: how those paragraphs sound, and what comes after the sentence.
Look at paragraphs 2 and 6
Paragraph 2 reports that “83 percent of the Internet group continued to consult Google in the second round, while only 63 percent of the memory group chose to do so.” Paragraph 6 reports “correctly identifying 49 percent of the folders for specific facts while remembering only 23 percent of the actual trivia.” These paragraphs give numbers. They do not say the results are good or bad. Writing that takes no side like this is called neutral.
Read the sentence and what follows
The sentence says “some question whether the process may cause people to depend too heavily on technology.” That is a worry, an argument against relying on the Internet. The very next word is “However.” Then Steven Pinker answers the worry. He ends, “Far from making us stupid, these technologies are the only things that will keep us smart.” An answer to an argument is called a counterargument. So the article moves from neutral reports to an argument and a counterargument.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. The worry comes after the studies. Nothing says it caused the research.
- B does not fit. Paragraphs 2 and 6 do not describe benefits. They only report numbers.
- C fits. The sentence shifts from neutral reports to an argument, and Pinker’s answer follows.
- D does not fit. Paragraphs 2 and 6 are not optimistic, or hopeful. And the end is not cautious. Pinker answers the worry with confidence.
Watch out: D is tempting because the sentence does raise an opposing view. But D gets both tones wrong.
Choose the answer
The sentence turns the article from plain reports to a debate. So the answer is C, “It signals a shift from a neutral viewpoint in paragraphs 2 and 6 to a presentation of an argument and a counterargument.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D is the closest wrong choice. Both C and D see the sentence bringing in an opposing view. But D calls paragraphs 2 and 6 optimistic, when they only give percentages. D also says a cautious tone follows. Instead, Pinker rejects the worry and ends with “keep us smart.” Only C describes both sides of the turn correctly.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 55 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 4Uses the passage above: “A Memory Revolution”.
Question
The study described in paragraph 6 influenced researchers’ ideas about memory in the digital age by
- Ahighlighting instances when organizing detailed information made it easier to remember.
- Bconfirming that keywords can be remembered more easily than large amounts of information.
- Cidentifying a shift in focus from remembering specific information to knowing where to find it.
- Demphasizing that remembering a basic idea is more important than storing detailed information.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks how the study described in paragraph 6 influenced researchers’ ideas about memory in the digital age.
A. Incorrect. The study required participants to organize information into folders, but the results suggest that organizing the information did not make the information easier to remember; instead, participants remembered the folder in which to find the information but forgot the information itself.
B. Incorrect. Although the participants in the study were given a keyword, such as “ostrich,” when asked to remember “which folder contained a particular fact,” the study was significant for researchers because it demonstrated that “our memory is adapting to the Internet age by prioritizing where to locate information even when the specific details are forgotten” (paragraph 6). The study confirmed that participants were remembering where the information was stored, because they were able to provide the name of the folder where the information was stored.
C. CORRECT. The study in paragraph 6 demonstrated that participants were better able to recall where to find certain information than to recall the information itself. This influenced researchers’ ideas about memory in the digital age: “Overall, participants recalled the information’s location more often than the content itself, correctly identifying 49 percent of the folders for specific facts while remembering only 23 percent of the actual trivia” (paragraph 6).
D. Incorrect. The study did not examine the relative importance of remembering basic information or storing detailed information. It examined the effect of the Internet on the information that people remember and concluded that human memory “is adapting to the Internet age by prioritizing where to locate information” (paragraph 6).
Question analysis
This development-of-ideas question on “A Memory Revolution” asks how the folder experiment in paragraph 6, where participants saved trivia statements in folders named “Facts” and “Items” and were later quizzed, influenced researchers’ ideas about memory in the digital age. Students must understand what the experiment measured and what the researchers made of it, while the choices echo its keywords, folders and details.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Explaining how a study shaped researchers’ thinking is typical grade 7 work with informational texts. The researchers state their conclusion in paragraph 6, which shortens the search, though the paragraph’s percentages and terms such as “transactive memory” need care.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly understand
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Much to keep track of minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 14, 763 words; question and choices: about grade 13, 67 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A mislabeled term in the explanation was corrected.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The researchers state their conclusion in paragraph 6, that memory is “prioritizing where to locate information even when the specific details are forgotten,” so the question mostly rewards recognizing it in new words. The risk lies in the experiment’s moving parts: a student who mixes up the folder, the fact and the keyword can believe that filing helped recall or that keywords were the finding. The closest wrong choice keeps the downgrading of detail and swaps a basic idea in for location.
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The choice about a basic idea mirrors the key’s first half, detailed information losing out; it differs only in what wins, a basic idea instead of knowing where the information is kept. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Much to keep track of minor Working it out
Paragraph 6 juggles three things a participant might recall, the fact, its folder and the keyword cue, plus two percentages, so students must keep straight that 49 percent is folders and 23 percent is trivia. (Sweller, 1988; Carpenter, Just & Shell, 1990)
Strategy: Locate the researchers’ own conclusion in paragraph 6, restate it in plain words, and choose the option that matches it, not one that borrows a word from the description of the experiment.
Traps
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Word match: Repeats striking words or phrases from the text, so it looks supported, but its meaning does not fit the question.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
The wrong answers, classified
A Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Assumes filing the facts in folders must have helped people remember them, though participants recalled only 23 percent of the trivia while naming the right folder 49 percent of the time.
B Word match (Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Seizes on “keyword” in paragraph 6, but the keyword was only the cue in the question put to participants; what they remembered best was a folder with a generic name such as “Facts.”
D Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Reads “prioritizing” as a ranking of what matters and turns knowing where a fact is kept into remembering a basic idea, though participants recalled locations, not the gist of the facts.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: The DOE’s explanation of Option B ends by saying that participants “were able to provide the name of the folder (keyword) where the information was stored.” In paragraph 6 the keyword is the cue the participants were given (the same explanation begins “the participants in the study were given a keyword, such as ‘ostrich’”); the folders had generic names such as “Facts” and “Items.” Calling the folder name a keyword makes the sentence seem to support Option B (“keywords can be remembered more easily”), the option it is rejecting. The site drops “(keyword).”
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks what the study in paragraph 6 taught the researchers about memory today. The researchers state their own conclusion in the paragraph. Find it, put it in plain words, and match it to a choice.
Follow the steps of the study
Participants typed trivia facts and saved them in folders. The folders had plain names, such as “Facts” and “Items.” Later each person got a keyword, a hint word, in a question like “Which folder has the fact about ostriches?” The result: “participants recalled the information’s location more often than the content itself, correctly identifying 49 percent of the folders for specific facts while remembering only 23 percent of the actual trivia.”
Read the researchers’ conclusion
Paragraph 6 says “our memory is adapting to the Internet age by prioritizing where to locate information even when the specific details are forgotten.” To prioritize is to put first. So people now put first knowing where a fact is kept. They may forget the fact itself. That is a shift in focus, a change in what memory pays attention to.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. Filing the facts in folders did not help people remember them. They recalled only 23 percent of the facts.
- B does not fit. The keyword, like “ostriches,” was only the hint in the question. What people remembered was the folder, such as “Facts.”
- C fits. Memory shifted from the facts themselves to where to find them.
- D does not fit. People remembered locations, not a basic idea of each fact.
Watch out: D is tempting because “prioritizing” sounds like deciding what matters most. But the study ranked nothing. It found that people recalled where facts were, not what they said.
Choose the answer
The study showed people remembering where facts were kept better than the facts. So the answer is C, “identifying a shift in focus from remembering specific information to knowing where to find it.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D is the closest wrong choice. Like C, it says detailed facts lose out. But it says a basic idea wins instead. In the study, what won was location: 49 percent of the folders against 23 percent of the facts. C names location, so C matches the researchers’ own conclusion.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 56 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 6Uses the passage above: “A Memory Revolution”.
Question
Which evidence from the passage is most relevant to the claim in paragraph 7 that “ ‘far from making us stupid, these technologies are the only things that will keep us smart’ ”?
- Athe revelation that most people opted to use the Internet to answer relatively easy trivia questions rather than relying on their own brainpower (paragraph 2)
- Bthe assertion that the storage of information on the Internet frees people to focus on higher-order tasks such as problem solving (paragraph 3)
- Cthe connection between how people organize information in their mind and their ability to recall that information (paragraph 5)
- Dthe description of transactive memory as an expansive external source that people can use to store information (paragraph 6)
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks for the evidence from the passage that is most relevant to the claim in paragraph 7 that “ ‘far from making us stupid, these technologies are the only things that will keep us smart.’ ”
A. Incorrect. Whether the participants decided to use the Internet to answer easy trivia questions varied based on the options that the participants were given during the first part of the experiment and, therefore, cannot be relevant to the claim in paragraph 7. Even when given the option of using the Internet, some participants chose to recall information from memory instead.
B. CORRECT. The assertion made in paragraph 3 that states that cognitive offloading allows for “people’s minds [to be] free for other cognitive feats, such as connecting data, learning new information, or solving problems” is relevant to the claim in paragraph 7 because it indicates that the ability to store large amounts of information within the brain does not necessarily make someone smart. It also suggests that if people did not have to use so much effort simply organizing and storing information, their brain would be free to conduct higher-order tasks: “the Internet, serving as a vast extended memory, allows people to digitally access and retrieve much larger volumes of information. Consequently, people’s minds are free for other cognitive feats, such as connecting data, learning new information, or solving problems” (paragraph 3).
C. Incorrect. The discussion in the passage connecting how people organize information in their mind and their ability to recall that information focuses on the process of organizing information within human memory rather than on how technology helps keep people’s minds available for complex thoughts.
D. Incorrect. Although the passage provides an accurate description of transactive memory, it provides no indication of how using such memory would advance a person’s ability to maintain or improve intelligent thought.
Question analysis
This evidence question on “A Memory Revolution” quotes the claim, made by Harvard psychologist Steven Pinker at the end of the article, that technologies such as the Internet are the only things that will keep us smart. Students choose the finding from earlier in the passage that is most relevant to it. Each choice summarizes a point about technology or memory, so relevance, not accuracy, decides.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Judging which evidence is most relevant to a claim is standard grade 7 argument work. The claim is short and quoted in the question, and each choice names its paragraph, but students must recall what each paragraph actually showed.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Reading between the lines minor
- Evidence in several places minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 14, 763 words; question and choices: about grade 14, 112 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Every choice reports something the article really says, so the question turns on relevance: which finding would persuade a reader that technology keeps us smart. The transactive-memory finding is the trap, because Pinker himself speaks of retrieving “our collective intellectual output,” and an outside store of facts sounds like his point. That finding shows only that technology holds information; paragraph 3 adds what people do with the freed space, and that step is the claim.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The transactive-memory choice and the key both describe the Internet storing information for people; only the key adds the result, minds free for “connecting data, learning new information, or solving problems,” which is what keeps us smart. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines minor Working it out
The key never says smart; students must see that freeing minds for “other cognitive feats” is exactly what Pinker means by technology that keeps us smart rather than stupid. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Evidence in several places minor Working it out
The four findings come from paragraphs 2, 3, 5 and 6, and each choice’s summary has to be matched back to what its paragraph actually showed before its relevance can be judged. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: Restate Pinker’s claim in your own words, then ask of each finding whether it would persuade a doubter of that claim itself or only of something related to it.
Traps
- Supports only part of the claim: In a question about evidence: a line that backs one half of the claim but not the other, or a related point rather than the claim itself.
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
The wrong answers, classified
A True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Pairs paragraph 2’s Google users with the “brainpower” in Pinker’s quotation, but people choosing a search engine for easy questions fits the worry he answers, not his claim that technology keeps us smart.
C True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Hears smartness in organizing and recalling information, but paragraph 5 found people recalled fewer facts when a computer would save them, which hardly shows technology keeping anyone smart.
D Supports only part of the claim (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Matches transactive memory to paragraph 7’s “external” memory and Pinker’s “retrieve,” but an outside store shows only that technology holds facts, not that it frees minds for harder thinking.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks for evidence: the detail that best supports a claim. The claim comes from Steven Pinker in paragraph 7: “Far from making us stupid, these technologies are the only things that will keep us smart.” Put it in your own words first. Pinker says the Internet does not make us dumb. It helps us think better.
Ask what would prove the claim
To support this claim, a detail must show technology helping people think. A detail that only shows people using the Internet is not enough. Neither is one that only shows the Internet storing facts. Look for a result: something people can do better because of the Internet.
Find that result in paragraph 3
Paragraph 3 says the Internet, “serving as a vast extended memory, allows people to digitally access and retrieve much larger volumes of information.” The next sentence gives the result: “Consequently, people’s minds are free for other cognitive feats, such as connecting data, learning new information, or solving problems.” Consequently means “as a result.” Cognitive feats are hard thinking tasks. Since the Internet holds the facts, your mind has room for harder work.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. People choosing Google for easy questions sounds more like the worry Pinker answers. It does not show anyone getting smarter.
- B fits. Higher-order tasks are harder kinds of thinking. Freeing minds for them is how technology could keep us smart.
- C does not fit. It is about how well people recall facts. In paragraph 5, people even recalled fewer facts when a computer would save them.
- D does not fit. It shows only that the Internet can store information. It does not say what people gain from that.
Watch out: D is tempting because transactive memory sounds like the “external” memory in paragraph 7. But storing facts outside your head is only half the idea. B adds the payoff: room for harder thinking.
Choose the answer
Only paragraph 3 shows the Internet freeing people for harder thinking. So the answer is B, “the assertion that the storage of information on the Internet frees people to focus on higher-order tasks such as problem solving” (paragraph 3).
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D is the closest wrong choice. It is true that the Internet works as an outside store of facts. But that alone does not show anyone getting smarter. B goes one step further. Because the Internet holds the facts, minds are free for “connecting data, learning new information, or solving problems.” That step is what Pinker’s claim needs.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 57 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 9Passage Excerpt from “How We Made the First Flight”
Excerpt from “How We Made the First Flight”
by Orville Wright
In 1903 brothers Wilbur and Orville Wright conducted experiments related to flying machines. These experiments would eventually lead to air travel becoming a reliable form of transportation.
During the night of December 16, 1903, a strong cold wind blew from the north. When we arose on the morning of the 17th, the puddles of water, which had been standing about camp since the recent rains, were covered with ice. The wind had a velocity of 10 to 12 meters per second (22 to 27 miles an hour). We thought it would die down before long, and so remained indoors the early part of the morning. But when ten o’clock arrived, and the wind was as brisk as ever, we decided that we had better get the machine out and attempt a flight. We hung out the signal for the men of the Life Saving Station.1 We thought that by facing the flyer into a strong wind, there ought to be no trouble in launching it from the level ground about camp. We realized the difficulties of flying in so high a wind, but estimated that the added dangers in flight would be partly compensated for by the slower speed in landing.
Final Preparations
We laid the track on a smooth stretch of ground about one hundred feet north of the new building. The biting cold wind made work difficult, and we had to warm up frequently in our living room, where we had a good fire in an improvised stove made of a large carbide2 can. By the time all was ready, J. T. Daniels, W. S. Dough and A. D. Etheridge, members of the Kill Devil3 Life Saving Station; W. C. Brinkley of Manteo, and Johnny Moore, a boy from Nags Head,4 had arrived.
We had a “Richard” hand anemometer with which we measured the velocity of the wind. Measurements made just before starting the first flight showed velocities of 11 to 12 meters per second, or 24 to 27 miles per hour. . . .
Audacity—and Calculation
Wilbur having used his turn in the unsuccessful attempt on the 14th, the right to the first trial now belonged to me. After running the motor a few minutes to heat it up, I released the wire that held the machine to the track, and the machine started forward in the wind. Wilbur ran at the side of the machine, holding the wing to balance it on the track. Unlike the start on the 14th, made in a calm, the machine, facing a 27-mile wind, started very slowly. Wilbur was able to stay with it till it lifted from the track after a forty-foot run. One of the Life Saving men snapped the camera for us, taking a picture just as the machine had reached the end of the track and had risen to a height of about two feet. The slow forward speed of the machine over the ground is clearly shown in the picture by Wilbur’s attitude. He stayed along beside the machine without any effort.
Flight
The course of the flight up and down was exceedingly erratic, partly due to the irregularity of the air, and partly to lack of experience in handling this machine. The control of the front rudder was difficult on account of its being balanced too near the center. This gave it a tendency to turn itself when started; so that it turned too far on one side and then too far on the other. As a result the machine would rise suddenly to about ten feet, and then as suddenly dart for the ground. A sudden dart when a little over a hundred feet from the end of the track, or a little over 120 feet from the point at which it rose into the air, ended the flight. As the velocity of the wind was over 35 feet per second and the speed of the machine over the ground against this wind ten feet per second, the speed of the machine relative to the air was over 45 feet per second, and the length of the flight was equivalent to a flight of 540 feet made in calm air. This flight lasted only 12 seconds, but it was nevertheless the first in the history of the world in which a machine carrying a man had raised itself by its own power into the air in full flight, had sailed forward without reduction of speed and had finally landed at a point as high as that from which it started.
From “How We Made the First Flight” by Orville Wright—Public Domain/Federal Aviation Administration
1Life Saving Station: one of the rescue stations along the Atlantic coastline that provided assistance to mariners in distress
2carbide: a very hard material composed of carbon and other heavy metals
3Kill Devil: the town of Kill Devil Hills in eastern North Carolina
4Nags Head: a town in eastern North Carolina
Question
Read this sentence from paragraph 4.
Wilbur having used his turn in the unsuccessful attempt on the 14th, the right to the first trial now belonged to me.
The sentence contributes to the development of ideas in the excerpt by
- Ademonstrating the challenge of the extreme winter conditions during the flight.
- Brevealing how many tries it took for Wilbur Wright to finally get the machine to take flight.
- Cdemonstrating that both Orville and Wilbur Wright were eager to pilot what could potentially be the first flight.
- Dsuggesting a sense that both brothers felt confident they would soon succeed in completing the first flight.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks how the sentence from paragraph 4 contributes to the development of ideas in the excerpt.
A. Incorrect. The sentence from paragraph 4 does not refer to the challenge of the winter conditions during the flight attempt.
B. Incorrect. While the sentence from paragraph 4 specifically references a previous flight several days earlier, it does not state how many attempts came before Wilbur’s attempt on December 14.
C. CORRECT. The sentence from paragraph 4 indicates that the Wright brothers had agreed to take turns attempting to achieve the first flight, which suggests their eagerness to each be the first to successfully fly the machine.
D. Incorrect. Orville’s trial came about simply because the brothers took turns, which would suggest that there was no greater likelihood of success or reason to be more confident at that moment than there had been for previous attempts.
Question analysis
This question quotes the sentence that opens the “Audacity—and Calculation” section of Orville Wright’s account, in which he explains that the first trial on December 17 was his because Wilbur had used his turn on the 14th. Students decide how the sentence contributes to the development of ideas in the excerpt. Several choices bring in other parts of the story, so students must stay with what this one sentence shows.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Explaining what one quoted sentence adds is routine grade 7 work. This sentence is short but opens with an old-fashioned “Wilbur having used his turn” construction, and its point about the brothers is implied rather than stated.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Reading between the lines moderate
- Complex sentences minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one sentence or line
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 7, 816 words; question and choices: about grade 8, 102 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The sentence is about whose turn it is, and the question asks what that arrangement says about the brothers. A quick reader may lose the subject in the opening phrase and think Wilbur is still trying, or may carry the cold of earlier paragraphs into a sentence that never mentions it. The harder call is between eagerness and confidence: the heading “Audacity—and Calculation” makes confidence sound right, but a failed attempt three days earlier gives no reason for it.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about confidence matches the key’s frame, both brothers feeling something about the first flight; it differs in one word, confident instead of eager, and only eagerness follows from taking turns. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
The sentence names no feeling; eagerness has to be read from the turn-taking itself, the brothers alternating for “the right to the first trial,” a chance each wanted to be his. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Complex sentences minor Understanding the question
The sentence opens with an absolute phrase, “Wilbur having used his turn in the unsuccessful attempt on the 14th,” whose subject is not the subject of the main clause, so a reader can lose track of who flies. (Abedi & Lord, 2001; Freedle & Kostin, 1993; Messick, 1989)
Strategy: Untangle the sentence first: say who used a turn, when, and who goes next. Then ask what the arrangement it describes suggests about the two brothers, and test each choice against that.
Traps
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Wrong part of the text: A choice is true of another paragraph, stanza or speaker than the one asked about.
The wrong answers, classified
A Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Carries the frozen puddles and “biting cold wind” of paragraphs 1 and 2 into this sentence, which says nothing about the weather and is only about whose turn it was.
B Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Loses the subject of the opening phrase and has Wilbur keep trying until he flies, though the sentence mentions one failed attempt and gives this trial to Orville.
D Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Reads “the right to the first trial” and the heading “Audacity—and Calculation” as confidence, but taking turns says nothing about their odds, and the attempt on the 14th had failed.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks what one sentence adds to the excerpt. The sentence is short, but it starts in an old-fashioned way. First untangle who did what. Then ask what the sentence tells you about the two brothers.
Untangle the sentence
The sentence is “Wilbur having used his turn in the unsuccessful attempt on the 14th, the right to the first trial now belonged to me.” The first part gives a reason. In plain words: Wilbur already had his turn on the 14th. Unsuccessful means it failed. The second part says: so now it is my turn. The “me” is Orville, who wrote the excerpt. A trial here is a try.
Ask what taking turns shows
The brothers took turns trying to fly. Each one had a “right” to a turn. You take turns when both people want the same chance. Each brother wanted to be the pilot. This could be the first flight in history, so both were eager. Eager means they really wanted it.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. The sentence says nothing about the cold or the wind.
- B does not fit. It mentions only one failed try by Wilbur. And this trial was Orville’s, not Wilbur’s.
- C fits. Taking turns shows that each brother wanted to fly the machine.
- D does not fit. Nothing in the sentence shows confidence. The last try had failed, and it was simply Orville’s turn.
Watch out: D is tempting because the section heading is “Audacity—and Calculation.” Audacity means boldness. But taking turns shows eagerness, not a belief that they would succeed.
Choose the answer
The turn-taking shows that both brothers wanted to fly. So the answer is C, “demonstrating that both Orville and Wilbur Wright were eager to pilot what could potentially be the first flight.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D is the closest wrong choice. Both C and D describe how the brothers felt about the first flight. But the sentence gives no reason to feel sure of success. It even mentions “the unsuccessful attempt on the 14th.” What it does show is that each brother wanted his own turn. That is eagerness, so C fits better.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Excerpt from “How We Made the First Flight”” as printed (pages 13–14)


Question 58 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 14Uses the passage above: “Excerpt from “How We Made the First Flight””.
Question
The use of chronological structure contributes to the development of ideas in the excerpt by
- Aoutlining the actions that the Wright brothers took to prepare for and successfully complete the first flight.
- Bidentifying the primary factors that allowed the Wright brothers to overcome obstacles and achieve the first flight.
- Cshowing how the Wright brothers applied lessons learned from their previous flight attempts to accomplish the first flight.
- Ddemonstrating how the Wright brothers analyzed the impact of wind velocity to identify the ideal conditions for the first flight.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks how the use of chronological structure contributes to the development of ideas in the excerpt.
A. CORRECT. Through the chronological structure, Orville addresses all stages of the flight in a way that builds from flight concerns and preparations for takeoff to his experiences during the flight and his successful landing.
B. Incorrect. While obstacles are presented within the excerpt, the chronological structure emphasizes the events that ended in the successful achievement of flight on that day rather than how the Wright brothers overcame obstacles.
C. Incorrect. The chronological structure of the excerpt does not show that the Wright brothers applied lessons learned from their previous attempts at flight; instead, the structure describes Orville’s December 17 attempt.
D. Incorrect. While Orville’s narrative certainly shows a strong need to analyze wind speed, this idea is not conveyed through the chronological structure of the excerpt. Additionally, the description of the first flight on December 17 indicates that it did not take place in ideal conditions (“We realized the difficulties of flying in so high a wind” [paragraph 1] and “The course of the flight up and down was exceedingly erratic, partly due to the irregularity of the air” [paragraph 5]).
Question analysis
This text-structure question asks how the chronological structure of Orville Wright’s “How We Made the First Flight,” an account that begins on the night of December 16, 1903, contributes to the development of ideas in the excerpt. Students must see what telling events in time order does for the account. Each choice names a purpose that could suit a story of the first airplane flight.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Grade 7 structure questions often ask how a less obvious pattern, such as problem and solution, shapes ideas. This excerpt is plainly told in time order, with dates and section headings, so recognizing what that order does is a lighter task.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- How, not what minor
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 7, 816 words; question and choices: about grade 11, 87 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The excerpt is plainly chronological, with a date in its first sentence and headings that move from “Final Preparations” to “Flight,” so the structure is easy to recognize. The difficulty is in saying what that order does. The strongest pull sounds like the excerpt’s central idea, success over obstacles, but ranking the causes of success is analysis, not sequence, and the other choices invent lessons from the failed attempt on the 14th or a search for ideal winds.
How, not what minor Working it out
The question asks what telling events in time order does, and the excerpt moves from the night of December 16 through laying the track and the launch to the flight, so the structure’s job is to trace those steps. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The choice about the primary factors shares the key’s ending, achieving the first flight; it differs in its first half, an analysis of what made success possible, which a time order does not set out. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Skim the section headings and the first sentence of each paragraph to see how the excerpt moves through time, then test each choice against what a time order can do.
Traps
- Wrong purpose or structure: Names a purpose, structure or effect that the part does not serve, or describes what a part says when the question asks what it does.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
The wrong answers, classified
B Wrong purpose or structure (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Expects the structure to explain why the flight succeeded, a fair summary of the excerpt’s message, but time order tells events as they happened and never ranks which factors mattered most.
C Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Builds on the failed attempt of the 14th and assumes the brothers learned from it, though the excerpt only contrasts that calm start with this windy one.
D Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Recalls the anemometer readings and the risk estimate and turns them into a search for ideal conditions, though the brothers flew in a wind whose difficulties and added dangers they admitted.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This is a structure question. Chronological structure means telling events in time order, from first to last. The question asks what that order does for the excerpt. So first check how the excerpt moves through time.
Trace the order of events
Look at the section headings and the start of each paragraph.
- Paragraph 1 starts “During the night of December 16, 1903.” The brothers decide to fly.
- Under “Final Preparations,” they lay the track and measure the wind.
- Under “Audacity—and Calculation,” Orville takes off.
- Under “Flight,” the machine flies and lands.
Say what the time order does
The story moves step by step. It goes from getting ready, to taking off, to flying, to landing. Each step leads to the next. By the end, you have followed everything the brothers did to make the first flight happen. The last sentence says the machine “had finally landed at a point as high as that from which it started.”
Check each choice
- A fits. Time order lays out what the brothers did to prepare and then to fly.
- B does not fit. Primary factors are the main causes. Time order tells events as they happen. It does not rank which causes mattered most.
- C does not fit. The excerpt mentions the failed try on the 14th. But it never says what they learned from it.
- D does not fit. They did not wait for ideal, or perfect, conditions. They flew in a strong wind and knew its dangers.
Watch out: B is tempting because the excerpt does show success over problems. But naming the main causes of success is a different job from telling events in order.
Choose the answer
The time order walks you through the preparations, the takeoff and the flight. So the answer is A, “outlining the actions that the Wright brothers took to prepare for and successfully complete the first flight.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong choice. The excerpt does show the brothers succeeding despite problems. But time order cannot explain which factors mattered most. It just tells events in the order they happened. That is what A says: the time order outlines the actions, from getting ready to completing the flight.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 59 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 15Passage Wolves of the Sea
Wolves of the Sea
The cool and misty landscape of the Great Bear Rainforest can be found along the coast of British Columbia, Canada, and its nearby islands, from Vancouver Island to the Alaskan border. Within this protected area, wolves roam the forests, islands, and beaches. When biologist Chris Darimont began to study these wolves, he wanted to confer with local First Nations groups, as aboriginal Canadians are known, in order to learn what they knew about these wolves. He spoke with Chester Starr, an elder of the Heiltsuk Nation that has occupied the Great Bear Rainforest for thousands of years. What Starr had to say about the wolves changed Darimont’s perception of the animals.
Starr asked Darimont which wolves he and his team were going to study—the timber wolves (mainland wolves) or the coastal wolves on the islands. The question took Darimont by surprise. Biologists had always believed that the wolves that are sometimes spotted swimming between islands and eating salmon are the same wolves that live on the mainland. Darimont was intrigued by Starr’s classification of the wolves as two different groups. At first, he was hesitant to accept the idea. The distances between the mainland and the islands are small, less than a mile. Why would the wolves on the islands be any different from the wolves on the mainland? To find out, Darimont and his research team studied the wolves on the islands and in the densely forested territory of the Great Bear Rainforest for ten years.
Throughout the study, Darimont recorded several significant, observable differences between the “sea wolves,” as they are nicknamed, and the mainland wolves. Compared with the mainland wolves, the sea wolves are smaller in size and are strong swimmers. In 1996 sea wolves were spotted on an island nearly eight miles from any other land formation. While mainland wolves almost exclusively eat meat, such as deer and elk, and teach their young to hunt for land animals, sea wolves get as much as 90 percent of their nutrition from the sea and teach their young to dig for clams and to catch fish. Sea wolves regularly swim between islands and have been known to sneak up on a seal sunning itself on a rock and make a leaping attack from the water. Some salmon-eating mainland wolves come and go from the islands with the fish-spawning season, but the sea wolves are full-time island residents. Darimont suspects that some sea wolves live their entire life on the islands.
The sea wolves displayed not only physical and behavioral differences but also genetic variations from the mainland wolves. After collecting and analyzing the DNA in 800 samples of gray fur and wolf waste, researchers could produce hard biological evidence that sea wolves had genetic markers that made them distinct from the mainland wolves. A genetic marker is a variation in a DNA sequence that can be used to identify individuals or a species because it is passed down to offspring. Darimont hypothesizes that a change in habitat led to the eventual genetic differences between sea wolves and mainland wolves. Many years ago, loss of habitat and food sources forced some mainland wolves out to the islands. They learned to eat everything from kelp and fish eggs to the remains of sea creatures that washed up on the beach. Wolves living on the islands and mainland wolves became more isolated and rarely mated with each other. Over time the two types of wolves became more distinct.
It turned out that Chester Starr was right all along. “It sounded totally bizarre at first,” admits Darimont, “that there could be two versions of the species.” But he now realizes that this skepticism “definitely reflected my ignorance of indigenous knowledge at the time.” Learning to trust the wisdom of the Heiltsuk people opened Darimont up to knowledge accumulated over millennia and positioned him so that he could gather new scientific evidence about one of British Columbia’s most elusive species, the sea wolf.
Question
The details in paragraph 1 contribute to a central idea of the passage by showing that Darimont
- Abelieved the Great Bear Rainforest was an ideal location to study wolves in their natural habitat because it is a protected area.
- Bvalues different perspectives, because the information that Starr provided influenced the focus of Darimont’s research.
- Cthought the Great Bear Rainforest would provide opportunities to study different groups of wolves because the area includes forests and islands.
- Dunderstands the importance of respecting local community members, because Darimont sought permission from an elder of the Heiltsuk Nation before starting his research.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks how the details about Darimont in paragraph 1 contribute to a central idea of the passage.
A. Incorrect. Although paragraph 1 includes the detail that the Great Bear Rainforest is a protected area, finding an ideal location to study wolves is not a central idea of the passage. Additionally, the paragraph does not describe Darimont’s beliefs about the Great Bear Rainforest.
B. CORRECT. Paragraph 1 explains why Darimont wanted to consult with Chester Starr, an elder of the Heiltsuk Nation: “When biologist Chris Darimont began to study these wolves, he wanted to confer with local First Nations groups, as aboriginal Canadians are known, in order to learn what they knew about these wolves.” The details in paragraph 1 show that Darimont valued Starr’s perspective (“What Starr had to say about the wolves changed Darimont’s perception of the animals”), even though it was different from Darimont’s own perspective at that time.
C. Incorrect. Paragraphs 1 and 2 show that Darimont did not initially believe that the mainland wolves and the coastal wolves were different groups. Therefore, the details in paragraph 1 do not provide evidence that Darimont chose the Great Bear Rainforest because of an expectation that there were separate groups of island wolves and timber wolves. Instead, he chose the Great Bear Rainforest for the opportunity to study what he had presumed to be one group of wolves.
D. Incorrect. Although Darimont sought out Chester Starr, an elder of the Heiltsuk Nation, before beginning his research, Darimont’s purpose in doing so was not to request Starr’s permission to study the wolves but to learn from Starr’s expert knowledge of the area and its wolves (“When biologist Chris Darimont began to study these wolves, he wanted to confer with local First Nations groups, as aboriginal Canadians are known, in order to learn what they knew about these wolves” [paragraph 1]).
Question analysis
This central idea question on “Wolves of the Sea,” an article about the coastal wolves of British Columbia’s Great Bear Rainforest, asks what the details in paragraph 1 show about the biologist Chris Darimont. Students must connect an introductory paragraph to the idea the whole passage develops, and each choice pairs a claim about Darimont with a reason that has to be checked.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Linking an opening paragraph’s details to a central idea is standard grade 7 work. Paragraph 1 is plainly written, but each choice is a two-part claim about Darimont with a reason attached, so both halves must be checked against the text.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Reading between the lines moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence in several places minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 10, 662 words; question and choices: about grade 13, 97 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A missing word in the explanation was restored.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Every choice pairs a claim about Darimont with a reason, so students who check only the first half can talk themselves into the respect choice, whose motive, asking permission, is a real-world custom the paragraph never mentions. The paragraph’s setting details, a protected area of forests and islands, invite readers to build beliefs about the study site that Darimont never states. The question rewards reading paragraph 1 as the opening of the passage’s larger story: a scientist learning from local knowledge.
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
Paragraph 1 never says Darimont values other views; that has to be drawn from his wish “to learn what they knew” and from Starr changing “Darimont’s perception of the animals.” (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The respect choice shares the key’s picture of Darimont turning to the Heiltsuk and differs only in its reason: asking an elder’s permission instead of learning what the Heiltsuk knew about the wolves. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places minor Working it out
The central idea the paragraph serves is stated only in paragraph 5, where trusting “the wisdom of the Heiltsuk people” opens Darimont to knowledge “accumulated over millennia.” (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: Sum up what paragraph 1 says Darimont did and why, recall what the passage as a whole is about, and test both parts of each choice, the claim and its reason, against the paragraph’s own words.
Traps
- Outside knowledge: A choice is plausible in the real world but not supported by this text.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Word match: Repeats striking words or phrases from the text, so it looks supported, but its meaning does not fit the question.
The wrong answers, classified
A Word match (Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Picks up “protected area” from paragraph 1 and turns it into Darimont’s reason for choosing the site, though the paragraph never says what he thought of the rainforest.
C Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Credits Darimont with expecting different groups of wolves, though it was Starr who drew that line; paragraph 2 says the question “took Darimont by surprise.”
D Outside knowledge (King et al., 2004; Recht & Leslie, 1988)
Supplies a familiar custom, asking an elder’s permission before research begins, though paragraph 1 says Darimont went to the First Nations “to learn what they knew about these wolves.”
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: The DOE’s explanation of Option C says Darimont “chose Great Bear Rainforest.” The passage, and the next sentence of the same explanation, say “the Great Bear Rainforest,” so the site adds “the.”
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This is a central idea question. A central idea is a main point the whole passage builds. You need to see how paragraph 1 helps build that point. Each choice has two parts: something about Darimont, and a reason. Both parts must match the paragraph.
Find the passage’s central idea
The last paragraph spells it out. Starr “was right all along.” Then it says, “Learning to trust the wisdom of the Heiltsuk people opened Darimont up to knowledge accumulated over millennia.” Millennia means thousands of years. So a central idea is that a scientist learned from the long knowledge of the local people.
Read what paragraph 1 shows
Paragraph 1 says Darimont “wanted to confer with local First Nations groups, as aboriginal Canadians are known, in order to learn what they knew about these wolves.” To confer is to talk and share ideas. The paragraph ends, “What Starr had to say about the wolves changed Darimont’s perception of the animals.” His perception is the way he saw and understood them. So Darimont listened to a different point of view, and it changed how he saw the wolves.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. The paragraph calls the area protected. But it never says what Darimont thought of it as a place to study.
- B is right. A perspective is a point of view. Darimont wanted to hear what the First Nations knew. Starr’s words changed how he saw the wolves and what he set out to study.
- C is wrong. Darimont did not expect two groups of wolves. In paragraph 2, Starr’s question “took Darimont by surprise.”
- D is wrong. Darimont never asks for permission. He went “to learn what they knew about these wolves.”
Watch out: D sounds kind and respectful, so it pulls hard. But asking an elder’s permission is a custom you may know from real life. The paragraph never mentions it.
Choose the answer
Paragraph 1 shows Darimont seeking out what Starr knew and letting it change his view. That fits the passage’s central idea about trusting local knowledge. So the answer is B, “values different perspectives, because the information that Starr provided influenced the focus of Darimont’s research.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D is the closest wrong answer. Like B, it shows Darimont turning to a Heiltsuk elder. But its reason is wrong. Paragraph 1 says he wanted “to learn what they knew about these wolves,” not to get permission. B gives the reason the passage gives: what Starr knew changed Darimont’s view.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Wolves of the Sea” as printed (pages 23–24)


Question 60 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 18Uses the passage above: “Wolves of the Sea”.
Question
The author uses the word “admits” in paragraph 5 most likely to
- Anote that Darimont’s genetic research verified a theory based solely on field observations.
- Bimply that Darimont’s study was disappointing because the conclusion that he reached was not original.
- Cemphasize that Darimont’s study ultimately confirmed an idea that he had initially doubted.
- Dhighlight that Darimont’s results led him to draw a conclusion from his research that his team did not agree with.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks for the most likely reason why the author uses the word “admits” in paragraph 5.
A. Incorrect. The word “admits” highlights the surprising difference between Darimont’s initial idea and the conclusion he ultimately drew from the results of the study. Though Darimont’s genetic research did, in fact, verify the field observations of the wolves, this does not explain the author’s use of the word “admits” in paragraph 5.
B. Incorrect. The conclusion that Darimont reached was actually quite original, since biologists widely believed the two separate groups of wolves to be one (“Biologists had always believed that the wolves that are sometimes spotted swimming between islands and eating salmon are the same wolves that live on the mainland” [paragraph 2]). The author uses the word “admits” in paragraph 5 to emphasize how unexpected Darimont found the conclusion to be (“The distances between the mainland and the islands are small, less than a mile. Why would the wolves on the islands be any different from the wolves on the mainland?” [paragraph 2]), not to indicate that the study was a disappointment.
C. CORRECT. The use of “admits” emphasizes that Darimont found the idea of two species of wolves “ ‘totally bizarre at first’ ” (paragraph 5) but ultimately proved it to be correct. Paragraph 2 suggests that Darimont, like other scientists, “had always believed that the wolves that are sometimes spotted swimming between islands and eating salmon are the same wolves that live on the mainland.” Therefore, the results of the study were likely to strike biologists as bizarre, and the use of the word “admits” in paragraph 5 highlights Darimont’s shift from doubt to confirmation.
D. Incorrect. Darimont’s team conducted the research that helped him confirm Starr’s idea and draw the conclusion that the wolves were separate species (“After collecting and analyzing the DNA in 800 samples of gray fur and wolf waste, researchers could produce hard biological evidence that sea wolves had genetic markers that made them distinct from the mainland wolves” [paragraph 4]). However, the opinions of Darimont’s research team are not described in the passage, and the word “admits” does not indicate that they disagreed with his conclusion.
Question analysis
This word-choice question asks why the author of “Wolves of the Sea” uses the verb “admits” to introduce Darimont’s own comment in paragraph 5, the passage’s last paragraph. Students must weigh what this one verb adds to the quotation, beyond simply reporting speech, and test four explanations that each make a claim about Darimont’s study.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Explaining why an author picked one word is typical grade 7 work. “Admits” is a familiar verb and the quotation it introduces is short, though students must look beyond that one sentence to judge what the verb conveys.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- How, not what moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 10, 662 words; question and choices: about grade 11, 72 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A stray comma in the explanation was removed.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Two choices describe what the study did, and both are accurate, so truth alone does not settle the question; the stem asks what one verb adds. Students who remember that the DNA backed up what had been observed can stop there without asking why Darimont would need to admit anything. The other two choices read the concession in “admits” as disappointment or as a dispute with the team, neither of which the passage describes.
How, not what moderate Working it out
The stem asks why the author chose “admits” over a neutral verb like “says,” so students must hear the verb’s sense of conceding an earlier mistake and link it to Darimont’s “totally bizarre” first reaction. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The verification choice and the key both say the study confirmed an earlier idea; only the key adds that Darimont had doubted it, which is the part “admits” actually conveys. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Compare “admits” with a neutral verb such as “says,” decide what extra meaning it carries, and then check which choice that meaning explains, rather than which choice is simply true of the study.
Traps
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
- Wrong tone or attitude: Misjudges the tone, attitude or point of view, such as reading admiration as criticism, or taking a character's or subject's feelings for the author's.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
The wrong answers, classified
A True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Chooses a fact the passage supports, that the DNA work backed up what had been observed, but that says nothing about why Darimont “admits” his first reaction.
B Wrong tone or attitude (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Hears “admits” as a reluctant confession that the study let him down, perhaps because Starr knew first, though the finding was new to biologists and Darimont sounds grateful.
D Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Takes “admits” as giving way in an argument and imagines a team that rejected the conclusion, though the passage never reports what Darimont’s team thought.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: In its explanation of Option B, the DOE ends the quotation from paragraph 2 with a comma before the citation: “…the same wolves that live on the mainland,” [paragraph 2]. Nothing follows in the sentence, and the passage has a period there, so the site drops the comma.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks why the author chose one word, “admits.” The author could have written says. So ask what extra meaning “admits” adds.
Find the word in paragraph 5
Paragraph 5 opens, “It turned out that Chester Starr was right all along.” Next comes “It sounded totally bizarre at first,” admits Darimont, “that there could be two versions of the species.” Bizarre means very strange. He now sees that this “skepticism” showed his “ignorance of indigenous knowledge at the time.” Skepticism means doubt. Indigenous means belonging to the people who first lived in a place.
Work out what “admits” means
To admit something is to say it is true, even if you would rather not. People often admit a mistake. So “admits” tells you Darimont first doubted Starr’s idea and now owns up to it. Back in paragraph 2, he “was hesitant to accept the idea.” Then his study proved that same idea right.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. The DNA work did back up what people had seen. But that fact does not explain why Darimont has to admit anything.
- B is wrong. Nothing says Darimont was let down. He sounds thankful for what he learned.
- C is right. “Admits” shows a change from doubt to agreement. His study confirmed, or proved true, an idea he once found strange.
- D is wrong. The passage never says what his team thought. No one argues with him.
Watch out: A is true about the study, so it is tempting. But the question asks what the word “admits” does, not what the study found.
Choose the answer
“Admits” stresses that Darimont once doubted Starr’s idea but came to see it was right. So the answer is C, “emphasize that Darimont’s study ultimately confirmed an idea that he had initially doubted.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong answer. Like C, it says the study confirmed an earlier idea. But A leaves out the doubt. You only admit something you once got wrong or pushed away. C includes that change, from finding the idea “totally bizarre” to accepting it. That change is what “admits” adds.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 61 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 19Uses the passage above: “Wolves of the Sea”.
Question
Which sentence from the passage best supports the idea that sea wolves had successfully adapted to living on the islands?
- A“While mainland wolves almost exclusively eat meat, such as deer and elk, and teach their young to hunt for land animals, sea wolves get as much as 90 percent of their nutrition from the sea and teach their young to dig for clams and to catch fish.” (paragraph 3)
- B“Sea wolves regularly swim between islands and have been known to sneak up on a seal sunning itself on a rock and make a leaping attack from the water.” (paragraph 3)
- C“Darimont suspects that some sea wolves live their entire life on the islands.” (paragraph 3)
- D“Darimont hypothesizes that a change in habitat led to the eventual genetic differences between sea wolves and mainland wolves.” (paragraph 4)
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks for the sentence from the passage that best supports the idea that sea wolves had successfully adapted to living on the islands.
A. CORRECT. This sentence from paragraph 3 describes a significant difference in the diets of the mainland and sea wolves: the mainland wolves “almost exclusively eat meat, such as deer and elk, and teach their young to hunt for land animals,” whereas the sea wolves had adapted to the point where they derive “as much as 90 percent of their nutrition from the sea and teach their young to dig for clams and to catch fish.” This sentence emphasizes the dietary difference between the two groups of wolves and best supports the idea that sea wolves had successfully adapted to living on the islands.
B. Incorrect. Although this sentence from paragraph 3 describes one technique that the sea wolves used to hunt, it does not offer evidence as strong as that provided by the preceding sentence, which explains that sea wolves were able to derive “as much as 90 percent” (paragraph 3) of their sustenance from the sea alone (versus the mainland wolves, which “almost exclusively eat meat” from land animals [paragraph 3]).
C. Incorrect. Although this sentence from paragraph 3 states that “some sea wolves live their entire life on the islands,” it does not provide strong evidence of the necessary adaptations—namely, how these wolves were able to successfully live their whole lives on the islands. Living on the islands was not necessarily an adaptation in and of itself; the adaptation was the sea-based diet that enabled the sea wolves to live on the islands without access to land animals.
D. Incorrect. Although this sentence from paragraph 4 presents Darimont’s hypothesis that “a change in habitat led to the eventual genetic differences” between the wolves, the sentence does not describe any of the sea wolves’ adaptations nor best support the idea that the sea wolves successfully adapted to living on the islands.
Question analysis
This evidence question on “Wolves of the Sea” asks which sentence best supports the idea that sea wolves had successfully adapted to living on the islands. Three choices come from paragraph 3’s list of differences between sea wolves and mainland wolves and one from paragraph 4, so students must rank closely related sentences by how directly each shows the wolves thriving there.
- NYS standards
- 7R1 textual evidence and inferences
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 evidence questions often have one clearly relevant sentence. Here three neighboring sentences all describe the sea wolves’ island life, so students must decide what counts as successful adaptation and rank strong evidence against nearly as strong.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Reading between the lines moderate
- Every choice must be checked minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 10, 662 words; question and choices: about grade 12, 131 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
All four sentences are about sea wolves, and three describe their island lives, so the question turns on ranking evidence rather than spotting it. The seal attack is one of the passage’s most vivid images and shows a real island skill, which makes it hard to give up for a sentence about diet. The key wins because it shows a whole way of life changing, most food from the sea and the young taught to fish, while the other sentences offer one habit, a hedged guess or a cause.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The seal-hunting sentence sits right after the key in paragraph 3 and also shows sea wolves living off the sea; it differs in showing one hunting trick instead of up to 90 percent of their food. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
No sentence uses the word “adapted,” so students must first decide what would prove an animal thrives in a new place, such as getting its food there and teaching that skill to its young. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Every choice must be checked minor Choosing the answer
Three of the four sentences come from paragraph 3’s list of island habits, and all four mention sea wolves or their habitat, so none can be dismissed at a glance. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Strategy: Before reading the choices, decide what would prove that an animal has adapted well to a new place, then rank the four sentences by how fully each one shows that, not merely whether it fits.
Traps
- Supports only part of the claim: In a question about evidence: a line that backs one half of the claim but not the other, or a related point rather than the claim itself.
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
The wrong answers, classified
B Supports only part of the claim (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Is impressed by the leaping attack on a seal, a real island skill, but one hunting technique shows less than wolves getting up to 90 percent of their food from the sea.
C Supports only part of the claim (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Matches “live their entire life on the islands” to the claim’s “living on the islands,” but it is Darimont’s guess about where the wolves stay, not how they manage there.
D True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Sees “change in habitat” and thinks of adaptation, but the sentence gives Darimont’s theory of what caused the genetic differences, not evidence that the wolves thrive.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks for evidence: the sentence that best supports a claim. The claim is that sea wolves “had successfully adapted to living on the islands.” To adapt is to change so you can live well in a new place.
Decide what strong proof looks like
Before you read the choices, ask what would prove an animal is doing well somewhere new. It can find its food there. It can also teach its young to live there. One clever trick is weaker proof. A guess is weaker still. So look for a sentence that shows a whole way of life built around the new home.
Test the diet sentence
Choice A comes from paragraph 3. It says “sea wolves get as much as 90 percent of their nutrition from the sea and teach their young to dig for clams and to catch fish.” Nutrition is the food a body needs. So almost all their food comes from the sea. They also pass those skills on to their pups. Mainland wolves, by contrast, “almost exclusively eat meat, such as deer and elk.” Exclusively means only.
Check the other choices
- B shows one hunting trick, a leap at a seal. It is a real island skill. But it shows less than a diet that is up to 90 percent from the sea.
- C uses the word “suspects,” so it is only Darimont’s guess. It also tells where some wolves live, not how they manage there.
- D gives Darimont’s idea about what caused the genetic differences. It does not show the wolves doing well.
Watch out: The seal attack in B is the most exciting picture. But one exciting hunt is weaker proof than a whole new diet.
Choose the answer
Sentence A shows sea wolves getting most of their food from the sea and training their young to do the same. So the answer is A, the sentence “While mainland wolves almost exclusively eat meat, such as deer and elk, and teach their young to hunt for land animals, sea wolves get as much as 90 percent of their nutrition from the sea and teach their young to dig for clams and to catch fish.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong answer. It comes right after A in paragraph 3 and also shows sea wolves living off the sea. But B shows one way of hunting. A shows where nearly all their food comes from, and that they teach it to their young. That is stronger proof that they adapted well.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 62 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 23Passage Ode to Fireworks
Ode to Fireworks
In autumn my mother drove us to the edge of the field
where the fair was set up year after year:
the carousel, the bumper cars, the long, low sheds
filled with prizewinning animals.
We—my sister, my cousin, and I—were ready for bed,
already in our pajamas. This was a treat we waited
all year for. We waited in the darkness
for the first low, dull thwumps, like someone
beating an old, filthy rug hung on a wash line.
Then we counted the seconds between the lightning
and thunder, as we also used to do, until the sky
lit up: red, blue, green, gold. In my mind’s eye
I can still see the straggly, ancient oak whose branches
reached up past the exhibition halls, silhouetted
against the spectrum of stars that cascaded behind it.
It was one thing to look up into the sky
and imagine yourself in it or to make out pictures
among the clouds, which my sister liked to do.
No, I would tell her, that cloud
does not look like an elephant, a hat, an umbrella.
But it was another thing to see
the sky at night written upon
with those jewels. (We lived in the country:
night was night.) All around us, crickets
stridulated in the stubble of what had been
somebody’s cornfield, their song rising and falling.
You could smell winter on the air’s edge.
Now, in the city, when the sky dips into shadow
at New Year’s or on the Fourth of July, I find myself
craning my neck upward at odd moments.
The city sky is always lit up. This is where we live now,
and it is how we live now, awash in light
of every hue. Everything is a constant celebration:
picking up washing at the cleaner’s or stopping by
the corner market for a loaf of heavy bread.
And the music around me is the music of people,
their voices rising and falling in a hundred languages.
But beneath the yellowish glow deep in the sky
of all our city lights pelting out into the universe,
I remember the feel of the pickup truck bumping
across the ridged field, as I kept waiting for those
childhood bursts, watching as they escorted us home.
Question
The use of italics on the word “night” in line 24 is most likely intended to emphasize the
- Asense of mystery in the darkness.
- Bsense of absolute darkness.
- Cspeaker’s fear of night.
- Dspeaker’s certainty about that night.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks what the use of italics on the word “night” in line 24 is most likely intended to emphasize.
A. Incorrect. The purpose of italicizing the word “night” is not to convey mystery. While the speaker refers to not knowing the exact location where the firework viewing took place (“in the stubble of what had been / somebody’s cornfield” [lines 25–26]), the emphasis on “night” is meant to highlight the darkness and contrast the bright light from the fireworks soaring across the sky.
B. CORRECT. The italics are intended to place emphasis on one key aspect of nighttime—total darkness. The speaker is making a point that night in the country was truly dark, unlike the night the speaker currently experiences in a city, where light emitted from buildings and vehicles prevents complete darkness.
C. Incorrect. The tone in the second stanza is positive, showing admiration for the beauty visible in true darkness rather than fear: “But it was another thing to see / the sky at night written upon / with those jewels” (lines 21–23).
D. Incorrect. The speaker is talking about the general experience of watching fireworks on several occasions, not focusing on the events of a specific night. The use of italics on the word “night” emphasizes the speaker’s memory of the persistent darkness.
Question analysis
In “Ode to Fireworks,” the word “night” is printed in italics in line 24, inside the speaker’s aside about living in the country. This craft question asks what the italics are most likely meant to emphasize, so students must think about what stressing one ordinary word does and choose among moods and meanings the word could carry.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Grade 7 students explain how word choice shapes meaning; here the device is italics on one everyday word, which is studied less often. The surrounding lines are plain, so a single careful inference settles it, a typical grade 7 demand.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- How, not what moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence in several places minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: 379 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 5, 36 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
One plain word in a parenthesis carries the question, and its meaning comes from the stress, not the dictionary. Darkness is easy to see; the harder step is choosing what the italics add to it, and mystery is a familiar partner for darkness that the stanza never develops. Students who read on to the brightly lit city of the third stanza see that the speaker is insisting on how complete the country dark was.
How, not what moderate Working it out
The stem asks what italics do, not what a word means, so students must hear the stress in “night was night” as insisting that the country night was fully dark, as night should be. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The mystery choice and the key both tie the italics to darkness; they differ only in what the darkness carries, a sense of mystery or its sheer completeness. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places minor Working it out
The point of the stress becomes clear from the third stanza, where “The city sky is always lit up” and the speaker now lives “awash in light / of every hue.” (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: Read line 24 aloud, stressing “night” as the italics do, and ask what the speaker insists on about nights in the country; then check whether the rest of the poem backs that reading.
Traps
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Wrong tone or attitude: Misjudges the tone, attitude or point of view, such as reading admiration as criticism, or taking a character's or subject's feelings for the author's.
- Wrong purpose or structure: Names a purpose, structure or effect that the part does not serve, or describes what a part says when the question asks what it does.
The wrong answers, classified
A Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Links darkness with mystery, a common pairing, but nothing in the stanza is hidden or puzzling; the stress falls on how dark the country night was.
C Wrong tone or attitude (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Assumes a child out in the dark must be afraid, but the stanza is full of wonder, with “jewels” in the sky and crickets singing, and shows no fear.
D Wrong purpose or structure (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Knows italics can mark insistence but reads “night” as one particular evening, though the speaker means country nights in general, at a fair held “year after year.”
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks why one word is in italics. Italics are slanted letters. Writers use them to stress a word, the way you would say it louder. So ask what the speaker insists on.
Read the line aloud
Lines 23–24 say “(We lived in the country: / night was night.)” Read it aloud and lean on the second “night.” It means night was really night. It was as dark as night should be, with no city lights.
Use the rest of the poem
Stanza 3 shows the opposite. “The city sky is always lit up.” The speaker now lives “awash in light / of every hue.” Awash means flooded. A hue is a color. So the italics stress how completely dark the country night was. That darkness made the fireworks stand out.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. Darkness can feel mysterious. But nothing in the stanza is hidden or puzzling.
- B is right. Absolute means total. The italics stress that the dark was total.
- C is wrong. The speaker shows wonder, not fear. The sky is full of “jewels.”
- D is wrong. “That night” would mean one evening. The speaker means country nights in general, at a fair held “year after year.”
Watch out: A pairs darkness with mystery, which feels natural. But the speaker stresses how dark it was, not that it felt strange.
Choose the answer
The italics insist that country nights were fully dark. So the answer is B, “sense of absolute darkness.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong answer, since both A and B link the italics to darkness. But the stanza never treats the night as strange or secret. The bright city sky in stanza 3 shows what the stress is for: country nights were completely dark. That is B.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Ode to Fireworks” as printed (page 32)

Question 63 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 26Uses the passage above: “Ode to Fireworks”.
Question
The fireworks in the poem represent the speaker’s
- Awish to return to a simpler way of living.
- Bbittersweet feelings about leaving the past behind.
- Chigh expectations for everyday life.
- Dreflections on past interactions with relatives.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks what the fireworks in the poem represent about the speaker.
A. Incorrect. While the speaker misses elements of the past, the speaker is also positive about the present, with comparisons to a “constant celebration” (line 33) and descriptions of “the music of people” (line 36). The speaker does not indicate a desire to return to a simpler way of living.
B. CORRECT. The speaker misses the experience of watching the fireworks display with family and friends but understands that time has progressed and that life is now different. The lines “This was a treat we waited / all year for” (lines 6–7) highlight the significance of the memory of waiting for and watching the fireworks. In the speaker’s present, the lines “I remember the feel of the pickup truck bumping / across the ridged field” (lines 40–41) emphasize the key details from the experience that stand out in the speaker’s mind when something in the current environment reminds the speaker of the past.
C. Incorrect. While the speaker does share details about the present and the tone is generally positive, the fireworks do not suggest that the speaker has high expectations for how everyday life should be. The third stanza (lines 28–42) describes the speaker’s daily life in the city, but the speaker does not form expectations from these everyday moments.
D. Incorrect. While the speaker does mention discussing cloud shapes with a family member in lines 19–20, the fireworks serve as a more general reminder of the speaker’s past life. Viewing the bright lights of the city makes the speaker recall memories of the speaker’s past and the feelings of anticipation before the fireworks show.
Question analysis
This question about symbolism asks what the fireworks represent in “Ode to Fireworks,” a 42-line poem in which an adult speaker remembers watching fireworks at a country fair as a child. Students must weigh all three stanzas to decide what the central image stands for, and the choices name abstract feelings and wishes that are close to one another.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students interpret symbols, usually where the text makes their meaning fairly clear. Here they must hold a 42-line poem in mind and choose among four abstract feelings, two of them very close, which goes beyond typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Figurative or literary language moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence in several places moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: 379 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 8, 35 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- The explanation of C misdescribed the third stanza; one sentence was corrected.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
This symbol question asks students to hold the whole 42-line poem in mind and weigh two feelings at once: the speaker misses the fireworks of childhood but speaks warmly of city life. Readers who notice only the longing choose a wish to go back, and readers who fix on one detail choose the relatives or the city’s “constant celebration.” The key’s “bittersweet” is the one word that holds both halves, which is why it is easy to pass over for a choice that states only one.
Figurative or literary language moderate Understanding the question
The fireworks are never explained; they are “jewels” in stanza 2 and the “childhood bursts” that “escorted us home” in stanza 3, so their meaning as a symbol must be built from images. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The wish-to-return choice and the key both read the fireworks as feelings about the past; they differ in whether the speaker wants that past back or has accepted leaving it. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
The answer needs all three stanzas: the treat “we waited / all year for,” the dark country night, and the city stanza’s “This is where we live now,” which shows acceptance beside longing. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: Note how the speaker describes the fireworks in each stanza and how the speaker feels about the present in the last one, then choose the feeling that fits all three stanzas, not only the first.
Traps
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Word match: Repeats striking words or phrases from the text, so it looks supported, but its meaning does not fit the question.
- Too narrow: A single detail offered as the central idea or a summary, or a summary that keeps minor details and leaves out an essential part.
The wrong answers, classified
A Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Takes the poem’s fond memories of the country as a wish to go back, though the speaker accepts “where we live now” and never asks to return.
C Word match (Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Links the fireworks to line 33’s “Everything is a constant celebration,” then turns that into high expectations for daily life, which the poem never mentions.
D Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Fixes on the mother, sister and cousin of the first stanza, real details, but the fireworks stand for a whole period of the speaker’s life, not time with relatives.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: Rejecting C, the handbook's explanation calls the third stanza (lines 28–42) “the speaker’s imaginings” and “fantasies”. The stanza describes the speaker's real life in the city now: “This is where we live now”, picking up washing at the cleaner's, stopping by the corner market. It now says the stanza describes the speaker's daily life in the city. The answer, B, is unchanged.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks what the fireworks represent, or stand for. A thing in a poem that stands for a bigger idea is called a symbol. Look at the fireworks in all three stanzas. Then see how the speaker feels about the past and the present.
Look at the past
Stanza 1 shows how special the fireworks were: “This was a treat we waited / all year for.” Stanza 2 calls them “jewels.” In stanza 3 the speaker still remembers them: “I remember the feel of the pickup truck bumping / across the ridged field.” So the speaker misses that time.
Look at the present
The speaker also accepts city life: “This is where we live now, / and it is how we live now.” The city is “a constant celebration,” full of “the music of people.” So the speaker is not unhappy now. The speaker misses the past but has moved on. That feeling is bittersweet: happy and sad at the same time.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. The speaker never says they want to go back to the country.
- B is right. The fireworks stand for a loved past the speaker has left behind. The feeling is both warm and sad.
- C is wrong. The “constant celebration” describes city life. Nothing shows high expectations.
- D is wrong. Relatives appear in stanza 1. But the fireworks stand for a whole time of life, not just time with family.
Watch out: A notices only the longing. It misses that the speaker accepts “where we live now.”
Choose the answer
The fireworks hold both the joy of the past and the sadness of leaving it. So the answer is B, “bittersweet feelings about leaving the past behind.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong answer. Both A and B are about feelings for the past. But A says the speaker wants to return, and the poem never says that. The speaker calls the city “a constant celebration” and accepts “where we live now.” Missing the past while accepting the present is bittersweet. That is B.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 64 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 36Passage Martial Arts for the Mind and Body
Martial Arts for the Mind and Body
(1) The martial arts blend a series of physical movements with strategic mental discipline so that practitioners can defend themselves, physically defeat an opponent, or both. (2) Historians are unsure of exactly when and where martial arts were first used. (3) Martial arts have been practiced by several different societies for many centuries. (4) Martial arts such as karate, kung fu, tae kwon do, and judo are still taught and practiced as methods of self-defense, but they offer students more than that. (5) The study of martial arts can provide students with a way to enhance their mental discipline as well as their physical fitness.
(6) Discipline, focus, and respect are important qualities for everyone to have. (7) However, for most people these qualities are not innate; they must be learned and practiced. (8) The study of martial arts can provide an opportunity to develop these skills. (9) Students are rewarded for their dedication by passing tests and advancing to higher ranks or levels. (10) For example, in a typical tae kwon do class, students learn discipline by diligently practicing moves, improve focus by listening carefully, and demonstrate respect by bowing to the instructor and following directions.
(11) For teenagers, martial arts classes provide a safe and structured environment for gaining physical skills, building confidence, and enjoying a sense of community. (12) A lot of teens go through hard situations as they try to do well in school and in life. (13) A martial arts class can provide teens with a physical outlet for stress while also challenging them mentally. (14) Participating in a martial arts program also helps children and teens focus on self-improvement rather than on competition. (15) Progressing through levels of achievement involves mastering more physically demanding techniques. (16) It requires students to take responsibility and be accountable for achieving set goals. (17) Students gain confidence and experience companionship with other students who are progressing through the ranks.
(18) Adults who practice martial arts can experience many of the same benefits that younger people do, but perhaps the greatest of these is health and fitness. (19) Adult martial arts students often see changes in their body within weeks of beginning a program.
(20) For people interested in studying a martial art, there are many ways to learn and practice. (21) In addition to private studios, community recreation centers often offer low-cost or free martial arts classes. (22) There are even online videos that introduce students to the basic concepts. (23) People should study martial arts.
Question
Where should sentence 10 be moved to improve the organization of the second paragraph (sentences 6–10)?
- Ato the beginning of the paragraph (before sentence 6)
- Bbetween sentences 6 and 7
- Cbetween sentences 7 and 8
- Dbetween sentences 8 and 9
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The question asks where sentence 10 should be moved to improve the organization of the second paragraph.
A. Incorrect. Starting this paragraph with sentence 10 would weaken the paragraph’s organization because it would place a supporting detail sentence (sentence 10) before the topic sentence (sentence 6). Sentence 6 belongs at the beginning of the paragraph because it introduces the topic—the qualities of discipline, focus, and respect. Sentence 10 supports the key idea of the paragraph, that these qualities can be developed through the study of martial arts. If sentence 10 preceded sentence 6, the transitional phrase “for example” would refer to an unspecified topic and idea.
B. Incorrect. Sentence 6 presents the idea that “discipline, focus, and respect are important qualities for everyone to have,” but the example in sentence 10 does not directly relate to this idea. Sentence 10 explains how martial arts develop these qualities, not why they are important qualities to have. Because sentence 10 is not directly related to the idea in sentence 6 (the qualities are important), it should not follow sentence 6.
C. Incorrect. Sentences 7 and 8 should not be separated, because the idea presented in sentence 8—that “the study of martial arts can provide an opportunity to develop these skills”—is directly related to the idea from sentence 7—that the skills of discipline, focus, and respect “are not innate; they must be learned and practiced.” Sentence 10 supports the idea from sentence 8 by describing an example from a typical martial arts class, so sentence 10 should not precede sentence 8.
D. CORRECT. This option is correct because sentence 10 logically follows and supports the idea in sentence 8 that “the study of martial arts can provide an opportunity to develop” the qualities of discipline, focus, and respect. Sentence 10 explains this idea with examples, describing three specific ways that students in a typical tae kwon do class develop discipline, focus, and respect—by “diligently practicing,” “listening carefully,” and “bowing to the instructor and following directions.”
Question analysis
This organization question asks where sentence 10, a “For example” sentence describing a typical tae kwon do class, should be moved within the second paragraph of the martial arts passage. Students must work out what idea the example illustrates and read the paragraph with the sentence in each position, since several spots sound acceptable.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Placing a sentence where it supports the right idea is regular grade 7 revision work. The paragraph is five plain sentences and the opening “For example” is a strong clue, which keeps the demand typical of grade 7.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- How sentences fit together moderate
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Much to keep track of minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 402 words; question and choices: about grade 7, 31 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The example sentence fits loosely almost anywhere in a paragraph about discipline, focus and respect, so students have to ask what exactly it is an example of. The slot just before sentence 8 is the trap: the class’s practicing seems to illustrate sentence 7’s claim that the qualities “must be learned and practiced,” but the paragraph has not yet brought in martial arts. Those who match the example to sentence 8’s claim about martial arts place it correctly.
How sentences fit together moderate Working it out
Sentence 10 opens with “For example,” so it must follow the claim it illustrates, sentence 8’s point that studying martial arts can “develop these skills,” before sentence 9 turns to rewards. (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The slots before and after sentence 8 are neighbors, and the tae kwon do class could seem to illustrate sentence 7 as well as sentence 8, so only rereading tells them apart. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Much to keep track of minor Working it out
Each of the four positions means rereading a five-sentence paragraph in a new order in your head while keeping track of what “these qualities” and “these skills” refer to. (Sweller, 1988; Carpenter, Just & Shell, 1990)
Strategy: Ask which sentence the tae kwon do class is an example of, then reread the paragraph with sentence 10 placed right after it and check that every sentence still follows the one before.
Traps
- Sentence in the wrong place: Puts a sentence where it breaks the order of ideas or separates it from what it refers to.
The wrong answers, classified
A Sentence in the wrong place (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Moves the example to the front, where “For example” would point back to nothing and the topic sentence would come after its own illustration.
B Sentence in the wrong place (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Places the example after sentence 6, but the class shows how the qualities are built, not why everyone needs them, and it would cut sentence 7’s “However” off from sentence 6.
C Sentence in the wrong place (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Hears sentence 7’s “learned and practiced” echoed in “learn” and “practicing,” but the example must come after sentence 8, which first connects the qualities to martial arts.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks where to move sentence 10 so paragraph 2 reads in a better order. Sentence 10 starts with “For example.” So it must come right after the idea it is an example of.
Name the rule
An example goes right after the claim it shows. “For example” points back to the sentence before it. For instance: Reading builds your word power. For example, you meet new words in every book. If the example came first, it would point back to nothing.
Find what sentence 10 shows
Sentence 10 says students “learn discipline by diligently practicing moves, improve focus by listening carefully, and demonstrate respect by bowing to the instructor and following directions.” Diligently means with steady, careful effort. This shows how martial arts build those three qualities. Sentence 8 makes that claim: “The study of martial arts can provide an opportunity to develop these skills.” So sentence 10 belongs right after sentence 8.
Read the new order
Now the paragraph runs 6, 7, 8, 10, 9. Sentence 6 names the qualities. Sentence 7 says they “must be learned and practiced.” Sentence 8 says martial arts can build them. Sentence 10 gives the tae kwon do example. Then sentence 9 tells how students are rewarded. Each sentence leads to the next.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. “For example” would point back to nothing.
- B is wrong. Sentence 6 says why the qualities matter, but the class shows how they are built. It would also cut sentence 7’s “However” off from sentence 6.
- C is wrong. Sentence 7 never mentions martial arts. Sentence 8 is the first to link the qualities to martial arts.
- D is right. The example follows the claim it shows.
Watch out: Sentence 7 says “learned and practiced,” and sentence 10 uses “learn” and “practicing.” That echo pulls you toward C.
Choose the answer
Sentence 10 gives an example of sentence 8’s claim. It belongs right after it. So the answer is D, “between sentences 8 and 9.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong answer, because sentence 7 talks about learning and practice too. But sentence 7 does not mention martial arts. Sentence 8 claims that martial arts can build these skills, and the tae kwon do class is an example of exactly that. So the example belongs right after sentence 8.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Martial Arts for the Mind and Body” as printed (page 52)

Question 65 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 39Uses the passage above: “Martial Arts for the Mind and Body”.
Question
Which sentence would best follow and support sentence 18?
- AAdult students gain discipline, focus, self-control, and respect, which are qualities that help them advance in their careers.
- BMany adults initially train in a martial art simply to get exercise without realizing that the training also helps develop other skills.
- CThe exercise involved in training helps people strengthen their heart, boost endurance, improve balance, and develop muscle tone.
- DPeople who commit to training in the martial arts are usually concerned about improving their overall physical health.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks for the sentence that would best follow and support sentence 18.
A. Incorrect. Though the idea of advancing one’s career is certainly appealing for adults, this benefit is not directly tied to “health and fitness” and, therefore, does not support sentence 18.
B. Incorrect. While the passage does discuss potential benefits related to discipline, focus, and confidence (sentences 6 and 11), sentence 18 is solely related to health and fitness benefits and should not be followed by a description of “other skills.”
C. CORRECT. This option is correct because sentence 18 conveys that the greatest benefit of practicing martial arts is “health and fitness,” and the sentence illustrates some specific ways that martial arts training helps improve physical fitness—“strengthen their heart, boost endurance, improve balance, and develop muscle tone.”
D. Incorrect. Some readers may choose this option because sentence 5, sentence 15, and sentence 18 discuss the physical aspects of practicing martial arts, but the idea that people who practice martial arts are concerned about their overall health does not provide further details about the connection between training and health.
Question analysis
This supporting-details question asks which sentence would best follow and support sentence 18 of the martial arts passage, which says adults gain many of the same benefits as younger students and names the greatest of them. Every choice is about adults or training, so students must match the exact point of sentence 18 rather than its general subject.
- NYS standards
- 7W2b developing a topic
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Adding a detail that supports a given sentence is a regular grade 7 writing task. Sentence 18 names its focus plainly and its paragraph is only two sentences long, so the demand is typical, though two choices stay close to the topic.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- How sentences fit together moderate
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 402 words; question and choices: about grade 11, 84 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- The DOE printed this question’s explanation after a different question; the site matches the question with its own explanation.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Sentence 18 states its focus plainly, so the question mostly tests whether students hold to it. Two choices drift back to the mental side of the passage, discipline, focus and other skills, which paragraphs 2 and 3 have already covered. The closest wrong answer stays on physical health but describes the people who train, so it adds nothing about how training improves fitness; the key is the only one to list effects on the body.
How sentences fit together moderate Working it out
Sentence 18 names one benefit, “perhaps the greatest of these is health and fitness,” so the next sentence must give details of that benefit, not of the mental ones the passage covered earlier. (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The choice about health-minded trainees and the key both concern training and physical health; the key says what the exercise does for the body, the other only what trainees care about. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Reread sentence 18 and note which benefit it singles out, then ask of each choice whether it gives specific details about that benefit or shifts to another one.
Traps
- Off the point: Adds or keeps something that does not support the paragraph's or the passage's focus, or an introduction or conclusion that misses the main point.
The wrong answers, classified
A Off the point (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Lists discipline, focus, self-control and respect, qualities from paragraph 2, and adds careers, but sentence 18 singles out health and fitness for adults.
B Off the point (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Starts with adults training “to get exercise,” which sounds on topic, but its point is the other skills they gain without realizing it, a turn away from fitness.
D Off the point (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Stays on physical health but says what trainees care about, not what training does for them, so it gives no detail about the benefit sentence 18 names.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: In the DOE’s explanations appendix, the explanation printed after this question belongs to question 40 (“the concluding sentence that best replaces sentence 23 and supports the topic presented in the passage”) and marks B correct, and this question’s explanation (“the sentence that would best follow and support sentence 18”) is printed after question 40, marking C correct. Read page by page, the appendix gives this question the answer B. The site gives the question the explanation that restates it, and the answer follows that explanation: C, because sentence 18 names health and fitness as the greatest benefit for adults, and Option C gives specific ways that training improves fitness.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks which sentence should come right after sentence 18 and support it. To support a sentence is to give details that back it up. So first find what sentence 18 is about.
Read sentence 18
Sentence 18 says adults “can experience many of the same benefits that younger people do, but perhaps the greatest of these is health and fitness.” A benefit is a good result. So the next sentence should give details about health and fitness. It should show how training helps the body.
Name the rule
A supporting sentence stays on the same point and adds details. For example: Dogs make good pets. They are loyal, playful and easy to train. The second sentence gives details about the first. A sentence about cats would drift off the point.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. Discipline, focus and respect are qualities of the mind. Careers are off the point too.
- B is wrong. It starts with exercise, then turns to “other skills.”
- C is right. It names four ways training helps the body. Endurance means being able to keep going for a long time. Muscle tone means firm, strong muscles.
- D is wrong. It tells what people who train care about, not what training does for them.
Watch out: D stays on physical health, so it looks on topic. But it gives no details about how training improves fitness.
Choose the answer
Only C gives details of the health and fitness benefit. So the answer is C, “The exercise involved in training helps people strengthen their heart, boost endurance, improve balance, and develop muscle tone.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D is the closest wrong answer, because it also talks about physical health. But it describes the people who train, not the benefit. Sentence 18 names health and fitness as the greatest benefit. C backs that up with real effects on the body: a stronger heart, endurance, balance and muscle tone.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 66 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 40Uses the passage above: “Martial Arts for the Mind and Body”.
Question
Which concluding sentence should replace sentence 23 to best support the topic presented in the passage?
- AWith so many ways to begin studying martial arts, people can easily discover how the skills needed to progress in rank may help them in life.
- BBy taking advantage of opportunities to practice martial arts, people can experience the satisfaction of achieving goals while also improving themselves.
- CBecause people are eager to reap the mental and physical benefits of studying martial arts, enrollment in martial arts courses has increased.
- DWhile taking martial arts classes can improve health for both young people and adults, the effects are clearly more immediate for adults.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks for the concluding sentence that best replaces sentence 23 and supports the topic presented in the passage.
A. Incorrect. The phrase “the skills needed to progress in rank” is vague, and progressing in rank is not related to the overall topic of the passage, which is the benefits of studying martial arts. The topic of the passage is not the “many ways to begin studying martial arts” or how “people can easily discover” the benefits of martial arts.
B. CORRECT. This option is correct because it best supports the topic of the passage—the benefits of studying martial arts—by stating two reasons why people should study martial arts: to “experience the satisfaction of achieving goals while also improving themselves.”
C. Incorrect. Some readers may choose this option because it refers to the benefits of martial arts, but the word “because” and the detail that “enrollment in martial arts courses has increased” make this sentence unrelated to the overall topic of the passage, which is about the benefits of studying martial arts, not the number of people who participate.
D. Incorrect. Although the benefits of studying martial arts are described for both teens (in the third paragraph) and adults (in the fourth paragraph), the topic of the passage is the overall benefits of studying martial arts, which include mental discipline (discussed in the first, second, and third paragraphs) in addition to health benefits. Furthermore, the passage does not compare the health effects of studying martial arts across age groups.
Question analysis
This conclusion question asks which sentence should replace sentence 23, the bare closing line “People should study martial arts,” to best support the topic of the passage. Students must keep all five paragraphs in view, from mental discipline to fitness to ways of getting started, because every choice sounds like a reasonable final line when read on its own.
- NYS standards
- 7W2e concluding informative writing
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 writers choose conclusions that follow from a passage’s topic. This passage covers mental and physical benefits for different ages, and each long choice picks up a real thread, so judging the best fit takes more than typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence in several places moderate
- A lot to read minor
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 402 words; question and choices: about grade 12, 106 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- The DOE printed this question’s explanation after a different question; the site matches the question with its own explanation.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Every ending borrows something real from the passage: ways to begin, ranks, mental and physical benefits, or adults’ quick results. The work is deciding what the whole passage is about, the benefits of martial arts for mind and body, and then noticing which ending adds a new claim or shrinks the topic. The rank-based ending is hardest to reject because it is shaped like the key and promises help “in life,” but its focus is how easily people discover rank skills.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The rank choice is built like the key, a phrase about ways or chances to train followed by what people gain; it differs in resting on the vague “skills needed to progress in rank.” (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
The topic is pieced together from all five paragraphs, from the opening’s mind-and-body claim through teens, adults’ fitness and ways to learn, so a fitting ending must cover both kinds of benefit. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
A lot to read minor Understanding the question
Each choice is a two-part sentence of 21 to 26 words, and each picks up a real thread of the passage, so all four must be held against the topic. (Kintsch, 1998; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Strategy: State the passage’s topic in a few words using all five paragraphs, then test each ending: does it sum up that topic, or does it narrow it or add a new claim?
Traps
- Off the point: Adds or keeps something that does not support the paragraph's or the passage's focus, or an introduction or conclusion that misses the main point.
- Too narrow: A single detail offered as the central idea or a summary, or a summary that keeps minor details and leaves out an essential part.
The wrong answers, classified
A Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Follows on from the last paragraph’s many ways to start, but rests the ending on vague “skills needed to progress in rank,” one thread of paragraphs 2 and 3, not the benefits overall.
C Off the point (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Names the passage’s “mental and physical benefits,” which fits, but ends on rising enrollment, a claim about numbers of students that the passage never discusses.
D Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Rightly says training can improve health for young people and adults, but adds that adults clearly benefit sooner, a comparison the passage never makes, and drops the mental benefits.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: In the DOE’s explanations appendix, the explanation printed after this question belongs to question 39 (“the sentence that would best follow and support sentence 18”) and marks C correct, and this question’s explanation (“the concluding sentence that best replaces sentence 23 and supports the topic presented in the passage”) is printed after question 39, marking B correct. Read page by page, the appendix gives this question the answer C. The site gives the question the explanation that restates it, and the answer follows that explanation: B, because it sums up the passage’s topic, the benefits of studying martial arts.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks for a better last sentence. A good concluding sentence sums up the topic of the whole passage. Sentence 23, “People should study martial arts,” is short and plain. It doesn’t remind the reader why.
Find the passage’s topic
Sentence 5 states the topic. Martial arts can help students “enhance their mental discipline as well as their physical fitness.” Enhance means improve. Paragraph 2 covers discipline, focus and respect. Paragraph 3 covers teens and goals. Paragraph 4 covers adults and fitness. Paragraph 5 lists ways to start. So the topic is how martial arts help both mind and body.
Name the rule
A conclusion should sum up the main point. It should not shrink the point or add a brand-new claim. For example, after a report on why sleep matters, a good ending is Getting enough sleep helps both your body and your mind. A poor one is More people buy pillows now.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. It rests on vague “skills needed to progress in rank,” one small part of the passage.
- B is right. “Opportunities to practice” follows paragraph 5. “Achieving goals” and “improving themselves” sum up the benefits.
- C is wrong. Enrollment is the number of people who sign up. The passage never says it has gone up.
- D is wrong. The passage never says adults see results sooner than young people. D also leaves out the benefits to the mind.
Watch out: A is built like B and promises help “in life.” But it shrinks the topic to rank skills.
Choose the answer
B sums up what the whole passage says martial arts offer. So the answer is B, “By taking advantage of opportunities to practice martial arts, people can experience the satisfaction of achieving goals while also improving themselves.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong answer. Like B, it starts with ways to begin and ends with what people gain. But its gain is vague “skills needed to progress in rank.” That is only one thread of the passage. B sums up the whole topic: reaching goals and improving yourself.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 67 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 48Question
Read this sentence.
In the Whispering Gallery of Grand Central Terminal, people whispering a message in one corner can be clearly heard in the opposite corner, regardless of surrounding noise, because the tiled archways send the sound through the environment.
Which revision to the words send the sound through the environment uses the most precise language?
Drag the correct phrase into the box.
In the Whispering Gallery of Grand Central Terminal, people whispering a message in one corner can be clearly heard in the opposite corner, regardless of surrounding noise, because the tiled archways ____.
On the test you drag one of the tiles into the box; here, choose it.
- Aguide the sound waves in a specific direction
- Bfocus the sound waves to travel through the space
- Cdirect the sound waves to move along the curves of the arches
- Dtransfer the sound waves to a variety of different locations
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks for the revision to the words send the sound through the environment that uses the most precise language.
Incorrect. The phrase “guide the sound waves in a specific direction” is not the most precise revision. “A specific direction” does not explain precisely where the sound waves travel.
Incorrect. The phrase “focus the sound waves to travel through the space” is not the most precise revision, because it does not precisely describe where the waves move. The phrase “through the space” does not provide the reader with more specific information as to where in the space the sound waves travel.
CORRECT. The phrase “direct the sound waves to move along the curves of the arches” uses precise language to explain how the waves travel. The wording “direct the sound waves” is more specific than “send the sound” as in the original sentence, and the action “move along the curves” conveys more detail than the phrase “through the environment.”
Incorrect. The phrase “transfer the sound waves to a variety of different locations” is not the most precise revision, because it does not precisely convey where the waves move to. The phrase “variety of different locations” is vague and does not add clarity.
Question analysis
This precise-language question gives a sentence about the Whispering Gallery in Grand Central Terminal, where a whisper in one corner is heard in the opposite corner, and asks which revision of “send the sound through the environment” is most precise. On the test students drag one of four phrase tiles into the box, and every tile sounds more technical than the original.
- NYS standards
- 7L3a precise and concise language
- Grade level
- Grade 6 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Replacing vague wording with exact wording is taught by grade 6. Here it is one sentence about a familiar place and four phrase tiles, a single judgment, which is lighter than typical grade 7 revision of a whole paragraph.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Every choice must be checked minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one sentence or line
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 8, 133 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A misquotation of the sentence in the explanation was corrected.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
All four tiles upgrade “send the sound” to “the sound waves” with a sharper verb, so the original’s vagueness survives only in the endings. The tile that promises “a specific direction” sounds precise because of that word, yet it never names the direction; the key is the only tile that says where the sound travels. Dragging a tile into the box adds nothing to the task beyond picking one choice.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The “specific direction” tile is built like the key, a precise verb and “the sound waves”; the two differ only in the ending, a direction never named versus “along the curves of the arches.” (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Every choice must be checked minor Choosing the answer
Every tile sounds more exact than the original, so students must ask of each one whether a reader could tell how the sound gets from one corner to the opposite one. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Strategy: Reread the whole sentence, then ask of each tile whether a reader could picture exactly how the sound gets from one corner of the gallery to the other.
Traps
- Wordy, vague or informal: A revision is grammatical but wordy, imprecise or too casual for the passage.
- Changes the meaning: A revision is correct English but no longer says what the writer meant.
The wrong answers, classified
A Wordy, vague or informal (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Trusts the word “specific,” which sounds exact, but “a specific direction” never says which direction, so the phrase stays as vague as the original.
B Wordy, vague or informal (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Is drawn by the technical “focus the sound waves,” but “through the space” just restates “through the environment” and says nothing about the archways.
D Changes the meaning (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Picks the scientific-sounding “transfer,” but sending sound to “a variety of different locations” contradicts a whisper heard in the one opposite corner, and the phrase repeats itself.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: The DOE’s explanation of the correct phrase says that “move along the curves” conveys more detail than “the phrase ‘moving through the environment.’” The sentence in the question says the archways “send the sound through the environment”; the word “moving” is not in it. The site now quotes the sentence’s own words: “the phrase ‘through the environment.’”
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks which phrase is most precise. Precise language is exact. It tells the reader just what happens, so they can picture it. The phrase you pick replaces the underlined words.
See what the sentence needs
The sentence says a whisper in one corner “can be clearly heard in the opposite corner.” Why? “because the tiled archways send the sound through the environment.” That ending is vague, or unclear. “Through the environment” could mean anywhere. A better phrase would say how the sound gets from one corner to the other.
Name the rule
Precise writing swaps general words for exact ones. For example, The dog went over there is vague. The dog ran under the porch is precise. Now you know just where the dog went.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. “A specific direction” sounds exact. But it never says which direction.
- B is wrong. “Through the space” is just another way to say “through the environment.”
- C is right. “Along the curves of the arches” tells exactly where the sound travels. It follows the curved arches to the far corner.
- D is wrong. “A variety of different locations” is vague. It also clashes with a whisper heard in one corner. And “variety” and “different” say the same thing twice.
Watch out: The word “specific” makes A sound precise. Ask whether you can picture the path. With A, you can’t.
Choose the answer
With the tile in place, the sentence ends because the tiled archways direct the sound waves to move along the curves of the arches. So the answer is C. On the test, you drag the tile “direct the sound waves to move along the curves of the arches” into the box.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong answer. It has a strong verb, “guide,” and the word “specific.” But it never names the direction, so the reader still can’t picture the path. C says exactly where the sound goes: along the curves of the arches. That explains how a whisper reaches the opposite corner.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 68 of 120
2026 Practice Test D English, question 50Question
What is the best way to combine the sentences?
(1) Scientists now believe that Jupiter may have as many as seventy-nine moons.
(2) One of Jupiter’s moons is named Io.
(3) Io has the greatest number of active volcanoes in the solar system.
- AIo, which is one of Jupiter’s moons, has the greatest number of active volcanoes in the solar system, and scientists now believe that Jupiter may have as many as seventy-nine moons.
- BScientists now believe that Jupiter may have as many as seventy-nine moons, and one of them is named Io, which has the greatest number of active volcanoes in the solar system.
- CScientists now believe that Jupiter may have as many as seventy-nine moons, including one named Io, which has the greatest number of active volcanoes in the solar system.
- DIo, a moon with the greatest number of active volcanoes in the solar system, is one of Jupiter’s moons, and scientists now believe that Jupiter may have as many as seventy-nine moons.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks for the best way to combine the sentences.
A. Incorrect. Although the sentence incorporates the ideas presented in the three original sentences, it is incorrect because the combination suggests an incorrect relationship between the ideas. By beginning with “Io,” the sentence places emphasis on the moon and the detail about the number of active volcanoes rather than the key idea that “scientists now believe that Jupiter may have as many as seventy-nine moons.” Since Io is an example of one of Jupiter’s moons, the details about Io should follow and be subordinate to the main clause, which provides new information about the number of Jupiter’s moons in general.
B. Incorrect. Although the sentence incorporates all three ideas from the original sentences and correctly places the detail about the number of active volcanoes on Io in a dependent clause, this option is incorrect because it presents an imprecise relationship between the ideas. By using the conjunction (connecting word) “and,” the sentence construction suggests that scientists “now believe” that “Jupiter may have as many as seventy-nine moons” and that “one of them is named Io,” instead of presenting Io as an example of one of Jupiter’s moons.
C. CORRECT. This sentence is the best way to combine the original sentences because it uses a complex sentence to present ideas clearly and precisely, and it shows the relationship between the ideas in the original sentences. The sentence starts by stating the number of moons scientists now believe Jupiter may have and then specifies that one of those moons is named Io. The dependent clause “which has the greatest number of active volcanoes in the solar system” immediately follows the word “Io” to provide additional information about the moon. A dependent clause contains a subject (“which,” referring to Io) and a verb (“has”) but is not a complete sentence on its own.
D. Incorrect. The sentence incorporates the key ideas from the original sentences, but its structure does not accurately present the relationship between these ideas. The beginning of the sentence includes the detail about Io having “the greatest number of active volcanoes in the solar system” before specifying that Io is one of the seventy-nine moons of Jupiter. The presentation of the details about Io at the beginning lessens the emphasis of the key idea that “scientists now believe that Jupiter may have as many as seventy-nine moons.”
Question analysis
This sentence-combining question gives three short sentences: scientists believe Jupiter may have as many as seventy-nine moons, one moon is named Io, and Io has the most active volcanoes in the solar system. Students must choose the single sentence that joins all three facts while showing how they relate, and the four versions differ only in order and connecting structure.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Combining sentences so the ideas relate clearly is grade 7 language work. The three sentences are short, but every version keeps all the facts, so the choice rests on which idea leads and which is tucked into a clause, a typical grade 7 demand.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- How sentences fit together moderate
- Every choice must be checked minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one sentence or line
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 10, 162 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Because every version keeps all three facts and is grammatical, the question is about emphasis and connection, which students rarely check for. Two versions open with Io and its volcanoes and leave the seventy-nine moons trailing after “and,” and one of them also calls Io a moon twice. The strongest pull is the version with the right order that still joins Io with “and,” so Io’s name reads as a second piece of news rather than an example of the moons just counted.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The “and one of them is named Io” version matches the key in its order and in its which-clause about volcanoes; only its connector differs from the key’s “including one named Io.” (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
How sentences fit together moderate Working it out
Students must see that sentence 1 is the main news and that sentences 2 and 3 narrow to one example, so Io belongs inside the sentence about Jupiter’s seventy-nine moons. (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Every choice must be checked minor Choosing the answer
Every version is grammatical and keeps all three facts, so none can be ruled out by an error; each is judged on which idea leads and how the others attach. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Strategy: Decide which of the three sentences states the main idea and which ones add detail, then check whether each version’s order and structure show that relationship.
Traps
- Wrong transition: A connecting word or phrase that signals the wrong relationship, such as contrast where the idea continues.
- Changes the meaning: A revision is correct English but no longer says what the writer meant.
The wrong answers, classified
A Changes the meaning (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Opens with Io and its volcanoes and adds the moon count with “and,” so the main news about Jupiter trails behind its own example as an afterthought.
B Wrong transition (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Keeps the right order and the which-clause, but “and one of them is named Io” adds Io as a second piece of news instead of an example of those moons.
D Changes the meaning (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Leads with Io’s volcanoes, then says Io “is one of Jupiter’s moons” right after calling it “a moon,” and leaves the main news about Jupiter for the end.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks for the best way to join three sentences into one. All four choices keep every fact. So the best one shows how the facts relate. Decide which fact is the main idea and which ones add detail.
Find the main idea
Sentence 1 is the big news: “Scientists now believe that Jupiter may have as many as seventy-nine moons.” Sentences 2 and 3 zoom in on one of those moons, Io. Io is an example of the moons, and its volcanoes are a detail about Io. So the main idea should come first, and Io should fit inside it.
Name the rule
Put the main idea in the main part of the sentence. Tuck the details in with words like including and which. For example: My school has thirty clubs. One is chess. The chess club meets on Fridays. Joined: My school has thirty clubs, including a chess club, which meets on Fridays.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. It starts with Io and its volcanoes. The main news about Jupiter trails at the end after “and.”
- B is wrong. The order is right. But “and one of them is named Io” adds Io as a second piece of news, not as an example.
- C is right. “Including one named Io” shows Io is one of the moons. Then “which” adds the fact about its volcanoes.
- D is wrong. It calls Io “a moon,” then says again that it “is one of Jupiter’s moons.” The main news comes last.
Watch out: B is very close to C. The only change is “and one of them is named Io” in place of “including one named Io.” The word “including” shows that Io belongs to the group.
Choose the answer
C leads with the main news and tucks in Io as an example. So the answer is C, “Scientists now believe that Jupiter may have as many as seventy-nine moons, including one named Io, which has the greatest number of active volcanoes in the solar system.”
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong answer. It has the right order and the same “which” clause. But “and” tacks Io’s name on as a separate fact, as if it were more news. “Including” shows that Io is one of the seventy-nine moons. That ties the three facts together most clearly.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 69 of 120
2026 Practice Test D Math, question 1Question
What is the prime factorization of 3,575?
- A
- B
- C
- D
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
By observation, 3,575 ends in 75; therefore, 3,575 is divisible by 25.
Test 143 for factors and eliminate 3, 5, and 7, but 11 is a factor.
; both 11 and 13 are prime numbers.
The first factor, 25, is not prime but is the product of primes, .
The prime factorization of 3,575 is .
Question analysis
This number question asks for the prime factorization of 3,575, chosen from four products of factors. Students divide by primes, using divisibility tests, until only primes remain. The four products look much alike, so the work must be carried all the way through, keeping count of every prime divided out along the way.
- Grade level
- Grade 6 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Breaking a number into primes is grade 6 number work that relies on divisibility tests. The number here is larger than in most class examples, but the work is still a few divisions, lighter than typical grade 7 problems.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Something you must already know minor
- Solution
- 3 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 11, 10 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Three of the four choices multiply back to 3,575, so checking a product rules out only the one that equals 715. The question turns on whether 143 is prime: it survives the quick tests for 2, 3 and 5, and the factor 11 is easy to miss. Students who keep dividing until every factor is prime, and who write a prime as often as it divides, finish in under a minute.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
5² · 143 matches the right factorization in its first factor and multiplies back to 3,575 just as well, so a product check cannot separate them; only splitting 143 into 11 × 13 does. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Something you must already know minor Working it out
Nothing on the page defines a prime factorization or gives a test for 11, and 143 passes the familiar quick tests for 2, 3 and 5, so it looks prime. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Strategy: Divide by the smallest prime that goes in evenly, again and again, writing down every prime you use until the quotient reaches 1, then compare that list with each choice.
Traps
- Stops one step early: A choice is a number from partway through the solution.
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
The wrong answers, classified
A Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Lists each prime that divides 3,575 only once, 5, 11 and 13, as if a factorization named which primes divide it, though their product is only 715.
C Stops one step early (King et al., 2004; Gierl et al., 2017)
Divides out one 5 and stops at 5 · 715, a true factorization but not a prime one, though 715 ends in 5 and splits further.
D Stops one step early (King et al., 2004; Gierl et al., 2017)
Divides by 25 and stops at 143, which passes the tests for 2, 3 and 5 and looks prime, though 143 = 11 × 13.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Divisibility by 25
- A number is divisible by 25 when 25 goes into it with no remainder. You only need to look at the last two digits. If they are 00, 25, 50 or 75, the number is divisible by 25. This works because 100 is 4 × 25, so the hundreds never leave a remainder.
- Writing a repeated factor with an exponent
- a is any number. The small raised 2 is an exponent. It tells you how many times a is used as a factor, so 5² means 5 × 5 = 25. Use an exponent in a prime factorization when the same prime shows up more than once.
Sort out the question
A prime number is a whole number greater than 1 whose only factors are 1 and itself. Examples are 2, 3, 5, 7, 11 and 13. The prime factorization of 3,575 writes it as a product (the answer to a multiplication) of prime numbers only. So you must break 3,575 down until every factor is prime.
Divide by 25 first
3,575 ends in 75. So it is divisible by 25:
That means 3,575 = 25 × 143. But 25 is not prime. It is 5 × 5, which you can write as 5².
Test 143 for prime factors
Now see if 143 splits. Try the primes in order. 143 is odd, so 2 does not work. Its digits add to 1 + 4 + 3 = 8, which is not a multiple of 3, so 3 does not work. It does not end in 0 or 5, so 5 does not work. Since 7 × 20 = 140, 143 ÷ 7 leaves a remainder of 3, so 7 does not work. Now try 11:
So 143 = 11 × 13, and both 11 and 13 are prime.
Watch out: 143 looks prime, but it is not. Stopping at 5² · 143 leads to choice D.
Put all the primes together
Collect every prime you found. The 5 appears twice, then 11 and 13 once each. The dot · means times, just like ×.
Watch out: write the 5 twice, since it divides 3,575 twice. Writing it once gives 5 · 11 · 13, choice A, which equals only 715. Choice C, 5 · 715, stops too early, because 715 ends in 5 and splits further.
So the answer is B, .
Check your answer
Multiply the primes back together: 25 × 11 = 275, and 275 × 13 = 3,575. That is the number you started with. Also, 5, 11 and 13 are all prime, so nothing can be split further.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 70 of 120
2026 Practice Test D Math, question 3Question
Two sets, R and S, are described below. The sum of the elements in set R equals the sum of the elements in set S.
What is the value of ?
- A−7
- B−5
- C5
- D7
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
First, find the sum for each set by adding the terms in each set separately.
The sum for set R is , which is .
The sum for set S is , which is .
The question states that these two sums are equal to each other, so write the equation and then rearrange using inverse operations.
If the rearranging to obtain the target value is unclear, use the equation and find a few possible values for x and y.
For example, if , then because . If , then because . Then find the value of . No matter which values are chosen, will always be .
Question analysis
Two sets of four numbers, R and S, each contain one unknown, x and y, and the sums of the two sets are equal. Students find the value of x − y without being able to find x or y alone. It tests writing and rearranging an equation, and deciding which way round the difference goes is the tricky part.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Grade 7 students write and solve equations with one unknown. This one has two unknowns that are never found separately; students must rearrange to get their difference, a less familiar goal, though the arithmetic is light.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Variables instead of numbers minor
- Solution
- 3 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 4, 33 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The sums take seconds; the point is lost on the sign. Because set R's known numbers add to more than set S's, x has to be the smaller unknown, so x − y is negative, but subtracting the two known sums in the order they appear gives a positive 5. Choosing one pair of values that balances the sets, such as x = 1 and y = 6, settles the sign at once.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choices pair −5 with 5 and −7 with 7, so the size 5 is easy to reach and only the order of subtraction, x − y rather than y − x, separates the right choice from its opposite. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Variables instead of numbers minor Understanding the question
Neither x nor y can be found, only the gap between them, so students who look for a value of each letter stall; the question rewards rearranging x + 16 = y + 11. (Koedinger & Nathan, 2004; Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
Strategy: Add the known numbers in each set, set the two sums equal, then move both letters to one side so it reads x − y; testing one pair of values confirms the sign.
Traps
- Negatives and direction: Arithmetic with negative numbers, the order of a subtraction, or direction on a number line. (Moving a term across the equals sign without changing its sign is a faulty procedure.)
The wrong answers, classified
A Little reason to choose it (Haladyna & Downing, 1993; Rodriguez, 2005)
No common working gives −7; it needs a slip in a sum, such as 18 for 5 + 3 + 8, so it mostly draws guesses near −5.
C Negatives and direction (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Subtracts the known sums in the order the sets appear, 16 − 11 = 5, which is y − x, missing that R's larger known sum makes x the smaller unknown.
D Little reason to choose it (Haladyna & Downing, 1993; Rodriguez, 2005)
Needs two unrelated errors, a slip in a sum and the subtraction reversed, so no single line of working reaches 7 and it mostly catches guesses.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Doing the same to both sides
- a and b are two equal amounts, and c is any number or letter. Taking the same thing away from both sides keeps them equal. You use it to move terms around until the equation shows what you want.
Sort out the question
Set R holds 5, x, 3 and 8. Set S holds 6, y, 4 and 1. The elements (the members) of R add up to the same total as the elements of S. You cannot find x or y alone. But you can find , the gap between them.
Add up each set
Add the known numbers in each set, and keep the letter:
The two sums are equal, so:
Rearrange to get x − y
You want on one side. Subtract y from both sides:
Then subtract 16 from both sides:
Make sense of the sign
Set R already has 16 from its numbers, but set S has only 11. So y must be 5 more than x to make the sums match. That makes negative.
Watch out: 16 − 11 = 5 is , not . Using it leads to choice C.
So the answer is B, −5.
Check your answer
Try real values. If x = 1, then R adds to 17. So y + 11 = 17, and y = 6. Then . Try x = 10: then y = 15, and 10 − 15 = −5 again.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 71 of 120
2026 Practice Test D Math, question 6Question
The cost of shipping a package is $12, plus $2 for each additional pound over 3 pounds. Which expression represents the total cost, in dollars, of shipping a package that weighs p pounds? Assume that .
- A
- B
- C
- D
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
Since the additional cost per pound is not added until the package weighs more than 3 pounds, the total cost for 1, 2, or 3 pounds is $12.
- 1 pound is $12
- 2 pounds is $12
- 3 pounds is $12
Since p is greater than or equal to 3 pounds, the total cost for:
- 4 pounds is
- 5 pounds is
- p pounds is
You may try to write the expression without generating the pattern by recognizing that subtracting 3 from the number of pounds for the package before multiplying by $2 and then adding $12 results in the total cost.
Question analysis
Shipping a package costs $12, plus $2 for each additional pound over 3 pounds, and students choose the expression for the total cost of a package that weighs p pounds. It tests writing an algebraic expression from a word problem. The per-pound charge starts only after the first 3 pounds, and turning that phrase into algebra is the tricky part.
- Grade level
- Grade 6 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Writing an expression from a cost description is grade 6 algebra. Because the per-pound charge starts only after the first 3 pounds, it is less routine than a fee plus a simple rate, in line with typical grade 7 demand.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Turning words into math moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Variables instead of numbers minor
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 6, 37 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The question rewards modeling the fee in two parts: a flat $12 that covers the first 3 pounds, and $2 for each pound beyond them. The two choices that start with 12 look equally reasonable until a weight is tried, and the two that begin with 14p come from merging the fee with the per-pound charge. Testing p = 3, which must cost exactly $12, rules out three choices in one step.
Turning words into math moderate Understanding the question
“$2 for each additional pound over 3 pounds” must become 2(p − 3), a charge on the pounds beyond the first 3, and the word “over” invites writing p + 3 instead. (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; Koedinger & Nathan, 2004)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
12 + 2(p + 3) and 12 + 2(p − 3) differ only in the sign inside the parentheses, so their shape cannot separate them; only a test weight or a careful reading can. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Variables instead of numbers minor Understanding the question
The weight is the letter p, so there is no cost to work out and compare; choosing a weight such as 5 pounds, which costs $16, turns every choice into a number. (Koedinger & Nathan, 2004; Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
Strategy: Test a weight such as 5 pounds: work out its cost from the description, then substitute 5 for p in each choice and keep the one that gives the same cost.
Traps
- Follows a key word: Picks the operation from a single word rather than the situation: "removed" so subtract, "of" so multiply, "more" so add, when the situation needs something else.
- Numbers taken from the question: Combines the numbers in the question without a model of the situation, or is simply a number that appears in the question.
The wrong answers, classified
A Follows a key word (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Reads “over 3 pounds” as adding 3, so the $2 charge applies to p + 3 pounds instead of only the pounds above the first 3.
C Numbers taken from the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Merges the $12 and the $2 into $14 for every pound and tacks on the 3 from the stem, building an expression from its numbers without a model.
D Numbers taken from the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Charges $14 for every pound by merging the fee with the $2 rate, then subtracts 3 for the first 3 pounds, mixing dollars with pounds.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Cost with a base fee and a rate
- The base fee is the set price, $12, which covers the first 3 pounds. The rate is the price for each pound after that, $2. The extra pounds are the pounds over 3, which is p − 3. Use it when a price has a fixed part plus a part per unit.
Sort out the question
Shipping costs $12 to start. Each pound over 3 pounds adds $2. The package weighs p pounds, and p is at least 3. You need an expression for the total cost in dollars.
Count the extra pounds
Only the pounds above 3 cost extra. To find them, take 3 away from the weight:
For example, a 5-pound package has 5 − 3 = 2 extra pounds.
Watch out: over 3 pounds means more than 3. It does not tell you to add 3. Writing p + 3 leads to choice A.
Build the expression
Each extra pound costs $2, so the extra pounds cost 2(p − 3) dollars. Add the $12 base fee:
Watch out: the $12 is paid once, not for every pound. Choices C and D charge $14 for every pound, which mixes up the fee and the rate.
Test each choice with 5 pounds
A 5-pound package costs $12 plus two $2 charges, which is $16. Put p = 5 into each choice:
Choice Value when p = 5 A 12 + 2(8) = 28 B 12 + 2(2) = 16 C 14(5) + 3 = 73 D 14(5) − 3 = 67 Only B gives $16. So the answer is B, .
Check your answer
Try p = 3, the smallest weight allowed. There are no extra pounds, so it should cost just $12. Choice B gives 12 + 2(0) = 12. Try p = 4: 12 + 2(1) = 14, which is $12 plus one $2 charge.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 72 of 120
2026 Practice Test D Math, question 10Question
For what values of x is the above inequality true?
- A
- B
- C
- D
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
Use inverse operations to isolate the variable x by first getting the x variable on one side.
Now, when dividing by , the direction of the inequality sign changes.
Another way to solve is to keep the coefficient of x positive and then recognize that is the same as .
Question analysis
This algebra question asks which values of x make the inequality 2x + 11 > 3x + 9 true, choosing from four solution sets. It tests solving a linear inequality with the variable on both sides. Collecting the x terms can leave a negative coefficient, and handling the inequality sign at that point is where most mistakes happen.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Two-step inequalities are grade 7 work, and having x on both sides, a grade 8 idea, takes only one extra subtraction here. The demand matches a careful grade 7 problem, with one sign decision that is easy to get wrong.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Error-prone arithmetic moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 10, 15 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A grammatical error in the explanation was corrected.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The boundary 2 comes out of two routine moves; the direction is where points are lost. Whichever side the x terms are collected on, the last step either divides by a negative or leaves x on the right, and both moments invite a reversed answer. A second risk is moving the 9 without changing its sign, which yields 20. Substituting x = 0, which makes 11 > 9 true, confirms the direction.
Error-prone arithmetic moderate Working it out
Subtracting 3x from both sides leaves −x > −2, and dividing by −1 must reverse the sign; subtracting 2x instead leaves 2 > x, which still has to be read from the x side. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
x < 2 and x > 2 share the boundary and differ only in direction, so finding the 2 settles nothing; only the sign rule or a test value such as x = 0 decides. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Subtract 2x from both sides so the x term stays positive, undo the + 9, then rewrite the result with x first; testing a value in the original inequality checks the direction.
Traps
- Negatives and direction: Arithmetic with negative numbers, the order of a subtraction, or direction on a number line. (Moving a term across the equals sign without changing its sign is a faulty procedure.)
- A faulty procedure: A systematic but wrong procedure: adding fractions straight across, applying an exponent to each term of a sum, dropping a sign when moving a term.
The wrong answers, classified
B Negatives and direction (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Reaches −x > −2 but divides by −1 without reversing the inequality, or reads 2 > x as x > 2, so the direction comes out backwards.
C A faulty procedure (Brown & Burton, 1978; Tatsuoka, 1983)
Moves the 9 across the inequality without changing its sign, 11 + 9 = 20 instead of 11 − 9 = 2, and keeps the direction right.
D A faulty procedure (Brown & Burton, 1978; Tatsuoka, 1983)
Moves the 9 without changing its sign to get 20 > x, then also rewrites that statement backwards as x > 20, two errors at once.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: The DOE’s explanation says “Another way to solve is to keep the coefficient of x positive and then recognizing that 2 > x is the same as x < 2.” The two verbs joined by “and then” should have the same form, so the site now says “and then recognize that”.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Doing the same to both sides of an inequality
- a and b are the two sides, and c is any number or term. Subtracting (or adding) the same amount on both sides keeps the inequality true and its sign the same. That is how you move terms from one side to the other.
- Dividing by a negative number
- a and b are any numbers. Multiplying or dividing both sides by a negative number flips the sign, so > becomes <. For example, 3 > 2, but −3 < −2. Use it whenever you divide by a negative number.
Sort out the question
The sign > means is greater than. You need every value of x that makes 2x + 11 greater than 3x + 9. The answer is a range of values, not one number. Solve it like an equation, but keep an eye on the direction of the sign.
Gather the x terms on one side
The right side has more x’s, 3x, than the left side, 2x. So subtract 2x from both sides. That keeps the x term positive:
Get x by itself
Subtract 9 from both sides:
Watch out: to move the 9, subtract it from both sides. Adding it instead gives 20 > x, which leads to choice C or D.
Read it from the x side
says 2 is greater than x. That is the same as saying x is less than 2:
Watch out: when you swap the sides, the sign must point the other way. Writing gives choice B. If you subtract 3x instead, you get . Dividing by −1 then flips the sign, and you get again.
So the answer is A, .
Check your answer
Test x = 0, which is less than 2. The left side is 11 and the right side is 9, and 11 > 9 is true. Test x = 5, which is more than 2. The left side is 21 and the right side is 24, and 21 > 24 is false. So only values below 2 work.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 73 of 120
2026 Practice Test D Math, question 20Question
What is the value of ?
- A−76
- B−4
- C4
- D148
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
Use the order of operations to evaluate the expression. It is important to recognize that the fraction bar is a grouping symbol and so the entire numerator should be evaluated first. Exponents are evaluated first.
Then multiplication, recognizing that the product of a negative factor and a positive factor is negative.
Then addition and subtraction in order from left to right, recognizing the rules for adding and subtracting signed numbers.
And finally the fraction can be evaluated by division, recognizing that the quotient of a positive and a negative number is negative.
Question analysis
This arithmetic question asks for the value of a fraction whose numerator, −9(−4)² + 36(−4) + 304, is divided by −4. Students follow the order of operations with negative numbers: a square, two products, a sum and a division. Every step carries a sign, and one dropped negative changes the result completely.
- NYS standards
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Order of operations with negative numbers is standard grade 7 practice. This expression stacks a squared negative, two products and a division by a negative into one fraction, so it takes more steps than usual, each with a sign to track.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Error-prone arithmetic moderate
- Many steps minor
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Solution
- 4 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 5, 6 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Nothing here is conceptually new; the question measures care with signs under the order of operations. The parentheses in (−4)² decide whether −9 multiplies 16 or −16, and the two products of −144 then nearly cancel the 304, leaving a small numerator whose sign is easy to lose. Writing each intermediate value with its sign, line by line, prevents most errors.
Error-prone arithmetic moderate Working it out
Five sign decisions sit in one expression: squaring −4, two products with a negative factor, a sum that climbs from −288 past zero, and a division by −4. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
Many steps minor Working it out
The numerator alone takes an exponent, two multiplications and two additions before the single division, and all of it must be finished before dividing. (Daniel & Embretson, 2010; Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The right value and the choice 4 differ only in sign, so a student with the right size must still check the sign of a positive numerator over −4. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Treat the fraction bar as grouping: square −4 first, do the two multiplications, combine the numerator from left to right, and only then divide by −4, writing each sign as you go.
Traps
- Negatives and direction: Arithmetic with negative numbers, the order of a subtraction, or direction on a number line. (Moving a term across the equals sign without changing its sign is a faulty procedure.)
- Order of operations: Working left to right, or distributing a minus sign wrongly, gives a choice.
The wrong answers, classified
A Order of operations (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Squares as if the minus sat outside the parentheses, taking (−4)² as −16, so −9 × (−16) = 144, the numerator becomes 304, and 304 ÷ (−4) = −76.
C Negatives and direction (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Works the numerator out correctly as 16 but divides by −4 as if the signs did not matter, giving a positive quotient.
D Negatives and direction (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Drops every negative sign, adding 144 + 144 + 304 = 592 and dividing by 4, so 148 keeps none of the signs in the problem.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Order of operations
- This is the order for working out an expression. Grouping means parentheses and the fraction bar. Exponents are small raised numbers, like the 2 in (−4)². Next, multiply and divide from left to right. Last, add and subtract from left to right.
- Squaring a negative number
- a is a positive number, so −a is negative. Squaring means multiplying a number by itself. A negative times a negative is positive, so a negative number squared is positive. For example, (−4)² = 16.
- Signs when you multiply or divide
- When two numbers have different signs, their product or quotient is negative. When they have the same sign, it is positive. A quotient is the answer to a division.
Sort out the question
You need the value of one big fraction. The fraction bar is a grouping symbol, so finish the whole top first. Then divide by −4. Follow the order of operations, and track every minus sign.
Do the exponent first
The only exponent is (−4)². Squaring means multiplying a number by itself:
Watch out: (−4)² is 16, not −16. Using −16 makes the top 304, which gives −76, choice A.
Do the multiplication
Now multiply. A negative times a positive is negative:
So the top becomes:
Add from left to right
Add the two negatives first:
Then add 304. Since 304 is more than 288, the result is positive:
The whole top is 16.
Divide by −4
Now divide the top by the bottom. A positive divided by a negative is negative:
Watch out: positive 4, choice C, ignores the negative bottom. Dropping every minus sign gives 592 ÷ 4 = 148, choice D.
So the answer is B, −4.
Check your answer
Multiply back. If the answer is −4, then −4 times the bottom, −4, should give the top. It does: (−4) × (−4) = 16. Also, the top is positive and the bottom is negative, so the answer must be negative.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 74 of 120
2026 Practice Test D Math, question 28Question
A graph shows the relationship between the number of gallons of water, y, that has been added to a tank and the number of hours, x, that water has been added to the tank at a constant rate. What does the ordered pair (3, 24) represent?
- AThree gallons of water was added in 24 hours.
- BThree gallons of water was added per hour.
- CTwenty-four gallons of water was added in 3 hours.
- DTwenty-four gallons of water was added per hour.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
It is given that x-values on the graph represent the numbers of hours for which water was added to the tank, and the y-values represent the numbers of gallons of water added in x hours. In the ordered pair (3, 24), 3 represents an x-value and 24 represents a y-value.
Therefore, (3, 24) represents a data point for 24 gallons of water being added to the tank in a 3-hour period.
Question analysis
A graph relates the gallons of water added to a tank, y, to the hours it has been filling at a constant rate, x. Students choose what the ordered pair (3, 24) means in the situation. It tests interpreting coordinates in context, and the four statements mix totals with rates and switch the two numbers around.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Explaining what a point on the graph of a proportional relationship means is named in the grade 7 standards. This is a direct case with no graph to read, though the stem introduces the two quantities in an order that needs care.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly understand
- What makes it hard
- Solution
- 1 step
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 5, 76 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
One fact decides the question: an ordered pair lists x first. The choices then test two confusions, which number is the gallons and whether a point is a rate. Reading the pair aloud as “after 3 hours, 24 gallons”, and noting that 24 ÷ 3 gives a rate of 8 gallons an hour that no choice states, rules out all three wrong statements.
Reading a figure, table or graph minor Understanding the question
No graph is drawn, and the stem names y, the gallons, before x, the hours, so the pair (3, 24) has to be matched to its letters, not to the order the quantities were mentioned. (Lesh, Post & Behr, 1987; Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The four statements reuse 3 and 24 in two frames, a total added “in” some hours and an amount “per hour”, so the right statement and its swapped twin differ only in which number counts gallons. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Recall that an ordered pair lists x first and y second, write down what x and y measure here, and read the pair as one sentence about hours and gallons.
Traps
- Misreads the question: Misses or misreads a condition or a word in the question: "at least", "each", "remaining", "not".
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
The wrong answers, classified
A Misreads the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Pairs the numbers with the quantities in the order the stem names them, gallons first, so reads (3, 24) as 3 gallons in 24 hours.
B Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Takes the first coordinate for a rate and pins it to gallons, mixing up one point on the graph with the constant rate, which is 8 gallons an hour.
D Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Reads the 24 gallons as the amount added each hour, taking a point’s y-value for the rate, though 24 is the total after 3 hours.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- An ordered pair
- An ordered pair names one point on a graph. The first number is always the x-value. The second number is always the y-value. Here x counts hours and y counts gallons. So a pair tells how many gallons were added after that many hours.
- Rate from a point
- When water is added at a constant rate, divide the y-value by the x-value. The result is the rate: gallons added in 1 hour. A point itself shows a total, not a rate.
Sort out the question
The graph links two amounts:
- x is the number of hours water has been added.
- y is the number of gallons added.
You need to say what the point (3, 24) means. No graph is drawn, so you work from the words.
Match each number to its letter
In an ordered pair, x always comes first and y second. So in (3, 24):
- x = 3, which means 3 hours.
- y = 24, which means 24 gallons.
Watch out: the question names gallons first and hours second. Do not match the numbers to the words in that order. That mistake reads 3 as gallons and 24 as hours, choice A.
Read the pair as a sentence
Put the two meanings together: after 3 hours, 24 gallons have been added in all. The 24 is a total for the whole 3 hours.
Watch out: 24 is not the amount for each hour. The rate per hour is gallons. So choice D, 24 gallons per hour, is wrong. Choice B, 3 gallons per hour, is also not the rate.
So the answer is C, twenty-four gallons of water was added in 3 hours.
Check your answer
Use the rate of 8 gallons each hour. In 3 hours, gallons go in. That matches choice C. No choice says 8 gallons per hour, so both “per hour” choices must be wrong.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 75 of 120
2026 Practice Test D Math, question 38Question
Melissa has a bag of marbles that are all the same size. The bag contains three red (R) marbles, three green (G) marbles, and two white (W) marbles. For an experiment, she will take two marbles out of the bag without looking. Which list shows the sample space for Melissa’s experiment?
- AR, G, W
- BRG, RW, GW
- CR, R, R, G, G, G, W, W
- DRR, RG, RW, GG, GW, WW
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The sample space of a random experiment is the collection of all possible outcomes. For this experiment, R represents a red marble, G represents a green marble, and W represents a white marble.
Since two marbles are being drawn, the possible outcomes for the first marble drawn are R, G, W.
List the possible results for each initial outcome combined with the second choice of marble. For example, if the first marble and second marble are both red, the sample space will include RR (red, red).
RR, RG, RW
GR, GG, GW
WR, WG, WW
Since order does not matter in this selection, remove any pairing that presents a duplicate choice, such as RG and GR—only one of the two pairings will be included in the sample space. Those are removed and leave a sample space of:
RR, RG, RW, GG, GW, WW
Question analysis
A bag holds three red, three green and two white marbles, and Melissa will take out two without looking. This probability question asks which list shows the sample space for her experiment. Students must know what a sample space is and what one outcome of drawing two marbles looks like, then decide which color pairs are possible.
- NYS standards
- 7.SP.8b sample spaces for compound events
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Representing the sample space of a compound event is a named grade 7 skill. Nothing is computed here; the demand is knowing what one outcome of drawing two marbles looks like and which pairs the bag allows, much as in grade 7 classwork.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly understand
- What makes it hard
- Something you must already know moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 3, 71 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The question tests a definition more than a skill, and three choices describe something real: the colors of one marble, the contents of the bag, and the pairs of different colors. The strongest pull comes from treating the colors as three single objects, which leaves out the pairs of one color although the bag holds three reds, three greens and two whites. Asking what Melissa could be holding after the draw settles it.
Something you must already know moderate Working it out
The term sample space is not defined in the question: students must know it means every possible result of the whole experiment, here a pair of colors drawn together. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The three mixed pairs, RG, RW and GW, form a complete-looking list that is the right list minus RR, GG and WW, so only asking whether two marbles of one color can come out together separates them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Describe one possible result of taking out two marbles, then build the list systematically, starting from each color and pairing it with every color that could come out with it.
Traps
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
- Without replacement: In a second pick there is one fewer item, which changes the probability.
- Answers a different question: A choice is right for another quantity: the other unknown, the rest instead of the part, the part instead of the whole.
The wrong answers, classified
A Answers a different question (King et al., 2004; Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Lists the colors a single marble can be, the sample space for drawing one marble, though Melissa takes out two.
B Without replacement (Fischbein & Schnarch, 1997)
Leaves out pairs of one color, as if drawing a red marble left no red behind, though the bag holds three reds, three greens and two whites.
C Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Lists the eight marbles in the bag, describing what the bag holds rather than the possible results of taking two out.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Sample space
- An outcome is one possible result of an experiment. The sample space lists every outcome once. For this experiment, one outcome is the pair of colors Melissa holds after she takes out two marbles.
Sort out the question
The bag holds 3 red (R), 3 green (G) and 2 white (W) marbles. Melissa takes out 2 marbles without looking.
You need the sample space: every possible result of taking out 2 marbles. So each outcome must name two colors, like RG for one red and one green.
List pairs by the first color
Start with each color the first marble could be. Then pair it with each color the second could be:
- First red: RR, RG, RW
- First green: GR, GG, GW
- First white: WR, WG, WW
That gives 9 pairs.
Remove pairs that repeat
Melissa ends up holding two marbles. One red and one green is the same result whichever came out first. So GR is the same as RG. Cross out GR, WR and WG. Six pairs are left:
RR, RG, RW, GG, GW, WW
Check the same-color pairs
Can both marbles be the same color? Yes. The bag has 3 reds, 3 greens and 2 whites, so RR, GG and WW can all happen.
Watch out: choice B leaves out RR, GG and WW. That would only be right if the bag had one marble of each color. Choice A is the colors of one marble. Choice C lists the marbles in the bag, not results.
So the answer is D, RR, RG, RW, GG, GW, WW.
Check your answer
Ask what Melissa could be holding. Two reds? Yes, there are 3. Two whites? Yes, there are exactly 2. A green and a white? Yes. Every pair in D can happen, and no possible pair is missing. Choice B misses three pairs that can happen.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 76 of 120
2026 Practice Test D Math, question 40Question
A team is participating in a contest to collect canned goods for a food drive. The team has 53 points and must have a total of at least 100 points to win a prize. The team earns 5 points for each can of food a member collects. Which inequality can be used to find x, the number of cans of food the team needs to collect to win a prize?
- A
- B
- C
- D
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
Since each can is worth 5 points, the total number of points earned from all the cans, x, is 5x. The team started with 53 points. That is a constant value and doesn’t change. So the total number of points the team will earn is . The team wants to earn at least (≥) 100 points, so they need total points.
Question analysis
A team has 53 points in a canned-food drive, earns 5 points for each can, and needs at least 100 points to win a prize. Students choose the inequality for x, the number of cans the team must collect. It tests writing an inequality from words, where the starting points and the points per can must each take the right place.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Writing an inequality for a word problem with a starting amount and a rate is grade 7 work. The four choices pair two expressions with two symbols, so students make one decision about the terms and one about the phrase "at least".
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Turning words into math moderate
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 4, 71 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The choices form a two-by-two grid: which number goes with x, and which way the symbol points. Each decision can be made separately, so a student who settles both gets the item, while one mistake lands on a listed choice. Testing two numbers of cans, 5, which leaves the team at 78 points, and 10, which lifts it to 103, rules out every wrong inequality.
Turning words into math moderate Understanding the question
The 53 points the team “has” are a fixed start, the “5 points for each can” go with x, and “at least 100” calls for ≥, though “least” can sound like less. (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; Koedinger & Nathan, 2004)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The four choices are two expressions, 5 + 53x and 53 + 5x, each with ≤ and with ≥, so the right one and the strongest wrong one differ only in the symbol. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Work out the team's total points after 2 cans and then after x cans, translate "at least 100" into a symbol, and compare the result with each choice.
Traps
- Misreads the question: Misses or misreads a condition or a word in the question: "at least", "each", "remaining", "not".
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
The wrong answers, classified
A Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Attaches x to the 53 points the team already has and also reverses “at least”, combining the mistakes behind the other two wrong choices.
B Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Keeps the right symbol but multiplies the number of cans by 53 and adds 5, putting the starting points where the points per can belong.
C Misreads the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Writes the points correctly as 53 + 5x but reads “at least 100” as at most 100, reversing the inequality.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Total with a start and a rate
- The start is the amount you have now, here 53 points. The rate is what each item adds, here 5 points for each can. x is the number of items. The start is added once, and the rate is multiplied by x.
- At least
- The sign ≥ means is greater than or equal to. At least 100 means 100 or more. So the total must be greater than or equal to 100.
Sort out the question
You know:
- The team already has 53 points.
- It earns 5 points for each can.
- It needs at least 100 points to win.
x is the number of cans. You need the inequality that shows this.
Write the total points
Try 2 cans first. The team gets 5 points for each, so points. For x cans, the total is:
Watch out: the 53 points do not repeat for each can. gives 53 points for each can, as in choices A and B.
Choose the sign
At least 100 means 100 or more, so use ≥:
Watch out: “least” sounds like “less,” but at least means the total can be 100 or higher. Using ≤ gives choice C.
So the answer is D, .
Check your answer
Test two numbers of cans. With 10 cans, , and 103 ≥ 100 is true. The team wins. With 9 cans, , and 98 ≥ 100 is false. The team is short. Choice D gets both right.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 77 of 120
2026 Practice Test D Math, question 48Question
The perimeter of square W is twice the perimeter of equilateral triangle X. What is the ratio of the length of one side of square W to the length of one side of equilateral triangle X?
- A3:8
- B2:3
- C3:2
- D2:1
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
First, set up the ratio of the perimeter of the square to the triangle as 2:1 because the question states that the perimeter of the square is twice the perimeter of the triangle.
Recognizing that the square has 4 equal sides and that an equilateral triangle has 3 sides, use division to find the ratio of the sides.
Perimeter:
Sides:
Question analysis
The perimeter of square W is twice the perimeter of equilateral triangle X, and students find the ratio of a side of the square to a side of the triangle. This ratio question uses perimeters of regular shapes with no lengths given. Turning a comparison of perimeters into one of sides, and keeping the ratio in the order asked, are the tricky parts.
- NYS standards
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 ratio problems usually supply numbers to work with. This one gives only a relationship between two perimeters, so students must bring in the number of sides of each shape themselves and keep the ratio in the order asked.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Turning words into math moderate
- Variables instead of numbers moderate
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Solution
- 3 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 9, 36 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The question turns a statement about perimeters into a ratio of sides, and the natural guess, that the sides keep the perimeters’ 2 to 1, ignores that the square shares its perimeter among 4 sides and the triangle among 3. Choosing a triangle perimeter such as 12 makes the comparison concrete. The order of the ratio still has to be checked at the end, because its reverse is listed too.
Turning words into math moderate Understanding the question
“The perimeter of square W is twice the perimeter of equilateral triangle X” must become 4s = 2 × 3t, with the 2 on the triangle’s side; written backward, it gives the triangle the larger perimeter. (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; Koedinger & Nathan, 2004)
Variables instead of numbers moderate Understanding the question
No side length is given, so students must either work with letters for the two sides or choose a convenient perimeter themselves, such as 12 for the triangle. (Koedinger & Nathan, 2004; Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The ratios 3:2 and 2:3 use the same two numbers, so only keeping the square’s side first, as the question orders it, separates the answer from its reverse. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Pick an easy side length for the triangle, find its perimeter, double that for the square, divide by the square's number of sides, and write square to triangle.
Traps
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
- Wrong operation: Adds instead of multiplying, divides the wrong way round, turns a ratio or rate upside down, or undoes a step in the wrong direction (subtracts what should be added back).
- Equation written backwards: Writes a comparison the wrong way round, word for word: "six times as many students as professors" as 6S = P. The bigger quantity gets the bigger number.
The wrong answers, classified
A Equation written backwards (Clement, Lochhead & Monk, 1981)
Writes the comparison backward, 2 × 4s = 3t, giving the triangle the larger perimeter, so the ratio of the sides comes out 3:8.
B Wrong operation (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; King et al., 2004)
Finds the right relationship but turns the ratio upside down, giving the triangle’s side to the square’s instead of the square’s side first.
D Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Assumes the sides are in the same ratio as the perimeters, 2:1, ignoring that the square has 4 sides and the triangle only 3.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Perimeter of a square
- P is the perimeter, the distance around the shape. s is the length of one side. A square has 4 equal sides, so its perimeter is 4 times one side.
- Perimeter of an equilateral triangle
- An equilateral triangle has 3 equal sides. t is the length of one side. So its perimeter is 3 times one side.
- Ratio
- A ratio compares two amounts in order. a : b means a compared with b. The order matters, so write the amounts in the order the question names them.
Sort out the question
Square W has a perimeter twice as long as the perimeter of triangle X. Equilateral means all 3 sides of X are equal.
You need the ratio of one side of the square to one side of the triangle, in that order. No lengths are given, so you can pick a size to try.
Pick a size for the triangle
Choose an easy side length for the triangle, such as 2 units. All 3 sides are 2, so its perimeter is:
Find the square’s side
The square’s perimeter is twice the triangle’s:
The square has 4 equal sides, so divide by 4:
Each side of the square is 3 units.
Write the ratio in order
The square comes first, then the triangle. Their sides are 3 and 2, so the ratio is 3 : 2.
Watch out: 2 : 1, choice D, compares the perimeters, not the sides. The square splits its perimeter into 4 sides, the triangle into only 3. Choice B, 2 : 3, puts the triangle first. Choice A, 3 : 8, comes from giving the triangle the bigger perimeter.
So the answer is C, 3:2.
Check your answer
Try a different size. Give the triangle sides of 4. Its perimeter is 12, so the square’s is 24. Each side of the square is . The ratio 6 : 4 simplifies to 3 : 2. The size does not change the ratio.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 78 of 120
2026 Practice Test D Math, question 50Question
This table shows the number of birds that came to a bird feeder on Monday and Tuesday.
BIRDS AT BIRD FEEDER
| Day | Number of Birds |
|---|---|
| Monday | 30 |
| Tuesday | 24 |
What was the percent decrease in the number of birds from Monday to Tuesday?
- A6%
- B20%
- C24%
- D25%
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
To determine the percent decrease from Monday to Tuesday, first calculate the decrease in the number of birds at the feeder.
The difference in the number of birds at the feeder divided by the number of birds on Monday will yield the percent decrease from Monday to Tuesday.
0.20 represents 20%.
There was a 20% decrease from Monday to Tuesday.
Question analysis
A table shows that 30 birds came to a bird feeder on Monday and 24 on Tuesday. This percent change question asks for the percent decrease from Monday to Tuesday. Students find the change and compare it with one day's count, and choosing the right day as the base decides the result.
- NYS standards
- 7.RP.3 multistep ratio and percent problems
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Percent decrease is core grade 7 work, and this is a plain example: one subtraction and one division with friendly numbers. The only real demand is measuring the change against the right day's count.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 3, 40 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The subtraction is trivial, so the question is about the base. Both counts sit in the table, and dividing by the later one gives an equally neat percent that is easy to accept. Saying “a decrease from Monday” and putting Monday’s 30 under the change avoids it, and checking that 20% of 30 is 6 confirms the result.
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
Dividing the drop of 6 by Monday’s 30 gives 20% and by Tuesday’s 24 gives 25%, two round, listed percents only 5 points apart, so only the choice of base separates them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Something you must already know minor Working it out
Students must know that a percent decrease is the change divided by the starting amount, here Monday’s count, a rule the question does not state. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Strategy: Subtract to find how many fewer birds came on Tuesday, divide by Monday's count, the starting amount, and change the fraction to a percent.
Traps
- Percent of the wrong amount: Finding the whole from a part, or a percent change measured from the wrong starting amount.
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
- Numbers taken from the question: Combines the numbers in the question without a model of the situation, or is simply a number that appears in the question.
The wrong answers, classified
A Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Finds the decrease of 6 birds and reads it as 6 percent, as if the count had dropped from 100 rather than from 30.
C Numbers taken from the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Reads Tuesday’s 24 birds as a percent, taking a number straight from the table without working out the change at all.
D Percent of the wrong amount (Parker & Leinhardt, 1995)
Divides the decrease of 6 by Tuesday’s 24 birds instead of Monday’s 30, measuring the change from the later day: 6/24 = 25%.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Percent decrease
- Old is the starting amount, here Monday’s count. New is the later amount, Tuesday’s count. The top is how much it dropped. You divide by the starting amount because a change is measured from where you started.
Sort out the question
The table shows 30 birds on Monday and 24 birds on Tuesday. You need the percent decrease from Monday to Tuesday. From Monday means Monday is the starting amount.
Find the drop
Subtract Tuesday’s count from Monday’s:
There were 6 fewer birds.
Watch out: 6 is a number of birds, not a percent. Calling it 6% leads to choice A.
Compare the drop with Monday
Use the formula. Divide the drop by Monday’s count, then multiply by 100:
The number of birds went down by 20%.
Watch out: dividing by Tuesday’s 24 gives , or 25%, choice D. Measure the change from the starting day. Choice C, 24%, just copies a number from the table.
So the answer is B, 20%.
Check your answer
Take 20% of Monday’s count: . Then , which is Tuesday’s count. The answer checks out.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 79 of 120
2025 Practice Test A English, question 11Passage Excerpt from “Scribe Like an Egyptian”
Excerpt from “Scribe Like an Egyptian”
by Hilary Wilson
In ancient Egypt, literacy was the key to success. However, contrary to popular belief, not all Egyptian scribes understood hieroglyphs. Many relied instead on the simpler hieratic script for the multitude of everyday documents generated by the Egyptian bureaucracy.
Hieroglyphs—“the Words of God”—compose a writing system with more than 1,000 distinct characters, the meanings of which were lost for 1,500 years before they were deciphered by Jean-François Champollion in 1822. Including both ideograms (which convey a whole word or idea, either concrete or abstract, in a single sign) and phonograms (representing either an alphabetic sound or a group of consonants), [the writing system] was used in formal inscriptions on tomb and temple walls as well as on elaborate funerary papyri. For everyday purposes, however, scribes used a shorthand version of the hieroglyphic script known as hieratic, which was quicker to write and more economical of space. The two writings existed side by side for at least 2,500 years.
Scraps of ancient hieratic writing, mostly penned by student scribes on limestone flakes called ostraca, suggest that no matter how humble his origins, an educated Egyptian could achieve almost anything. Horemheb (d.1292 B.C.) is a good example. Born of middle-ranking parents, his scribal training led to an army career. From Scribe of Recruits, during the reign of Akhenaten (1353–1336 B.C.), Horemheb rose through the military ranks and, by the rule of Tutankhamun (1332–1323 B.C.), he was commander in chief of the Egyptian forces. As a close adviser of the young Pharaoh, Horemheb was appointed “Deputy of the King throughout the Two Lands,” and might have expected to succeed to the throne should the king die childless. He had to wait a few years, but eventually Horemheb achieved the pinnacle of his career by becoming the last king of the 18th Dynasty, making his mark by instituting dramatic reforms to the organisation of the army, the judiciary and administration in general. The lasting success of these changes owed much to his scribal background. . . .
But education was not available to all. Government departments and major temples supported schools, where boys commenced their training at six or seven, sometimes earlier. To these boarding establishments . . . family or household servants delivered the students’ food and drink rations daily for several years, during which time the student was not contributing to the family’s income. Boys from poorer families could only hope to be educated with support from a wealthier relative or patron, or through apprenticeship to an older scribe, perhaps the local clerk or land agent, who would teach them the basics of the scribe’s craft. This limited the scope for employment but such “on the job” training allowed apprentices to help out at home while learning. . . .
Scribal education began with the elementary principles of the hieratic script. The lowliest scribes, who trained for just five or six years, probably learned only the rudiments of the hieroglyphic script. Students were set exemplar documents and extracts from popular texts to copy, to practice their hieratic handwriting on basic-format letters, reports and contracts, while absorbing the good advice contained in the texts. Surviving examples of copy-work sometimes include tutors’ corrections added in red. Some significant Egyptian literary works survive almost exclusively from student copies.
A schoolboy “dictionary” of hieroglyphs with their hieratic equivalents shows that a knowledge of more than 450 signs was required for everyday writing purposes. Lessons in record-keeping and filing and labelling enabled any half-competent scribe to perform that most essential of all scribal functions: the making and updating of lists. For professions such as those of government official, priest or lawyer, a scribe would train for several more years, increasing his vocabulary to perhaps a thousand or more signs. Those with the best handwriting or drawing skills might follow the craft of creating beautifully illustrated copies of funerary texts, commonly called Books of the Dead. Others could become draughtsmen, artists or architects. Doctors compiled their own collections of medication recipes, treatments and associated incantations, many copied from texts found in the House of Life, the temple library. Lawyers had to be familiar with the corpus of civil and religious laws and precedents found in the official records, which were administered by archivists. Egypt’s bureaucratic society depended on the skills of an army of scribes of all ranks from filing clerk to tax assessor. For young Egyptians, “be a scribe” was the best of career advice.
From “Scribe Like an Egyptian” by Hilary Wilson from HISTORY TODAY, August 8, 2019. Copyright © 2019 by History Today Ltd. Company.

bureaucracy: an administrative staff of government officials
funerary papyri: a sheet or scroll of papyrus containing religious images and hieroglyphs meant to help the deceased be reborn in the afterlife
rudiments: basics
schoolboy: slang that refers to materials used during the course of receiving an education
draughtsmen: people who draw plans of machinery or structures
corpus: a collection of writings
Question
Which statement summarizes the process that schools used to train scribes?
- ABoys had to memorize around 450 hieratic signs. Once they had learned these, they were expected to copy literary texts that contained valuable lessons.
- BBoys spent at least five years learning hieratic signs, which they practiced by copying texts. During this period, they were also introduced to basic hieroglyphs.
- CBoys spent five or six years learning the basics of hieratic script. After this period, they could become apprentices and begin learning hieroglyphics.
- DBoys were taught two different scripts. They practiced both types by copying lists and eventually progressed to writing letters, reports, and contracts.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks for the best summary of the process that schools used to train scribes.
A. Incorrect. This summary incorrectly explains that scribes were expected to learn 450 hieratic signs instead of 450 hieroglyphs along with their hieratic versions as explained in paragraph 6. In paragraph 5, the author explains that scribes copied texts as part of the process of learning the scripts rather than as practice after the signs had already been memorized.
B. CORRECT. Paragraph 5 explains that students began by learning hieratic script and studied for about five or six years by using “exemplar documents and extracts from popular texts to copy, to practice their hieratic handwriting.” The paragraph also explains that during this time, they learned only the basics of hieroglyphic script.
C. Incorrect. Although paragraph 5 does explain that the scribes spent five or six years learning hieratic script, it does not suggest that hieroglyphs were learned only during apprenticeships.
D. Incorrect. This summary correctly explains that scribes learned two types of scripts, but the second sentence of the summary is incorrect. In paragraph 5, the author explains that the students copied from exemplar texts, but the author clearly states that the purpose of this copy work was “to practice their hieratic handwriting” and does not suggest that the copy work was used to practice hieroglyphs. Paragraph 6 explains that scribes could make lists as part of their professional skills but does not suggest that copy work was used to help them learn this task. Paragraph 5 mentions letters, reports, and contracts as the formats students practiced on while copying, not as a later stage of their training.
Question analysis
This summary question on “Scribe Like an Egyptian” asks which statement sums up how ancient Egyptian schools trained young scribes. Each choice is a two-sentence summary that combines years of study, kinds of script and copying practice, so students must check every detail against what the article says about scribal education.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Summarizing a process is a grade 7 standard, but these four summaries are long, two-part and mostly accurate, and the details they mix up come from three different paragraphs, so judging them asks more than typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly understand
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence in several places moderate
- The right answer is reworded minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 12, 810 words; question and choices: about grade 7, 104 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A detail in the explanation that misdescribes the excerpt was corrected.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Every wrong summary opens with something true or nearly true, so a quick reading of first sentences cannot separate them. Most of the errors concern order: one makes copying follow memorizing, one turns apprenticeship into a later stage where hieroglyphs begin, and one makes the copied letters, reports and contracts a later step. Students who check the order of training against paragraph 5, not just the facts, find the only summary with nothing out of place.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The apprenticeship summary repeats the right one’s opening, years of hieratic study, and parts from it on one phrase: hieroglyphs come “After this period” instead of “During this period.” (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
The details sit in three paragraphs: the five or six years, the copying and the hieroglyph basics in paragraph 5, apprenticeship in paragraph 4, and the 450-sign dictionary and list-making in paragraph 6. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
The right answer is reworded minor Choosing the answer
The right summary puts the text in new words, “at least five years” and “basic hieroglyphs,” while wrong ones repeat its own details: “five or six years,” the “450” signs, “letters, reports, and contracts.” (Freedle & Kostin, 1993; Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Strategy: Note what the article says students learned, for how long and by what method, then check both sentences of each summary against those notes; one wrong detail rules a summary out.
Traps
- Half right: One half of a two-part choice is right and the other is not.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
The wrong answers, classified
A Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Takes paragraph 6’s 450 signs, hieroglyphs listed with their hieratic forms, as hieratic signs to memorize first, and makes copying come afterward, though copying was how students learned.
C Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Gets the five or six years of hieratic right, then makes apprenticeship, the other route paragraph 4 offers poorer boys, a later stage where hieroglyphs are first taught.
D Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Rightly says two scripts were taught, then claims students copied lists for both and only later wrote letters, reports and contracts, though paragraph 5 ties copying to hieratic and to those very formats.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: The DOE’s explanation of Option D ends: “Paragraph 6 explains that scribes could make lists and write letters as part of their professional skills but does not suggest that copy work was used to help them learn these tasks.” Paragraph 6 mentions the making and updating of lists, but not letters. Letters come up in paragraph 5, where students copy texts “to practice their hieratic handwriting” on basic-format letters, reports and contracts, so the excerpt does tie the copy work to letters. The site now says that paragraph 6 explains that scribes could make lists as part of their professional skills but does not suggest that copy work was used to help them learn this task, and that paragraph 5 mentions letters, reports, and contracts as the formats students practiced on while copying, not as a later stage of their training. Option D is still wrong, and the answer, B, is unchanged.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks for the best summary of how schools trained scribes. A summary retells the main steps in a few words. Each choice has two sentences. Both must match the article, including the order of the steps. One wrong detail rules a choice out.
Find the training in paragraph 5
Paragraph 5 says training began with the basics of hieratic script. The lowest scribes studied for five or six years, and others studied longer. In that time they learned only the basics of hieroglyphs. Students were given “exemplar documents and extracts from popular texts to copy, to practice their hieratic handwriting.” Exemplar means model. Extracts are short pieces. So they learned by copying good examples.
Sort out paragraphs 4 and 6
Two other paragraphs hold details that look alike. Paragraph 4 describes apprenticeship. An apprentice learns on the job from a skilled worker. It was another way in for boys from poorer families, not a step after school. Paragraph 6 mentions a list of hieroglyphs with their hieratic forms. It says more than 450 signs were needed for everyday writing. It never says students memorized them before copying.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. The 450 signs were hieroglyphs paired with their hieratic forms. And copying was how students learned, not a step after memorizing.
- B fits. Students spent at least five years on hieratic, practiced by copying, and learned basic hieroglyphs along the way.
- C does not fit. Apprenticeship was a different route, not a later stage. Hieroglyphs were not saved for apprentices.
- D does not fit. The copying was to practice hieratic. Lists come up in paragraph 6 as a job skill, not as practice. Letters, reports and contracts were what students copied, not a later stage.
Choose the answer
Watch out: C starts out right, with five or six years of hieratic. Then it says hieroglyphs came “After this period” instead of during it. That one change makes it wrong.
Only B gets every detail and the order right. So the answer is B.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong choice. It gets the five or six years of hieratic right. But it says hieroglyphs came afterward, through apprenticeship. Paragraph 5 says students learned the basics of hieroglyphs during their schooling. Apprenticeship was a separate path for poorer boys. B says “During this period,” which matches.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Excerpt from “Scribe Like an Egyptian”” as shown on the test






Question 80 of 120
2025 Practice Test A English, question 14Uses the passage above: “Excerpt from “Scribe Like an Egyptian””.
Question
The diagram after paragraph 6 best provides additional support for the topic of the excerpt by
- Ademonstrating the place of scribes in ancient Egyptian social structure.
- Bdepicting the types of tasks performed by each social class.
- Cindicating that scribes were able to easily improve their social ranking.
- Dcomparing the social positions of each social class in ancient Egypt.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks how the diagram of ancient Egyptian class structure supports the topic of the excerpt.
A. CORRECT. The focus of the excerpt is the opportunities available to scribes in different professions and how people became scribes and therefore improved their position. By illustrating the position of the scribes in the class structure of ancient Egypt, the diagram supports the idea that scribes were valuable members of society.
B. Incorrect. The professions of the different social classes are shown in the diagram, but it does not address specific tasks. Furthermore, the main topic of the excerpt is the role of the scribes in society rather than the tasks performed by the different social classes.
C. Incorrect. While the diagram does show the position of scribes in the social hierarchy, it does not provide an illustration of movement between the different classes or rankings, so the diagram does not support the idea that scribes were able to improve their social standing.
D. Incorrect. The diagram shows the class structure as hierarchical and can support readers’ efforts to compare the different social positions. However, the role of scribes in society, rather than a general comparison of different classes, is the main focus of the excerpt.
Question analysis
This question on “Scribe Like an Egyptian” asks how the diagram after paragraph 6, a pyramid of ancient Egyptian social classes from the pharaoh at the top to unskilled workers at the base, gives additional support to the excerpt’s topic. Students must decide what the excerpt is mainly about and then judge what the graphic adds, and several choices describe something the pyramid really shows.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Linking a graphic to a text is regular grade 7 work, and this five-level pyramid is simple and clearly labeled. The demand lies in naming the excerpt’s topic first and judging how the diagram bears on it.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Reading a figure, table or graph moderate
- How, not what minor
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 12, 810 words; question and choices: about grade 9, 57 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
More than one choice is true of the pyramid, so the question is decided by the excerpt’s topic, not by the picture alone. Students who look only at the diagram see a ranking of all the classes; students who remember that the article is about scribes look for where scribes stand. The choice about rising easily borrows Horemheb’s story from the text and credits it to a drawing that shows no movement.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about comparing every class’s position differs from the right one in a single detail, all classes rather than scribes, and both are true of the pyramid. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading a figure, table or graph moderate Understanding the question
Scribes are not a tier of their own: they share the third of five tiers with merchants and craftsmen, below the pharaoh, nobles and priests and above farmers, herders and laborers. (Lesh, Post & Behr, 1987; Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
How, not what minor Working it out
The stem asks how the diagram supports the excerpt’s topic, so students must first decide the topic is scribes, then judge what the picture adds to it. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Strategy: State the excerpt’s topic in a few words, then test each choice twice: is it true of the diagram, and does it connect the diagram to that topic?
Traps
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
- Wrong part of the text: A choice is true of another paragraph, stanza or speaker than the one asked about.
- Wrong purpose or structure: Names a purpose, structure or effect that the part does not serve, or describes what a part says when the question asks what it does.
The wrong answers, classified
B Wrong purpose or structure (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Notices the small figures at work, such as the herders with their cattle, and takes tasks as the diagram’s point, though its labels name classes and the excerpt is about scribes.
C Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Carries Horemheb’s rise from scribe to king in paragraph 3 over to the diagram, which shows fixed tiers with no arrows or movement, and nothing about rising easily.
D True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Describes what the pyramid plainly does, rank all five classes against one another, which is accurate but misses why the diagram belongs with an excerpt about scribes.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks how the diagram after paragraph 6 adds to the topic of the excerpt. First name the topic. Then ask two things about each choice. Is it true of the diagram? And does it connect the diagram to that topic?
Name the excerpt’s topic
The excerpt is about scribes, people trained to read and write for others. It tells how they learned, who could study, and what jobs they could get. Every paragraph comes back to scribes. So the diagram should add something about scribes.
Read the diagram
The diagram is a pyramid with five levels. From the top down, they are the Pharaoh, nobles and priests, then “Traders, shopkeepers, scribes, and artisans,” then herders and farmers, and last unskilled workers. Artisans are skilled craftspeople. Scribes sit in the third level, the middle one. They are below the ruler and the nobles, and above farmers and workers.
Check each choice
- A fits. The diagram shows where scribes stood in Egyptian society, which ties it to the topic.
- B does not fit. The labels name groups of people, not the tasks each group did.
- C does not fit. The levels are fixed, and nothing in the diagram shows anyone moving up. Horemheb’s rise comes from paragraph 3, not the diagram.
- D does not fit. The pyramid does rank all the classes. But that alone does not connect it to an excerpt about scribes.
Watch out: More than one choice is true of the picture. The right one must also fit the topic.
Choose the answer
The diagram supports the topic by showing where scribes fit among the classes of ancient Egypt. So the answer is A.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D is the closest wrong choice, because the pyramid really does compare every class. But the excerpt is about scribes, not about every class. A is true of the diagram too, and it also links the diagram to the topic. It points to the place of scribes in the middle level.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 81 of 120
2025 Practice Test A English, question 22Passage Excerpt from Winter Wheat
Excerpt from Winter Wheat
by Mildred Walker
Ellen, the narrator, is preparing to leave her parents and the family farm for college the next day.
I love Dad’s way of talking that makes him seem different from other ranchers. He’s lived here twenty-three years, but he still says “back East where I come from.” He’s the one who gets excited when I do about spring coming or a serial running in the magazine we’re both reading, but it’s what Mom says that I depend on. When Mom used to say “Don’t worry” about my pet chicken or dog or new calf, it always got well. Dad is always talking of going some place, not now, but next year, maybe. Mom seems to think of nothing farther away than today or perhaps yesterday or tomorrow morning.
Mom folded the ironing board and put it inside their bedroom that was just off the kitchen. She carried in the freshly ironed clothes. Dad went back to his paper. When Mom came back she took beans from the cupboard to soak for tomorrow. Dad always said Mom could make all the dishes he’d had back in Vermont as well as though she were a New Englander herself, instead of a Russian. All of a sudden, I realized that tomorrow when those beans would be ready to eat I’d be going away. It gave me a funny feeling.
“I’ll be taking the train tomorrow night,” I said aloud, more to hear it myself.
“We can drive you into town in the afternoon,” Dad said, dropping his paper on the floor.
“There’s no need to go to town; she can catch the train at Gotham just as well. We haven’t nothing to take us into town for,” Mom said.
“Well, we don’t have to decide tonight,” Dad said, but I knew he wanted to go into Clark City. It wouldn’t be so flat as just seeing me go off on the train from Gotham. My going away was hard on both of them; they were so different—and I was part of them both. It made me uncomfortable to think of leaving them.
While I was getting ready for bed in my room that’s off the front room, I saw how it would be if I left from town. We’d go in right after dinner and go around to the stores, Dad going one way and Mom and I another. Dad would probably have his hair cut at the barbershop and stop in the bank and meet someone he knew to talk to. Then we’d meet at the big store on the corner and go to the cafeteria for supper. The train stops ten minutes or so at the station in town and there are other people and excitement and you have time to wave from the platform and then again from your window by your seat. We went to the station in Clark City to see the Goodals off when they went back to Iowa.
If I left from Gotham, we’d just drive down in the truck and wait till the train came. It only stops long enough for you to get on and you hardly have time to taste the flavor of going away.
I sat on the bed in my pyjamas with my arms around my knees. I couldn’t keep from thinking of that time Dad went back East. I tried to, and then I just sat still and looked straight at it. Sometimes that’s better than working so hard to keep from looking at what’s in your mind.
Dad went all the way back to Vermont. . . . It was in November and it was already dark when the train came through Gotham. Even now, I could feel how cold and dark it was. I held Mom’s hand. Dad was so dressed-up he seemed strange. . . . We stood there without saying anything until Dad told Mom to remember to call Mr. Bardich, our neighbor, if the cow didn’t calve tomorrow.
“I’ll manage,” Mom snapped back.
“I wish you could go, Anna,” Dad said to Mom, “and we could take Ellen.” . . .
“Good-by, Anna Petrovna,” he said, looking at Mom. I had never heard him call her by two names before.
“Good-by,” Mom said, standing still, without smiling.
Then he was gone and the crossroads were darker than ever. The train light shone on the high window in the top of the grain elevator for a moment and then that too was dark. We got into our old Ford and Mom drove back to the house. My throat ached all the way. The name Dad had called Mom kept saying itself in my ears: “Anna Petrovna, Anna Petrovna.” . . .
Our house seemed lonely when we came back to it. It seemed to be hiding under the coulee. I went with Mom to put the truck in the barn that was bigger than the house. I think Mom was prouder of our barn than the house, anyway. We walked back to look at the cow that was going to calve. She was just a big light blob in the dark, waiting. I had thought she was exciting this morning, but now she seemed sad, too.
The wind blew when we walked across the open space to the house and I couldn’t help shivering with the cold. Inside the house it was warm, but empty.
“Bring your nightgown in here and I heat you some milk,” Mom said.
I drank the milk sitting on a stool in front of the stove. It tasted good, but the lonely ache in my throat was still there. I picked up my clothes and hung them neatly behind the stove and put my cup on the sink board. Mom was fixing oatmeal for tomorrow morning.
“Good night, Mom,” I said almost timidly, standing beside her. She seemed wrapped around in a kind of strangeness. Then she turned around and drew me to her. The front of her dress was warm from the stove. I felt the comfortable heat through my gown. She laid her hand against my face and it felt rough and hard but firm. I dared ask her something I wanted to know.
“Mom, was that really your name—what Dad called you?”
Her voice sounded surprised. “Why, Yeléna, you know that; Anna Petrovna. You know I am born in Russia, in Seletskoe.”
“Yes, but I didn’t know your other name,” I said.
“Anna Petrovna Webb.” She pronounced it slowly. “Once I think what a funny name Ben Webb is!” She laughed. Her laugh was warm and low like our kitchen, and comfortable. The house seemed natural and right again. . . .
But now that I am grown, I feel the wall of strangeness between them, more than when I was a child. I wondered how they would get along without me.
From WINTER WHEAT by Mildred Walker, published by University of Nebraska Press. Copyright © 1944 by Harcourt, Brace and Company, Inc. Copyright renewed 1971 by Mildred Walker. All rights reserved.
serial: story published in short segments at regular intervals
coulee: small gulch or ravine
Question
The flashback in paragraphs 10–24 affects the plot by
- Ashowing that the departure of one member of the family makes extra work for those left on the farm.
- Bshowing that the bond within the family persists even when its members are apart.
- Cexplaining why Ellen fears that leaving her parents will be too difficult.
- Dillustrating the close connection Ellen has with both of her parents.
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The question asks how the flashback in paragraphs 10–24 affects the plot of the excerpt.
A. Incorrect. The flashback does not show that Ellen and her mother faced extra work as a result of the father’s trip to Vermont. Although paragraph 19 describes Ellen’s mother making oatmeal for the next day’s breakfast, this task was not extra work.
B. Incorrect. Although the flashback highlights Ellen’s fondness for each of her parents, it describes her father’s initial departure only and does not show what happened to the familial bond while he is away.
C. Incorrect. Although Ellen describes the memory of her father’s departure as something she wanted to avoid thinking about, she does not fear that it will be too difficult to leave her parents. Instead, she is concerned about what will happen to her parents’ relationship when she is no longer there.
D. CORRECT. The flashback illustrates the close connection that Ellen has with her parents by describing her sadness over the departure of her father (“My throat ached all the way” [paragraph 15]) and presenting a moment of comfort and reassurance between Ellen and her mother (“She laid her hand against my face and it felt rough and hard but firm” [paragraph 20]).
Question analysis
This text-structure question asks how the long flashback in paragraphs 10–24 of the Winter Wheat excerpt, Ellen’s memory of the night her father left by train for Vermont, affects the plot. Students must hold fifteen paragraphs in mind, see why the narrator recalls that night just before her own departure, and choose among several believable effects.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students study how a flashback shapes a story. This one runs through most of the excerpt, so students must sum up a long stretch of narrative and then tell apart choices that are close in meaning, more than typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Among the hardest on the SHSAT: a non-obvious approach, heavy reading, or a well-hidden trap.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Evidence in several places major
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- How, not what moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 4, 1179 words; question and choices: about grade 7, 64 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The flashback is most of the excerpt, and it carries several things at once: grief at Dad’s leaving, the parents’ stiffness with each other, Mom’s comfort, the mystery of her Russian name. The two strongest wrong choices sound like plot effects, a bond lasting through absence or a fear of leaving, while the key describes a relationship, so students looking for an event to point to may pass it by. Students must sum up the whole memory and test each choice against what it actually shows.
Evidence in several places major Working it out
The support for “both of her parents” lies in two separate stretches of a fifteen-paragraph flashback: Ellen’s aching throat after Dad’s train leaves in paragraph 15, and Mom’s hand on her face in paragraph 20. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choice about the family bond persisting while members are apart shares the right one’s subject, family closeness, and differs in one claim, that the bond lasts through a separation the flashback never follows. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
How, not what moderate Working it out
The stem asks how the flashback affects the plot, yet the keyed effect is about character, so students must accept that the memory works by showing Ellen’s ties to each parent before she leaves. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Strategy: Summarize what happens in the flashback and how Ellen feels at each stage, then compare it with the present-day scenes before and after it and decide what the memory adds.
Traps
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Outside knowledge: A choice is plausible in the real world but not supported by this text.
The wrong answers, classified
A Outside knowledge (King et al., 2004; Recht & Leslie, 1988)
Assumes a farmer’s absence must mean more chores, perhaps from Dad’s reminder about the cow and Mom’s “I’ll manage,” though the flashback never shows Ellen and Mom burdened with extra work.
B Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Sees the warmth between Ellen and her parents and stretches it into a bond that lasts through a long separation, though the memory ends the night Dad leaves.
C Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Ties the flashback to Ellen’s unease about leaving but misplaces the worry: what troubles her is how her parents will manage without her, not whether leaving will be too hard.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks how the flashback in paragraphs 10–24 affects the story. A flashback is a scene from the past that interrupts the present. Here Ellen, about to leave for college, remembers the night Dad left for Vermont years ago. Sum up what the memory shows, then test each choice.
Sum up the flashback
Ellen and Mom see Dad off at the train in the cold dark. On the drive home, Ellen says “My throat ached all the way.” At home, Mom comforts her: “She laid her hand against my face and it felt rough and hard but firm.” Later, Mom laughs warmly about her name, and the house feels right again.
See what the memory shows
An aching throat is the tight, sore feeling you get when you hold back tears. That shows how much Ellen loves her father. Mom’s firm hand and warm laugh show how close Ellen is to her mother. So the flashback shows Ellen’s strong tie to both parents.
Check each choice
- A does not fit. The flashback never shows Ellen and Mom with extra farm work.
- B does not fit. The memory ends the night Dad leaves. It never shows the family while he is away.
- C does not fit. Ellen’s worry is about how her parents will get along without her, not about whether leaving will be too hard.
- D fits. It shows Ellen’s love for Dad and her closeness to Mom.
Watch out: B also talks about family closeness. But it says the bond lasts through time apart, which the flashback never shows.
Choose the answer
The flashback shows how close Ellen is to her father and to her mother. So the answer is D.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong choice, because it also describes a strong family bond. But B says the bond lasts while family members are apart. The flashback stops on the night Dad leaves, so it never shows that. It does show Ellen grieving for Dad and comforted by Mom. That is D.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Excerpt from Winter Wheat” as shown on the test







Question 82 of 120
2025 Practice Test B English, question 3Passage Excerpt from “It’s Time to Stop Thinking That All Non-Native Species Are Evil”
Excerpt from “It’s Time to Stop Thinking That All Non-Native Species Are Evil”
by Emma Marris
The author of this opinion article attended a symposium, or conference, in Missoula, Montana, at which biologists and other scientists discussed species of plants and animals that are not native to the areas in which they live.
Invasive species are scary. It was ecologist Charles Elton, back in the 1950s, who introduced the militaristic “invasion” metaphor to describe exotic plants and animals—but there’s no question some can be extremely destructive.
The brown tree snake has eaten a dozen kinds of forest birds in Guam to extinction; zebra mussels clog pipes around the Great Lakes; the common house cat turns out to be, in Australia, a mercilessly effective killer of cute, fluffy marsupials like the bilby and the numbat.
As scientists have sounded the alarm about these pests, the public has gotten the message. Citizen groups rip out non-native plants. Native gardens have become increasingly popular, both as ways to celebrate the unique flora of each region and as tiny hot spots of diversity. Native trees provide food for native bugs, which feed native birds. Food chains developed over thousands of years of co-evolution unfold in our backyards. . . .
So we’ve learned, scientists and laypeople alike, that native species are good and non-natives are bad.
Julian Olden, a biologist at the University of Washington, Seattle, who co-organized the symposium, recently polled nearly 2,000 ecologists. Among his findings: a substantial number of them said they would immediately eradicate a hypothetical non-native forest plant, even if it were shown to have no effect on the forest. Olden calls this the “guilty even when proven innocent” approach.
That kind of approach is not very useful on a rapidly changing planet.
Exotics Are Everywhere
Climate change is making it harder even to decide who the invaders are.
How, scientists at the symposium wondered, do you define “native” on a warming planet, when plants and animals are already moving toward the poles or up mountainsides in search of climate conditions they can tolerate? Should we consider them “invasive” in their new homes? Regardless of what we label them, conservationists will be reluctant to remove them from their new environs—to do so would stymie1 their chances of adapting to the warmer future we’re creating.
And then there are the non-natives that we actually like. Most domestic crops are exotic in most of the places they’re grown, but there are even wild exotics that “do good,” forming useful relationships with native species.
Edwin Grosholz of the University of California, Davis, told the recent symposium about one such relationship. On beaches in his state, non-native spartina grass has become important habitat for the endangered California clapper rail, a plump shorebird with a downward curving bill more at home on land than in the air. A project to rip out and poison the spartina—which grows in dense swaths that exclude many other shorebirds—saw clapper rail numbers go tumbling downward.
There are other examples like that. The endangered southwestern willow flycatcher nests in “invasive” tamarisk shrubs. Many native (and beautiful) Hawaiian flowers are now pollinated by the Japanese white-eye bird—because the native pollinators have been driven extinct by other non-native species.
Should we impose further risk on already endangered natives by severing these relationships? Or should we admire the resilience of nature and let such “well-behaved” exotics stay? . . .
Leave them alone, more and more conservationists are arguing, and stop focusing obsessively on categorizing species as native or non-native. Mark Davis, an ecologist at Macalester College in St. Paul, Minnesota, once considered himself an “invasion biologist”—but not anymore. “I am actively trying to get the field to retire the invader narrative,” he said in Missoula.
A Good Thing, Not the Only Thing
After all, nativeness is just one environmental value, and arguably not as important as preventing extinctions and preserving biodiversity. In some cases we can best serve biodiversity by leaving the non-natives alone or even—brace yourself, now—introducing them on purpose.
This is the thinking behind, for example, installing the Aldabra tortoise on the islands of Mauritius. The islands lost their own large tortoises, and the fruiting plants that formerly had their seeds moved around by these fruit-loving reptiles have been on the decline. A tortoise that’s related to the island’s large tortoises—a non-native from the Seychelles in the Indian Ocean that was intentionally introduced in 2004—is now handling some of that work.
Most of the time, for the time being, conserving species still means focusing on supporting them in their historical habitats, planting natives and removing non-natives. We can and should do that in places where it is feasible and important to us.
From “It’s Time to Stop Thinking That All Non-Native Species Are Evil” by Emma Marris from NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE, July 24, 2014. Copyright © 2014 by National Geographic Society.

1stymie: hinder or interfere with
Question
Which two phrases from paragraph 3 most affect the tone of the excerpt?
Move the two correct answers to the box.
Phrases That Most Affect the Tone of the Excerpt
On the test you drag tiles into the box; here, choose them below. The DOE has not published how answers with several parts are scored; this site counts one right only when every part is right.
- A“sounded the alarm”
- B“gotten the message”
- C“rip out”
- D“become increasingly popular”
- E“provide food”
Show the answer
Correct answer: A and C
The question asks for the two phrases from paragraph 3 that most affect the tone of the excerpt.
A. “sounded the alarm”: CORRECT. This phrase affects the tone of the excerpt by conveying the stark sense of urgency surrounding the debate over the ecological impact of non-native species. The reference to an alarm sounding evokes the feeling of being on high alert.
B. “gotten the message”: Incorrect. This phrase does not most affect the tone of the excerpt.
C. “rip out”: CORRECT. This phrase affects the tone of the excerpt by vividly depicting the effect of widespread misunderstanding of non-native species.
D. “become increasingly popular”: Incorrect. This phrase does not most affect the tone of the excerpt.
E. “provide food”: Incorrect. This phrase does not most affect the tone of the excerpt.
Question analysis
This select-two tone question on Emma Marris’s opinion article about non-native species lists five short phrases from paragraph 3 and asks which two most affect the tone of the excerpt. On the test students move two tiles into a box, and both must be right. All five are common, everyday expressions, so students must weigh how strongly each one colors the excerpt.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Typical grade 7 tone questions quote the words and ask what effect they have. Here students pick the two phrases themselves from five in one short paragraph and compare how much feeling each carries, which keeps the demand at grade level.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Figurative or literary language moderate
- Much to keep track of minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 815 words; question and choices: about grade 3, 42 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Most students hear the urgency of “sounded the alarm” at once, and the point is lost on the second pick. The idiom that ends the same sentence sounds just as colorful, while “rip out” is a short, everyday verb whose force is easy to read past as plain weeding. Swapping each phrase for a neutral word and asking how much feeling is lost separates them, and credit comes only when both tiles are right.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
“Sounded the alarm” and “gotten the message” are paired idioms in the first sentence of paragraph 3, both about the warning passing from scientists to the public, and only the first carries urgency. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Figurative or literary language moderate Understanding the question
The tone lives in connotation: “sounded the alarm” borrows the picture of a siren or bell, and “rip out” shows plants torn up by force where “remove” would sound flat. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Much to keep track of minor Working it out
Five tiles compete for one box and both picks must be right, so each phrase’s charge has to be weighed against the other four, since the stem asks which affect the tone “most.” (Sweller, 1988; Carpenter, Just & Shell, 1990)
Strategy: Swap each phrase for a plain word with the same meaning, reread its sentence, and keep the two whose replacement changes the feeling of the passage the most.
Traps
- Wrong tone or attitude: Misjudges the tone, attitude or point of view, such as reading admiration as criticism, or taking a character's or subject's feelings for the author's.
- Taking figurative language literally: A choice reads a figure of speech or image at face value.
The wrong answers, classified
B Wrong tone or attitude (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Hears an idiom as colorful as “sounded the alarm” in the same sentence and takes it as equally charged, though “gotten the message” only says the public accepted the warning.
D Wrong tone or attitude (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Hears approval in the word “popular” and takes it as setting the tone, though “become increasingly popular” is a neutral report of a trend in gardening.
E Wrong tone or attitude (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Is drawn by the pleasant picture of native trees feeding bugs that feed birds, though “provide food” is plain, factual wording that any science textbook might use.
C Taking figurative language literally (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Left out by students who read “rip out” as a plain account of weeding, missing that the verb pictures citizen groups tearing up plants by force, where “remove” would be neutral.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This is a tone question. Tone is the feeling or attitude that a writer’s words give a passage. You need the two phrases from paragraph 3 that carry the most feeling. Words can carry feeling beyond their plain meaning. On the test you drag two tiles into the box. On this site, you choose two of the five. Both must be right.
Read paragraph 3 in its place
The excerpt opens with “Invasive species are scary.” Paragraph 2 lists the harm some invaders do. Then paragraph 3 says “As scientists have sounded the alarm about these pests, the public has gotten the message. Citizen groups rip out non-native plants.” The rest of the paragraph is calm. It says native gardens are popular, and native trees feed bugs that feed birds.
Swap each phrase for plain words
A good test is to swap each phrase for plain words with the same meaning. Then ask how much feeling is lost.
- “sounded the alarm” becomes warned. An alarm is a loud bell for danger, like a fire alarm. The sense of danger is lost.
- “gotten the message” becomes understood. Little changes.
- “rip out” becomes remove. To rip is to tear roughly and fast. The force is lost.
- “become increasingly popular” becomes grown more common. Little changes.
- “provide food” becomes feed. Nothing changes.
See what the two phrases do
Urgency is the feeling that something must be done right now. “Sounded the alarm” makes non-native species sound like an emergency. “Rip out” shows people tearing up plants with force. Together they make the fight against non-natives sound urgent and harsh. That matches paragraph 1, which calls the word “invasion” militaristic, or warlike. The author goes on to question treating every non-native as bad.
Check each of the five tiles
- A fits. It adds urgency.
- B does not fit. It is an idiom, a saying whose meaning differs from its words. It only means the public understood.
- C fits. It adds force.
- D does not fit. It calmly reports a trend in gardening.
- E does not fit. It is plain, factual wording.
Watch out: B sits in the same sentence as A, and it sounds just as colorful. But it adds no danger and no force.
Choose both answers
So the answers are A and C. On the test, move the tiles “sounded the alarm” and “rip out” into the box Phrases That Most Affect the Tone of the Excerpt. You need both to get the point.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong choice. It is an idiom in the same sentence as A, so it seems just as strong. But swap in understood, and the feeling barely changes. C is easier to miss because it is short. Swap in remove, and the force is gone.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Excerpt from “It’s Time to Stop Thinking That All Non-Native Species Are Evil”” as printed (pages 68–70)



Question 83 of 120
2024 Test A English, question 1Question
Read this sentence.
The engineers tried some other things in the hope of finding a more effective insulation for the compartment.
What is the most precise revision for the words The engineers tried some other things?
- AThe engineers did experiments with several new materials
- BThe engineers tested foam and fiberglass
- CThe engineers examined two new materials
- DThe engineers worked with foam and fiberglass
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks for the most precise revision for the words “The engineers tried some other things.”
A. Incorrect. This revision uses the word “materials” rather than precisely identifying what the engineers used.
B. CORRECT. This option revises the words to be more precise by using the specific words “tested” for the verb and “foam and fiberglass” for the materials.
C. Incorrect. This revision uses the word “examined” rather than a word indicating a process of experimental trial and error. The sentence also uses the word “materials” rather than precisely identifying what the engineers used.
D. Incorrect. This revision identifies the materials, but the imprecise verb “worked with” does not specify what the engineers were doing.
Question analysis
This revising question gives one sentence about engineers looking for better insulation for a compartment and asks which rewrite of its vague opening words is the most precise. The tricky part is that some choices sharpen one half of the phrase while leaving the other half as loose as the original.
- NYS standards
- 7L3a precise and concise language
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Choosing precise wording is a grade 7 language standard, but this item is a single sentence about an engineering test with everyday words. Typical grade 7 revision asks for the same judgment across a paragraph or a full draft.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Every choice must be checked minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one sentence or line
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 7, 63 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Precision here has two halves: a verb that names the actual activity and an object that names the actual materials. Most students who miss it stop at the first concrete detail they see, the named materials or the count of two, and never test the verb. Only one rewrite names both an exact action and the exact materials; each of the others leaves one half, or both, nearly as loose as the original.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The rewrite with “worked with foam and fiberglass” matches the right one word for word except the verb, so only asking whether “worked with” says what the engineers did separates them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Every choice must be checked minor Choosing the answer
The vague words have two parts, the action “tried” and the object “some other things,” and each rewrite sharpens a different part, so every one must be tested for both. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Strategy: Split the underlined words into the action and the things acted on, then ask of each revision whether a reader would know exactly what the engineers did and with what.
Traps
- Half right: One half of a two-part choice is right and the other is not.
- Wordy, vague or informal: A revision is grammatical but wordy, imprecise or too casual for the passage.
The wrong answers, classified
A Wordy, vague or informal (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Takes “did experiments with” as an exact verb, but the wordier phrase still ends in “several new materials,” which leaves the reader guessing what was tried.
C Wordy, vague or informal (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Treats the count “two” as precise detail, though the materials stay unnamed and “examined” suggests looking them over rather than trying them as insulation.
D Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Sees that naming foam and fiberglass makes the object exact and stops there, missing that “worked with” is as vague as the original “tried.”
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This question is about precise language. Precise means exact and clear. The words “The engineers tried some other things” are vague. You can’t tell what the engineers did. You also can’t tell what they used. You need the rewrite that tells both.
Learn what makes words precise
Precise writing names the exact action and the exact thing. Vague: She did stuff with food. Precise: She baked bread.
The underlined words have two vague parts. The verb (the action word) is “tried.” The things are “some other things.” A good rewrite must fix both parts.
Think about what the sentence needs
The engineers want “a more effective insulation.” Insulation is material that keeps heat or cold from getting through. To find the best one, they would try out real materials and see how well each works. So the best verb says they tested. The best object names the materials.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. “Did experiments with” is wordy, and “several new materials” still doesn’t say which ones.
- B is right. “Tested” names the exact action. “Foam and fiberglass” names the exact materials.
- C is wrong. “Two new materials” gives a number but no names. “Examined” means looked over, not tried out.
- D is wrong. It names foam and fiberglass. But “worked with” is as vague as “tried.”
Watch out: D is tempting because it names the materials. Always check the verb too.
Choose the answer
Only B fixes both vague parts. The reader learns what the engineers did and what they used. So the answer is B: The engineers tested foam and fiberglass.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D is the closest wrong answer. It matches B word for word except for the verb. “Worked with” could mean cut, built or studied. “Tested” tells you the engineers tried each material to see how well it insulates. That is what the sentence is about, so B is more precise.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 84 of 120
2024 Test A English, question 11Passage Excerpt from “Impressions of an Indian Childhood”
Excerpt from “Impressions of an Indian Childhood”
by Zitkala-Sa
Zitkala-Sa (Gertrude Simmons Bonnin) was a Native American writer, musician, teacher, and political activist who was raised on the Yankton Sioux Reservation in South Dakota. In 1900 she published “Impressions of an Indian Childhood” (the term Indian was commonly used at the time to refer to Native American people) to expose readers to what life is like on a reservation.
Soon after breakfast Mother sometimes began her beadwork. On a bright, clear day, she pulled out the wooden pegs that pinned the skirt of our wigwam1 to the ground, and rolled the canvas part way up on its frame of slender poles. Then the cool morning breezes swept freely through our dwelling, now and then wafting the perfume of sweet grasses from newly burnt prairie.
Untying the long tasseled strings that bound a small brown buckskin2 bag, my mother spread upon a mat beside her bunches of colored beads, just as an artist arranges the paints upon his palette. On a lapboard she smoothed out a double sheet of soft white buckskin; and drawing from a beaded case that hung on the left of her wide belt a long, narrow blade, she trimmed the buckskin into shape. Often she worked upon small moccasins for her small daughter. Then I became intensely interested in her designing. With a proud, beaming face, I watched her work. In [my] imagination, I saw myself walking in a new pair of snugly fitting moccasins. I felt the envious eyes of my playmates upon the pretty red beads decorating my feet.
Close beside my mother I sat on a rug, with a scrap of buckskin in one hand and an awl in the other. This was the beginning of my practical observation lessons in the art of beadwork. From a skein3 of finely twisted threads of silvery sinews my mother pulled out a single one. With an awl she pierced the buckskin, and skillfully threaded it with the white sinew. Picking up the tiny beads one by one, she strung them with the point of her thread, always twisting it carefully after every stitch.
It took many trials before I learned how to knot my sinew thread on the point of my finger, as I saw her do. Then the next difficulty was in keeping my thread stiffly twisted, so that I could easily string my beads upon it. My mother required of me original designs for my lessons in beading. At first I frequently ensnared many a sunny hour into working a long design. Soon I learned from self-inflicted punishment to refrain from drawing complex patterns, for I had to finish whatever I began.
After some experience I usually drew easy and simple crosses and squares. These were some of the set forms. My original designs were not always symmetrical nor sufficiently characteristic, two faults with which my mother had little patience. The quietness of her oversight made me feel strongly responsible and dependent upon my own judgment. She treated me as a dignified little individual as long as I was on my good behavior; and how humiliated I was when some boldness of mine drew forth a rebuke from her!
In the choice of colors she left me to my own taste. I was pleased with an outline of yellow upon a background of dark blue, or a combination of red and myrtle-green. There was another of red with a bluish-gray that was more conventionally used. When I became a little familiar with designing and the various pleasing combinations of color, a harder lesson was given me. It was the sewing on, instead of beads, some tinted porcupine quills, moistened and flattened between the nails of the thumb and forefinger. My mother cut off the prickly ends and burned them at once in the centre fire. These sharp points were poisonous, and worked into the flesh wherever they lodged. For this reason, my mother said, I should not do much alone in quills until I was as tall as my cousin Warca-Ziwin.
Always after these confining lessons I was wild with surplus spirits, and found joyous relief in running loose in the open again. Many a summer afternoon a party of four or five of my playmates roamed over the hills with me. We each carried a light sharpened rod about four feet long, with which we pried up certain sweet roots. When we had eaten all the choice roots we chanced upon, we shouldered our rods and strayed off into patches of a stalky plant under whose yellow blossoms we found little crystal drops of gum. Drop by drop we gathered this nature’s rock-candy, until each of us could boast of a lump the size of a small bird’s egg. Soon satiated with its woody flavor, we tossed away our gum, to return again to the sweet roots.
From “Impressions of an Indian Childhood” by Zitkala-Sa—Public Domain
A BRIEF HISTORY OF BEADWORK IN SOUTH DAKOTA
| Date | Event |
|---|---|
| 1500s | The Dakota use beads made from bones, shells, stones, and animal teeth. European traders bring glass beads to North America. |
| Late 1600s | The Dakota begin trading with the French in Minnesota. |
| 1830s | The Dakota begin using glass beads in clothing, artwork, and decorations in place of Native-made beads. |
| 1862–1865 | The Dakota are expelled from their homelands in Minnesota as a result of the U.S.-Dakota War. |
| 1900s–1920s | The Dakota create items to sell outside their community. |
Source: MNopedia
1wigwam: hut with an arched framework of poles covered with bark, mats, or animal hides
2buckskin: leather made from the skin of a male deer
3skein: coiled length of yarn or other thread loosely wound on a reel
Question
The author’s use of sequence in paragraphs 1 and 2 contributes to the development of ideas in the excerpt by
- Alisting the many steps that are involved in the process of beading in order to explain its difficulty and complexity.
- Bconveying the importance of following the steps of the beading process in a precise order to work most efficiently.
- Cemphasizing the time required to fully prepare for and execute the many large and small tasks in the activity of beading.
- Ddetailing each step in preparation for beading in order to highlight the author’s enthusiasm for the work.
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The question asks how the author’s use of sequence in paragraphs 1 and 2 contributes to the development of ideas in the excerpt.
A. Incorrect. In paragraph 2, the author does list the steps her mother takes in preparation to do beadwork, such as “untying the long tasseled strings” of the bag of beads, spreading the beads beside her on a mat, and using “a long, narrow blade” to trim the buckskin into shape. However, the language used to describe this sequence does not indicate that preparing to work with beads is difficult or complex.
B. Incorrect. Although the author’s description of untying the bag of beads, spreading the beads upon a mat, smoothing out a sheet of buckskin, and trimming the buckskin into shape in paragraph 2 indicates that the mother follows a certain routine, it does not place any emphasis on working most efficiently by following the steps of the beading process in a precise order.
C. Incorrect. In paragraph 2, the author describes her mother “untying the long tasseled strings that bound a small brown buckskin bag,” “spread[ing] upon a mat beside her bunches of colored beads,” “smooth[ing] out a double sheet of soft white buckskin; and drawing from a beaded case that hung on the left of her wide belt a long, narrow blade” to trim the buckskin. Although these descriptions do outline the steps in her process for creating beadwork, they do not emphasize the time required to do so, since the author does not mention in the excerpt how long it took her mother to fully prepare for and complete the large and small tasks in the activity of beading.
D. CORRECT. In paragraph 1, the author describes how the morning begins with her mother rolling up the canvas of the wigwam and allowing the breeze to come in. In paragraph 2, the author uses sensory language and precise sequencing to describe the way her mother prepares the beading materials by untying “the long tasseled strings that bound a small brown buckskin bag,” spreading the “bunches of colored beads” beside her, and smoothing out “a double sheet of soft white buckskin.” This combination of sequence and sensory language highlights the author’s enthusiasm for beadwork by emphasizing that the author pays close attention to her mother’s preparations.
Question analysis
This reading question asks how the step-by-step description of a mother preparing her beadwork, in the opening paragraphs of Zitkala-Sa's memoir, contributes to the excerpt's ideas. Every choice agrees that steps are listed, so students must judge which purpose the text actually supports and resist reasons that only sound likely for a craft.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 structure questions usually ask what a paragraph adds to a topic. This one asks what an ordered description achieves, in dense 1900 prose where the purpose is never stated outright, which goes beyond typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- How, not what major
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Reading between the lines moderate
- Complex sentences minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 8, 946 words; question and choices: about grade 11, 95 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A misquotation of the excerpt in the explanation was corrected.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
All four choices agree that the paragraphs lay out steps, so the question turns entirely on purpose, and three of the purposes sound like natural reasons to describe a craft. Nothing in paragraphs 1 and 2 calls the work hard, slow or a matter of efficiency; what they do show is a child following every move and becoming intensely interested. Students who look for the narrator's own reaction find the purpose, while those who reason from the steps alone drift to difficulty or time.
How, not what major Working it out
The stem asks what the ordered account of untying the bag, spreading the beads, and smoothing and trimming the buckskin does for the excerpt, a purpose the author never states. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The difficulty choice shares the right one's frame, steps laid out in order to show something, and differs only in what they show: how hard beading is, or how eagerly the girl watched. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
The enthusiasm has to be pieced together from the close attention to each step and from “intensely interested” and “a proud, beaming face” in paragraph 2. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Complex sentences minor Understanding the question
Paragraph 2 uses literary word order, as in “my mother spread upon a mat beside her bunches of colored beads,” which slows the reading of the very steps in question. (Abedi & Lord, 2001; Freedle & Kostin, 1993; Messick, 1989)
Strategy: For each choice, look in paragraphs 1 and 2 for words that would prove its purpose; a purpose that no sentence states or shows can be ruled out.
Traps
- Half right: One half of a two-part choice is right and the other is not.
- Wrong purpose or structure: Names a purpose, structure or effect that the part does not serve, or describes what a part says when the question asks what it does.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
The wrong answers, classified
A Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Rightly sees that paragraph 2 lists many preparation steps, then decides the list must show that beading is difficult and complex, which nothing in these paragraphs says.
B Wrong purpose or structure (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Reads the sequence as instructions about doing the steps in a precise order for efficiency, a purpose a watching child's memories never suggest.
C Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Reasons that so many steps must take a long time, perhaps recalling the “many a sunny hour” of paragraph 4, but paragraphs 1 and 2 never mention time.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: In rejecting choice C, the handbook quotes paragraph 2 as “spread[ing them] upon a mat beside her bunches of colored beads.” In the excerpt, the bunches of colored beads are what the mother spreads (“my mother spread upon a mat beside her bunches of colored beads”). The inserted “them” refers to nothing and turns the beads into a place. The quotation now reads “spread[ing] upon a mat beside her bunches of colored beads,” which is how the handbook itself reads the sentence in its reason for rejecting choice A (“spreading the beads beside her on a mat”).
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
Sequence means the order in which things happen. Paragraphs 1 and 2 tell the steps of a morning in order. The question asks why the author tells them step by step. What does that careful order help show?
List the steps
In paragraphs 1 and 2, the mother:
- rolls up the side of the wigwam to let in the breeze,
- unties a bag made of buckskin (soft deer leather),
- spreads her beads on a mat,
- smooths out a sheet of buckskin, and
- trims it into shape with a blade.
Find the author’s reaction
Right after the steps, the author tells how she felt. “Then I became intensely interested in her designing. With a proud, beaming face, I watched her work.” Intensely means very strongly. A beaming face has a big, happy smile. She noticed every little step because she was so excited. The details show her enthusiasm, or eager interest.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. The steps are listed, but nothing says beading is hard or complex.
- B is wrong. Nothing says the steps must go in a set order to save effort.
- C is wrong. Paragraphs 1 and 2 never say how long anything takes.
- D is right. The careful details show how closely the girl watched, with eager interest.
Watch out: A is tempting because there are many steps. But many steps don’t prove a task is hard. The author never calls it difficult.
Choose the answer
The step-by-step order shows a child following every move her mother makes. So the answer is D.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong answer. Like D, it says the steps are listed to show something. But no word in paragraphs 1 and 2 calls beading hard. The author does say she was “intensely interested” and had “a proud, beaming face.” That shows enthusiasm, so D fits better.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Excerpt from “Impressions of an Indian Childhood”” as printed (pages 42–43)


Question 85 of 120
2024 Test A English, question 15Uses the passage above: “Excerpt from “Impressions of an Indian Childhood””.
Question
Read this sentence from paragraph 7.
Always after these confining lessons I was wild with surplus spirits, and found joyous relief in running loose in the open again.
Which sentence best describes how this sentence fits into the overall structure of the excerpt?
- AIt introduces a shift from the author’s demanding relationship with her mother to her more relaxed relationships with friends.
- BIt signals a change from the challenging aspects of life on the reservation to the advantages of living on the prairie.
- CIt highlights a contrast between the focus and control required while working and the freedom of having fun outside.
- DIt concludes the progression of events in the narrative by describing the sequence of events at the end of the author’s day.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks which sentence best describes how the sentence from paragraph 7 fits into the overall structure of the excerpt.
A. Incorrect. Though the author feels humiliated “when some boldness of mine drew forth a rebuke from” her mother (paragraph 5) and characterizes her lessons with her mother as “confining” (paragraph 7), the overall passage does not portray a demanding relationship between the author and the mother. The shift introduced in the sentence from paragraph 7 is not from one of the author’s relationships to another; it is from work to play.
B. Incorrect. In paragraph 6, the author explains how working with porcupine quills is difficult because the “sharp points were poisonous, and worked into the flesh wherever they lodged.” Although this sentence suggests that working with porcupine quills was challenging, the sentence from paragraph 7 does not signal a change from the challenging aspects of life on the reservation to the advantages of living on the prairie. Most of paragraph 6 describes the author’s pleasure in creating designs in different colors.
C. CORRECT. In the sentence from paragraph 7, the author refers to her beadwork lessons as “confining” and states that after the lessons, she “was wild with surplus spirits” and “found joyous relief” in being outside and running around. The phrases “surplus spirits” and “joyous relief” highlight a sense of freedom that stands in strong contrast to the “confining” nature of the author’s beadwork lessons, which required intense focus and control.
D. Incorrect. In paragraph 7, the author describes how “many a summer afternoon” after her beadwork lessons, she and her friends used “a light sharpened rod” to gather “sweet roots” and “little crystal drops of gum.” She then explains that they later “tossed away our gum, to return again to the sweet roots.” However, the sentence from paragraph 7 does not conclude the progression of events in the narrative by describing the sequence of events at the end of the author’s day; the sentence appears at the beginning of paragraph 7 and provides a contrast with events from the previous paragraph.
Question analysis
This reading question quotes the sentence that opens the last paragraph of Zitkala-Sa's excerpt, where she tells how she felt after her beadwork lessons, and asks how it fits the overall structure. Several choices describe a turn or a contrast, so students must pin down exactly what is being set against what.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Explaining how one sentence fits a text's structure is grade 7 reading. The sentence is quoted and its wording is vivid, but the student must connect it to the paragraphs on both sides of it, a typical grade 7 demand.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- How, not what moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Hard words minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 8, 946 words; question and choices: about grade 10, 123 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The sentence clearly marks a change, and every choice names some change, so the work lies in saying exactly what is set against what. The excerpt contrasts careful, controlled work with free play, and the word “confining” carries that contrast. Students lose the point by making the turn about people, reading one rebuke as a hard relationship, or about the day's timeline, when the sentence describes what always happened after lessons.
How, not what moderate Working it out
The stem asks how the sentence works in the excerpt's structure, so students must name the turn it marks, from the “confining” lessons of paragraphs 3–6 to running loose outdoors. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The relationships choice also describes a move from lessons with her mother to play with friends, and differs from the right one only in calling the bond with her mother demanding. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Hard words minor Understanding the question
Old-fashioned phrasing such as “wild with surplus spirits” and “joyous relief” has to be decoded as a burst of energy after hours of holding still. (Perfetti, 2007; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Strategy: Compare paragraph 6 with paragraph 7 and name what changes between them in a few words, then pick the choice whose two halves match both sides of that change.
Traps
- Half right: One half of a two-part choice is right and the other is not.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Wrong purpose or structure: Names a purpose, structure or effect that the part does not serve, or describes what a part says when the question asks what it does.
The wrong answers, classified
A Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Notices the move from lessons with her mother to play with friends, but the excerpt shows a quiet, respectful teacher, not a demanding relationship; the turn is from work to play.
B Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Inflates the move outdoors into a contrast between hardships of reservation life and the prairie's advantages, a far broader claim than one sentence about lessons supports.
D Wrong purpose or structure (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Takes the sentence as closing a day's events, since the excerpt begins after breakfast and paragraph 7 turns to afternoons, though it opens its paragraph with a contrast.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks how one sentence fits the structure of the excerpt. Structure means how the parts are put together. You need to know what change this sentence marks.
Read the sentence closely
The sentence opens paragraph 7: “Always after these confining lessons I was wild with surplus spirits, and found joyous relief in running loose in the open again.” Confining means keeping you shut in or held still. “Surplus spirits” means extra energy. “Joyous relief” is a happy feeling of being free at last.
Compare what comes before and after
Paragraphs 3 to 6 show the lessons. The girl sits still and works with care. She learns to knot thread, plan designs and handle sharp quills. The rest of paragraph 7 shows her roaming the hills with friends. So this sentence turns from careful work to free play.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. The mother is a quiet, respectful teacher, not a demanding one. The shift is from work to play.
- B is wrong. The sentence sets lessons against play. It says nothing about reservation life being hard or the prairie being better.
- C is right. “Confining” lessons are set against “running loose in the open.”
- D is wrong. The sentence starts paragraph 7 and tells what always happened after lessons. It doesn’t end the story.
Watch out: A is tempting because the girl goes from her mother to her friends. But the sentence contrasts how she felt during lessons and after them.
Choose the answer
The sentence contrasts the focus that work needs with the freedom of playing outside. So the answer is C.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong answer. It also sees a move from lessons with her mother to play with friends. But A calls the relationship demanding. The mother teaches quietly and treats her daughter “as a dignified little individual” (paragraph 5). The real contrast is in the word “confining,” which sets held-still work against free play. That is C.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 86 of 120
2024 Test A English, question 20Passage At Dusk
At Dusk
by Natasha Trethewey
At first I think she is calling a child,
my neighbor, leaning through her doorway
at dusk, street lamps just starting to hum
the backdrop of evening. Then I hear
the high-pitched wheedling1 we send out
to animals who know only sound, not
the meanings of our words—here here—
nor how they sometimes fall short.
In another yard, beyond my neighbor’s
sight, the cat lifts her ears, turns first
toward the voice, then back
to the constellation of fireflies flickering
near her head. It’s as if she can’t decide
whether to leap over the low hedge,
the neat row of flowers, and bound
onto the porch, into the steady circle
of light, or stay where she is: luminous
possibility—all that would keep her
away from home—flitting before her.
I listen as my neighbor’s voice trails off.
She’s given up calling for now, left me
to imagine her inside the house waiting,
perhaps in a chair in front of the TV,
or walking around, doing small tasks;
left me to wonder that I too might lift
my voice, sure of someone out there,
send it over the lines stitching here
to there, certain the sounds I make
are enough to call someone home.
“At Dusk” from NATIVE GUARD by Natasha Trethewey, published by Houghton Mifflin Company. Copyright © 2006 by Natasha Trethewey. All rights reserved.
1wheedling: speaking in a flattering manner
Question
The isolation of the words “—here here—” in line 7 contributes to the meaning of the poem mainly by
- Ademonstrating how people try to communicate in familiar ways but are still sometimes misunderstood.
- Bshowing how people can feel desperate to connect with others but give up quickly when their first attempts are ignored.
- Cusing the unspoken bond between the neighbor and her cat to highlight the understanding people have with their pets.
- Dillustrating the use of a simple expression to call home those who are loved and missed.
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The question asks how the isolation of the words “—here here—” in line 7 mainly contributes to the meaning of the poem.
A. Incorrect. The words “—here here—” do interrupt the speaker’s observation in lines 7–8 that “our words . . . / . . . sometimes fall short.” However, in lines 5–7, the speaker observes that the neighbor accompanies her words with a “high-pitched wheedling” that people “send out” because they are aware that animals “know only sound, not / the meanings of our words,” indicating that the neighbor does not actually expect her words to be understood. The description of the cat’s response in lines 10–11 (“the cat lifts her ears, turns first / toward the voice, then back”) does not suggest that the neighbor’s message is misunderstood but rather suggests that the cat prefers not to respond to it.
B. Incorrect. In lines 20–21, the “neighbor’s voice trails off,” and she does give up calling the cat. However, rather than any desperation to connect, the neighbor’s use of a “high-pitched wheedling” (line 5) simply indicates her understanding that the cat, like other animals, understands “only sound, not / the meanings of our words” (lines 6–7) such as “here here.” Furthermore, the neighbor does not give up quickly. In lines 21–22, the speaker says the neighbor has “given up calling for now” but is still “waiting” for the cat.
C. Incorrect. In lines 4–7, the speaker describes the neighbor calling to the cat with a “high-pitched wheedling.” The sound may indicate a bond between the neighbor and the cat because the neighbor does understand that animals “know only sound, not / the meanings of our words” (lines 6–7). However, the use of the words “here here” in line 7 does not indicate that bond, because they are used as an example of the type of words that animals do not understand.
D. CORRECT. The speaker’s initial thought in line 1 that the neighbor is calling a child, rather than a cat, suggests that the neighbor loves and misses the cat. Lines 4–7 then present the speaker’s observation that the neighbor uses a “high-pitched wheedling,” to emphasize the simple words of her call, “—here here—.” The idea that the words are an example of a simple expression used to call home a missed loved one is reinforced in lines 25–29, when the speaker is “left . . . to wonder” whether the speaker, too, “might lift / [his or her] voice” and be able “to call someone home.”
Question analysis
This reading question asks how setting off the words here here with dashes in line 7 adds to the meaning of At Dusk, Natasha Trethewey's poem about a neighbor calling her cat at nightfall. Students must work out what two plain, isolated words contribute to the whole poem, choosing among four readings about how people and animals communicate and connect.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students explain how a line adds to a poem, but here the feature is a tiny typographic choice, and its meaning has to be built from the whole poem rather than nearby lines, which goes beyond typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Among the hardest on the SHSAT: a non-obvious approach, heavy reading, or a well-hidden trap.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer major
- Evidence in several places moderate
- How, not what moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: 236 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 9, 87 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A grammar slip in the explanation was corrected.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The words sit inside a sentence about animals not knowing the meanings of our words and about words that “sometimes fall short,” so the nearest lines point toward miscommunication. The poem's frame points elsewhere: it opens with a call that sounds like a parent's, ends with the speaker hoping a voice can “call someone home,” and even repeats “here” in line 27. Students who read only around line 7 choose the misunderstanding; those who connect the isolated call to the first and last lines see what it is for.
A very close wrong answer major Choosing the answer
The misunderstanding choice and the right one agree that “here here” is a familiar way of calling; they part only on what it shows, failed communication or a call home to someone missed. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
The right reading rests on lines far from line 7: the speaker's first guess that a child is being called, and the last line's wish “to call someone home.” (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
How, not what moderate Working it out
The question asks what setting two words apart with dashes and italics does for the poem, a typographic choice whose purpose the poem never explains. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Strategy: Ask what the two words are meant to do and whom they are aimed at, then keep the choice that the poem's other lines confirm.
Traps
- Wrong purpose or structure: Names a purpose, structure or effect that the part does not serve, or describes what a part says when the question asks what it does.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
The wrong answers, classified
A Wrong purpose or structure (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Reads the words through line 8's “sometimes fall short” as failed communication, but the cat does hear and turn toward the call, and the ending hopes such sounds can bring someone home.
B Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Sees the neighbor stop calling and calls her desperate and quick to quit, though she has given up only “for now” and is still waiting inside.
C Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Assumes an owner and a pet share a silent understanding, but “here here” is spoken aloud, and the poem offers it as words animals cannot follow.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: In rejecting choice C, the handbook reads “the use of the words “here here” in line 7 do not indicate that bond.” It now reads “does not,” to agree with “use.”
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
In line 7 the words here here are set apart by dashes and slanted letters (italics). The question asks what this does for the poem’s meaning. Think about what the words are for and who they are aimed at.
Look at line 7
Line 7 reads “the meanings of our words—here here—.” These are the words the neighbor calls to her cat. Setting them apart lets you hear them, as if spoken aloud. They are simple words that mean “come here.” Lines 6–7 say animals know “only sound, not / the meanings of our words.”
Connect to the start and end
In line 1 the speaker first thinks the neighbor “is calling a child.” So the call sounds like a parent calling someone they love. The poem ends with the hope that a voice can be “enough to call someone home” (line 29). So here here is a simple call to bring a loved one home.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. The cat isn’t confused. She “lifts her ears” and turns “toward the voice.” She just doesn’t come yet.
- B is wrong. The neighbor isn’t shown as desperate. She stops only “for now,” and the speaker pictures her waiting inside.
- C is wrong. Here here is spoken out loud. The poem treats it as words animals don’t understand, not a silent bond.
- D is right. It is a simple call to someone loved and missed.
Watch out: Line 8 says words “sometimes fall short,” which points toward A. But read the first and last lines too.
Choose the answer
The two words stand for the simple call people use to bring loved ones home. So the answer is D.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong answer, because line 8 says our words “sometimes fall short.” But the cat does hear the call and turn toward it. And the poem ends by hoping the sounds “are enough to call someone home.” D links the two words to that wish, and to the first guess that a child is being called.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “At Dusk” as printed (page 48)

Question 87 of 120
2024 Test A English, question 24Uses the passage above: “At Dusk”.
Question
How does the setting affect the events of the poem?
- AIt enables the speaker to regularly overhear the neighbor calling for her cat at dusk.
- BIt allows the speaker to observe the neighbor quietly without interacting with her.
- CIt shows how living in close proximity helps the speaker feel connected to the neighbor.
- DIt shows how feeling isolated causes the speaker to imagine interactions with the neighbor.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks how the setting affects the events discussed in the poem.
A. Incorrect. In line 2, the speaker refers to the woman calling for her cat as “my neighbor,” which clearly suggests that the speaker lives next door to the woman. However, although the two live next door to each other, line 1 suggests that perhaps the speaker does not regularly overhear the neighbor because the speaker initially thinks that the neighbor is “calling a child” and only later realizes the neighbor is calling to a cat. Although the setting places the speaker and the neighbor in close proximity, the poem does not indicate the frequency or regularity with which the speaker overhears the neighbor.
B. CORRECT. In the first four lines, the speaker observes the actions of the neighbor as the neighbor leans out to call for the cat at dusk. Despite the speaker’s observation of the neighbor, there is no indication that the neighbor notices the speaker. The reader can conclude that because of the time of day and the speaker being in the house next door, the speaker can observe the neighbor without being observed by her or having to interact with her.
C. Incorrect. The setting of the poem is a neighborhood at nightfall, as indicated by “at dusk” in line 3, the reference to “another yard” in line 9, and the flickering fireflies in line 12. However, while the speaker is close enough to the neighbor to overhear her calling to the cat, there is no indication that the speaker feels connected to the neighbor. Instead, the speaker expresses curiosity about the neighbor after the neighbor goes inside, and the speaker is “left . . . / to imagine her inside the house waiting” (lines 21–22). The fact the speaker initially thought that the neighbor was calling a child indicates that the speaker is not familiar with the neighbor and her habits, and there is no indication that the speaker feels connected to the neighbor.
D. Incorrect. In lines 22–24, the speaker imagines what the neighbor may be doing while the neighbor is waiting inside for the cat to return, but the speaker is imagining the neighbor’s solitary experience after the neighbor has momentarily “given up” on calling to the cat (line 21). The speaker does not imagine personally interacting with the neighbor but rather briefly imagines what the neighbor is doing at home while the cat is away.
Question analysis
This reading question asks how the setting of At Dusk, a neighborhood at nightfall where a woman leans from her doorway to call her cat, affects the events of the poem. Because so little happens, students must infer the setting's role from small details, and several choices sound reasonable without being supported by the poem.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students analyze how setting shapes events, usually in a story with a clear plot. This poem has almost no action, so the student must reason from a handful of details about place and time, which is harder than typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer major
- Reading between the lines moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: 236 words (a poem; reading level not measured); question and choices: about grade 8, 67 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Little happens in this poem, so the setting's role must be built from small details: a neighbor at her doorway at dusk, a cat in another yard, a speaker who hears and watches but never speaks. The strongest wrong answer is right about overhearing and wrong only in claiming it happens regularly, which the speaker's first mistaken guess argues against. The other choices supply a feeling of closeness or of isolation that the poem never states.
A very close wrong answer major Choosing the answer
The overhearing choice describes what the setting allows almost as well as the right one and fails on a single word, “regularly,” since the poem records one evening and the speaker first mistakes the call. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
The setting's effect is never stated; it has to be inferred from the speaker hearing and watching from nearby while the neighbor, “leaning through her doorway,” never seems to notice anyone. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Strategy: Picture the scene from the speaker's position, then check each choice word by word against the poem and reject any that claims something the poem never states.
Traps
- Too broad or too strong: A choice overstates, generalizes, or uses absolute words the text does not support.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
The wrong answers, classified
A Too broad or too strong (King et al., 2004)
Rightly sees that living next door lets the speaker overhear the call, but “regularly” is unsupported, and the first guess about a child suggests the call is unfamiliar.
C Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Connects living close by with the poem's interest in connection and the speaker's “I too,” but the speaker never claims to feel close to the neighbor.
D Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Notices the speaker picturing the neighbor indoors and calls it imagined interaction, but the speaker pictures her alone, waiting or doing small tasks, and never mentions feeling isolated.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
The setting is where and when a story or poem takes place. You need to see how the setting shapes what happens in the poem.
Picture the setting
It is “dusk” (line 3), the dim time just after sunset. The neighbor is “leaning through her doorway” (line 2). The cat is “In another yard” (line 9). The speaker is close enough to hear and watch it all. But the speaker never speaks to the neighbor. Nothing shows the neighbor notices the speaker.
Work out the effect
Living next door puts the speaker close by. In the fading light, the speaker can watch quietly. So the speaker sees the neighbor and the cat without joining in. The whole poem is what the speaker sees, hears and imagines from there.
Check each choice
- A is wrong. The word “regularly” is the problem. The poem shows one evening.
- B is right. The speaker watches from nearby and never talks with the neighbor.
- C is wrong. The speaker never says they feel close to the neighbor.
- D is wrong. The poem never says the speaker feels lonely. The speaker pictures the neighbor alone inside, not the two of them talking.
Watch out: A is almost right, since living nearby does let the speaker overhear. One word makes it wrong.
Choose the answer
The setting lets the speaker watch quietly from close by. So the answer is B.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong answer. Living next door does let the speaker hear the call. But nothing says it happens often. The poem tells about one evening. At first the speaker even thinks a child is being called. B fits what the poem shows: the speaker watches without ever talking to the neighbor.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 88 of 120
2024 Test A English, question 26Passage Champion of the Channel
Champion of the Channel
In 1926 an editor at the London Daily News predicted that Gertrude Ederle, an American swimmer with eighteen world records and three Olympic medals, would fail in her attempt to swim across the English Channel. He claimed that “even the most uncompromising champion of the rights and capacities of women must admit that in contests of physical skill, speed and endurance they must remain forever the weaker sex.” Yet, at only nineteen years old, Ederle not only became the first woman to accomplish this feat, she also broke the men’s record by two hours. Gertrude Ederle’s triumphant swim across the English Channel was a testimony to her determination, innovative spirit, and passion for swimming.
Crossing the English Channel is a daunting task for any swimmer. At its narrowest point, the channel measures twenty-one miles across. Its icy waters hover around sixty degrees Fahrenheit, and its unruly tides and currents toss swimmers about like bobbing corks. Stinging jellyfish, seaweed, and floating debris from shipwrecks and lost cargoes present added hazards.
For decades the channel’s perils have defeated countless swimmers. Ederle, too, failed in her first attempt to cross the channel in 1925. Just six miles short of finishing, she became ill, and her coach had to haul her out of the water. Undeterred, Ederle decided to try again. Ederle knew that if she did not complete the challenge this time, she might never get the opportunity to set this record, because a rival female swimmer was preparing to make her second attempt at the crossing as well.
To prepare for the marathon swim, Ederle found ways to improve her equipment. She and her sister Meg discovered that melted candle wax perfectly sealed goggle edges, effectively waterproofing Ederle’s goggles against hammering waves. The sisters also designed a two-piece silk swimsuit for Ederle. During her first channel-crossing attempt she had worn a standard one-piece swimsuit that, after the lengthy hours of swimming across the channel, had stretched out, filling with water and creating drag, making an already challenging task almost insurmountable. Unlike the cumbersome typical bathing suit, this silk invention weighed little and allowed for easy movement.
On August 6, 1926, Ederle waded into the channel near Cape Gris-Nez, France. At first she shivered in the bone-chilling water even though she had covered her body in eight layers of grease for insulation. Her limbs felt stiff. Her strokes were irregular. Driving forward, she fought to clear her mind and find what she called her “sphere,” a place where the sea became her only companion and the shrieks of gulls and the humming of boat engines faded away. Using a new overhand stroke called the American crawl, Ederle eventually settled into a steady pace, briskly breaking through waves.
Throughout Ederle’s swim, two tugboats accompanied her. One carried newspaper reporters who wired dispatches of her progress to shore. The other, displaying a sign that read “This way, ole kid!” with an arrow pointing forward, transported her coach, family, and friends. Her coach played songs, such as “Yes, We Have No Bananas,” on a phonograph so that Ederle could time her strokes to the rhythm. Using a net, her coach also passed her baby bottles of broth for nourishment.
For hours Ederle swam, dodging debris with an amused smile. However, as she neared the English shore, a sudden fierce storm erupted. The tides and waves forced Ederle backward, and she fought the stubborn swells for several hours. The salty water caused her tongue to swell and inflamed her ears. Yet Ederle felt indescribably happy as she churned through the sea. Finally, as she neared the English shore, the storm abated, and the tide turned. No longer fighting against her, the sea pushed her toward the shore and victory.
After fourteen hours and thirty-one minutes, Ederle, on wobbly legs, stepped onto the English shore. The waiting crowd roared, honked their automobile horns, blasted their tugboat whistles, and set off flares that flashed in the sky. Ederle had swum into history.
When Ederle returned to New York, she received a parade, where thousands of people shouted “Trudy!” Not only were everyday American citizens proud of Ederle, but she also inspired them to be more active. Over the next few years, more than 60,000 people credited her with motivating them to earn their American Red Cross swimming certificates. Gertrude Ederle’s accomplishment proved to the world that with determination and passion, it was possible for a person to achieve his or her goals.
SOLO SWIMS ACROSS THE ENGLISH CHANNEL
|
Earliest Speed Records |
||
| Year | Swimmer | Time |
| 1875 | Matthew Webb (M) | 21 hours, 45 minutes |
| 1923 | Enrico Tiraboschi (M) | 16 hours, 33 minutes |
| 1926 | Gertrude Ederle (F) | 14 hours, 31 minutes |
| 1926 | Arnst Vierkotter (M) | 12 hours, 38 minutes |
| Current Speed Records | ||
| Year | Swimmer | Time |
| 2012 | Trent Grimsey (M) | 6 hours, 55 minutes |
| 2006 | Yvetta Hlavacova (F) | 7 hours, 25 minutes |
Question
What do the newspaper editor’s comments in paragraph 1 reveal about the challenges Ederle faced in attempting her feat?
- ARegardless of her ability, being an American put Ederle at a serious disadvantage over a Londoner, who would be more familiar with the English Channel.
- BAt the time, Ederle still needed more training in order to succeed in the daunting task of swimming the English Channel.
- CWhile Ederle could participate in athletic competition, some people were not comfortable with her attempt to swim the channel because no woman had ever attempted it before.
- DIn spite of her previous achievements, Ederle still experienced social as well as physical obstacles in attempting to swim the channel.
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The question asks what the newspaper editor’s comments in paragraph 1 reveal about Ederle’s challenges leading up to her attempt to swim across the channel.
A. Incorrect. The idea that Ederle was at a disadvantage because she was American rather than English, and thus less familiar with the channel, was not the basis for the newspaper editor’s comments about the outcome of her swim.
B. Incorrect. The passage establishes that Ederle was a highly accomplished swimmer who had won major world competitions (“Gertrude Ederle, an American swimmer with eighteen world records and three Olympic medals” [paragraph 1]).
C. Incorrect. The newspaper editor’s point was that Ederle would be unsuccessful in her attempt to complete the swim because she was a woman, not that people were uncomfortable with the idea since no woman had attempted it before.
D. CORRECT. The comments reveal a lack of social support since many people believed that a woman, no matter how skilled a swimmer, did not have the strength to overcome the physical challenges that the dangerous channel waters presented (“He claimed that ‘even the most uncompromising champion of the rights and capacities of women must admit that in contests of physical skill, speed and endurance they must remain forever the weaker sex.’ ” [paragraph 1]).
Question analysis
In 1926 a London newspaper editor predicted that Gertrude Ederle would fail to swim the English Channel, and this reading question asks what his comments in the first paragraph reveal about the challenges she faced. Students must infer from the editor's own words what stood in her way, and the wrong choices offer believable obstacles that the passage never connects to him.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Reading an opinion for what it shows about a person's situation is everyday grade 7 inference. This question points to both of the editor's sentences rather than quoting just one, so the evidence is in plain view and the work is weighing four readings.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly understand
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Reading between the lines moderate
- Complex sentences minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 9, 790 words; question and choices: about grade 14, 112 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Pointing to both of the editor's sentences puts his reason in plain view, so the work lies in naming what kind of obstacle a sexist prediction is. Students who see prejudice but not its stated basis fall for the near miss, which blames the lack of earlier female attempts, though Ederle herself had tried in 1925. The right answer is the only one that pairs that prejudice with the channel's physical dangers, and it rewards reading his words as a judgment about women, not about her.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The right choice and the one about people being uncomfortable both find a social obstacle despite her skill; they part on its cause, the editor's claim that women are “the weaker sex” or the idea that no woman had tried. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
Neither of the editor's sentences names an obstacle, so a prediction of failure and a remark about women's “physical skill, speed and endurance” must be read as prejudice she faced on top of the channel's own dangers. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Complex sentences minor Understanding the question
The editor's quoted claim runs 30 words, opening with “even the most uncompromising champion of the rights and capacities of women” and holding its point, “the weaker sex”, until the end. (Abedi & Lord, 2001; Freedle & Kostin, 1993; Messick, 1989)
Strategy: Put the editor's reasoning into your own words before looking at the choices, then reject any choice whose reason for doubting Ederle is not the one he actually gives.
Traps
- Half right: One half of a two-part choice is right and the other is not.
- Outside knowledge: A choice is plausible in the real world but not supported by this text.
- Word match: Repeats striking words or phrases from the text, so it looks supported, but its meaning does not fit the question.
The wrong answers, classified
A Outside knowledge (King et al., 2004; Recht & Leslie, 1988)
Imagines a rivalry between an American and Londoners who know the channel, a plausible reason for doubt that the editor never gives, since his claim is about women.
B Word match (Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Picks up “daunting task” from paragraph 2 and reads a prediction of failure as a sign she was undertrained, though the same sentence credits her with eighteen world records.
C Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Rightly sees people doubting a woman's attempt but gives the wrong reason; the editor cites women's supposed weakness, and Ederle had already tried the crossing in 1925.
Working it out, step by step
Understand what the question asks
This question asks you to make an inference. An inference is a conclusion you reach from clues when the text does not say it outright. The editor’s comments are in paragraph 1. You need to work out what they show about the problems Ederle had to face.
Find the editor’s two comments
Paragraph 1 says the editor “predicted that Gertrude Ederle, an American swimmer with eighteen world records and three Olympic medals, would fail in her attempt to swim across the English Channel.” Then it gives his reason. He said that women “must remain forever the weaker sex.”
Put his reason in your own words
The editor’s full sentence is long, and its point comes at the very end. He meant that even people who support women must agree that women will always be weaker in sports. His reason had nothing to do with Ederle’s own skill, which her records proved. He doubted her only because she was a woman. That is a social obstacle: a problem that comes from what other people believe.
Add the dangers of the swim
On top of that, the swim itself was dangerous. Paragraph 2 calls the crossing “a daunting task for any swimmer.” Daunting means scary and hard. The paragraph lists “icy waters,” rough tides and “stinging jellyfish.” So Ederle had two kinds of trouble: people’s doubts and the hard swim itself.
Check each choice
- D fits: “in spite of her previous achievements” matches her records, and “social as well as physical obstacles” matches the editor’s doubts plus the rough water.
- A is wrong because the editor never mentions her being American or Londoners knowing the channel.
- B is wrong because nothing says she needed more training, and her eighteen world records show she was well prepared.
- C is wrong because the editor’s reason was that women are weaker, not that no woman had tried.
Watch out: C also spots people doubting her, so it is tempting. But it gives the wrong reason for the doubt. Paragraph 3 even says Ederle herself had tried in 1925.
Choose the answer
The editor’s words show that Ederle faced prejudice against women on top of a dangerous swim. So the answer is D.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the choice most likely to fool you. It also sees that some people doubted Ederle. But it blames the doubt on no woman having tried before. The editor’s real reason was his belief that women are “the weaker sex.” D names that social obstacle and adds the physical ones, so D fits best.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Champion of the Channel” as printed (pages 56–57)


Question 89 of 120
2024 Test A English, question 27Uses the passage above: “Champion of the Channel”.
Question
Read this sentence from paragraph 4.
During her first channel-crossing attempt she had worn a standard one-piece swimsuit that, after the lengthy hours of swimming across the channel, had stretched out, filling with water and creating drag, making an already challenging task almost insurmountable.
The word “insurmountable” is used to highlight
- Ahow the bathing suit made it impossible for Ederle to make it across the channel.
- Bhow Ederle and her sister decided to improve Ederle’s swimming equipment in a creative way.
- Cthat the flaws in Ederle’s bathing suit made a difficult task even more complicated.
- Dthat the swimming equipment Ederle used needed to be custom made for her attempt.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks about the effect of the word “insurmountable,” which means “incapable of being overcome,” in paragraph 4.
A. Incorrect. Ederle did not complete her first swim because she became ill (“Just six miles short of finishing, she became ill, and her coach had to haul her out of the water.” [paragraph 3]), not because the suit made it impossible for Ederle to complete her swim.
B. Incorrect. The author uses the word “insurmountable” to draw attention to the increased difficulty caused by the suit, not to draw attention to the sisters’ creativity in solving the problem.
C. CORRECT. The suit Ederle wore during her first attempt to swim the channel “stretched out, filling with water and creating drag” (paragraph 4), which likely contributed to her failed attempt to swim across the channel.
D. Incorrect. The passage does not address whether the original suit was custom made, simply that the suit created additional difficulties for Ederle in a situation that was already difficult.
Question analysis
This vocabulary-in-context question quotes a sentence about the stretched-out swimsuit Gertrude Ederle wore on her first attempt to swim the English Channel and asks what the word insurmountable is used to highlight. Students must decide what point the word stresses in this sentence rather than simply define it, and the choices range from the old suit's effects to the sisters' new equipment.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Explaining what a strong word emphasizes in context is standard grade 7 vocabulary work. The sentence is printed in the question, which saves a search, but it is long, with several phrases stacked between the swimsuit and the key word.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Hard words moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Complex sentences minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one sentence or line
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 9, 790 words; question and choices: about grade 10, 108 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The phrase to weigh is “an already challenging task almost insurmountable”, and two small words carry it: “already” says the swim was hard to begin with, and “almost” stops short of impossible. Students who know only the dictionary meaning blame the suit for a failure that paragraph 3 pins on illness. Those who look past the sentence to the sisters' new gear answer a different question, about the fix rather than the problem the word stresses.
Hard words moderate Understanding the question
The question hinges on “insurmountable”, impossible to overcome, which is softened by the “almost” in front of it and set against the “already challenging task” it describes. (Perfetti, 2007; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The right choice and the one saying the suit made the crossing impossible both blame the old suit; they differ only in degree, which is exactly what “almost” decides. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Complex sentences minor Understanding the question
The stem prints all 38 words of the sentence, but between the swimsuit and “insurmountable” come an inserted time phrase, the verb “had stretched out” and two “-ing” phrases, so the link is easy to lose. (Abedi & Lord, 2001; Freedle & Kostin, 1993; Messick, 1989)
Strategy: Say in your own words what the quoted sentence claims about the old swimsuit, then choose the statement that restates that claim, checking each choice against the sentence word by word.
Traps
- Dictionary meaning, not meaning here: A common meaning of the word that does not fit its use in this text.
- Wrong purpose or structure: Names a purpose, structure or effect that the part does not serve, or describes what a part says when the question asks what it does.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
The wrong answers, classified
A Dictionary meaning, not meaning here (Perfetti, 2007)
Gives “insurmountable” its full dictionary force and drops “almost”, so the suit seems to have made the crossing impossible, though paragraph 3 says she stopped in 1925 because she became ill.
B Wrong purpose or structure (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Describes what the paragraph goes on to do, the sisters' creative silk suit and waxed goggles, when the quoted sentence and its key word dwell on the old suit's flaws.
D Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Reasons that because a standard suit failed, her gear had to be custom made, a conclusion the passage never draws and the word does not point toward.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out the word’s job
This question asks why the author chose one word, “insurmountable,” in paragraph 4. First you need to know what the word means. Then you can see which idea it helps the sentence stress.
Break the word into parts
To surmount something is to get over it or on top of it, the way a climber gets to the top of a cliff. The start in- means not, and the end -able means can be. So something insurmountable cannot be gotten over. It is too hard to beat.
Read the words around it
The old suit “had stretched out, filling with water and creating drag.” Drag is a force that pulls back on you and slows you down. This made “an already challenging task almost insurmountable.” Two small words matter a lot. Already tells you the swim was hard even before the suit caused trouble. Almost tells you it came close to impossible, but not all the way.
Decide what the word stresses
Put together, the phrase stresses how much worse the old suit made things. A task that was hard to begin with became even harder. The word does not say the suit by itself made the swim impossible.
Check each choice
- C fits: the suit’s flaws made “a difficult task even more complicated,” just like “already challenging” plus “almost insurmountable.”
- A is wrong because it drops “almost,” and paragraph 3 says her first try ended when she “became ill.”
- B is wrong because the sisters’ clever new gear comes in other sentences, while this word is about the problem.
- D is wrong because the passage never says her gear had to be custom made.
Watch out: A uses the word’s dictionary meaning. Always read the small words around a key word.
Choose the answer
The word shows how the old suit turned a hard swim into a nearly hopeless one. So the answer is C.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A comes closest, since “insurmountable” alone does mean impossible. But the author wrote “almost” in front of it. And paragraph 3 says illness, not the suit, ended her first try. C keeps the exact amount the sentence gives: a hard task made even harder.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 90 of 120
2024 Test A English, question 32Uses the passage above: “Champion of the Channel”.
Question
Which sentence is the best summary of the steps that Ederle took to prepare for her second attempt to swim across the English Channel?
- AWorking with her sister, Ederle waterproofed her goggles using melted candle wax to seal the edges and designed a two-piece silk swimsuit that was lightweight and would not stretch out during the long swim.
- BEderle covered her body in numerous layers of grease for insulation and focused on finding her “sphere” during her swim.
- CEderle began training with her coach, who played music while she swam to help her time her strokes to the music.
- DEderle focused on developing better equipment than the standard bathing suit that proved cumbersome during her first attempt to cross the channel.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks for the best summary of Ederle’s steps to prepare for her second attempt to swim across the English Channel.
A. CORRECT. Ederle’s preparation is outlined in paragraph 4. This option is correct because it acknowledges the idea that Ederle involved her sister in this process, and it details the efforts the two took to improve Ederle’s equipment, including sealing her goggles with wax and designing a better swimsuit.
B. Incorrect. The option focuses on Ederle’s actions in the moments before her swim (covering her body with grease for insulation) and during her swim (finding her “sphere”), not her overall preparation methods.
C. Incorrect. The option refers to a way that Ederle’s coach helped Ederle keep her strokes in rhythm during her swim. While this option suggests that Ederle and her coach had made thoughtful preparations, it does not address the many other steps that Ederle took to prepare for the swim.
D. Incorrect. The option does not refer to the series of steps that Ederle took to prepare for her swim, but rather to just one of the efforts made (improving equipment), without acknowledging her sister’s contributions.
Question analysis
This summary question asks which sentence best sums up how Gertrude Ederle got ready for her second try at swimming the English Channel. Because the passage also describes what she and her team did during the crossing, students must separate preparation from the swim itself and judge which summary is complete.
- NYS standards
- 7R2 theme or central idea
- Grade level
- Grade 6 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 This is a one-paragraph summary, the kind of task grade 6 standards describe; grade 7 central-idea work usually follows an idea through a whole text. The real demand is telling preparation apart from the swim.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly understand
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Every choice must be checked minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 9, 790 words; question and choices: about grade 12, 121 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Paragraph 4 holds all of the preparation, but the passage keeps describing things Ederle and her team did, so getting ready must be told apart from the swim. The grease is the hardest to place, because she put it on before wading in, on the day of the crossing itself. Between the two equipment choices, the one that lists the goggles, the silk suit and her sister's help is the fuller summary of several steps.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The right summary and the one about better equipment than the standard bathing suit describe the same work; only the waxed goggles and Meg's part, missing from the shorter one, separate them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Every choice must be checked minor Choosing the answer
Two choices borrow real details from the crossing, the grease she wore and the songs played from the tugboat, so each has to be placed before or during the swim. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Strategy: Locate the paragraph about getting ready, list each preparation step and who took part, and choose the sentence that covers that list most fully without adding events from another part of the passage.
Traps
- Too narrow: A single detail offered as the central idea or a summary, or a summary that keeps minor details and leaves out an essential part.
- Wrong part of the text: A choice is true of another paragraph, stanza or speaker than the one asked about.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
The wrong answers, classified
B Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Takes the grease she wore on the day and her search for her “sphere” in the water, both from paragraph 5's account of the swim, as advance preparation.
C Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Turns the phonograph her coach played from a tugboat during the crossing into training sessions before it, which the passage never describes.
D Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Captures the idea of better equipment but names only the bathing suit, leaving out the wax-sealed goggles and her sister Meg, so it summarizes one step of several.
Working it out, step by step
Know what a summary needs
A summary retells the main points in a few words. Here you need the steps Ederle took to get ready before her second try. A good summary includes all of those steps. It leaves out things that happened during the swim itself.
Find the getting-ready paragraph
Paragraph 4 opens with “To prepare for the marathon swim, Ederle found ways to improve her equipment.” The word “prepare” signals that this paragraph holds the steps. Equipment means the gear she used.
List each step
- With her sister Meg, she found that “melted candle wax perfectly sealed goggle edges,” so water stayed out of her goggles.
- Together the sisters “designed a two-piece silk swimsuit” to replace her old one.
- The new suit “weighed little and allowed for easy movement,” unlike her old suit, which had stretched and filled with water.
Check each choice
- A fits: it names her sister, the waxed goggles and the light silk suit.
- B is wrong because the grease and her “sphere” belong to paragraph 5, the day of the swim.
- C is wrong because her coach played music from a tugboat during the swim (paragraph 6), not in training.
- D is wrong because it leaves out the goggles and Meg.
Watch out: D is true as far as it goes. But it covers only one step, so it is too narrow to be the best summary.
Choose the answer
Choice A lists all the preparation in paragraph 4, and nothing from the swim itself. So the answer is A.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D comes closest, since improving her equipment is what paragraph 4 is about. But D mentions only the swimsuit. It skips the wax-sealed goggles and her sister’s help. A summary of the steps should include every step, and only A does.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 91 of 120
2024 Test A English, question 34Uses the passage above: “Champion of the Channel”.
Question
The table builds on the information in the passage mainly by
- Aemphasizing that people have continued to swim across the channel and have significantly improved the speed record.
- Bsuggesting that Ederle inspired many women to swim across the channel to attempt to break the current speed record.
- Crevealing that other women competed with Ederle to set a record time for swimming across the English Channel.
- Dproviding a comparison between the earliest channel-swimming records and the current record times.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks how the table mainly builds on the information in the passage.
A. CORRECT. The table supports the information in the passage by showing that people have continued to swim the channel and have significantly improved on past records. The information in the table about records set by those who came after Ederle builds on the idea that “Gertrude Ederle’s accomplishment proved to the world that with determination and passion, it was possible for a person to achieve his or her goals” (paragraph 9).
B. Incorrect. Even though paragraph 9 states that Ederle “inspired [everyday American citizens] to be more active” and the table presents the time for the current female record holder, there is no indication in the passage or in the table that the subsequent female record holders were inspired to swim across the channel by Ederle.
C. Incorrect. Although paragraph 3 mentions that Ederle had a female rival and the table includes the speed record of another female swimmer, the passage does not provide information about other female swimmers competing with Ederle to set the channel-swim record.
D. Incorrect. Although paragraph 1 mentions that Ederle “broke the men’s record by two hours” and the table allows for comparisons between the earliest speed records and those of the present day, the passage mentions no channel-swim records set after Ederle’s swim, so it says nothing about current record times. The table allows for comparison, but this aspect of the table does not build on the information presented in the passage.
Question analysis
This question asks how a table of English Channel speed records, from Matthew Webb's 1875 crossing to a 2012 record, builds on the passage about Gertrude Ederle. Students must read times from two eras and decide what the table adds to the text, while the choices mix accurate observations about the table with claims neither source supports.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Relating a table to a passage is within grade 7 standards, but here the student must compare records from two eras, connect them to ideas in the text and choose among closely worded statements, well above typical grade 7 demand.
- Estimated difficulty
- Among the hardest on the SHSAT: a non-obvious approach, heavy reading, or a well-hidden trap.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer major
- Reading a figure, table or graph moderate
- How, not what moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 9, 790 words; question and choices: about grade 11, 78 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A self-contradictory statement in the explanation was corrected.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
This is one of the hardest questions on the test because a wrong choice describes the table exactly, in its own words. The passage stops with Ederle's 1926 record, and what the table adds is the rest of the story: swimmers kept crossing, and the record fell to under seven hours. Students who describe what the table contains, rather than what it tells a reader who has finished the passage, lose the point.
A very close wrong answer major Choosing the answer
The comparison choice repeats the table's own headings, “Earliest Speed Records” and “Current Speed Records”, and is literally true; only the stem's “builds on the information in the passage” and “mainly” separate it from the choice about the falling record. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading a figure, table or graph moderate Understanding the question
The student must compare times across the table's two sections, from Webb's 21 hours 45 minutes in 1875 and Ederle's 14 hours 31 minutes to Grimsey's 6 hours 55 minutes in 2012. (Lesh, Post & Behr, 1987; Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
How, not what moderate Working it out
The question asks what the table adds to a passage that ends in 1926, so the student must say what its later rows extend, not what its layout holds. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Strategy: Read both sections of the table and say what it adds to Ederle's story, then keep only a choice that the table shows and that connects to an idea the passage itself develops.
Traps
- Wrong purpose or structure: Names a purpose, structure or effect that the part does not serve, or describes what a part says when the question asks what it does.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
The wrong answers, classified
B Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Assumes Ederle inspired many women to chase the record, but the table lists one later woman, Yvetta Hlavacova in 2006, and nothing links her or anyone else to Ederle.
C Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Joins the rival female swimmer of paragraph 3 to Hlavacova's 2006 time, inventing a contest among women in Ederle's day that neither the table nor the passage shows.
D Wrong purpose or structure (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Describes the table's layout, earliest records beside current ones, which is accurate, but stops at what it contains instead of saying what the comparison adds to Ederle's story.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: In rejecting choice D, the handbook notes that paragraph 1 says Ederle “broke the men’s record by two hours,” and then says “there is no mention in the passage of past, present, or future channel-swim records.” Paragraph 1 does mention a past record: the one Ederle broke. What the passage never mentions is a record set after hers, which is what the table’s “Current Speed Records” add. The explanation now says the passage mentions no channel-swim records set after Ederle’s swim, so it says nothing about current record times. The reason for rejecting D is otherwise unchanged.
Working it out, step by step
Understand the question
To build on something means to add to it. So this asks what the table adds to what the passage already tells you. Don’t just describe what is in the table. Ask what a reader learns from it after finishing the passage.
Read the table’s two parts
The table has two parts, “Earliest Speed Records” and “Current Speed Records.” These rows matter most:
Year Swimmer Time 1875 Matthew Webb 21 hours, 45 minutes 1926 Gertrude Ederle 14 hours, 31 minutes 2012 Trent Grimsey 6 hours, 55 minutes Compare the times
Ederle swam for 14 hours and 31 minutes. Half of her time would be about 7 hours and 15 minutes. Grimsey’s 2012 time, 6 hours and 55 minutes, is even faster than that. So people kept swimming the channel after 1926, and the record got much faster.
See what the passage leaves out
The passage does mention one record. In paragraph 1, Ederle “broke the men’s record by two hours.” But the passage stops in 1926. It never tells of any record set after her swim. The table adds that later part of the story: swimmers kept crossing, and the record kept falling.
Check each choice
- A fits: people kept crossing and “significantly improved the speed record,” and significantly means by a lot.
- B is wrong because nothing links any later woman to Ederle, and the table lists only one later woman.
- C is wrong because Ederle is the only woman of her time in the table, and Hlavacova swam 80 years later, in 2006.
- D is wrong because it only names what the table holds, not what the comparison adds to Ederle’s story.
Watch out: D uses the table’s own headings, so it sounds right. But the question asks what the table adds, not how it is laid out.
Choose the answer
The table carries the story past 1926 and shows the record falling far below Ederle’s time. So the answer is A.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D comes closest, because the table really does set the earliest and current records side by side. But D stops at describing the table. A says what that comparison shows a reader who has finished the passage: the record kept falling, from Ederle’s 14 hours and 31 minutes to under 7 hours.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 92 of 120
2024 Test A English, question 38Passage 5 Reasons Physical Books Might Be Better Than E-Books
5 Reasons Physical Books Might Be Better Than E-Books
by Shaunacy Ferro
Though e-book1 readers have become a more common sight around town, traditional books still have their evangelists.2 According to The New York Times, e-book sales have been falling in 2015. Print definitely isn’t dead. In fact, according to some research, it may actually be a better choice for some readers. While scientists are still trying to tease out exactly how digital reading affects us differently, here are five ways e-books might be inferior to their dead-tree cousins.
E-books can reduce reading comprehension.
In a study of middle schoolers, West Chester University researchers found that students who read on iPads3 had lower reading comprehension than when they read traditional printed books. They discovered that the kids sometimes skipped text in favor of interactive features in the e-books, suggesting that certain multimedia in children’s e-books can be detrimental to the practice of reading itself. However, the researchers noted that some interactive features in e-books are designed to enhance comprehension, and that those might be more helpful than game-type interactive graphics.
Young kids can get distracted by e-books.
Similar results were found by a small study by the Joan Ganz Cooney Center that consisted of 32 kids reading e-books and print books with their parents. It found that “enhanced” e-books might be distracting. Kids who read enhanced e-books—ones with interactive, multimedia experiences—were more engaged with them physically, but in the end they remembered fewer narrative details than those who read print books or basic e-books.
You remember less about a book’s timeline.
Another study of adults also found that e-books can be hard to absorb. The researchers asked 25 people to read a 28-page story on a Kindle4 and 25 to read the story in paperback, then asked the readers to put 14 events from the story in chronological order. Those who read the story on a Kindle performed worse on the chronology test than the book readers, though they performed about the same as print readers in other tests. Earlier research by the same scholars, from Stavanger University in Norway, found that Norwegian 10th graders also remembered more about texts if they read them in print rather than on a computer screen.
They’re not great as textbooks.
While e-book textbooks are often cheaper (and easier to carry) than traditional door-stop5 textbooks, college students often don’t prefer them. In some surveys of college kids, the majority of students have reported preferring print books. However, a 2012 study from the UK’s National Literacy Trust of kids ages 8 to 16 found that more than 50 percent of children reported preferring screen reading.
They’re tiring.
Staring at a lit screen can be tiring for the eyes and the brain. A 2005 study from Sweden found that reading digitally required a higher cognitive workload than reading on paper. Furthermore, staring at LED6 screens at night can disrupt sleep patterns. A 2014 Harvard study found that people who used e-readers with LED screens at night slept worse and were more tired the next day. So, if you’re going to go for an e-book, go for one without the backlight.
The take-away message? If you’re really trying to absorb material, you might want to go for a physical book. And if you’re going to be up all night studying, turn off the backlight.
However, all this may not mean that reading on a Kindle is really going to melt your brain. For instance, reading an e-book on a computer is a much different experience than reading on a Kindle, which is specifically designed for consuming books. So, too, is playing with an interactive e-book on an iPad, compared to using a simpler e-book device that only presents the text, with no opportunities to click away into digital distractions.
And some studies have found that part of the difference between the way people absorb information from e-books versus paper might be due to approaching e-books differently—in one test, participants didn’t regulate their study time with digital books like they did with paper texts, leading to worse performances. It’s possible that our expectations of e-book reading—as well as the different designs of the digital reading experience on a computer or iPad or Kindle—might affect how we approach the text and how much effort we put into studying them. As generations of e-book readers evolve, and people become more accustomed to the idea of sitting down with a digital textbook, these factors could change—for better or for worse.
“5 Reasons Physical Books Might Be Better Than E-Books” by Shaunacy Ferro from MENTAL FLOSS, October 2, 2015. Copyright © 2015 Mental Floss, Inc.
1e-book: an electronic book, a publication made available digitally for reading on a computer or other device
2evangelists: advocates or supporters
3iPads: tablet computers
4Kindle: device for reading e-books
5door-stop: a reference to the idea that some textbooks are large and heavy enough to hold a door open
6LED: Light-emitting diode; LEDs are often used as a backlight for electronic devices such as smart phones and tablets.
Question
How does paragraph 7 fit into the overall structure of the passage?
- AIt indicates where the author changes the purpose of the writing.
- BIt introduces the author’s opinion on the issue.
- CIt signals a shift in the position of the author.
- DIt begins the author’s commentary on the preceding information.
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The question asks for an explanation of the role of paragraph 7 in the overall structure of the passage.
A. Incorrect. The purpose of paragraphs 2–6 is to present reasons physical books might be better than e-books, and paragraph 7 offers summarizing “take-away” advice based on those reasons. As a result, it may seem as though the author’s purpose for writing the entire passage has shifted. However, the author’s advice in paragraph 7, that readers who want to learn from reading “might want to go for a physical book,” makes it clear that paragraph 7, like paragraphs 2–6, continues to serve the same purpose for the passage that the writer expresses in paragraph 1: to inform readers that printed books “may actually be a better choice for some readers” than e-books.
B. Incorrect. In paragraph 7, the author does offer the advice that readers who want to absorb material “might want to go for a physical book” rather than an e-book. Even though the author makes the statement favoring physical books for those who want to learn from their reading, the author is not sharing a personal opinion. Instead, the author offers the advice as a summary of the information presented in paragraphs 2–6, which explore various studies about the advantages of physical books over e-books. Furthermore, the idea that physical books are sometimes a better option is not introduced for the first time in paragraph 7. Instead, it is introduced early in the passage, when the author states in paragraph 1 that physical books “may actually be a better choice for some readers.”
C. Incorrect. Paragraph 7 presents a clear shift in style and content from paragraphs 2–6. Paragraphs 2–6 are each preceded by a heading stating a reason physical books might be a better choice than e-books, and each paragraph provides research evidence. Paragraph 7 shifts to stating a “take-away message”—the author’s advice—which is based on the reasons in paragraphs 2–6. Paragraph 7’s different style and content do not, however, signal a change in the author’s position. Instead, the author’s advice in paragraph 7 (“if you’re really trying to absorb material, you might want to go for a physical book”) actually reinforces the position first introduced in paragraph 1 that physical books “may actually be a better choice for some readers.”
D. CORRECT. The author uses paragraphs 2–6 to present “five ways e-books might be inferior” (paragraph 1) to physical books. Each of paragraphs 2–6 presents one reason for the inferiority of e-books, based on a scientific study. Paragraph 7 indicates a shift because it describes neither a reason e-books might be inferior nor a scientific study. Instead, it presents personal commentary: the “take-away,” or conclusion, the author draws from the studies and evidence presented in paragraphs 2–6. That commentary consists of the author’s own practical advice to readers who want to retain information that they read (“you might want to go for a physical book”) and to those who are “going to be up all night studying” (“turn off the backlight”).
Question analysis
This text-structure question asks how paragraph 7, a two-sentence paragraph that follows the five research sections, fits into the overall structure of an article arguing that printed books might be better than e-books. Students must compare it with the opening claim and the paragraphs around it, and the four choices use similar abstract wording about the author's purpose, opinion and position.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students analyze how sections contribute to a text, but here all four choices are abstract statements about the author's purpose and position, and telling them apart means tracking the argument from the first paragraph to the last.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer major
- How, not what moderate
- Evidence in several places minor
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 10, 829 words; question and choices: about grade 8, 49 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
All four choices are abstract claims about the author's purpose and position, so none can be checked against a single sentence. Paragraph 7 does feel like a turn, from studies to advice, which makes the choices about a changed purpose or position tempting, but the advice repeats the view the first paragraph set out. The real hedge comes one paragraph later, and the closest call is whether paragraph 7 introduces a view or comments on evidence already given.
A very close wrong answer major Choosing the answer
The right choice and the one saying paragraph 7 introduces the author's opinion both find the author's own voice there; they part on whether that view is new, and paragraph 1 already said print “may actually be a better choice”. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
How, not what moderate Working it out
The question asks what paragraph 7 does in the article, a short take-away after five research sections, so its advice about physical books and backlights matters only for its role. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Evidence in several places minor Working it out
Judging the claims of a shift or a change needs both ends of the article, the stance of paragraph 1 and the “However” that opens paragraph 8. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: Compare what paragraph 7 does with what paragraphs 1–6 do: where was the author's view first stated, and what is new in paragraph 7? Then match that role to a choice.
Traps
- Wrong part of the text: A choice is true of another paragraph, stanza or speaker than the one asked about.
- Wrong purpose or structure: Names a purpose, structure or effect that the part does not serve, or describes what a part says when the question asks what it does.
The wrong answers, classified
A Wrong purpose or structure (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Notices the move from research findings to practical advice and calls it a new purpose, but the advice serves the aim stated in paragraph 1, showing print may be better.
B Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Rightly hears the author's own voice in the take-away, but introducing that view is what paragraph 1 does; paragraph 7 restates it as advice drawn from the studies.
C Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Places the article's hedge too early: the author softens the stance only in paragraph 8, “all this may not mean”, while paragraph 7's advice keeps the same position.
Working it out, step by step
Know what the question asks
This asks about the structure of the passage, which means how its parts fit together. You need to name the job paragraph 7 does compared with the paragraphs around it.
Map the passage first
Paragraph 1 states the author’s view: print “may actually be a better choice for some readers.” Paragraphs 2 through 6 each sit under a bold heading. Each one reports research on one way e-books might be worse than print.
Read paragraph 7
It begins, “The take-away message?” A take-away is the lesson you carry away. Then the author advises, “If you’re really trying to absorb material, you might want to go for a physical book.” The author also says to “turn off the backlight” when studying late. Both tips come from the studies just before. So paragraph 7 is the author commenting on that evidence.
Check each choice
- D fits: it “begins the author’s commentary on the preceding information,” and preceding means coming before.
- A is wrong because the purpose doesn’t change, since the advice still shows print may be better.
- B is wrong because the author’s opinion first appears in paragraph 1, not paragraph 7.
- C is wrong because the author softens the view only later, in paragraph 8, with “all this may not mean.”
Watch out: B is tempting because paragraph 7 really is the author’s own voice. But it is not the first time you hear it.
Choose the answer
Paragraph 7 turns the research in the five sections into advice, which is commentary on what came before. So the answer is D.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B comes closest, since paragraph 7 really is the author speaking. But the author’s view already appeared in paragraph 1. Paragraph 7 doesn’t introduce it. It sums up the research before it and turns that research into advice. That is commentary on the preceding information, as D says.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “5 Reasons Physical Books Might Be Better Than E-Books” as printed (pages 58–59)


Question 93 of 120
2024 Test A English, question 49Passage Excerpt from The Highest Tide
Excerpt from The Highest Tide
by Jim Lynch
The narrator’s summer job is collecting marine specimens in Puget Sound, Washington. In this excerpt, he is looking for specimens in the mudflats before daybreak. Mudflats, or flats, are coastal landforms created when sediment and silt from tides are deposited as the tides recede.
I rounded the oyster beds, to the far side. . . . It was low tide by then, and I saw the water hesitating at its apex, neither leaving nor returning, patiently waiting for the gravitational gears to shift. Dozens of anxious clams started squirting in unison like they did whenever vibrating grains of sand warned them predators were approaching. I stopped and waited with them, to actually see the moment when the tide started returning with its invisible buffet of plankton for the clams, oysters, mussels and other filter feeders. It was right then, ankle deep in the Sound, feet numbing, eyes relaxed, that I saw the nudibranch.1
In all my time on the flats I’d never seen one before. I’d read about them, sure. I’d handled them at aquariums but never in the wild, and I’d never even seen a photo of one this stunning. It was just three inches long but with dozens of fluorescent, orange-tipped hornlike plumes jutting from the back of its see-through body that appeared to be lit from within.
Nudibranchs are often called the butterflies of the sea, but even that understates their dazzle. Almost everything else in the northern Pacific is dressed to blend with pale surroundings. Nudibranchs don’t bother, in part because they taste so lousy they don’t need camouflage to survive. But also, I decided right then, because their beauty is so startling it earns them a free pass, the same way everyday life brakes for peacocks, parade floats. . . .
The dark mudflats loomed like wet, flattened dunes stretching deep into Skookumchuck Bay in front of our house. From a distance, they looked too barren to support sea life. Up close, they still did, unless you knew where to find the hearty clams, worms and tiny creatures that flourish in mud. . . . I’m not sure why I decided to take a look. It was still an hour before sunrise, and I knew exactly what the bars2 looked like in the moonlight, but for some reason, I couldn’t resist.
I heard it long before I saw it. It was an exhale, a release of sorts, and I instantly wondered if a whale was stranded again. We had a young minke3 stuck out there two summers prior, and it made similar noises until the tide rose high enough for rescuers to help free it. . . . I looked for a hulking silhouette but couldn’t find one. I waited, but there were no more sounds. Still, I went toward what I thought I’d heard, avoiding stepping into the mud until I had to. I knew the flats well enough to know I could get stuck just about anywhere. The general rule was you didn’t venture out past the shells and gravel with an incoming tide. I sank up to my knees twice, and numbing water filled my boots.
. . . I kept stepping toward the one sound I’d heard, a growing part of me hoping I’d find nothing at all. When I stopped to rest and yank up my socks, my headlamp crossed it. My first thought? A giant octopus.
Puget Sound has some of the biggest octopi in the world. They often balloon to a hundred pounds. Even the great Jacques Cousteau4 himself came to study them. But when I saw the long tubular shape of its upper body and the tangle of tentacles below it, I knew it was more than an octopus. I came closer, within fifty feet, close enough to see its large cylindrical siphon5 quiver. I couldn’t tell if it was making any sounds at that point, because it was impossible to hear anything over the blood in my ears. . . .
The creature’s body came to a triangular point above narrow fins that lay flat on the mud like wings, but it was hard to be sure exactly where it all began or ended, or how long its tentacles truly were, because I was afraid to pry my eyes off its jumble of arms for more than half a second. I didn’t know whether I was within reach, and its arms were as big around as my ankle and lined with suckers the size of half-dollars. If they even twitched I would have run. So, I was looking at it and not looking at it while my heart spangled my vision. I saw fragments, pieces, and tried to fuse them in my mind but couldn’t be certain of the whole. I knew what it had to be, but I wouldn’t allow myself to even think the two words. Then I gradually realized the dark shiny disc in the middle of the rubbery mass was too perfectly round to be mud or a reflection.
It was too late to smother my scream. Its eye was the size of a hubcap.6
From THE HIGHEST TIDE by Jim Lynch. Copyright © 2005 by Jim Lynch. Used by permission of Bloomsbury USA. All rights reserved.
1nudibranch: type of sea slug
2bars: sandbars
3minke: species of small whale
4Jacques Cousteau: renowned French oceanographer
5siphon: tube-like organ that is used for drawing in or removing fluids
6hubcap: removable cap over the end of a wheel axle
Question
Read these sentences from paragraph 8.
So, I was looking at it and not looking at it while my heart spangled my vision. I saw fragments, pieces, and tried to fuse them in my mind but couldn’t be certain of the whole.
The sensory language “spangled my vision,” “I saw fragments, pieces,” and “tried to fuse them in my mind” conveys the narrator’s
- Aextreme excitement about making a great discovery.
- Breluctant acceptance that he needs to leave the mudflats.
- Cterrified confusion about the creature in the mudflats.
- Dsudden concern about his personal safety.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks what the sensory language in the sentences from paragraph 8 conveys about the narrator.
A. Incorrect. While the narrator does not leave the mudflats and is curious about what has been found, the main emotions described in paragraph 8 are fear and confusion as the narrator tries to comprehend the size of the animal.
B. Incorrect. The language focuses on the narrator’s inability to organize what he sees into useful thoughts and conclusions, and while the narrator feels fear in paragraph 8—“I was afraid” and “I would have run”—the narrator refuses to leave the mudflats out of curiosity.
C. CORRECT. The phrase “spangled my vision” illustrates that the narrator cannot fully recognize what has appeared on the mudflats. The sight is so amazing, the narrator is trying to “fuse” together “fragments” and “pieces” because seeing the creature has created so much emotion in the narrator that he feels confused.
D. Incorrect. While the narrator is feeling some fear, as expressed in paragraph 8, the phrases actually indicate that the narrator’s amazement causes him to struggle to take in the view of the creature before him.
Question analysis
This question about sensory language asks what three phrases, including “spangled my vision,” convey about the narrator as he stares at a huge creature in the mud in an excerpt from The Highest Tide. Students must interpret unusual imagery and choose among emotions that all seem possible at such a startling moment.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Interpreting sensory language for a character's state of mind is grade 7 work, but spangled is an unusual verb, and the paragraph partly supports several of the emotions offered, so the choice must be matched precisely to the quoted phrases.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Figurative or literary language major
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Hard words minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 6, 902 words; question and choices: about grade 7, 92 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The quoted phrases are about perception, not feeling: the narrator sees fragments and cannot assemble them, while his heart pounds hard enough to blur his sight. The fear is clear from the surrounding sentences, where he is afraid to look away and ready to run, and that context makes the choice about personal safety very tempting. The answer must cover both the terror and the confusion, and the word “spangled” can mislead readers into hearing excitement.
Figurative or literary language major Understanding the question
The phrases describe seeing in pieces, “looking at it and not looking at it”, a heart that “spangled” his vision, “fragments” he cannot “fuse”, and the emotion has to be read from that broken sight. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The right choice and the one about concern for his safety both name fear; they part on what the quoted phrases show, a mind unable to piece the creature together or a worry about its reach. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Hard words minor Understanding the question
“Spangled”, to scatter with glittering spots, is a rare word, and its sparkle can suggest delight, which opens a reading of excitement to students who miss the fear around it. (Perfetti, 2007; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Strategy: Ask what the three quoted phrases together say about how the narrator is seeing and thinking at this moment, then choose the emotion that accounts for all three, not just one.
Traps
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
- Wrong tone or attitude: Misjudges the tone, attitude or point of view, such as reading admiration as criticism, or taking a character's or subject's feelings for the author's.
The wrong answers, classified
A Wrong tone or attitude (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Reads the pounding heart and glittering vision as the thrill of a great find, missing that he is afraid to take his eyes off the creature and cannot make sense of it.
B Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Turns “If they even twitched I would have run”, a possibility, into an accepted need to leave, though the narrator stays and the phrases describe how he sees.
D True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Matches the fear in paragraph 8, where he wonders whether he is within reach, but the quoted phrases describe broken seeing and puzzling, and his fear has been building, not sudden.
Working it out, step by step
Know what the question asks
Sensory language describes what a character sees, hears or feels. This asks what feeling the three quoted phrases show. Your answer must explain all three phrases, not just one.
Explain the hard words
To spangle means to cover with glittering spots. His heart pounds so hard that his sight seems to sparkle and blur. Fragments are small broken pieces. To fuse means to join together.
Put the phrases together
He sees only “fragments, pieces.” He tries “to fuse them in my mind” but “couldn’t be certain of the whole.” So he is confused, unable to tell what the creature really is. The sentences around them show he is also terrified. He is “afraid to pry my eyes off” its arms, and his heart is racing.
Check each choice
- C fits: “terrified confusion” covers both his fear and his broken, puzzled seeing.
- A is wrong because “spangled” may sound happy, but he is frightened, not thrilled.
- B is wrong because he never decides to leave, and he would run only if the arms moved.
- D is wrong because the phrases show confused seeing, and his fear has been growing since paragraph 6.
Watch out: D is close, since he is afraid. But it leaves out the confusion the phrases show.
Choose the answer
The phrases show a frightened narrator who cannot piece together what he sees. So the answer is C.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D comes closest, because the narrator truly fears for his safety. But the quoted phrases are about how he sees: in pieces he can’t join. That is confusion. C names both the fear and the confusion, so it fits all three phrases.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Excerpt from The Highest Tide” as printed (pages 64–65)


Question 94 of 120
2024 Test A English, question 53Passage Excerpt from “It’s Time to Stop Thinking That All Non-Native Species Are Evil”
Excerpt from “It’s Time to Stop Thinking That All Non-Native Species Are Evil”
by Emma Marris
The author of this opinion article attended a symposium, or conference, in Missoula, Montana, at which biologists and other scientists discussed species of plants and animals that are not native to the areas in which they live.
Invasive species are scary. It was ecologist Charles Elton, back in the 1950s, who introduced the militaristic “invasion” metaphor to describe exotic plants and animals—but there’s no question some can be extremely destructive.
The brown tree snake has eaten a dozen kinds of forest birds in Guam to extinction; zebra mussels clog pipes around the Great Lakes; the common house cat turns out to be, in Australia, a mercilessly effective killer of cute, fluffy marsupials like the bilby and the numbat.
As scientists have sounded the alarm about these pests, the public has gotten the message. Citizen groups rip out non-native plants. Native gardens have become increasingly popular, both as ways to celebrate the unique flora of each region and as tiny hot spots of diversity. Native trees provide food for native bugs, which feed native birds. Food chains developed over thousands of years of co-evolution unfold in our backyards. . . .
So we’ve learned, scientists and laypeople alike, that native species are good and non-natives are bad.
Julian Olden, a biologist at the University of Washington, Seattle, who co-organized the symposium, recently polled nearly 2,000 ecologists. Among his findings: a substantial number of them said they would immediately eradicate a hypothetical non-native forest plant, even if it were shown to have no effect on the forest. Olden calls this the “guilty even when proven innocent” approach.
That kind of approach is not very useful on a rapidly changing planet.
Exotics Are Everywhere
Climate change is making it harder even to decide who the invaders are.
How, scientists at the symposium wondered, do you define “native” on a warming planet, when plants and animals are already moving toward the poles or up mountainsides in search of climate conditions they can tolerate? Should we consider them “invasive” in their new homes? Regardless of what we label them, conservationists will be reluctant to remove them from their new environs—to do so would stymie1 their chances of adapting to the warmer future we’re creating.
And then there are the non-natives that we actually like. Most domestic crops are exotic in most of the places they’re grown, but there are even wild exotics that “do good,” forming useful relationships with native species.
Edwin Grosholz of the University of California, Davis, told the recent symposium about one such relationship. On beaches in his state, non-native spartina grass has become important habitat for the endangered California clapper rail, a plump shorebird with a downward curving bill more at home on land than in the air. A project to rip out and poison the spartina—which grows in dense swaths that exclude many other shorebirds—saw clapper rail numbers go tumbling downward.
There are other examples like that. The endangered southwestern willow flycatcher nests in “invasive” tamarisk shrubs. Many native (and beautiful) Hawaiian flowers are now pollinated by the Japanese white-eye bird—because the native pollinators have been driven extinct by other non-native species.
Should we impose further risk on already endangered natives by severing these relationships? Or should we admire the resilience of nature and let such “well-behaved” exotics stay? . . .
Leave them alone, more and more conservationists are arguing, and stop focusing obsessively on categorizing species as native or non-native. Mark Davis, an ecologist at Macalester College in St. Paul, Minnesota, once considered himself an “invasion biologist”—but not anymore. “I am actively trying to get the field to retire the invader narrative,” he said in Missoula.
A Good Thing, Not the Only Thing
After all, nativeness is just one environmental value, and arguably not as important as preventing extinctions and preserving biodiversity. In some cases we can best serve biodiversity by leaving the non-natives alone or even—brace yourself, now—introducing them on purpose.
This is the thinking behind, for example, installing the Aldabra tortoise on the islands of Mauritius. The islands lost their own large tortoises, and the fruiting plants that formerly had their seeds moved around by these fruit-loving reptiles have been on the decline. A tortoise that’s related to the island’s large tortoises—a non-native from the Seychelles in the Indian Ocean that was intentionally introduced in 2004—is now handling some of that work.
Most of the time, for the time being, conserving species still means focusing on supporting them in their historical habitats, planting natives and removing non-natives. We can and should do that in places where it is feasible and important to us.
From “It’s Time to Stop Thinking That All Non-Native Species Are Evil” by Emma Marris from NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE, July 24, 2014. Copyright © 2014 by National Geographic Society.

1stymie: hinder or interfere with
Question
The author’s use of cause and effect in paragraphs 10–11 mainly emphasizes the idea that
- Asome non-native species have helped their environments while others have had harmful impacts.
- Battempts to remove non-native species have seldom produced desired results.
- Csome endangered native species have flourished because of the presence of non-native species.
- Dinteractions between endangered native species and non-native species must be carefully monitored.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks what the author’s use of cause and effect in paragraphs 10–11 mainly emphasizes.
A. Incorrect. The examples of cause and effect discussed in paragraphs 10–11, such as the spartina grass helping the clapper rail and the Japanese white-eye bird pollinating Hawaiian flowers, are all instances in which non-native species have helped their new environments.
B. Incorrect. While paragraph 10 does mention that efforts to eradicate the non-native spartina grass hurt the native clapper rail shorebird, the main emphasis in both paragraphs 10–11 is on the fact that certain non-native species have helped native species.
C. CORRECT. Paragraphs 10–11 focus on several examples of non-native species that have helped endangered native species flourish: non-native spartina grass providing “important habitat for the endangered California clapper rail” (paragraph 10), non-native tamarisk shrubs providing nesting places for the endangered southwestern willow flycatcher (paragraph 11), and the non-native Japanese white-eye bird pollinating Hawaiian flowers (paragraph 11).
D. Incorrect. While paragraphs 10–11 describe several interactions between non-native and native species, they never discuss monitoring these interactions.
Question analysis
This text-structure question asks what the cause-and-effect examples in two paragraphs of an article about non-native species mainly emphasize. The paragraphs describe a shorebird, a flycatcher and Hawaiian flowers, and students must decide what the examples have in common rather than fixing on any one of them.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Analyzing what a cause-and-effect structure emphasizes is grade 7 work, but these examples involve unfamiliar species and endangered status, and more than one choice is partly supported by the paragraphs, which raises the demand above typical.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer major
- Reading between the lines moderate
- An unfamiliar subject minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 815 words; question and choices: about grade 11, 62 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The paragraphs mention harm as well as help, so a balanced statement about both looks accurate and even fair-minded. What the cause-and-effect pairs stress, though, is endangered natives depending on non-natives, and the right answer captures that while overstating it, since a bird whose numbers held up only with spartina's help can hardly be said to have flourished. Students must prefer the statement of the main emphasis to one that is partly supported but off the point.
A very close wrong answer major Choosing the answer
The right choice and the help-and-harm choice both say non-natives have aided their surroundings; they part on harm, which the paragraphs do mention, spartina crowding out shorebirds and other non-natives killing Hawaii's pollinators, but only in passing. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
Paragraph 10 states its cause and effect backwards, removing spartina sent clapper rail numbers “tumbling downward”, and the student must turn that around into the grass's presence helping the bird. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
An unfamiliar subject minor Understanding the question
Five unfamiliar species crowd two paragraphs, spartina grass, the California clapper rail, tamarisk shrubs, the southwestern willow flycatcher and the Japanese white-eye, and each one's role must be kept straight. (Recht & Leslie, 1988; Kintsch, 1998)
Strategy: List each cause-and-effect pair in paragraphs 10 and 11, the species involved and what happened to them, then pick the statement that holds for the examples taken together.
Traps
- Too narrow: A single detail offered as the central idea or a summary, or a summary that keeps minor details and leaves out an essential part.
- Too broad or too strong: A choice overstates, generalizes, or uses absolute words the text does not support.
- Outside knowledge: A choice is plausible in the real world but not supported by this text.
The wrong answers, classified
A Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Accurately notes helpful and harmful non-natives, but the harm is mentioned only in passing, and it leaves out what every example stresses, endangered natives depending on non-natives.
B Too broad or too strong (King et al., 2004)
Generalizes from the single spartina project in paragraph 10 to removal attempts in general, a “seldom” claim that neither paragraph makes.
D Outside knowledge (King et al., 2004; Recht & Leslie, 1988)
Adds a sensible-sounding call for careful monitoring, the kind of advice scientists often give, but neither paragraph says anything about watching over these relationships.
Working it out, step by step
Know what the question asks
In a cause-and-effect pattern, one thing makes another happen. You need the main idea that the causes and effects in paragraphs 10 and 11 stress. Start by listing each pair.
List each cause and effect
- Paragraph 10: non-native spartina grass gives the endangered clapper rail a home, so when people ripped out the grass, clapper rail numbers went “tumbling downward.”
- Paragraph 11: the endangered willow flycatcher nests in non-native tamarisk shrubs.
- Paragraph 11: native Hawaiian flowers are now pollinated by a non-native bird, the Japanese white-eye.
Find the common thread
Endangered means at risk of dying out. Pollinated means a bird or bug carries pollen between flowers so they can make seeds. In every pair, a native species depends on a non-native one. The newcomer gives it a home, a place to nest or a pollinator. Two of the natives, the clapper rail and the flycatcher, are endangered. So the paragraphs stress that some endangered natives do better because non-natives are there.
Check each choice
- C fits: some endangered natives have “flourished,” or done well, because non-natives are present.
- A is wrong because harm comes up only in passing, while every example stresses a native getting help.
- B is wrong because one removal project is not enough to say removal “seldom” works.
- D is wrong because the paragraphs never mention monitoring, or watching over, these relationships.
Watch out: The paragraphs do mention harm. Spartina crowds out some other shorebirds, and other non-natives wiped out Hawaii’s native pollinators. So A sounds balanced, but it misses the main point.
Choose the answer
The causes and effects show struggling natives, two of them endangered, helped by non-natives. So the answer is C.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A comes closest, because the paragraphs mention harm as well as help. But the harm is only a side note. Every cause and effect shows a native relying on a non-native, and two of those natives are endangered birds. C names that main point, even though “flourished” is a strong word for birds that are still endangered.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Excerpt from “It’s Time to Stop Thinking That All Non-Native Species Are Evil”” as printed (pages 68–70)



Question 95 of 120
2024 Test A English, question 54Uses the passage above: “Excerpt from “It’s Time to Stop Thinking That All Non-Native Species Are Evil””.
Question
Which sentence from the excerpt supports the idea that some species are able to adjust to change?
- A“Native gardens have become increasingly popular, both as ways to celebrate the unique flora of each region and as tiny hot spots of diversity.” (paragraph 3)
- B“Many native (and beautiful) Hawaiian flowers are now pollinated by the Japanese white-eye bird—because the native pollinators have been driven extinct by other non-native species.” (paragraph 11)
- C“After all, nativeness is just one environmental value, and arguably not as important as preventing extinctions and preserving biodiversity.” (paragraph 14)
- D“The islands lost their own large tortoises, and the fruiting plants that formerly had their seeds moved around by these fruit-loving reptiles have been on the decline.” (paragraph 15)
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks which sentence from the excerpt supports the idea that some species are able to adjust to change.
A. Incorrect. This sentence discusses native gardens, featuring native species, which presumably have no need to adjust to change.
B. CORRECT. This sentence demonstrates that some species—in this case, Hawaiian flowers—have adapted well to change: the flowers thrive thanks to new pollinators.
C. Incorrect. This sentence focuses on the importance of “preventing extinctions and preserving biodiversity” but does not address the fact that being able to adjust to change is one thing that helps achieve those goals.
D. Incorrect. Far from demonstrating that some species can adjust to change, this sentence discusses species that were not adjusting to the loss of large tortoises and were therefore “on the decline.”
Question analysis
Using an article that argues not every non-native species is harmful, this evidence question asks students to pick the sentence showing that some species are able to adjust to change. Students must decide what adjusting to change would look like in nature, then find a quotation that actually shows a species doing it.
- NYS standards
- 7R1 textual evidence and inferences
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Selecting a sentence that supports an idea is typical grade 7 evidence work. The quotations are labeled, but the idea is stated generally and must be recognized inside a specific ecological example, a small inference that keeps the item at grade level.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- Reading between the lines moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from one sentence or line
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 815 words; question and choices: about grade 14, 117 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The idea is general and every choice is specific, so the student must recognize adjustment inside an ecological example. The Mauritius sentence is the trap: the paragraph it comes from ends with a new tortoise taking over, which is adjustment, but the quoted sentence stops at the decline. Judging only the words quoted, and asking whether a species carried on after a change, separates the two.
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
The right sentence never says “adjust”; Hawaiian flowers now pollinated by a newcomer after their native pollinators died out must be recognized as species coping with a change. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The Hawaiian sentence and the Mauritius sentence both describe plants losing the animals that served them; they part on the outcome, a new pollinator or a decline. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: For each quotation, ask whether a species faces a change and whether the sentence shows it carrying on successfully; judge only the words quoted.
Traps
- Supports only part of the claim: In a question about evidence: a line that backs one half of the claim but not the other, or a related point rather than the claim itself.
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
The wrong answers, classified
A True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Picks the popularity of native gardens, which is about what people plant and celebrate, not about any species coping with a change in its world.
C True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Chooses the author's ranking of nativeness below preventing extinctions, a statement of values that shows no species adapting to anything.
D Supports only part of the claim (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Remembers that a new tortoise later took over seed-spreading on Mauritius, but the quoted sentence shows only the change, plants declining after their tortoises vanished, not any adjustment.
Working it out, step by step
Know what the question asks
To adjust to change means to keep going when something important in your world changes. You need a sentence that shows a species facing a change and carrying on. Judge only the words in each quoted sentence.
Look for a change
Choice B says the native pollinators of some Hawaiian flowers “have been driven extinct.” Extinct means gone forever. Pollinators are animals that carry pollen between flowers so the plants can make seeds. Losing them is a huge change for the flowers.
Look for the adjustment
The same sentence says the flowers “are now pollinated by the Japanese white-eye bird.” A new bird does the job the old pollinators used to do. So the flowers carried on after the change. That is adjusting.
Check each choice
- B fits: the flowers lost their pollinators and gained a new one.
- A is wrong because native gardens are about what people like to plant, and no species adjusts to anything.
- C is wrong because it states the author’s values and shows no species at all.
- D is wrong because the plants “have been on the decline,” which means they are getting fewer, not adjusting.
Watch out: Later in paragraph 15, a new tortoise takes over some of the lost tortoises’ work. But the sentence in D stops at the decline.
Choose the answer
Only B shows a species carrying on after a big change. So the answer is B.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D comes closest, because it also shows plants losing the animals that helped them. But D’s sentence ends with the plants in decline. B’s sentence goes further: a new bird now does the work, so the flowers carry on. That is a species adjusting to change.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 96 of 120
2024 Test A English, question 57Uses the passage above: “Excerpt from “It’s Time to Stop Thinking That All Non-Native Species Are Evil””.
Question
How does the chart provide additional support for a central idea of the excerpt?
- Aby implying that the public becomes aware of non-native species only after removal is impossible
- Bby showing that the complete removal of non-native species is usually not achievable after a certain period of time
- Cby demonstrating why non-native species can be destructive if they are not removed from an area immediately
- Dby explaining how some conservation groups have approached the removal of non-native species
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks how the chart provides additional support for a central idea of the excerpt.
A. Incorrect. The chart indicates that the public tends to become aware of non-native species once eradication is “unlikely or impossible,” not strictly impossible. Furthermore, this idea is not a central idea of the excerpt.
B. CORRECT. The chart strongly suggests that once “rapid increase in populations” of non-native species has occurred, eradication will be “unlikely or impossible.”
C. Incorrect. While the chart does show that non-native species can eventually be impossible to eradicate, it never addresses the issue of how the non-native species might be destructive to their new environments.
D. Incorrect. The chart shows how non-native species become harder and harder to remove as their population grows but does not explain how any conservation groups have approached their removal.
Question analysis
This question asks how a chart titled “Possible Management of Non-Native Species, Based on Extent of Invasion” supports a central idea of an article arguing that not all non-native species are harmful. Students must read the chart's stages, labels and curve, then decide which statement the chart actually shows and which also fits the article's argument.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Grade 7 students connect graphics to a text, but this chart packs four stages, two arrows, a curve and several labels into one figure, and its pattern must be linked to an argument made in words, demanding but within upper grade 7.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Reading a figure, table or graph moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Combines ideas minor
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 815 words; question and choices: about grade 12, 78 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The chart is easy to read in outline, simple management on the left and costly, likely failed eradication on the right, and the right choice restates that contrast. The pull comes from the “Public awareness begins” marker, placed at the border of the stage where eradication is no longer feasible, which makes a statement about public awareness look like a faithful reading. It is nearly faithful, but it describes one marker, not a central idea the article develops.
Reading a figure, table or graph moderate Understanding the question
The chart packs four shaded stages, two arrows, an S-shaped curve and three markers into one figure, and its message lies in the arrows: eradication “likely” early, “unlikely or impossible” later. (Lesh, Post & Behr, 1987; Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The right choice and the public-awareness choice both read the late stages where removal fails; the awareness marker even sits on the border of “Eradication no longer feasible”, so only centrality separates them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Combines ideas minor Working it out
The chart's pattern has to be matched to the article's argument that nativeness is one value among several and that removal makes sense only where “feasible and important to us”. (Embretson, 1998; Daniel & Embretson, 2010)
Strategy: Read the chart's title, axes and stage labels, say in one sentence what it shows happening over time, then ask which part of the article's argument that pattern supports.
Traps
- Too narrow: A single detail offered as the central idea or a summary, or a summary that keeps minor details and leaves out an essential part.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Wrong part of the text: A choice is true of another paragraph, stanza or speaker than the one asked about.
The wrong answers, classified
A Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Reads the “Public awareness begins” marker, which sits where eradication becomes unlikely or impossible, as the chart's point, though it is one label and public awareness is not a central idea.
C Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Takes the rising curve of area affected as proof of damage, but the chart tracks spread and the difficulty of removal, never harm, and the article questions removing non-natives on reflex.
D Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Credits the chart with the citizen groups of paragraph 3 and the spartina project of paragraph 10, but it shows general stages of possible management, not any group's actual approach.
Working it out, step by step
Know what the question asks
This asks how the chart supports a central idea, a main point of the article. First read the chart and say in your own words what it shows. Then link that to the article’s argument.
Read the chart from left to right
Time moves from left to right. The curve shows how much area a non-native species covers. Eradication means wiping a species out completely. Early on, the arrow says management is “simple” and eradication is “likely.” Then the species spreads fast. From there on, management is “difficult and costly,” and eradication is “unlikely or impossible.” In the last stage it is “no longer feasible,” or no longer possible.
Link the chart to the article
The article argues that we shouldn’t treat every non-native species the same way. Paragraph 16 says we should remove non-natives “in places where it is feasible and important to us.” The chart shows when removal is possible: mostly early, before the species spreads. After that, wiping it out usually can’t be done.
Check each choice
- B fits: complete removal is usually not possible after a certain time, which is the chart’s main message.
- A is wrong because the “Public awareness begins” marker is one small label, and the article never discusses when the public notices.
- C is wrong because the chart shows how far a species spreads, not how much damage it does.
- D is wrong because the chart shows general stages, not what any real group has done.
Watch out: A reads the marker correctly, since it does sit late, where removal is already hard. But it picks a detail, not the chart’s main point.
Choose the answer
The chart shows that removal works only early, which backs up the article’s argument. So the answer is B.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A comes closest, since the chart does place “Public awareness begins” late, when removal is already hard. But that is one small marker, and the article never says when the public first notices a species. B states the chart’s main message, that removal works only early. That backs up the article’s point that removing non-natives isn’t always possible.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 97 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 6Question
Mr. Jones has 550 goats, which is 10% more than Mr. King has. How many more goats does Mr. Jones have than Mr. King?
- A50
- B55
- C495
- D500
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
First, set up a proportion to determine x, the number of goats Mr. King has.
Then solve the proportion for x.
Finally, determine the difference between the number of goats Mr. Jones has, 550, and the number of goats Mr. King has, 500.
Mr. Jones has 50 more goats than Mr. King.
Question analysis
A percent word problem: Mr. Jones has 550 goats, which is 10% more than Mr. King has, and students find how many more goats Mr. Jones has. It asks students to work with a percent increase when only the larger amount is known. The tricky part is deciding which amount the 10% is taken of.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students usually find a percent increase from a known original amount. This runs the task backward: the increased amount is given, and the original must be recovered before the difference can be found, a step many do not expect.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Turning words into math major
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 1, 22 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The arithmetic is one division and one subtraction, so the question is really about the base of a percent. The sentence gives the bigger number and calls it 10% more, and the reflex is to take 10% of the number on the page. That shortcut lands on a listed choice five goats from the answer. Students who find King's herd first, 550 ÷ 1.1, still have to remember that the question wants the difference, not the herd.
Turning words into math major Understanding the question
The clause "which is 10% more than" makes King's unknown herd the base of the 10%, so 550 is 110% of his number rather than the amount the 10% is taken of. (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; Koedinger & Nathan, 2004)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choices 50 and 55 are only 5 goats apart, and both are 10% of a herd; only taking the percent of King's 500 rather than of 550 separates them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Mr. Jones's 550 is 110% of Mr. King's number, so divide 550 by 1.10 to find Mr. King's goats, then subtract that from 550.
Traps
- Percent of the wrong amount: Finding the whole from a part, or a percent change measured from the wrong starting amount.
- Stops one step early: A choice is a number from partway through the solution.
The wrong answers, classified
B Percent of the wrong amount (Parker & Leinhardt, 1995)
Takes 10% of 550, measuring the increase from Jones's herd instead of from King's smaller herd, which is the amount the 10% is based on.
C Percent of the wrong amount (Parker & Leinhardt, 1995)
Takes 10% off 550 to get King's herd, 550 − 55 = 495, using the wrong base, then gives that herd instead of the difference.
D Stops one step early (King et al., 2004; Gierl et al., 2017)
Finds King's herd correctly, 550 ÷ 1.1 = 500, then stops there instead of subtracting it from 550 to get how many more.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Percent increase
- The original is the amount you start from, the one the percent is taken of. p is the percent of increase. The new amount is all of the original, which is 100%, plus p% more. For 10% more, you multiply by 1.10.
Sort out the question
Mr. Jones has 550 goats. That is “10% more than Mr. King has”. You need how many more goats Mr. Jones has than Mr. King. That is the difference between the two herds, not the size of a herd.
Decide what the 10% is of
The words “10% more than Mr. King” mean the 10% is a part of Mr. King’s herd. So Mr. King’s herd is the original. Mr. Jones has all of Mr. King’s goats, 100%, plus 10% more. That is 110% of Mr. King’s herd. Watch out: do not take 10% of 550. That gives 55, choice B. It uses the wrong herd. Taking those 55 away from 550 gives 495, choice C, which is also wrong.
Find Mr. King’s herd
Call Mr. King’s number of goats K. Use the percent increase formula with p = 10. The new amount is 550.
Mr. King has 500 goats. Watch out: 500 is Mr. King’s herd, choice D. It is not the difference.
Find the difference
Mr. Jones has 50 more goats than Mr. King. So the answer is A, 50.
Check your answer
Check the 10%. 10% of 500 is , and , Mr. Jones’s herd. So 550 really is 10% more than 500. If King had 495, then 10% more would be about 545, not 550.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 98 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 9Question
A list of consecutive integers begins with m and ends with n. If , how many integers are in the list?
- A2
- B33
- C66
- D67
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
Consider the case where .
The list of integers from 1 to 67 contains 67 numbers.
Question analysis
A number question about a list of consecutive integers that starts at m and ends at n, where n minus m is 66. Students decide how many integers the list contains. The tricky part is relating the difference between the two ends to the number of integers in the list.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Consecutive integers and differences are familiar grade 7 ideas, and the arithmetic is trivial. What keeps this at grade 7 rather than below it is the counting trap, which needs a moment of careful reasoning.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Variables instead of numbers moderate
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 7, 21 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The arithmetic is trivial, so the question tests one idea: the number of integers from m to n is one more than their difference, because both ends belong to the list. The stem supplies 66 ready-made, and taking it as the count is the natural first reaction. A five-number list, 1 to 5, whose ends differ by 4, shows the extra one in seconds.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choices 66 and 67 differ by one, and 66 is the difference the stem hands over; only counting both ends of the list separates them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Variables instead of numbers moderate Understanding the question
The list is given only by its ends, m and n, so the count has to be reasoned out in general, or checked on a small list such as 1 through 5. (Koedinger & Nathan, 2004; Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
Strategy: Try a small list you can count, such as 1 through 5, and compare its count with the difference between its first and last numbers.
Traps
- Counting the ends: Inclusive or exclusive ends, fence posts, consecutive numbers: an answer that is one too many or too few, or an endpoint drawn open where it belongs closed (or the reverse).
The wrong answers, classified
A Little reason to choose it (Haladyna & Downing, 1993; Rodriguez, 2005)
No common working counts only the two named ends, m and n, in a list said to hold consecutive integers, so 2 mostly draws guesses.
B Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Halves 66, as if consecutive integers went up by 2 like consecutive odd or even numbers, so the list held only every other integer.
C Counting the ends (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Takes the difference of the ends as the count, forgetting that a list from m to n includes both m and n.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Counting consecutive integers
- m is the first number in the list and n is the last. n − m counts the steps from each number to the next. A list always has one more number than it has steps, so you add 1. This works for any list that goes up by 1.
Sort out the question
Integers are whole numbers and their negatives, like −2, 0 and 5. Consecutive integers come one after another, going up by 1, like 4, 5, 6. The list starts at m and ends at n. The difference is 66. You need how many integers are in the list.
Try a small list
Letters are hard to count, so try a list you can count: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Here m = 1 and n = 5.
But the list has 5 numbers, not 4. The difference counts the steps: 1 to 2, 2 to 3, 3 to 4 and 4 to 5. Both ends are in the list, so there is one more number than steps.
Use the counting rule
Watch out: 66 is the difference, not the count. Choosing 66, choice C, leaves out one end of the list. Also, consecutive integers go up by 1, not 2, so halving 66 to get 33 is wrong. So the answer is D, 67.
Check your answer
Try m = 1. Then . The list 1, 2, 3, and so on up to 67, plainly has 67 numbers. Any other start gives the same count, because the list just slides along.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 99 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 16Question
A truck rental company charges a one-time fee of $40 plus $1 per mile driven. Dalia rented a truck and used a coupon for 20% off the total rental cost. After the coupon was applied, she spent a total of $60. How many miles did she drive?
- A8
- B20
- C32
- D35
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
Let m equal the miles driven during Dalia’s rental. The total cost, c, can be expressed as an equation.
Dalia spent a total of $60, which included a 20% off coupon. Find the cost before the coupon by dividing the final cost ($60) by the percentage paid (80%):
Use $75 as the total cost to find m.
Dalia drove 35 miles.
Question analysis
A multistep word problem about a truck rental that costs a $40 fee plus $1 per mile, with a 20% off coupon applied to the total. Given that Dalia paid $60 after the coupon, students find how many miles she drove. Undoing the discount correctly before removing the fixed fee is the hard part.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students solve two-step equations and work with discounts, usually separately. This combines them and makes students undo a 20% discount starting from the price paid, a reversal many grade 7 students have not practised.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Turning words into math moderate
- Combines ideas moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Solution
- 3 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 5, 43 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Two ordinary skills, undoing a discount and solving a two-step equation, are stacked, and the first runs in reverse. The natural way to undo 20% off is to add 20% back, which gives $72 instead of $75 and a choice three miles from the answer. Students who check by applying the coupon to the full cost of 40 + 35 = 75 dollars see at once that 80% of it is 60.
Turning words into math moderate Understanding the question
The sentence "After the coupon was applied, she spent a total of $60" makes 60 the price after 20% off, so it is 80% of the full cost, 40 + m. (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; Koedinger & Nathan, 2004)
Combines ideas moderate Working it out
A percent discount has to be undone before the fee-plus-mileage equation can be solved: 60 ÷ 0.8 = 75, then 75 − 40 = 35 miles. (Embretson, 1998; Daniel & Embretson, 2010)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choices 32 and 35 are three miles apart, too close to tell apart by estimate; only dividing 60 by 0.8, rather than adding 20% of 60, separates them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Since $60 is 80% of the full cost, divide 60 by 0.80 to find the cost before the coupon, then subtract the $40 fee to get the miles.
Traps
- Percent of the wrong amount: Finding the whole from a part, or a percent change measured from the wrong starting amount.
- Misreads the question: Misses or misreads a condition or a word in the question: "at least", "each", "remaining", "not".
The wrong answers, classified
A Wrong operation (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; King et al., 2004)
Takes 20% off the $60 again, 60 × 0.8 = 48, instead of undoing the discount, then subtracts the $40 fee to get 8 miles.
B Misreads the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Ignores the coupon and treats the $60 as the full cost, so it subtracts the $40 fee and gets 20 miles.
C Percent of the wrong amount (Parker & Leinhardt, 1995)
Undoes the coupon by adding 20% of $60 to get $72, though the 20% was taken of the larger pre-coupon cost, then subtracts the $40 fee.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Rental cost
- c is the full cost in dollars, before any coupon. 40 is the one-time fee, paid once no matter how far you drive. m is the number of miles, and each mile costs 1 dollar.
- Price after a discount
- The full cost is the price before the discount. p is the percent taken off. You pay what is left: 100% minus p%. For 20% off you pay 80%, so you multiply by 0.80.
Sort out the question
The truck costs a $40 fee, plus $1 for each mile. Dalia’s coupon took 20% off the total. After the coupon, she paid $60. You need how many miles she drove. The $60 is the price after the discount, not the full cost.
Write what she paid
20% off means she paid what was left of the full cost.
As a decimal, 80% is 0.80.
Undo the discount
To undo times 0.80, divide by 0.80. Move the decimal point one place in both numbers to make it easier.
The full cost was $75. Watch out: the 20% was taken off the full cost, not off $60. Adding 20% of $60 gives $72 and leads to 32 miles, choice C. Taking 20% off $60 again leads to 8 miles, choice A.
Find the miles
She drove 35 miles. Watch out: do not skip the coupon. Using $60 as the full cost gives 20 miles, choice B. So the answer is D, 35.
Check your answer
Go forward. 35 miles cost $35. Add the $40 fee to get $75. The coupon takes off 20% of $75, which is dollars. Then . That is exactly what she paid.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 100 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 19Question
8.9, 8.2, 8.5, 9.0, 8.4, 8.6, 8.8
At a skating championship, there are seven judges who each award a score for each skater’s performance. The highest and lowest scores given to each skater are discarded, and the mean of the remaining scores is then calculated and reported as the skater’s final score. What is the final score for the skater who received the scores shown above from the judges?
- A8.60
- B8.62
- C8.64
- D8.70
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The highest and lowest scores are discarded: 8.2 and 9.0.
To find the mean, add the remaining scores and then divide that sum by the total number of remaining scores.
Question analysis
A statistics question about a skating championship with seven judges: the highest and lowest of a skater's seven scores are dropped, and the rest are averaged. Students apply that rule to the listed scores, decimals close together. Following the dropping rule exactly and adding the decimals carefully both matter, since the choices are very close.
- Grade level
- Grade 6 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Finding a mean is grade 6 content, and this adds only a rule about which scores to drop. Grade 7 statistics usually compares whole data sets, so this is easier, though the close choices demand exact decimal arithmetic.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Error-prone arithmetic minor
- Turning words into math minor
- Solution
- 3 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 9, 62 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The arithmetic is short, but the choices are spaced so closely that a small slip or a skipped rule lands on a neighbor. Averaging all seven scores, or picking the middle score, gives values within a few hundredths of the answer. The question rewards following the stated rule exactly and adding the five remaining scores with care.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The choices 8.60, 8.62 and 8.64 lie within 0.04 of one another, so no estimate separates them; only the exact sum of the five kept scores, 43.2, does. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Error-prone arithmetic minor Working it out
Five one-decimal scores must be added and divided by 5; subtracting 8 from each first leaves 0.9, 0.5, 0.4, 0.6 and 0.8, which are easier to add. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
Turning words into math minor Understanding the question
The scoring rule takes two sentences to state: discard the single highest and the single lowest score, then average the five that remain. (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; Koedinger & Nathan, 2004)
Strategy: Cross out the single highest and the single lowest score, add the five that remain, and divide that sum by 5.
Traps
- Misreads the question: Misses or misreads a condition or a word in the question: "at least", "each", "remaining", "not".
- Answers a different question: A choice is right for another quantity: the other unknown, the rest instead of the part, the part instead of the whole.
The wrong answers, classified
A Answers a different question (King et al., 2004; Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Gives the median, the middle score 8.6, instead of the mean of the five scores left after the highest and lowest are dropped.
B Misreads the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Averages all seven scores without discarding any, 60.4 ÷ 7 = 8.628…, and takes 8.62, the nearest choice to that mean.
D Misreads the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Drops only the lowest score, 8.2, and averages the other six, (60.4 − 8.2) ÷ 6 = 8.7, keeping the top score of 9.0.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Mean, or average
- The mean is the average. The sum is what you get when you add all the scores. Divide it by how many scores you added. It shares the total out evenly, as if every score were the same.
Sort out the rule
Seven judges gave the seven scores shown. The rule has two parts. First, throw out the highest score and the lowest score. Then find the mean of the scores that are left. The mean is the average. That is the final score you need.
Cross out the highest and lowest
The highest score is 9.0. The lowest is 8.2. Cross both out. Five scores are left: 8.9, 8.5, 8.4, 8.6 and 8.8. Watch out: drop both. Dropping only 8.2 gives 8.70, choice D. Keeping all seven gives about 8.63, which is closest to 8.62, choice B.
Add the five scores
A shortcut: each score is 8 plus a bit. The bits are 0.9, 0.5, 0.4, 0.6 and 0.8, and they add to 3.2. Five 8s make 40, and .
Divide by the number of scores
Watch out: do not just take the middle score, 8.6. That is the median, choice A. The question asks for the mean. So the answer is C, 8.64.
Check your answer
Multiply back: , the sum. Also, the mean should sit between the lowest kept score, 8.4, and the highest kept score, 8.9. 8.64 does.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 101 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 20Question
A piece of wood that is feet long is cut into 2 pieces of different lengths. The shorter piece has a length of x feet. Which inequality expresses all possible values of x?
- A
- B
- C
- D
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The original piece of wood is feet long.
The shorter piece is x feet long, and it must be less than half the length of the original piece of wood.
Since half of is , it follows that .
The shorter piece of wood cannot be 0 feet long, so it follows that .
This gives the compound inequality .
Question analysis
An inequality question: a piece of wood 4½ feet long is cut into two pieces of different lengths, and the shorter piece is x feet long. Students choose the inequality that gives every possible value of x. They must turn each condition in the words into a boundary and decide whether each end of the range is included.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students solve and graph simple inequalities. Writing a compound inequality from a description, where the words decide whether each end is strict, is less familiar and calls for careful reading of every condition.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- Turning words into math moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Variables instead of numbers minor
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 5, 37 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Halving 4 1/2 feet is the only computation; the rest is deciding whether each end of the range can actually happen. A shorter piece of 2 1/4 feet would make the two pieces equal, and a piece of 0 feet is no piece at all, so both ends are excluded. Students who find the right bounds but never test the ends are drawn to the version with the inclusive symbols.
Turning words into math moderate Understanding the question
Two phrases set the two ends: "cut into 2 pieces" means x is more than 0, and "of different lengths" with "the shorter piece" means x is less than half of 4 1/2. (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; Koedinger & Nathan, 2004)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The inequalities 0 < x < 2 1/4 and 0 ≤ x ≤ 2 1/4 share both bounds and differ only in their symbols; only checking whether each end can happen separates them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Variables instead of numbers minor Understanding the question
The question asks for every possible length of the shorter piece, a range rather than one length, so students must picture the cut moving along the board. (Koedinger & Nathan, 2004; Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
Strategy: Picture cutting the board in different places, find the largest and smallest values the shorter piece could take, and check whether each boundary value is actually possible.
Traps
- Counting the ends: Inclusive or exclusive ends, fence posts, consecutive numbers: an answer that is one too many or too few, or an endpoint drawn open where it belongs closed (or the reverse).
- Misreads the question: Misses or misreads a condition or a word in the question: "at least", "each", "remaining", "not".
- Answers a different question: A choice is right for another quantity: the other unknown, the rest instead of the part, the part instead of the whole.
The wrong answers, classified
B Counting the ends (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Finds the right bounds but includes both ends, allowing a piece of 0 feet or two equal halves, though the stem says 2 pieces of different lengths.
C Misreads the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Ignores that x is the shorter piece and allows any length up to the whole 4 1/2-foot board.
D Answers a different question (King et al., 2004; Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Describes the longer piece, whose length lies between half the board and the whole board, instead of the shorter piece the stem calls x.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Two pieces make the whole board
- x is the length of the shorter piece, and L is the length of the longer piece, both in feet. Together they make the whole board. Since x is smaller than L, x must be less than half of the board.
- Inequality signs
- a < b says a is less than b. a ≤ b says a is less than or equal to b, so a can also equal b. A chain like 0 < x < 5 means x is more than 0 and less than 5.
Sort out the question
A board is feet long. It is cut into 2 pieces of different lengths. The shorter piece is x feet long. You need an inequality for every possible value of x. An inequality uses signs like <, less than, to show a range of numbers.
Find the top end for x
If you cut exactly in the middle, each piece is half the board.
But the pieces have different lengths, so the cut is not in the middle. The shorter piece must be less than half.
Find the bottom end for x
The shorter piece can be very small, like 0.1 foot. But it can’t be 0 feet. Then nothing would be cut off, and there would not be 2 pieces.
Put the two ends together
This says x is more than 0 and less than . Watch out: choice B uses ≤, which allows x = 0 or . Neither can happen. Choice C lets x be more than half, so it would not be the shorter piece. Choice D describes the longer piece. So the answer is A, .
Check your answer
Test values. Cut off 1 foot: the pieces are 1 foot and feet. The shorter one is 1, and 1 is between 0 and . If x were 3, the other piece would be feet, so x would not be the shorter one. Choice A leaves 3 out, as it should.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 102 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 24Question
In 1991, the total public debt of the United States was about $3,600,000,000,000. In that year, there were about 250,000,000 people in the United States. Which amount is the best estimate of the public debt per person for that year?
- A$1,440
- B$14,400
- C$144,000
- D$14,400,000,000
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks for the amount of the public debt per person, so divide the total public debt by the number of people.
The amount of the public debt per person was about $14,400.
Question analysis
An estimation question with very large numbers: the 1991 United States public debt of about 3.6 trillion dollars and a population of about 250 million. Students find the debt per person. The choices differ by powers of ten, so cancelling zeros and keeping track of place value is the whole challenge.
- Grade level
- Grade 6 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Dividing large whole numbers and using place value are grade 5 and 6 skills. Grade 7 work goes further with rational numbers; this asks only for one careful division, with counting zeros as the main risk.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Error-prone arithmetic moderate
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 5, 37 words.
- Corrected from the DOE handbook
- A misprinted number in the explanation was corrected.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The division itself is easy once the zeros are handled, and the question is built to punish miscounting them. Three choices carry the same digits, 144, at different sizes, so a student who loses or gains one zero still finds a match. A quick estimate in powers of ten, 3.6 trillion over a quarter of a billion, confirms that the answer is in the tens of thousands.
Error-prone arithmetic moderate Working it out
The debt has 13 digits and the population 9; cancelling seven zeros from each leaves 360,000 ÷ 25, and losing or adding one zero shifts the answer tenfold. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
Three choices share the digits 144 and differ only by powers of ten, so getting the digits right does not settle it; only exact place value does. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Cancel the same number of zeros from the debt and the population, then divide the smaller numbers that remain; check the size by estimating with powers of ten.
Traps
- An arithmetic slip: The right method with a plausible arithmetic error: a digit, a place value or a times-table fact.
- A faulty procedure: A systematic but wrong procedure: adding fractions straight across, applying an exponent to each term of a sum, dropping a sign when moving a term.
The wrong answers, classified
A An arithmetic slip (Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
Cancels one zero too many while dividing and ends with $1,440, a per-person amount ten times too small.
C An arithmetic slip (Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
Cancels one zero too few from the debt and ends with $144,000, a per-person amount ten times too large.
D A faulty procedure (Brown & Burton, 1978; Tatsuoka, 1983)
Divides the debt by 250 alone, dropping the six zeros that follow 250 in the population without removing any from the debt.
What was corrected from the DOE handbook, and why
- Explanation: The handbook’s first division writes the debt as “3,6000,000,000,000”, with an extra zero. The question gives $3,600,000,000,000, and the handbook’s next line (where the zeros are cancelled) uses 3,600,000,000,000, so the site now reads 3,600,000,000,000 ÷ 250,000,000. The answer, $14,400, is unchanged.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Amount per person
- The total is the whole amount, here the debt in dollars. Dividing by the number of people shares it out equally. The result is how much goes with each one person.
- Canceling zeros
- a and b are any numbers, and b is not zero. Dividing the top and bottom of a fraction by 10 does not change its value. So you can cross off a zero at the end of the top and one at the end of the bottom, as a pair.
Sort out the question
The debt was about $3,600,000,000,000, which is 3.6 trillion dollars. There were about 250,000,000 people, which is 250 million. You need the debt per person. Per person means the amount for each one person.
Set up the division
Share the debt equally by dividing it by the number of people. The debt goes on top, and the people go on the bottom.
Cancel zeros in pairs
Count the zeros at the end of each number. The debt ends in 11 zeros. The population ends in 7. Cross off 7 zeros from each. Each pair you cross off divides the top and bottom by 10.
Watch out: cross off the same number from each. One too many from the debt gives $1,440, choice A. One too few gives $144,000, choice C.
Divide what is left
Dividing by 25 is the same as dividing by 100 and then multiplying by 4. That is because 4 groups of 25 make 100.
The debt was about $14,400 per person. Watch out: choice D divides by 250 only and forgets the zeros after it. So the answer is B, $14,400.
Check your answer
Multiply back. First, . Then put back the 7 zeros you crossed off: 3,600,000,000,000. That is the debt, so $14,400 is right.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 103 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 35Question
Evaluate:
- A−30
- B−18
- C18
- D44
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
Simplify negatives inside the first absolute value brackets.
Simplify the first absolute value.
Calculate the absolute values.
Perform the final subtraction.
Question analysis
This integer question asks students to evaluate an expression with two absolute values: the first holds four positive and negative numbers, and the second is the absolute value of 24. It tests subtracting negative numbers and understanding absolute value. Subtracting a negative number and handling each pair of bars separately are where most slips happen.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Grade 7 students add and subtract integers and know absolute value as distance from zero. This expression puts four signed terms inside one pair of bars and subtracts a second absolute value, a typical but sign-heavy grade 7 exercise.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Error-prone arithmetic moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Many steps minor
- Solution
- 4 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 16+, 2 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Every step is routine, but the question stacks sign decisions, and one slip anywhere produces a clean wrong number. The last step is the subtle one: each pair of bars gives a positive number, but 6 minus 24 is still negative. Students who believe bars guarantee a positive result flip that subtraction, and the choices offer the flipped number beside the right one.
Error-prone arithmetic moderate Working it out
The first bars hold four signed terms, and two must be rewritten, + (−17) as − 17 and − (−31) as + 31, before they combine to −6. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The answer, −18, and the choice 18 differ only in sign, so estimating cannot separate them; only doing the last step as 6 − 24 does. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Many steps minor Working it out
Each pair of bars is simplified inside and made positive before the outer subtraction, so three separate jobs must be done in the right order. (Daniel & Embretson, 2010; Enright, Morley & Sheehan, 2002)
Strategy: Rewrite each subtraction of a negative as addition, combine the four numbers inside the first bars, take both absolute values, and only then do the final subtraction.
Traps
- Negatives and direction: Arithmetic with negative numbers, the order of a subtraction, or direction on a number line. (Moving a term across the equals sign without changing its sign is a faulty procedure.)
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
The wrong answers, classified
A A faulty procedure (Brown & Burton, 1978; Tatsuoka, 1983)
Simplifies the inside to −6 but treats the bars like parentheses, keeping −6, so −6 − 24 = −30.
C Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Assumes an expression made of absolute values cannot be negative, so subtracts 6 from 24 instead of 24 from 6.
D Negatives and direction (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Reads − (−31) as − 31, so the inside becomes −8 − 12 − 17 − 31 = −68, and 68 − 24 = 44.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Adding and subtracting negatives
- a is any number, and b is a positive number, so −b is negative. Adding a negative moves you left on the number line, just like subtracting. Subtracting a negative is like taking away a debt, so you end up with more. It is the same as adding.
- Absolute value
- The bars around a number mean absolute value. a is any number. Its absolute value is how far a is from 0 on the number line. A distance is never negative, so the absolute value of −6 is 6.
Sort out the expression
The expression has two absolute values. The bars mean the distance from 0, so what comes out of them is never negative. Work in this order. First simplify inside the first bars. Then take both absolute values. Last, do the subtraction between them.
Rewrite the signs inside
Two signs inside the first bars are tricky. Adding −17 is the same as subtracting 17. Subtracting −31 is the same as adding 31.
Watch out: minus negative 31 is plus 31. Treating it as minus 31 makes the inside −68. That leads to 44, choice D.Combine the four numbers
Go from left to right, one number at a time.
The inside of the first bars is −6.
Take the absolute values
Now the expression is . Watch out: the bars turn −6 into 6. Keeping −6 gives , choice A.
Do the last subtraction
You take 24 away from 6. Taking a bigger number from a smaller one gives a negative answer. Watch out: absolute values are never negative, but this answer can be. Doing instead gives 18, choice C.
So the answer is B, −18.
Check your answer
Check the inside a new way. The positive part is 31. The negative parts add to . Since , the inside is right. Then, on a number line, start at 6 and move 24 to the left. Six steps reach 0, and 18 more land on −18.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 104 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 38Question
By what percent did the price of a cup of coffee increase if its price was increased from $1.25 to $1.35?
- A7%
- B8%
- C10%
- D12%
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
Subtract to determine the amount of the increase.
Divide the increase by the original price.
Multiply the quotient by 100 to express the decimal answer as a percent.
Question analysis
This percent increase question gives the price of a cup of coffee before and after a raise, from $1.25 to $1.35, and asks by what percent the price went up. Students find the change in price and compare it with a price. Deciding which price to compare the change with is the tricky part.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Percent increase is grade 7 content, and this is a standard case with two prices. What makes it harder than routine is deciding which price the change is measured against and dividing small decimals accurately.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Error-prone arithmetic moderate
- Solution
- 3 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 6, 19 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Most students see that the price rose by 10 cents; the question is what to compare that with. Percent change is measured from the original amount, and dividing by the new price gives a number close enough to the answer that rounding hides the mistake. Reading the 10 cents directly as 10 percent is the other quick trap, since 10 cents is only 10 percent of a dollar.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
Dividing the 10-cent rise by either price gives a single-digit percent, 8% from $1.25 and about 7.4% from $1.35, so only the choice of base separates the two listed answers. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Error-prone arithmetic moderate Working it out
Without a calculator, 0.10 ÷ 1.25 is a division by a decimal; rewriting it in cents as 10/125, which simplifies to 8/100, is the clean way through. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
Strategy: Subtract to get the increase, then divide it by the price before the raise and multiply by 100; working in cents keeps the decimals out of the way.
Traps
- Percent of the wrong amount: Finding the whole from a part, or a percent change measured from the wrong starting amount.
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
- Wrong operation: Adds instead of multiplying, divides the wrong way round, turns a ratio or rate upside down, or undoes a step in the wrong direction (subtracts what should be added back).
The wrong answers, classified
A Percent of the wrong amount (Parker & Leinhardt, 1995)
Divides the 10-cent increase by the new price, $1.35, measuring from the wrong amount; 0.10 ÷ 1.35 is about 7.4%, so 7%.
C Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Reads the 10-cent increase as 10 percent, as if every percent change were a percent of one dollar rather than of the $1.25 price.
D Wrong operation (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; King et al., 2004)
Divides the wrong way round, $1.25 ÷ $0.10 = 12.5, and takes the nearest choice, 12%.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Percent increase
- New is the price after the change, and original is the price before it. The top is the amount of the increase. Dividing by the original compares the increase with where you started. Multiplying by 100 turns that decimal into a percent.
Sort out the question
The coffee cost $1.25 before. That is the original price. Now it costs $1.35, the new price. You need the percent increase. That compares how much the price went up with the original price.
Find the amount of the increase
The price went up $0.10, or 10 cents. Watch out: 10 cents is not 10%. It would be 10% only if the price started at $1.00. That mistake gives choice C.
Divide by the original price
Dividing by a decimal is easier in cents: 10 cents out of 125 cents. Divide the top and bottom by 5. Then multiply both by 4 to get hundredths.
Change to a percent
The price went up 8%. Watch out: divide by the original price, $1.25, not the new one. Dividing by $1.35 gives about 7.4%, which rounds to choice A.
So the answer is B, 8%.
Check your answer
Work forward from the answer. 8% of $1.25 is , or 10 cents. Then . That is the new price, so 8% is right.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 105 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 40Question
The price of a sandwich was raised from $6.25 to $6.75. What was the percent increase in the price?
- A5%
- B8%
- C7%
- D50%
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
Use the percent increase expression to find the answer:
Question analysis
A sandwich's price went up from $6.25 to $6.75, and this percent change question asks for the percent increase in the price. Students divide the 50-cent increase by one of the prices and write the result as a percent. Picking which price is the base, and doing the decimal division accurately, decide whether the answer comes out right.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Finding a percent increase is a core grade 7 skill, and this is the plain version with no context beyond two prices. Its demand lies in measuring the change against the correct price and dividing by $6.25 without a calculator.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Error-prone arithmetic moderate
- Solution
- 3 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 2, 17 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The 50-cent rise is easy to find; the percent depends on what it is compared with. Dividing by the new price, $6.75, gives a value that rounds to a listed choice one point below the answer, and reading 50 cents as 50 percent gives another. The choices are printed out of order, 8% before 7%, so students should read each one rather than scan the list.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
Measured against $6.75 the 50-cent rise is about 7.4%, and against $6.25 it is 8%; both are listed side by side, so only the right base separates them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Error-prone arithmetic moderate Working it out
The division 0.50 ÷ 6.25 is easiest as 50/625, which reduces to 2/25 and then to 8/100; a three-digit decimal divisor invites a slip. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
Strategy: Put the 50-cent change over the original price, 0.50 over 6.25, then scale the fraction to hundredths or divide to read off the percent.
Traps
- Percent of the wrong amount: Finding the whole from a part, or a percent change measured from the wrong starting amount.
- Misunderstands the concept: A wrong belief about a concept: that percents can be added, that area grows like length, that averages can be averaged, that a bigger denominator means a bigger fraction.
The wrong answers, classified
A Little reason to choose it (Haladyna & Downing, 1993; Rodriguez, 2005)
No common working gives 5%: dividing the 50-cent rise by either price does not come near it, so it mostly draws guesses.
C Percent of the wrong amount (Parker & Leinhardt, 1995)
Divides the 50-cent increase by the new price, $6.75, instead of the original, which gives about 7.4%, so 7%.
D Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Reads the 50-cent increase as 50 percent, treating cents as a percent of one dollar rather than of the $6.25 price.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Percent increase
- New is the price after the change, and original is the price before it. The top is the amount of the increase. Dividing by the original compares the increase with where you started. Multiplying by 100 turns that decimal into a percent.
Sort out the question
The sandwich cost $6.25 before. That is the original price. Now it costs $6.75, the new price. You need the percent increase. That compares the increase with the original price. Note that the choices are not in order: C, 7%, comes after B, 8%.
Find the amount of the increase
The price went up $0.50, or 50 cents. Watch out: 50 cents is not 50%. It would be 50% only if the price started at $1.00. That mistake gives choice D.
Divide by the original price
In cents, this is 50 out of 625. Divide the top and bottom by 25. Then multiply both by 4 to get hundredths.
Change to a percent
The price went up 8%. Watch out: divide by the original price, $6.25, not the new one. Dividing by $6.75 gives about 7.4%, which is choice C.
So the answer is B, 8%.
Check your answer
Work forward from the answer. 8% of $6.25 is , or 50 cents. Then . That is the new price, so 8% is right.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 106 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 42Question
Lian bought enough oranges to fill 4 bags. Each bag contains 8 oranges. The total cost was $11.52. At that rate, how much would Lian pay for 42 oranges?
- A$17.28
- B$15.12
- C$15.02
- D$12.52
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
First, find the amount, in dollars, that Lian paid for each orange. There are 4 bags with 8 oranges each.
Divide the total cost by the total number of oranges to get the cost per orange:
Multiply to find the cost of 42 oranges:
Question analysis
This rate word problem says Lian paid $11.52 for 4 bags of 8 oranges each and asks how much 42 oranges would cost at the same rate. Students find the price of one orange and multiply. Since 42 oranges is not a whole number of bags, working by the bag instead of by the orange invites mistakes.
- Grade level
- Grade 6 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Finding a unit price and scaling it up is grade 6 rate work. The decimals are multi-digit, but the plan is routine, with less to manage than grade 7 problems built on percents or negative numbers.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Error-prone arithmetic moderate
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Solution
- 3 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 2, 25 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The plan is familiar, total oranges, price per orange, then the new cost, so the work lies in the decimals. Because 42 oranges is five bags and two oranges, students who price by the bag either round up to six bags or must handle the leftover. Estimating, since 42 is about a third more than 32, gives roughly $15 and rules out the far choices but not the near one.
Error-prone arithmetic moderate Working it out
Two decimal operations are done by hand: 11.52 ÷ 32 = 0.36 for one orange, then 0.36 × 42 = 15.12, where a dropped carry is easy. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The choices $15.12 and $15.02 differ by 10 cents, so a rough estimate of about $15 cannot choose between them; only the exact product can. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Multiply to find how many oranges were bought, divide the total cost by that number to get the price of one orange, then multiply by 42.
Traps
- Misreads the question: Misses or misreads a condition or a word in the question: "at least", "each", "remaining", "not".
- An arithmetic slip: The right method with a plausible arithmetic error: a digit, a place value or a times-table fact.
The wrong answers, classified
A Misreads the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Prices whole bags, rounding 42 oranges up to 6 bags of 8, and pays 6 × $2.88 = $17.28, missing that "at that rate" means per orange.
C An arithmetic slip (Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
Uses the right method but slips one digit in multiplying 0.36 by 42, a tens-place error that lands 10 cents short of the total.
D Little reason to choose it (Haladyna & Downing, 1993; Rodriguez, 2005)
No common working gives $12.52, exactly one dollar more than $11.52; no price per orange or per bag leads there, so it mostly draws guesses.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Unit price
- The unit price is what one item costs. Divide the total cost by how many items you got. It works because the total is shared equally among the items.
- Cost
- The unit price is the cost of one item, here one orange. Multiply it by how many items you buy to get the total cost. This works when every item costs the same.
Sort out the question
Lian bought 4 bags with 8 oranges in each bag. She paid $11.52 in all. You need the cost of 42 oranges. “At that rate” means each orange costs the same as before. So find the price of one orange first.
Count the oranges
Each of the 4 bags holds 8 oranges, so multiply to find how many she bought.
Lian bought 32 oranges for $11.52.
Find the price of one orange
This is easier in cents: . So one orange costs $0.36, or 36 cents.
Find the cost of 42 oranges
Break 42 into 40 and 2 to make it easier.
The 42 oranges cost $15.12.
Avoid the traps and answer
Watch out: $15.02, choice C, is only 10 cents away. Multiply and add with care. Watch out: Lian pays for each orange, not for full bags. Buying 6 whole bags would cost $17.28, choice A.So the answer is B, $15.12.
Check your answer
42 oranges is 10 more than 32. Those 10 oranges cost $3.60, since . Then . Same answer, so $15.12 is right.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 107 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 48Question
A hiker plans on hiking 17 miles in 3 days. Which equation describes the relationship between the number of days hiked, x, and the number of miles traveled, y?
- A
- B
- C
- D
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
There is a proportional relationship between the number of miles traveled, y, and the number of days hiked, x.
So the equation describes the relationship.
Question analysis
A hiker plans to cover 17 miles in 3 days, and this proportional relationship question asks for the equation linking days hiked, x, to miles traveled, y. Students find the constant rate and write it as an equation of the form y = kx. Putting the right quantity on top of the rate is the main decision.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Writing an equation y = kx for a proportional relationship is a core grade 7 skill, and this is the textbook form. The only extra demand is keeping the rate's direction straight: miles per day or days per mile.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Turning words into math minor
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 7, 31 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Writing y = kx is routine, so the question rests on putting the right number on top of the rate. Two choices use one number from the stem with no division at all, and one inverts the rate. Substituting x = 3 into each equation is the fastest check, since only one of them gives y = 17.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The coefficients 17/3 and 3/17 use the same two numbers, one the other inverted, so only checking that 3 days gives 17 miles separates the two equations. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Turning words into math minor Understanding the question
With x as days and y as miles, "17 miles in 3 days" becomes miles per day, 17 ÷ 3, the number that multiplies x. (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; Koedinger & Nathan, 2004)
Strategy: Find the constant of proportionality as miles per day, since y is miles and x is days, then write y equals that constant times x; check with x = 3.
Traps
- Wrong operation: Adds instead of multiplying, divides the wrong way round, turns a ratio or rate upside down, or undoes a step in the wrong direction (subtracts what should be added back).
- Numbers taken from the question: Combines the numbers in the question without a model of the situation, or is simply a number that appears in the question.
The wrong answers, classified
A Wrong operation (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; King et al., 2004)
Divides days by miles, 3/17, the number of days per mile, turning the rate upside down.
B Numbers taken from the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Uses the 3 days as the rate, writing y = 3x, a number from the question with no division.
D Numbers taken from the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Uses the 17 total miles as if they were covered in one day, writing y = 17x without dividing by the 3 days.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Constant of proportionality
- x and y are two amounts that change together. k is the constant of proportionality: how much y goes with 1 of x. In a proportional relationship, y divided by x gives the same k every time.
- Proportional relationship
- kx means k times x. In a proportional relationship, y is always k times x. Here x is the number of days and y is the miles. k is the miles for each day. Use it to write the equation once you know k.
Sort out the question
The hiker plans 17 miles in 3 days. x is the number of days, and y is the number of miles. You need an equation that links them. Assume the hiker goes the same distance each day. Then y is always the same number times x.
Find the miles for each day
That number is the constant of proportionality, k. It is miles divided by days.
That is miles each day. Watch out: miles go on top, because y is miles. is days per mile, upside down. That is choice A.
Write the equation
Watch out: 17 is the miles for all 3 days, not for 1 day. So , choice D, is too fast. And , choice B, uses the days as the rate.So the answer is C, .
Check your answer
Put in x = 3, for 3 days: . That is 17 miles, which matches the plan. Try choice A the same way: . That is less than 1 mile, far too short.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 108 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 49Question
Carolyn walked 3 miles from her house to the library and then miles farther to the grocery store. Returning home by the same route, she walked miles before stopping at a friend’s house. How many miles did Carolyn have left to walk home?
- A
- B
- C
- D
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The distance from Carolyn’s house to the grocery store is miles.
Carolyn walked miles back, so she still had miles left to walk home.
So Carolyn had miles left to walk home.
Question analysis
Carolyn walks 3 miles from home to the library and 2 1/2 miles more to the grocery store, then heads back the same way and stops at a friend's house after 1 2/3 miles. This fractions word problem asks how far she still has to walk home. Students add and subtract mixed numbers, and the subtraction needs regrouping across unlike denominators.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Grade 7 students solve multi-step word problems with mixed numbers. This one has only positive numbers, but it needs a clear picture of the route and a subtraction that requires regrouping across unlike denominators.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Error-prone arithmetic moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Turning words into math minor
- Solution
- 3 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 6, 48 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The story needs a quick sketch, but the real test is one mixed-number subtraction in which the second fraction is larger than the first. Many students subtract the fractions the easy way round, which gives a choice close to the right one. Converting both numbers to sixths, 33/6 − 10/6, sidesteps the regrouping, and adding the result to 1 2/3 to get back 5 1/2 is a quick check.
Error-prone arithmetic moderate Working it out
The subtraction 5 1/2 − 1 2/3 needs sixths, 5 3/6 − 1 4/6, and the fraction on top is the smaller one, so a whole must be regrouped. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
Subtracting the fraction parts the wrong way round gives 4 1/6, only 1/3 away from the answer, so a rough estimate cannot tell the two apart. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Turning words into math minor Understanding the question
The route has to be pictured: the walk back starts at the grocery store, 5 1/2 miles from home, not at the library. (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; Koedinger & Nathan, 2004)
Strategy: Sketch the route as a line from home to the library to the store, find the total distance out, then subtract the distance already walked back, using sixths.
Traps
- A faulty procedure: A systematic but wrong procedure: adding fractions straight across, applying an exponent to each term of a sum, dropping a sign when moving a term.
- Answers a different question: A choice is right for another quantity: the other unknown, the rest instead of the part, the part instead of the whole.
The wrong answers, classified
B A faulty procedure (Brown & Burton, 1978; Tatsuoka, 1983)
Subtracts the whole numbers, 5 − 1 = 4, then the fractions the easy way round, 2/3 − 1/2 = 1/6, giving 4 1/6.
C Answers a different question (King et al., 2004; Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
On the store-to-library stretch, uses the 1 2/3 miles already walked instead of the 5/6 mile left, then adds the 3 miles home.
D Answers a different question (King et al., 2004; Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Adds all three distances, 3 + 2 1/2 + 1 2/3 = 7 1/6, which is how far she has walked so far, not how far is left.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Mixed number to fraction
- a is the whole number part, b is the top of the fraction, and c is the bottom. Each whole holds c pieces, so a wholes hold a times c pieces. Then add the b extra pieces.
- Equivalent fractions
- a is the top of a fraction and b is the bottom. n is any number except 0. Multiplying the top and bottom by the same number gives an equal fraction, cut into smaller pieces. Use it to give two fractions the same bottom before you add or subtract.
- Subtracting fractions with the same bottom
- c is the shared bottom number. a and b are the tops. When the pieces are the same size, you just take away how many pieces you have. The size of the pieces, c, stays the same.
Picture the route
Draw a line: home, then the library, then the store. Home to the library is 3 miles. The library to the store is miles more. Carolyn walks back the same way. After miles she stops at a friend’s house. You need the miles still left to get home.
Find the distance from home to the store
The store is miles from home. She starts back from the store, so this is the full trip home. Watch out: adding all three distances gives , choice D. That is how far she has walked, not how far is left.
Change to improper fractions
The miles left are . An improper fraction has a top bigger than its bottom. Change each mixed number to one.
Use sixths for both
To subtract, the fractions need the same bottom. 2 and 3 both go into 6, so change both to sixths.
Subtract and simplify
23 sixths is 3 wholes (18 sixths) and 5 sixths more. So . Watch out: is less than . Subtracting the fraction parts the wrong way round gives , choice B.
So the answer is A, miles.
Check your answer
Add back: . That is the full distance from the store to home. Also estimate: 5.5 minus about 1.7 is about 3.8, and is about 3.83.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 109 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 50Question
A child grows inches in of a year. What would be his yearly growth rate in inches per year?
- A
- B
- C
- D
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
Set up a proportion to solve.
Question analysis
A child grows 1 1/4 inches in one third of a year, and this unit rate question asks for his growth rate in inches per year. Students divide a mixed number by a fraction, or scale the growth up to a whole year. Choosing between multiplying and dividing, and handling the whole mixed number, are where the wrong rates come from.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Computing a unit rate from a ratio of fractions is the grade 7 standard itself, and this is a typical example: one mixed number over one unit fraction, in two short steps with no extra information.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Error-prone arithmetic minor
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 4, 25 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The idea is simple: three thirds make a year, so the yearly growth is three times the growth in a third. Errors come from the mixed number, where students triple the 1 and leave the 1/4 alone, and from multiplying by 1/3 instead of dividing, which shrinks the rate. A sense check helps, since a yearly rate must be larger than the 1 1/4 inches grown in a third of a year.
Error-prone arithmetic minor Working it out
Dividing 1 1/4 by 1/3 means multiplying by 3, and the mixed number must be multiplied whole, as 5/4 × 3 = 15/4, not just its 1. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
Multiplying only the whole part gives 3 1/4, which differs from the answer only in the fraction's numerator, so a rough size check cannot rule it out. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Divide the growth by the time, writing 1 1/4 as 5/4 and dividing by 1/3 as multiplying by 3; or ask how much he grows in three such periods.
Traps
- Wrong operation: Adds instead of multiplying, divides the wrong way round, turns a ratio or rate upside down, or undoes a step in the wrong direction (subtracts what should be added back).
- A faulty procedure: A systematic but wrong procedure: adding fractions straight across, applying an exponent to each term of a sum, dropping a sign when moving a term.
The wrong answers, classified
A Wrong operation (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; King et al., 2004)
Multiplies 5/4 by 1/3 instead of dividing by it, getting 5/12, a yearly rate smaller than the growth in a third of a year.
B A faulty procedure (Brown & Burton, 1978; Tatsuoka, 1983)
Triples only the whole-number part of 1 1/4, writing 3 × 1 1/4 as 3 1/4 and leaving the 1/4 unchanged.
D Wrong operation (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; King et al., 2004)
Adds 3 to 1 1/4 instead of multiplying it by 3, getting 4 1/4.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Rate
- The amount is how much something changed, here inches grown. The time is how long it took, here part of a year. Dividing tells how much it changes in 1 unit of time, here 1 whole year.
- Mixed number to fraction
- a is the whole number part, b is the top of the fraction, and c is the bottom. Each whole holds c pieces, so a wholes hold a times c pieces. Then add the b extra pieces.
- Dividing by a fraction
- a over b is the number you divide. c over d is the number you divide by. To divide by a fraction, multiply by its reciprocal, the fraction flipped upside down. This works because dividing by a number undoes multiplying by it.
Sort out the question
The child grows inches in of a year. You need his growth rate in inches per year. That is how much he would grow in 1 whole year at the same speed. A year has 3 thirds, so the answer should be bigger than .
Set up the rate
Divide the growth by the time to get the inches for 1 whole year.
Change the mixed number to a fraction first.
Divide by multiplying
To divide by a fraction, multiply by its reciprocal, the fraction flipped upside down. The reciprocal of is 3.
Watch out: multiplying by instead gives , choice A. That is less than he grew in a third of a year.Change back to a mixed number
15 quarters is 3 wholes (12 quarters) and 3 quarters more.
He grows inches per year. Watch out: triple all of , not just the 1. Tripling only the whole number gives , choice B.
So the answer is C, .
Check your answer
Think of the year as 3 thirds. He grows inches in each third. Add them: . The wholes make 3, and the quarters make . That is inches, the same answer.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 110 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 51Question
- A−0.33
- B−0.27
- C0
- D0.33
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
Question analysis
This decimal question asks for the value of 3 times 0.01 minus 3 times 0.1. Students multiply each decimal by 3 and subtract, keeping the order of the subtraction as written. The two decimals look alike, so place value and the sign of the result both need care.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Grade 7 students subtract rational numbers and get negative results. This short computation adds place-value care, since 0.01 and 0.1 look alike, but it is a routine two-step grade 7 exercise.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- Error-prone arithmetic moderate
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 16+, 1 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Two quick multiplications leave 0.03 − 0.3, a subtraction whose result is negative. The usual errors are adding the two products, with or without a minus sign, and treating 0.01 and 0.1 as the same number. Rewriting the subtraction as −(0.3 − 0.03) keeps the place values lined up and makes the sign plain.
Error-prone arithmetic moderate Working it out
The products 0.03 and 0.3 have their digits in different places, and taking the larger from the smaller crosses zero, so both alignment and sign need care. (Brown & Burton, 1978; Junker & Sijtsma, 2001)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The choice −0.33 has the right sign and is only 0.06 from the answer, so a sense that the result is a little below zero cannot separate them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Multiply each decimal by 3, then subtract with the place values lined up; or factor out the 3 and compute 3 times (0.01 − 0.1).
Traps
- Negatives and direction: Arithmetic with negative numbers, the order of a subtraction, or direction on a number line. (Moving a term across the equals sign without changing its sign is a faulty procedure.)
- Wrong operation: Adds instead of multiplying, divides the wrong way round, turns a ratio or rate upside down, or undoes a step in the wrong direction (subtracts what should be added back).
The wrong answers, classified
A Negatives and direction (Brown & Burton, 1978)
Sees the result must be negative but adds the sizes, −(0.03 + 0.3) = −0.33, instead of subtracting 0.03 from 0.3.
C Misunderstands the concept (Smith, diSessa & Roschelle, 1993; De Bock et al., 1998; Ni & Zhou, 2005)
Treats 0.01 and 0.1 as equal, since each shows a single 1 after the point, so the two products cancel to 0.
D Wrong operation (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; King et al., 2004)
Adds the products, 0.03 + 0.3 = 0.33, instead of subtracting the second from the first.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Subtracting a bigger number
- a and b are numbers, and b is the bigger one. When you take a bigger number away from a smaller one, the answer is negative. Its size is the gap between them, b minus a. So subtract the other way, then put a minus sign in front.
Sort out the problem
3(0.01) means 3 times 0.01. A number right next to parentheses means multiply. Then subtract 3 times 0.1. Note that 0.01 is one hundredth, and 0.1 is one tenth. They are not equal. Watch out: treating them as equal makes the two parts cancel to 0, choice C.
Multiply each part
So the problem is . Write 0.3 as 0.30 so both have two decimal places. Now you can see that 0.30 is bigger than 0.03.
Subtract the bigger number
You take a bigger number from a smaller one, so the answer is negative.
Watch out: find the gap between the numbers. Don’t add them. Adding gives 0.33, choice D, or −0.33, choice A.So the answer is B, −0.27.
Check your answer
Pull out the 3 first: . Same answer. Also think of a number line. Start at 0.03, just right of 0. Move 0.30 to the left. You land a little left of 0, at −0.27.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 111 of 120
2024 Test A Math, question 57Question
An ice cream shop sells 16 cups of ice cream for $48 and 4 cups for $12. There is a proportional relationship between the number of cups of ice cream and the cost. What is the constant of proportionality for this relationship?
- A3 cups per dollar
- B3 dollars per cup
- C4 cups per dollar
- D4 dollars per cup
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
There is a proportional relationship between the cost and the number of cups of ice cream.
Divide the cost by the number of cups of ice cream to find the constant of proportionality.
The constant is the cost per cup, 3 dollars.
Question analysis
An ice cream shop sells 16 cups for $48 and 4 cups for $12, and the cost is proportional to the number of cups. This proportional relationship question asks for the constant of proportionality, with its units. The choices pair two numbers with two kinds of units, so the units of the rate matter as much as the number.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 content, by NYS standard
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Grade 7 students find constants of proportionality in tables, graphs and equations. Here one division gives the number, as in grade 6 unit pricing, and the real demand is attaching the right units to it.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly apply
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Something you must already know minor
- Solution
- 2 steps
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 4, 50 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
One division gives the number, so the question is really about units. The cost depends on the number of cups, and dividing $48 by 16 cups gives the dollars for each cup; reversing the label describes a shop where one dollar buys three cups. The second offer, 4 cups for $12, is a built-in check that the rate stays the same.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
Two choices carry the number 3, "3 cups per dollar" and "3 dollars per cup", so finding 48 ÷ 16 is not enough; the units decide. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Something you must already know minor Working it out
Students must know that dividing dollars by cups gives dollars per cup: a quotient's units read as the top quantity per the bottom one. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
Strategy: Divide one quantity by the other for one offer, check that the other offer gives the same quotient, and label it with the numerator's units per the denominator's units.
Traps
- Wrong operation: Adds instead of multiplying, divides the wrong way round, turns a ratio or rate upside down, or undoes a step in the wrong direction (subtracts what should be added back).
- Numbers taken from the question: Combines the numbers in the question without a model of the situation, or is simply a number that appears in the question.
The wrong answers, classified
A Wrong operation (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995; King et al., 2004)
Gets 3 from 48 ÷ 16 but labels it cups per dollar, turning the rate upside down; at these prices a dollar buys only 1/3 of a cup.
C Numbers taken from the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Divides the two cup amounts, 16 ÷ 4 = 4, and attaches cups per dollar, a ratio of like quantities given made-up units.
D Numbers taken from the question (Hegarty, Mayer & Monk, 1995)
Divides the two costs, $48 ÷ $12 = 4, or the two cup counts, and calls the result dollars per cup.
Worked solution, step by step
Formulas used
- Constant of proportionality
- In a proportional relationship, y is always the same number, k, times x. Here x is the number of cups and y is the cost in dollars. So k is y divided by x. Its units are the top’s units per the bottom’s units: dollars per cup.
Sort out the question
16 cups cost $48, and 4 cups cost $12. The cost is proportional to the cups. That means the cost is always the same number times the number of cups. That number is the constant of proportionality. You need it with the right units.
Divide cost by cups
For each offer, divide the cost in dollars by the number of cups.
Both offers give 3. So the constant is 3.
Name the units
Dollars are on top and cups are on the bottom. So the units are dollars per cup. 3 dollars per cup means each cup costs $3. Watch out: two choices use 3. Choice A, 3 cups per dollar, flips the rate. Then 16 cups would cost only about $5, not $48.
Avoid the traps and answer
Watch out: dividing two costs, , or two cup counts, , gives 4. That compares like amounts, so it is not a cost for each cup. It leads to choice C or D.So the answer is B, 3 dollars per cup.
Check your answer
Multiply back. At 3 dollars per cup, 16 cups cost , which is $48. And 4 cups cost , which is $12. Both match the shop’s prices.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 112 of 120
2024 Test B English, question 3Question
Read this sentence.
The Appalachian Trail is a really long trail that a lot of people do each year.
Which revision of the sentence uses the most precise language?
- AThe Appalachian Trail is an extremely long trail that millions of people do each year.
- BThe Appalachian Trail is a 2,200-mile trail that more than a million people hike each year.
- CThe Appalachian Trail is a 2,200-mile trail that two million people hike each year.
- DThe Appalachian Trail is a lengthy trail that a couple million people do each year.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks for the revision of the sentence that uses the most precise language.
A. Incorrect. The word “extremely” does not specify the precise length of the trail (2,200 miles); “millions” is less precise than the specific number of people who hike the trail each year (two million); and the verb “do” imprecisely describes the purpose of visiting the trail (hiking).
B. Incorrect. While the revision specifies the precise length of the trail and the verb “hike” precisely describes the purpose of visiting the trail, “more than a million” is less precise than the specific number of people who hike the trail each year (two million).
C. CORRECT. The length of the trail (2,200 miles), the specific number of people who hike the trail each year (two million), and the action of the visitors (hiking) are clear and precise in this revision of the sentence.
D. Incorrect. The word “lengthy” is less precise than specifying the actual length of the trail (2,200 miles); “a couple million” is less precise than the specific number of people who hike the trail each year (two million); and the verb “do” imprecisely describes the purpose of visiting the trail (hiking).
Question analysis
This precise-language question gives a casual sentence saying the Appalachian Trail is “a really long trail that a lot of people do each year” and asks which revision is most precise. Several revisions swap in more specific words or numbers, so students must check every part of each sentence, not just the first improvement they notice.
- NYS standards
- 7L3a precise and concise language
- Grade level
- Grade 6 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Below grade 7 Choosing precise wording is grade 7 language work, but this item is one short sentence in everyday words. Typical grade 7 revision sets the same choice inside a paragraph, with more wording to weigh.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 1, recall and reproduction · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Every choice must be checked minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one sentence or line
- Reading level
- Question and choices: about grade 6, 89 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The question is quick once each revision is tested on three points: how long the trail is, how many people hike it, and what they do there. The near miss catches students who stop checking once they see the mileage and the verb “hike,” though its count of hikers is still a range. Words such as “extremely” and “lengthy” are the other snare, since they sound sharper without saying any more.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The right revision and the one with “more than a million” share the 2,200-mile length and the verb “hike,” and differ only in the hiker count: an exact two million or an open-ended floor. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Every choice must be checked minor Choosing the answer
Each revision repairs a different part of “a really long trail that a lot of people do,” so all four have to be checked for the length, the count and the verb. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Strategy: Check each revision on three points: how long the trail is, how many people visit, and what they do there. Keep only a version that is exact on all three.
Traps
- Wordy, vague or informal: A revision is grammatical but wordy, imprecise or too casual for the passage.
The wrong answers, classified
A Wordy, vague or informal (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Treats “extremely long” and “millions” as upgrades, though neither gives a length or a count, and the vague verb “do” is still there.
B Wordy, vague or informal (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Sees the exact length and the verb “hike” and stops checking, missing that “more than a million” is looser than a specific number of hikers.
D Wordy, vague or informal (Connors & Lunsford, 1988)
Takes the fancier “lengthy” and the casual “a couple million” for sharper wording, though neither is exact and “do” still does not say what visitors do.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
You need the revision with the most precise language. Precise means exact. A precise word tells the reader exactly what or how much. For example, a lot of homework is vague, but three pages of math homework is precise. The sentence has three vague parts: “a really long trail,” “a lot of people,” and the verb “do.”
Make a three-part test
The most precise revision must fix all three parts.
- How long is the trail? Look for an exact length.
- How many people go? Look for an exact number.
- What do they do there? Do is vague. People hike a trail.
A choice that fixes only one or two parts is not the most precise.
Check each choice
- C gives “a 2,200-mile trail,” “two million people,” and “hike.” It passes all three tests.
- B gives the length and “hike.” But “more than a million” is not exact. It could mean 1.1 million or 5 million.
- A says “extremely long” and “millions.” Neither is exact, and it keeps “do.”
- D says “lengthy” and “a couple million.” These sound fancier but say no more. It also keeps “do.”
Pick the answer
Watch out: B is very close. It has the length and the right verb, so many students stop there. But its count of people is still loose. Only C is exact on all three parts. So the answer is C.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong answer. It matches C on the length, 2,200 miles, and on the verb “hike.” The only difference is the number of hikers. “More than a million” sets a low limit but gives no exact count. “Two million” tells the reader exactly how many, so C is more precise.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 113 of 120
2024 Test B English, question 6Passage Find Time to Volunteer
Find Time to Volunteer
(1) Many people believe that they gain a greater sense of purpose by giving their time to serve others. (2) These are the people who spend their free time volunteering at various places within the community. (3) Those who are served benefit from the work of these volunteers. (4) However, research shows that those who volunteer also receive benefits.
(5) For many students, this proposition may sound impossible. (6) Schoolwork can require hours of study each week. (7) Volunteering at a retirement center or homeless shelter requires both time and energy. (8) Extracurricular activities fill up after-school time. (9) Family obligations and part-time jobs often have to be worked into the schedule, too. (10) However, if students can find time to volunteer, even for a few hours a month, they may find that the benefits outweigh the scheduling difficulties.
(11) To begin with, students who engage in volunteer activities acquire valuable skills and experience, which can help them focus on potential fields of study and career options. (12) Furthermore, when students list volunteer work on college applications, admissions counselors see applicants who care about making their community and college campus a better place.
(13) Volunteerism benefits more than students applying to college. (14) This type of experience is equally important for students moving directly into the workforce after high school. (15) Volunteering demonstrates initiative, dedication, and a strong work ethic, qualities that companies value in a potential employee. (16) In a CareerBuilder study, 60 percent of managers regarded volunteerism as a significant asset when considering applicants.
(17) Students who volunteer undoubtedly make a positive investment in their future, but they also affect their present quality of life. (18) Studies have shown that volunteering is good for both the mind and the body. (19) Volunteering can boost mood levels and reduce anxiety. (20) According to the Mayo Clinic,1 the feeling of doing something meaningful and the appreciation received from that action can reduce stress.
(21) Even the busiest of students can find a way to donate some time to a worthy cause. (22) Though managing different commitments may seem overwhelming at times, students are sure to feel a sense of fulfillment in volunteerism.
1Mayo Clinic: a nonprofit medical organization dedicated to treatment and research
Question
Which sentence should follow sentence 4 to introduce the main claim of the passage?
- AWith that in mind, high school students should consider engaging in some form of regular volunteerism.
- BFortunately for students, these benefits are guaranteed to produce both immediate and long-term results.
- CIn fact, studies have confirmed that volunteerism can be beneficial for students, the family, and the community.
- DFor this reason, high school students should learn about how helping others can strengthen their communities.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks which sentence should follow sentence 4 to introduce the main claim of the passage.
A. CORRECT. Sentence 4 states that “research shows that those who volunteer also receive benefits.” The sentence in the option logically follows the ideas in sentence 4 and provides the best thesis statement for the passage because it introduces the main claim that high school students should consider the benefits of volunteerism.
B. Incorrect. While the sentence refers to the “benefits” mentioned in sentence 4, it erroneously asserts that “immediate and long-term results” are “guaranteed.” In addition, the sentence does not introduce the main claim of the passage that volunteering is beneficial for high school students.
C. Incorrect. Although the sentence states that “volunteerism can be beneficial for students,” it introduces the idea that “the family, and the community” benefit as well, which is not part of the main argument. Therefore, this sentence should not follow sentence 4 to introduce the main claim of the passage.
D. Incorrect. Although the sentence introduces the claim that “high school students should learn about” volunteering, it focuses on the idea that volunteering strengthens the community, which is not the main claim. This sentence does not accurately introduce the claim that volunteering is beneficial for high school students and thus should not follow sentence 4.
Question analysis
This introduction question asks which sentence should come right after sentence 4 of the volunteering essay to state its main claim. Students must work out what the whole essay argues and match it to an opening line, while the choices mention benefits, studies and communities in ways that sound like a thesis.
- NYS standards
- 7W1a introducing claims and counterclaims
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Stating a precise claim is a core grade 7 argument skill. Students must sense the essay’s claim from all six paragraphs and test four openers that each sound like a thesis, typical of careful grade 7 revision.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- Evidence in several places moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- How sentences fit together minor
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 354 words; question and choices: about grade 10, 76 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Three of the four sentences sound like a thesis, and two contain “high school students should,” so tone decides nothing. Students go wrong when they choose a sentence that only repeats the research point of sentence 4, or one that urges a different action. The question rewards stating the essay’s claim first, that students should volunteer because it pays off for them, and then finding the sentence that says exactly that.
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
The essay never states its claim in one sentence; it has to be pieced together from the benefits for college, work and health in paragraphs 3 to 5 and sentence 21’s “Even the busiest of students can find a way.” (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The right sentence and the one about strengthening communities both open with a linking phrase and “high school students should”; they part only on what students should do, volunteer or learn about communities. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
How sentences fit together minor Working it out
The new sentence follows sentence 4’s “those who volunteer also receive benefits,” so it must turn that research point into what students should do about it. (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Strategy: Skim the body paragraphs and state in a few words what the essay wants its readers to believe. Then choose the sentence that says exactly that and follows naturally from sentence 4.
Traps
- Off the point: Adds or keeps something that does not support the paragraph's or the passage's focus, or an introduction or conclusion that misses the main point.
- Too broad or too strong: A choice overstates, generalizes, or uses absolute words the text does not support.
The wrong answers, classified
B Too broad or too strong (King et al., 2004)
Follows the word “benefits” from sentence 4 but overstates them as “guaranteed” and never says what students should do, so no claim is introduced.
C Off the point (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Likes the research-sounding “studies have confirmed,” but it restates sentence 4 as a fact rather than a claim and widens the benefits to families and the community.
D Off the point (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Sees the thesis-like “high school students should,” but it asks students to learn about strengthening communities, a point the essay never develops, instead of urging them to volunteer.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
You need a sentence to go right after sentence 4. It must introduce the main claim. A claim is the main point a writer wants you to believe or act on. In an essay like this, it is often a should statement. Example: Students should get more sleep. So first figure out what the whole essay argues.
Find the essay’s main claim
The essay keeps urging students to make time to help. Sentence 10 says “if students can find time to volunteer, even for a few hours a month, they may find that the benefits outweigh the scheduling difficulties.” Paragraphs 3 to 5 give benefits for college, jobs and health. Sentence 21 says “Even the busiest of students can find a way to donate some time to a worthy cause.” So the claim is: high school students should volunteer, because it helps them.
Use the clue in sentence 5
The new sentence will sit just before sentence 5. Sentence 5 says “For many students, this proposition may sound impossible.” A proposition is a suggestion. So the sentence before it must suggest something students could do. That points to a sentence telling students to volunteer.
Check each choice
- A says students “should consider engaging in some form of regular volunteerism.” That is the essay’s claim. “With that in mind” links it to the benefits in sentence 4.
- B says the benefits are “guaranteed.” That overstates them, and it never tells students to do anything.
- C just repeats that studies found benefits. It also adds families, which the essay never discusses.
- D tells students to “learn about” helping communities. The essay never argues for that.
Pick the answer
Watch out: D also says “high school students should,” so it sounds like a claim. But it asks them to learn, not to volunteer. Only one choice states what the essay argues. So the answer is A.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D is the closest wrong answer, because it also tells high school students what they should do. But the essay never asks students to study how helping makes communities stronger. It argues that volunteering pays off for the students themselves. A says exactly that, and it sets up “this proposition” in sentence 5.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Find Time to Volunteer” as printed (page 163)

Question 114 of 120
2024 Test B English, question 8Uses the passage above: “Find Time to Volunteer”.
Question
Which of these would best follow sentence 12 and support the ideas presented in the third paragraph (sentences 11–12)?
- AThese students show that they are likely to be responsible, reliable, and helpful young adults. Admissions counselors know that character traits like these will benefit the applicants as well as whomever they interact with.
- BVolunteering can help students meet new people who can provide references and advice to the students when they are applying to colleges. It can also be an invaluable opportunity for students to meet possible future employers.
- CThe counselors hope that young adults who demonstrate this behavior will go on to volunteer during their college years, working on campus in student government and leadership programs or serving in the community at hospitals, schools, and homeless shelters.
- DMany colleges are looking for students who are not just academically successful but who also work well with others and care about improving and serving surrounding communities.
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The question asks which option would best follow sentence 12 to support the ideas presented in the third paragraph (sentences 11–12).
A. Incorrect. The subject of the main clause in sentence 12 is “admissions counselors.” Although the second sentence in the option mentions “admissions counselors,” it does not support the ideas in the paragraph, because the statement that “admissions counselors know that character traits like these will benefit the applicants” focuses on how students benefit, while sentence 12 focuses on how these traits benefit the community.
B. Incorrect. While sentence 11 discusses the potential academic and professional connections that can be made through volunteering, sentence 12 moves on to the topic of college admissions. Since the sentences in the option revert back to the topic of connections, they do not support and logically follow a sentence about how college admissions counselors view students with volunteering experience.
C. Incorrect. Although the sentence in the option continues on the subject of admissions counselors and follows the idea in sentence 12 that these counselors tend to favor students who “care about making their community and college campus a better place,” the sentence focuses on what students will do while in college rather than on how volunteering helps them get into college. Therefore, the sentence does not best follow sentence 12 and support the ideas presented in the third paragraph.
D. CORRECT. In sentence 12, the author states that college admissions counselors view students who list volunteer work on admissions applications as “applicants who care about making their community and college campus a better place.” The sentence in the option best follows sentence 12 and supports the ideas in the third paragraph because it provides additional details about why admissions counselors look beyond academics when considering students for admissions and the positive qualities assigned to those who have volunteering experience.
Question analysis
This supporting-details question asks which addition would best follow the volunteering essay’s sentence about how college admissions counselors view applicants who list volunteer work. Every option mentions college and sounds reasonable on its own, so students must decide which one develops the paragraph’s point rather than drifting to a related idea.
- NYS standards
- 7W1b supporting claims with evidence
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students choose evidence that supports a claim. Here the options are one or two full sentences, all of them about college, and the right fit depends on the precise idea in sentence 12, a finer judgment than usual.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer major
- How sentences fit together moderate
- A lot to read minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 354 words; question and choices: about grade 13, 153 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Every option stays on the subject of college, so the work is matching sentence 12’s exact idea: counselors see applicants who care about making their community a better place. The near miss also explains what counselors value, but it swaps caring for the community for a new set of traits and ends on what those traits do for the applicants. Students who restate sentence 12 before reading the options can hear that the right one simply widens it, from community service to what colleges want beyond grades.
A very close wrong answer major Choosing the answer
The right sentence and the two-sentence option about responsible, reliable, helpful students both explain why volunteers impress admissions; only the right one keeps sentence 12’s point, caring about improving communities. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
How sentences fit together moderate Working it out
The new sentence must extend sentence 12’s specific idea, what admissions counselors see in volunteers, rather than return to sentence 11’s skills and careers or move on to college life. (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
A lot to read minor Understanding the question
The options run 27 to 39 words, two of them two sentences long, and all four are about college, so topic alone rules none of them out. (Kintsch, 1998; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Strategy: Restate sentence 12 in your own words, then ask of each option whether it explains or extends that exact point about what admissions counselors value.
Traps
- Off the point: Adds or keeps something that does not support the paragraph's or the passage's focus, or an introduction or conclusion that misses the main point.
The wrong answers, classified
A Off the point (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Follows the admissions counselors from sentence 12 but replaces caring for the community with new traits, responsibility and reliability, and turns to how those traits help the applicants.
B Off the point (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Is drawn by “applying to colleges,” but networking for references and future employers is a new benefit that neither sentence 11 nor sentence 12 develops.
C Off the point (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Stays with the counselors and picks up “college campus” from sentence 12, but jumps ahead to what students might do in college instead of explaining admission decisions.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
You need the sentence that best follows sentence 12. A good next sentence adds to the same idea. It does not jump to a new point. Example: after Dogs make loyal pets, the sentence They stay by their owners’ side fits. Dogs come in many colors drifts away. So first put sentence 12 in your own words.
Restate sentence 12
Sentence 12 says that “when students list volunteer work on college applications, admissions counselors see applicants who care about making their community and college campus a better place.” Admissions counselors are the people who choose which students get into a college. So the idea is this: colleges like volunteers because volunteers care about their communities.
Check each choice
- D says colleges want students who are “not just academically successful.” That means more than good grades. They also want students who “care about improving and serving surrounding communities.” That explains sentence 12 and builds on it.
- A swaps in new traits: “responsible, reliable, and helpful.” Then it says those traits help the applicants and the people around them. It drops caring for the community.
- B brings in a new benefit: meeting people who can give advice or jobs. Neither sentence 11 nor sentence 12 talks about that.
- C jumps ahead to what students might do in college. It doesn’t explain how volunteering helps them get in.
Pick the answer
Watch out: A is the most tempting. It is about what counselors value, just like the right answer. But it changes the reason they value it. Only D keeps sentence 12’s idea of caring for the community. So the answer is D.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong answer. Like D, it explains why admissions counselors like volunteers. But A’s reasons are new ones, such as being responsible and reliable. D keeps sentence 12’s exact idea, caring about the community, and adds that colleges want more than good grades. So D supports the paragraph best.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 115 of 120
2024 Test B English, question 9Uses the passage above: “Find Time to Volunteer”.
Question
Which concluding sentence should replace sentence 22 to provide the best support for the argument presented in the passage?
- AIn every city, there are homeless shelters, food pantries, youth centers, and political campaigns that depend on the support and commitment of hardworking young people.
- BClearly, students who volunteer will experience a host of benefits, such as learning new skills, meeting interesting people, opening up opportunities for the future, and gaining a sense of satisfaction.
- CWhen students carefully evaluate their activities and prioritize volunteerism, they find a way to work it into their schedule and are soon encouraging their peers to do the same.
- DWhether they are seeking admission to college, preparing to enter the workforce, or simply looking to reduce stress, high school students who volunteer can help themselves as much as they help others.
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The question asks which concluding sentence should replace sentence 22 to provide the best support for the argument presented in the passage.
A. Incorrect. Although the sentence lists examples of organizations that depend on “hardworking young people” as volunteers, it should not replace sentence 22, because its use of specific examples does not provide a strong conclusion to the main idea in the passage, and it does not best support the main argument that students benefit themselves and their community when volunteering.
B. Incorrect. While the sentence supports the argument that students “will experience a host of benefits” through volunteerism, it should not replace sentence 22 as a concluding sentence, because it does not best support the main argument that volunteerism benefits both the students and their community.
C. Incorrect. Although the sentence emphasizes the importance of prioritizing volunteerism, it should not replace sentence 22, because it focuses on the main idea in the second paragraph (“For many students, this proposition may sound impossible.”), rather than the main argument that volunteerism benefits both students and their community. This sentence introduces the idea that student volunteers “are soon encouraging their peers” to volunteer, which does not best support the argument presented in the passage.
D. CORRECT. This sentence should replace sentence 22 to conclude the passage because it lists specific reasons for volunteering (“Whether they are seeking admission to college, preparing to enter the workforce, or simply looking to reduce stress”) and best supports the main argument that volunteering not only helps students but can also help their community (“high school students who volunteer can help themselves as much as they help others”).
Question analysis
This conclusion question asks which sentence should replace the last line of the essay urging high school students to volunteer. Students need a closing statement that best supports the argument as a whole. Several options list benefits or name real places to volunteer, so the challenge is telling an ending that fits the whole essay from one that drifts.
- NYS standards
- 7W1e concluding an argument
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Writing a conclusion that sums up an argument is a grade 7 standard. Students recognize one rather than write it, but they must keep the essay’s several reasons in mind while judging four endings that all sound final.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- Evidence in several places moderate
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from the whole text
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 354 words; question and choices: about grade 15, 134 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
All four endings sound final, and the strongest wrong one is a fair-sounding list of benefits that opens with “Clearly.” The right ending wins on fit: its three reasons are the essay’s own, college, work and stress, and it keeps the opening idea that volunteers help others as well as themselves. Students who sketch the essay’s reasons paragraph by paragraph before reading the endings can see which one gathers them and which adds a point of its own.
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
The reasons a conclusion must gather sit in three body paragraphs, college admission in paragraph 3, the workforce in paragraph 4 and stress in paragraph 5, well before sentence 22. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The right ending and the “host of benefits” ending both list what volunteers gain; they part on whether the list matches the essay’s own reasons and keeps the help volunteers give others. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: List the essay’s reasons for volunteering, one phrase per paragraph, then pick the ending that pulls them together without bringing in a new point.
Traps
- Too narrow: A single detail offered as the central idea or a summary, or a summary that keeps minor details and leaves out an essential part.
- Off the point: Adds or keeps something that does not support the paragraph's or the passage's focus, or an introduction or conclusion that misses the main point.
The wrong answers, classified
A Off the point (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Likes the concrete list of shelters, pantries and campaigns, but naming groups that need young volunteers sums up none of the essay’s reasons for volunteering.
B Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Sums up only what students gain, adding “meeting interesting people,” which the essay never mentions, and drops the point that volunteers help others too.
C Off the point (Halliday & Hasan, 1976)
Carries on sentence 21’s point that busy students can find time, then adds students recruiting their peers, so it ends on scheduling instead of the reasons to volunteer.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
You need a new last sentence for the essay. A good conclusion sums up the argument. It pulls the main reasons together without adding a new idea. Example: an essay on biking to school might end, Biking keeps you fit, saves money and helps clean the air. So first list this essay’s reasons.
List the essay’s reasons
- Paragraph 1: volunteers help others, and “those who volunteer also receive benefits” (sentence 4).
- Paragraph 3: volunteering helps with college applications.
- Paragraph 4: it helps students “moving directly into the workforce,” which means starting a job.
- Paragraph 5: it helps the mind and body, and it “can reduce stress.”
So a good ending names college, work and stress. It also keeps the idea that volunteers help both others and themselves.
Check each choice
- D names all three: “seeking admission to college, preparing to enter the workforce, or simply looking to reduce stress.” It ends with students who “help themselves as much as they help others.” That matches the essay.
- B lists benefits, but it adds “meeting interesting people.” The essay never says that. It also leaves out helping others.
- A lists places that need volunteers. It sums up none of the essay’s reasons.
- C is about fitting volunteering into a schedule and getting friends to join. Getting friends to join is a new idea.
Pick the answer
Watch out: B starts with “Clearly” and lists good things, so it sounds like an ending. But its list is not the essay’s list. So the answer is D.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
B is the closest wrong answer, because it also sums up what volunteers gain. But it adds a benefit the essay never discusses, and it drops the help volunteers give others. D gathers the essay’s own reasons, college, work and stress, and keeps both sides of the essay’s idea.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 116 of 120
2024 Test B English, question 17Passage Excerpt from “How Exercise Could Help You Learn a New Language”
Excerpt from “How Exercise Could Help You Learn a New Language”
by Gretchen Reynolds
Many scientists suspect that exercise alters the biology of the brain in ways that make it more malleable and receptive to new information, a process that scientists refer to as plasticity.
But many questions have remained unanswered about movement and learning, including whether exercise is most beneficial before, during or after instruction and how much and what types of exercise might be best.
So for a new study, which was published recently in PLOS One, researchers in China and Italy decided to home in on language learning and the adult brain.
Language learning is interesting. As young children, almost all of us picked up our first language easily. We didn’t have to be formally taught; we simply absorbed words and concepts.
But by early adulthood, the brain generally begins to lose some of its innate language capability. It displays less plasticity in areas of the brain related to language. As a result, for most of us, it becomes harder to learn a second language after childhood.
To see what effects exercise might have on this process, the researchers first recruited 40 college-age Chinese men and women who were trying to learn English. The students had some facility with this second language but were far from proficient.
The researchers then divided the students into two groups. Those in one group would continue to learn English as they had before, primarily while seated in rote vocabulary-memorization sessions.
The others would supplement these sessions with exercise.
Specifically, the students would ride exercise bikes at a gentle pace (about 60 percent of their maximum aerobic capacity) beginning 20 minutes before the start of the lessons and continuing throughout the 15 minutes or so of instruction.
Both groups learned their new vocabulary by watching words projected onto large screens, together with comparable pictures, such as “apple” and a Red Delicious. They were shown 40 words per session, with the sequence repeated several times.
Afterward, the students all rested briefly and then completed a vocabulary quiz, using computer keys to note as quickly as possible whether a word was with its correct picture. They also responded to sentences using the new words, marking whether the sentences were accurate or, in the case of “The apple is a dentist,” nonsensical. Most linguists1 feel that understanding sentences shows greater mastery of a new language than does simple vocabulary improvement.
The students completed eight vocabulary sessions over the course of two months.
And at the end of each lesson, the students who had ridden bikes performed better on the subsequent vocabulary tests than did the students who sat still.
They also became more proficient at recognizing proper sentences than the sedentary students, although that difference did not emerge until after several weeks of instruction.
Perhaps most interesting, the gains in vocabulary and comprehension lingered longest for the cyclists. When the researchers asked the students to return to the lab for a final round of testing a month after the lessons—without practicing in the meantime—the cyclists remembered words and understood them in sentences more accurately than did the students who had not moved.
“The results suggest that physical activity during learning improves that learning,” says Simone Sulpizio, a professor of psychology and linguistics at the University Vita-Salute San Raffaele in Milan, Italy, and a study co-author.
These improvements extend beyond simply aiding in memorization, she added. The exercise also deepened language learners’ grasp of how to use their newly acquired words.
This study involved college students performing relatively light exercise, though, and cannot tell us whether other people completing other types of exercise would achieve the same results.
It also offers no clues about what is occurring inside the brain that might be contributing to the benefits of the exercise. But many past studies have shown that exercise prompts the release of multiple neurochemicals in the brain that increase the number of new brain cells and the connections between neurons, Dr. Sulpizio says. These effects improve the brain’s plasticity and augment the ability to learn.
From a real-world standpoint, the study’s implications might seem at first to be impractical. Few classrooms are equipped with stationary bicycles. But specialized equipment is probably unnecessary, Dr. Sulpizio says.
“We are not suggesting that schools or teachers buy lots of bicycles,” she says. “A simpler take-home message may be that instruction should be flanked by physical activity.”
From “How Exercise Could Help You Learn a New Language” by Gretchen Reynolds from THE NEW YORK TIMES, August 16, 2017. Copyright © 2017 The New York Times Company.
1linguists: scientists who study language
Question
Read this sentence from paragraph 6.
To see what effects exercise might have on this process, the researchers first recruited 40 college-age Chinese men and women who were trying to learn English.
Which statement describes the function of the sentence in the overall structure of the excerpt?
- AIt indicates a shift from describing the results of the study to describing the process.
- BIt introduces the aspect of the research that was most critical to determining the results.
- CIt marks the change from explaining why the study was conducted to explaining how the study was conducted.
- DIt shows how questions were raised that could be addressed in further research.
Show the answer
Correct answer: C
The question asks how the first sentence from paragraph 6 functions in the overall structure of the excerpt.
A. Incorrect. While paragraph 6 begins to describe how the study was carried out, the results of the study have not been discussed in previous paragraphs.
B. Incorrect. The population used for the study is an important detail that helps describe who participated in the study, as well as an ideal situation (college-age people trying to learn a new language), but this is not critical information used to determine the results.
C. CORRECT. While paragraphs 4 and 5 address why the study focuses on adult language learning, the first sentence of paragraph 6 begins to give details about how the study was conducted, including describing the population being studied: “40 college-age Chinese men and women who were trying to learn English.”
D. Incorrect. The sentence from paragraph 6 does not include examples or discuss questions for further research; it simply introduces the subjects recruited for the study.
Question analysis
This question quotes the sentence in which researchers recruit 40 college-age Chinese students learning English, and asks what job that sentence does in the structure of the article on exercise and language learning. Students must keep track of what the article has covered by that point and what it turns to next, then judge four descriptions that each name a shift or a purpose.
- NYS standards
- 7R5 structure and genre features
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Naming the job a sentence does in an article’s structure is standard grade 7 work. The sentence opens with a clear signal phrase, and students need only recall what the paragraphs before and after it cover.
- Estimated difficulty
- Straightforward: two steps or one careful reading.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- How, not what moderate
- A very close wrong answer minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 764 words; question and choices: about grade 8, 106 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
The sentence announces its own job with “To see what effects exercise might have on this process,” which points back to the reasons for the study and forward to its method. The main risk is misplacing the results: paragraphs 4 and 5 report facts about how brains learn language, which can pass for findings, but the study’s results come only in paragraphs 13 to 15. Students who outline the article’s order before reading the choices find this quick.
How, not what moderate Working it out
The question asks what the sentence does in the excerpt’s plan, so students must see that paragraphs 1–5 explain why the study was done and that “To see what effects” opens the account of its method. (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001)
A very close wrong answer minor Choosing the answer
The right choice and the one about a shift “from describing the results” both say the sentence turns to how the study was run; they differ only in what they say came before it. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Strategy: Note what paragraphs 1 through 5 mainly do and what paragraphs 7 through 12 mainly do. The quoted sentence sits between them, so describe the shift it makes.
Traps
- Reversed relationship: Cause and effect, or the order of events, turned around.
- Wrong part of the text: A choice is true of another paragraph, stanza or speaker than the one asked about.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
The wrong answers, classified
A Reversed relationship (King et al., 2004)
Rightly sees the turn to the study’s process but puts the results first, perhaps taking paragraph 5’s facts about the adult brain as findings, though results come in paragraphs 13–15.
B Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Rightly notes that the sentence introduces who took part, then calls the 40 college-age learners the most critical factor in the results, a judgment the excerpt never makes.
D Wrong part of the text (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990)
Fits the open questions of paragraph 2 and the limits in paragraphs 18 and 19, not this sentence, which simply names the students recruited.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks what job one sentence does in the article’s plan. The sentence begins paragraph 6: “To see what effects exercise might have on this process.” To answer, look at what comes before it and what comes after it.
See what comes before the sentence
Paragraphs 1 to 5 explain why the study was done. Paragraph 2 says “many questions have remained unanswered about movement and learning.” Paragraph 5 says adult brains lose some of their skill with language. The words “this process” in the sentence point back to that. These paragraphs give reasons. They give no results yet.
See what comes after the sentence
The sentence says the researchers “first recruited” students. To recruit means to sign people up. After that, paragraphs 7 to 12 tell how the study worked. The students were split into two groups. One group rode bikes. Everyone took quizzes. The results come later, in paragraphs 13 to 15. So the sentence is where the article turns from why to how.
Check each choice
- C fits. It marks the change from why the study was done to how it was done.
- A says the article turns away from the results. But no results come before this sentence.
- B says this was the most important part of the study. The article never says that.
- D is about questions for later research. Those come up in paragraphs 18 and 19, not here.
Watch out: A is tempting because it also says the sentence turns to the process. Check its first half too.
Pick the answer
The method is the way the study was carried out. This sentence ends the reasons and starts the method. So the answer is C.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
A is the closest wrong answer. Like C, it says the sentence starts describing how the study was done. But A says the article was describing results before this. It wasn’t. The results, such as the cyclists doing better on quizzes, come in paragraphs 13 to 15.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Excerpt from “How Exercise Could Help You Learn a New Language”” as printed (pages 171–172)


Question 117 of 120
2024 Test B English, question 18Uses the passage above: “Excerpt from “How Exercise Could Help You Learn a New Language””.
Question
Which sentence is the best summary of the research procedure used in the study in the excerpt?
- AResearchers had a group of non-English-speaking students learn new English vocabulary by matching words and images on a computer screen, and also by analyzing words in context; some students exercised and some students sat still while learning.
- BResearchers first divided non-English-speaking students into two groups, with one group exercising before and while studying English and the other group studying English without exercising; then, after instruction, student learning was assessed.
- CResearchers first had non-English-speaking students sit on stationary bikes and pedal for 20 minutes before instruction and 15 minutes during instruction; then, after a rest period, students indicated whether English sentences made sense.
- DResearchers asked non-English-speaking students to study English while sitting or biking; then the students’ vocabulary skills were assessed after a short break period and also after a break of a full month without their having studied any of the materials.
Show the answer
Correct answer: B
The question asks for the best summary of the research procedure used in the study in the excerpt.
A. Incorrect. This summary says that students learned new words by matching words and images and “also by analyzing words in context,” but this last method was how the researchers assessed students, not how the students learned words; the summary is therefore inaccurate.
B. CORRECT. The summary includes the most important information, which is that one group of non-English-speaking students exercised before and during the English lessons, while the other group did not, and that the students’ learning was assessed afterward.
C. Incorrect. This summary is incomplete because it never mentions the control group—that is, the students who studied English without exercising—which was essential to the study so that results could be compared.
D. Incorrect. This summary includes unnecessary details, such as that students were assessed after a short break and also assessed after a month of no studying; it also neglects to mention important points: that one group exercised both before and during learning, while the other group did not exercise at all.
Question analysis
This summary question asks which of four long sentences best sums up how the researchers ran the study of exercise and English vocabulary learning. Each choice packs in real details about bikes, screens, quizzes and timing, so students must check both whether every detail is accurate and whether anything essential to the study’s design has been left out.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 students summarize texts, usually choosing among short summaries. Here each choice runs about forty words packed with accurate details from several paragraphs, and students must judge which keeps the study’s essential design, not merely which details are true.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly understand
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer major
- Evidence in several places moderate
- A lot to read moderate
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 764 words; question and choices: about grade 16+, 157 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Most of what the wrong summaries say is true, which makes this a test of completeness and weight rather than of accuracy. One summary describes only the cyclists, another slips the sentence quiz into how words were taught, and the most tempting one is accurate but leaves out that the cyclists pedaled before the lesson as well as during it. The right summary is plainer than its rivals: two groups, one exercising, then a test.
A very close wrong answer major Choosing the answer
The sitting-or-biking summary is accurate and names both conditions, as the right one does, but it spends its words on the short rest and the month-later test instead of when the cyclists rode. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places moderate Working it out
The procedure runs from the recruiting in paragraph 6 through the groups, bikes, lessons and quiz in paragraphs 7–12 to the final test in paragraph 15, so it must be gathered before any summary is judged. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
A lot to read moderate Understanding the question
Each summary is a 32- to 40-word sentence packed with real details, the 20 minutes of pedaling, the rest period, the month without study, so the four together form a dense passage of their own. (Kintsch, 1998; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Freedle & Kostin, 1993)
Strategy: Before reading the choices, note in a few words how the study was set up and how learning was checked. Then test each summary for accuracy and for anything essential it leaves out.
Traps
- Too narrow: A single detail offered as the central idea or a summary, or a summary that keeps minor details and leaves out an essential part.
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
The wrong answers, classified
A Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Adds that students learned “by analyzing words in context,” but judging sentences was part of the quiz after each lesson, while the words were taught with pictures on large screens.
C Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Follows the cyclists’ routine accurately, 20 minutes before and during the lesson, but leaves out the group that studied without exercise, so the comparison at the heart of the study disappears.
D Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Is drawn by accurate details about the short rest and the month-later test, but it builds the summary around them and leaves out that the cyclists rode before the lessons too.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
You need the best summary of how the study was done. A summary gives the main parts in a few words. It must be accurate, and it can’t leave out anything important. Small details can be skipped.
Find the main parts of the study
- Paragraph 7: “The researchers then divided the students into two groups.”
- Paragraphs 8 and 9: one group rode bikes “beginning 20 minutes before the start of the lessons and continuing throughout the 15 minutes or so of instruction.” The other group sat still.
- Paragraph 11: then all the students took a quiz.
So the key parts are two groups, one that exercised, and a test afterward. The group that sat still matters. It lets the researchers compare.
Check each choice
- B has it all: two groups, one exercising “before and while studying,” then a test.
- A says students learned by “analyzing words in context.” But judging sentences was part of the quiz, not the lessons.
- C describes only the bike riders. It leaves out the group that sat still, so nothing gets compared.
- D spends its words on small details: the short break and the test a month later. It leaves out that the bike riders started 20 minutes before the lesson.
Pick the answer
Watch out: D is tempting because everything in it is true. But a summary should give the main parts, not the side details. So the answer is B.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
D is the closest wrong answer. Its facts are accurate, and it names both groups. But it builds the summary around the break and the month-later test. It never says the cyclists rode before the lessons too. B gives the main plan plainly: two groups, one exercising, then a test of learning.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 118 of 120
2024 Test B English, question 20Uses the passage above: “Excerpt from “How Exercise Could Help You Learn a New Language””.
Question
Read these sentences from paragraph 17.
These improvements extend beyond simply aiding in memorization, she added. The exercise also deepened language learners’ grasp of how to use their newly acquired words.
Which sentence from the excerpt best explains why Sulpizio feels confident in the conclusion stated in these sentences?
- A“They were shown 40 words per session, with the sequence repeated several times.” (paragraph 10)
- B“They also responded to sentences using the new words, marking whether the sentences were accurate or, in the case of ‘The apple is a dentist,’ nonsensical.” (paragraph 11)
- C“And at the end of each lesson, the students who had ridden bikes performed better on the subsequent vocabulary tests than did the students who sat still.” (paragraph 13)
- D“They also became more proficient at recognizing proper sentences than the sedentary students, although that difference did not emerge until after several weeks of instruction.” (paragraph 14)
Show the answer
Correct answer: D
The question asks which sentence from the excerpt best supports Sulpizio’s assertion in paragraph 17 that exercise went beyond helping with memorization to deepen the language learners’ ability to use new vocabulary.
A. Incorrect. This sentence merely describes what the language-learning sessions were like, without making any claims about how the exercise affected the subjects’ understanding of how to use new words.
B. Incorrect. While this sentence does address the fact that learners were required to think about how the new words should be used rather than just memorizing the words, it does not discuss results such as how the exercise affected their ability to do this.
C. Incorrect. This sentence establishes only that exercise helped with the memorization of new words, not that exercise deepened learners’ grasp of how to use the new words.
D. CORRECT. The fact that learners who exercised were better at identifying when the new words were used correctly in sentences directly supports Sulpizio’s assertion that the exercise deepened their grasp of how to use the new words.
Question analysis
This textual evidence question quotes Simone Sulpizio’s conclusion that exercise did more than help learners memorize new English words. Students choose the sentence from the article that best explains why she can be confident of it. All four choices come from the article’s account of the study, so students must match evidence to the exact claim rather than to its general topic.
- Grade level
- Grade 8 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- Above grade 7 Grade 7 evidence questions usually match a quotation to a stated claim. This claim has two parts, gains beyond memorizing and a better grasp of usage, and two quotations touch it closely, a sharper test than typical grade 7 work.
- Estimated difficulty
- Hard: combines ideas, needs a plan, and has more than one tempting wrong answer.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 3, strategic thinking · mainly evaluate
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer major
- Reading between the lines moderate
- Evidence in several places minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 764 words; question and choices: about grade 11, 142 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Sulpizio’s claim has two parts, gains beyond memorizing and a better grasp of using words, and two of the quotations each touch one part. The vocabulary result is real evidence that exercise helped, but of the very memorizing she says the gains went beyond, and the sentence-task description mentions using words but reports no result. Only a result about sentences proves the claim, so the question rewards asking of each line what it shows, not what it is about.
A very close wrong answer major Choosing the answer
The vocabulary-test result in paragraph 13 and the sentence result in paragraph 14 are worded alike, cyclists outperforming students who sat still; only the skill measured, memorizing words or using them, separates them. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines moderate Working it out
Students must map the claim’s two halves onto the study’s two measures: vocabulary tests show memorization, and recognizing proper sentences shows the “grasp of how to use” new words. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Evidence in several places minor Working it out
The four quotations come from paragraphs 10, 11, 13 and 14, and each must be weighed against a claim made later, in paragraph 17. (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: Pin down what the quoted claim says the exercise achieved, then test each sentence by asking whether it reports a result that proves that specific achievement.
Traps
- Supports only part of the claim: In a question about evidence: a line that backs one half of the claim but not the other, or a related point rather than the claim itself.
- True but not the answer: A choice says something accurate about the text that does not answer this question.
The wrong answers, classified
A True but not the answer (King et al., 2004; Embretson & Wetzel, 1987)
Picks a sentence about how the lessons were run, 40 words repeated several times, accurate but silent on what the exercise did for the learners.
B Supports only part of the claim (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Matches the claim’s focus on using words to the sentence-judging task, but this line only describes the task and reports no result showing that exercise helped.
C Supports only part of the claim (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Picks a real finding in favor of the cyclists, but better vocabulary-test scores show only the memorizing that Sulpizio says the gains went beyond.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
Sulpizio says the exercise did more than help students memorize words. It “deepened language learners’ grasp of how to use their newly acquired words.” A grasp is an understanding. You need the sentence that best proves this claim. Proof should be a result, not just a description.
Break the claim into two parts
- Part 1: the gains went “beyond simply aiding in memorization.” Memorization is learning words by heart.
- Part 2: the cyclists got better at using the words.
So the proof must show the bike riders did better with words in sentences. A test that only checks memory won’t prove it.
Check each choice
- A (paragraph 10) tells how many words were shown. It gives no result.
- B (paragraph 11) describes the sentence task. But it doesn’t say who did better.
- C (paragraph 13) is a result. But it is about “vocabulary tests,” which check memory. That is the part she says the gains went beyond.
- D (paragraph 14) says the cyclists “became more proficient at recognizing proper sentences than the sedentary students.” Proficient means skilled. Sedentary means sitting still. That is a result about using words.
Pick the answer
Watch out: C is very tempting. It shows that exercise helped. But it proves the wrong kind of help. Only one choice shows the cyclists did better at using words in sentences. So the answer is D.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong answer. Both C and D say the bike riders beat the students who sat still. The difference is the skill that was tested. C’s vocabulary tests show memory. D’s sentence test shows the learners knew how to use the words, which is exactly Sulpizio’s claim.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 119 of 120
2024 Test B English, question 21Uses the passage above: “Excerpt from “How Exercise Could Help You Learn a New Language””.
Question
Paragraph 18 shows that the author’s perspective toward the study described in the excerpt is that
- Athough the study allowed some conclusions to be drawn, these conclusions are limited.
- Bwhile the study focused on moderate exercise, it would have been better to focus on difficult exercise.
- Cwhile the study was performed appropriately, it is doubtful the results can be duplicated.
- Dthough the study was about learning language, its conclusions can be applied to learning in general.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks what paragraph 18 reveals about the author’s perspective toward the study in the excerpt.
A. CORRECT. As paragraph 18 says, the study cannot address “whether other people completing other types of exercise would achieve the same results” as college students riding bikes.
B. Incorrect. While paragraph 18 mentions that the students performed “relatively light exercise,” it never suggests that more rigorous exercise should have been studied, only that it is still unknown what the impact on language learning would be for other populations doing other types of exercise.
C. Incorrect. Paragraph 18 points out only that the study’s results cannot be generalized to other populations performing other types of exercise and never speculates on whether the study’s results could be duplicated.
D. Incorrect. Far from claiming that the study’s results could be applied more broadly to learning in general, paragraph 18 points out the ways in which the study’s results cannot be applied more broadly.
Question analysis
This author’s perspective question asks what paragraph 18 of the article on exercise and language learning shows about how the author views the study. The paragraph is a single sentence, so the difficulty lies in the four choices, each of which pairs a fair-sounding statement about the study with a judgment that must be checked against the paragraph.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Identifying how an author judges a study is grade 7 work on author’s position. Paragraph 18 is a single plain sentence, but the choices make fine distinctions about what research can and cannot show, which keeps the task at grade level.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Reading between the lines minor
- Evidence
- Answered from one paragraph or stanza
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 11, 764 words; question and choices: about grade 10, 75 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Paragraph 18 is a single plain sentence, but its “though” marks a turn from reporting the study to limiting it. Every choice frames the author’s view as a concession followed by a doubt or a hope, so students must test the second half against what the sentence says cannot be known. Confusing results that may not apply to other people with results that may not be repeatable is the main trap.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The right choice and the one about duplicating the results both grant the study something and then cast doubt; they differ only in the doubt, about applying the results to others or about repeating the study. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Reading between the lines minor Working it out
Paragraph 18 states a fact, that the study “cannot tell us whether other people completing other types of exercise would achieve the same results,” and the author’s judgment must be read from it. (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994; Kintsch, 1998)
Strategy: Restate paragraph 18 in your own words before looking at the choices, then pick the choice that says the same thing, checking each word of it against the paragraph.
Traps
- Twists what the text says: Uses the text's topic and ideas but changes what it says: who did it, how much, when, or why.
- Reads too much in: A reasonable-sounding conclusion that goes further than the text allows.
- Too broad or too strong: A choice overstates, generalizes, or uses absolute words the text does not support.
The wrong answers, classified
B Reads too much in (Graesser, Singer & Trabasso, 1994)
Reads “relatively light exercise” as a complaint and invents a wish for harder exercise, when the author only notes that other kinds remain untested.
C Twists what the text says (King et al., 2004)
Rightly hears doubt in paragraph 18 but changes its object: the author questions whether the results apply to other people and exercise, not whether the study could be repeated.
D Too broad or too strong (King et al., 2004)
Echoes the upbeat take-home message of paragraphs 16 and 21 and stretches the findings to all learning, the opposite of paragraph 18’s caution.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
This asks how the author feels about the study, based on paragraph 18. The author’s perspective is the author’s point of view. Paragraph 18 is just one sentence, so read it closely.
Read paragraph 18
It says: “This study involved college students performing relatively light exercise, though, and cannot tell us whether other people completing other types of exercise would achieve the same results.” The word though signals a turn. Up to now, the author has reported good results. Here the author points out a limit.
Put it in your own words
The study tested only one kind of person doing one kind of exercise. So we know what happened to college students on bikes. We don’t know if older people, or people who run or swim, would get the same results. The study tells us something, but not everything. Its conclusions are limited, which means they only go so far.
Check each choice
- A fits. The study gave some answers, but they are limited.
- B says the study should have used hard exercise. The author never wishes for that. “Relatively light” is just a fact about the study.
- C says the results may not be duplicated, which means done again with the same results. The author doubts something else: whether the results apply to other people and exercise.
- D says the results apply to all learning. Paragraph 18 says the opposite.
Pick the answer
Watch out: C sounds doubtful, just like paragraph 18. But it doubts the wrong thing. So the answer is A.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong answer, because paragraph 18 does raise a doubt. But the doubt is not about repeating the study. It is about whether “other people completing other types of exercise would achieve the same results.” That means the conclusions are limited, which is A.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

Question 120 of 120
2024 Test B English, question 24Passage Excerpt from Do Them No Harm!
Excerpt from Do Them No Harm!
by Zoa L. Swayne
This narrative is about the Nez Perce, an American Indian tribe, in what is now northern Idaho. The tribe is preparing for a gathering before the coming winter.
In the moon of Ta-Yum, the hottest days of summer, when salmon spawn in the little streams and huckleberries ripen in the high mountains, people from many villages of the Chopunnish Nation gathered in the Oyaip Prairie for the work and festivities of their annual camas1 harvest.
From far and near The People came. . . .
Should a stranger enter their homeland and ask, “Where are you from?” the reply was always, “We are Nee-mee-poo, The People who live here in this place.”
It was a time of Lawtiwa-mah-ton—a time of being friends together—when The People came for this last chance to enjoy being together before the Cold Moons kept them close to their fires. The visiting and trading, the foot racing and horse racing, and the gambling and stick games would be remembered and talked about long after they had forgotten the drudgery of digging and roasting camas, picking berries, or drying meat and fish. Lawtiwa-mah-ton! It was good to be friends together.
As was their custom since wahk-kee-ma, a time far back beyond the memory of man, they set up their camps in the same locations their parents and grandparents had occupied before them. Red Bear’s people, from Kamiah, made their camp near the trail that came out of the mountains. Their neighbors in Kamiah Valley, The People from Tee-e-lap-a-lo, had their camp close by. Across the wide meadow, by the great roasting pits, the camps of the Te-wap-poo and Ask-kah-poo were located. The tepees and ish-nash, brush shelters, of other groups nestled in their accustomed areas in and among the pines in such numbers that they encircled the entire meadow land.
Red Bear’s people had traveled all summer with neighboring bands, gathering and preparing roots, picking and drying berries, drying and smoking meat and fish for their winter food supply. Now they were at the Oyaip camp. The women worked hard to dig and cure as many bags of roots as they could during the warm, sunny days, for the sharp night air brought warnings that WARM was going and COLD was coming.
Everyone helped in some way. Most of the men fished or hunted for meat. While many of the women dug and roasted camas, other women and older children picked and dried berries.
And the younger children played. They played at hunting. They played with the babies. They played with their horses and puppies. They learned how to live through their play.
This sun, happiness, peace, and quiet blessed the Red Bear camp. All were busy with their daily tasks, until sudden cries came from the children playing by the trail.
“People coming! People coming! People coming on the trail from the high mountains!” they called as they ran to their elders, who looked sharply at the figures of approaching horsemen.
Were they friends or enemies? Did they bring good news or bad?
“Who can it be? What brings them here?” were the questions in every mind.
“Could they be the four hunters who had gone to Buffalo Country two summers past? Would they have news of the families who had gone long ago to Buffalo Country and never returned?”
It was customary for a hunting party to be gone for more than one season.
“Looks like hunters,” the older men agreed. “Looks like they had good hunting. Maybe our four hunters. [They have] been gone many moons.”
“Looks like five people—not four,” others observed.
Excitement grew as the riders came close enough to be recognized.
“A-a-a-a-a, they are our four hunters! But who is the fifth person?” they asked.
“Looks like a woman. Who is she?”
The hunters rode up to the welcoming crowd, proud to show off the loads of meat, hides, and other trophies of their hunt. They paraded around the encampment for all to see how strong their Hunting Power had been—what great hunters they, themselves, were.
Red Bear’s people rejoiced at their hunters’ success. Good hunters brought good to everybody. The meat meant plenty of food and the hides meant soft-tanned robes to give comfort through the Cold Moons. But it was the sight of the frail figure of the woman that aroused their curiosity. Who was she? Where had she come from? . . .
“Belongs to Red Bear people. Gone then come back,” the hunters said, as they dismounted and unloaded their packs. . . .
Now they could see! She was the daughter of the family gone so long ago! The girl-child who had left came back now—a grown woman.
“Wat-ku-ese!” the women cried. “Gone-from-Home-then-Come-Back. Wat-ku-ese!” And Wat-ku-ese was her name from that time on.
Gentle arms lifted Wat-ku-ese from her horse. The women brought her food and made a place for her to rest. For many suns they cared for her until she became stronger.
One evening Wat-ku-ese told her story for all to hear.
From DO THEM NO HARM!: Lewis and Clark Among the Nez Perce by Zoa L. Swayne. Published by Caxton Press. Copyright © 1990 by Zoa L. Swayne. Orofino, Idaho and Legacy House, Inc. Orofino, Idaho. All rights reserved.
1camas: a wild, edible plant
Question
In paragraphs 4 and 6, the beginning of the change in seasons affects the characters mainly by
- Acausing them to collect their bounty and feel eager to celebrate before it becomes cold.
- Bmaking them want to rest and relax before the challenging work of the harvest begins.
- Cforcing them to give up leisure time to prepare their camp for the coming winter.
- Dallowing them to trade the goods they have prepared during the warm months.
Show the answer
Correct answer: A
The question asks how the beginning of the change of seasons mainly affects the characters.
A. CORRECT. Paragraph 4 describes the time as the last chance for The People to be together “before the Cold Moons kept them close to their fires.” Paragraph 6 tells about how the women were working hard to dig and cure roots, because “WARM was going and COLD was coming.” These paragraphs describe both celebration and preparation before the winter comes.
B. Incorrect. Paragraphs 4 and 6 describe the characters working hard, but there is no discussion of them wanting to rest and relax.
C. Incorrect. While both paragraphs describe some of the work involved in the harvest, paragraph 4 also lists a number of leisure activities, such as visiting, foot racing, horse racing, gambling, and stick games. The characters are still taking the time to relax.
D. Incorrect. While paragraph 4 mentions trading in a list of activities that the characters are doing, this is just one of many activities. Allowing the characters to trade goods is not the way the change in seasons mainly affects them.
Question analysis
This question on how setting shapes characters asks how the first signs of winter mainly affect The People in paragraphs 4 and 6 of Do Them No Harm!, a narrative about a Nez Perce harvest gathering. Students must draw on two separate paragraphs and pick the effect both support, among choices that each borrow real activities from the story.
- Grade level
- Grade 7 reading and task
- Compared with grade 7
- At grade 7 Explaining how setting shapes what characters do is typical grade 7 work on story elements. Students combine details from two separate paragraphs, a step beyond reading one, but the language is plain and the details concrete.
- Estimated difficulty
- Moderate: several steps, or a close reading with one strong distractor.
- Thinking it demands
- Depth of knowledge 2, skills and concepts · mainly analyze
- What makes it hard
- A very close wrong answer moderate
- Evidence in several places minor
- Evidence
- Answered from several paragraphs or stanzas
- Reading level
- Passage: about grade 5, 885 words; question and choices: about grade 7, 73 words.
- Students, last 30 days
- Not enough answers yet to show (it takes 10).
Why it is hard, traps and wrong answers (shows the answer)
Why it is hard
Each paragraph shows a different response to the coming winter, play in paragraph 4 and hard work in paragraph 6, and only one choice keeps both. Students who read paragraph 6 alone see work under pressure and decide the cold costs The People their free time, though paragraph 4 lists races and games. The question rewards checking each choice against both paragraphs, not just the one read last.
A very close wrong answer moderate Choosing the answer
The right choice and the one about giving up leisure both have The People preparing before the cold; they differ only in whether the season brings celebration or takes it away. (Embretson & Wetzel, 1987; Gorin & Embretson, 2006; Ascalon et al., 2007)
Evidence in several places minor Working it out
The answer must fit both paragraphs: paragraph 4’s racing, gambling and stick games before “the Cold Moons” and paragraph 6’s women digging roots because “COLD was coming.” (Kirsch & Mosenthal, 1990; Gorin & Embretson, 2006)
Strategy: Find what paragraphs 4 and 6 each say about the approaching cold, then note what The People do because of it, and choose the effect that fits both paragraphs.
Traps
- Half right: One half of a two-part choice is right and the other is not.
- Too narrow: A single detail offered as the central idea or a summary, or a summary that keeps minor details and leaves out an essential part.
- Reversed relationship: Cause and effect, or the order of events, turned around.
The wrong answers, classified
B Reversed relationship (King et al., 2004)
Puts rest before work, though the harvest is already under way at the Oyaip camp, and nothing shows The People wanting to relax before it begins.
C Half right (King et al., 2004; Thissen, Steinberg & Fitzpatrick, 1989)
Sees the hard work of digging and curing roots before winter but misses paragraph 4’s racing, games and visiting, so the loss of leisure is invented.
D Too narrow (King et al., 2004)
Seizes on trading, one item in paragraph 4’s list of activities, and treats that single detail as the main effect of the coming cold.
Working it out, step by step
Figure out what the question asks
Summer is ending and winter is coming. This asks how that change mainly affects the characters in paragraphs 4 and 6. Your answer has to fit both paragraphs, not just one.
Read paragraph 4
Paragraph 4 calls this time “this last chance to enjoy being together before the Cold Moons kept them close to their fires.” The Cold Moons are the winter months. The People enjoy “the foot racing and horse racing, and the gambling and stick games.” So, before winter, they celebrate together.
Read paragraph 6
Paragraph 6 says “The women worked hard to dig and cure as many bags of roots as they could during the warm, sunny days.” To cure food means to dry it so it keeps. Why rush? Because “the sharp night air brought warnings that WARM was going and COLD was coming.” So, before winter, they also gather and store food.
Check each choice
- A fits both: they collect their bounty and celebrate before the cold. Bounty means a large supply of good things, like food.
- B: no one wants to rest before the work. The harvest work is already going on.
- C: they don’t give up leisure, which is free time for fun. Paragraph 4 is full of races and games.
- D: trading is only one item in paragraph 4’s list. It is not the main effect.
Pick the answer
Watch out: C is tempting if you read only paragraph 6, which is all hard work. But paragraph 4 shows play. Only one choice fits both paragraphs. So the answer is A.
Why this answer and not the closest wrong one
C is the closest wrong answer. Like A, it has The People getting ready for winter. But C says they give up their free time. Paragraph 4 says the opposite: races, games and visiting fill this “last chance to enjoy being together.” A keeps both the work and the fun.
More questions like this
The original DOE question

The passage “Excerpt from Do Them No Harm!” as printed (pages 177–178)

